JP2019216786A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: When a discrimination condition is established, discrimination is executed by discrimination means on the basis of information stored in storage means. Identification information for indicating the discrimination result is dynamically displayed on display means by dynamic display means, and when stop display is carried out by specific identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result, a specific game is executed. By the time discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means is executed, pre-discrimination based on the information is executed by pre-discrimination means, and the number of displays of specific patterns in which a predetermined number of specific patterns is displayed in the display means on the basis of a result of the pre-discrimination is displayed variably irrespective of the number of pieces of information. Thereby, the player's interest in the game can be increased.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 216

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning port is a hit. In some of such gaming machines, the lottery result is preliminarily determined before the lottery is executed, and an effect that suggests the preliminarily determined result is executed to improve the interest of the player in the game.

JP 2001-038007 A

  However, there is a need for further enhancement of interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means are determined by at least a discrimination condition for the information. A storage unit capable of storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until the determination is made; a determination unit that performs a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied; Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result on the display means, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for a specific identification for indicating the specific determination result. And a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the information is stopped and displayed, based on the information before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is executed. Pre-determination means for performing pre-determination, specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and display by the specific symbol display means Symbol number variable display means capable of variably displaying the number of displayed specific symbols regardless of the number of pieces of information.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the specific symbol display unit is capable of displaying the specific symbol up to the number of pieces of the information that can be stored in the storage unit.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the symbol number variable display means is configured such that when the number of the information stored in the storage means is one or more, The number of the specific symbols to be displayed is changed within one or more ranges as the number of the specific symbols.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Among a plurality of game states including a game state setting means capable of setting one game state, wherein the game state setting means determines that at least the second game state is set and an end condition is satisfied. The specific symbol display means can display the specific symbol on the display means while the second game state is set.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the symbol number variable display means is capable of changing the display number of the specific symbol displayed on the display means by two or more. It is.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 1, an information acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition unit, at least until a determination condition for the information is satisfied, A storage means capable of storing a predetermined number as an upper limit, a determination means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and a determination result of the determination means. Display means for dynamically displaying identification information for display on the display means, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in the case where the information is stored, and performs a preliminary determination based on the information before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is performed. Pre-determination means, a specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and the specific symbol displayed by the specific symbol display means And a symbol number variable display means capable of variably displaying the number of displayed items regardless of the number of pieces of information.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the specific symbol display means displays the specific symbol up to the number of pieces of the information that can be stored in the storage means. It is possible.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the symbol number variable display means is configured such that the number of the information stored in the storage means is one or more. In some cases, the display number of the specific symbol is changed within a range of one or more as the number of the specific symbol.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. And a game state setting unit that can set one game state among a plurality of game states including the second game state, wherein the game state setting unit is configured to set at least the second game state in a state where the second game state is set. When the end condition is satisfied, the first game state can be set, and the specific symbol display means can display the specific symbol on the display means while the second game state is set. Things.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the symbol number variable display means changes the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means by two or more. It is something that can be done.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed the flow which the ball | ball which won in the general winning a prize apparatus flows into an out port. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed the flow which the ball | ball which won in the general winning a prize apparatus flows into a special power operation port. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the V winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is a schematic diagram which shows the ball flow in the V winning device when the storage valve is in the storage state in the game per accessory. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and shows a ball flow in a case where a storage valve shifts from a storage state to a release state and a first movable valve is located at a guidance position in a game per accessory. FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and shows a ball flow in a case where a storage valve shifts from a storage state to a release state and a first movable valve is located at a passage position in a game per accessory. FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode according to the embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the first embodiment. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the V rush displayed on 81, and FIG. 12C shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram illustrating a hold state of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 12B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol hit in a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of hitting an accessory during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 13 (c) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (a). FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in the case where the symbol is held, and FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a V prize per V rush medium character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first embodiment. 14C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a loss per V rush medium character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the embodiment, and FIG. 14C shows the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in the case where the display is performed, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. . (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of the jackpot ending in the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram in the first embodiment. FIG. 15C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of adding a timer during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 15C illustrates each of the cases where the display screen illustrated in FIG. FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of symbols, and FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of the end of the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the first embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the V rush is extended displayed on the device 81, and FIG. 16C illustrates a hold state of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 16A is displayed. FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a special screen at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third embodiment in the first embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in the heaven mode displayed on the symbol display device 81. FIG. 17C illustrates the holding of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 17A is displayed. FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the situation, and FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a medium chance per hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third embodiment in the first embodiment. FIG. 19C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in the case of a stoppage of a general figure during a V rush displayed on the symbol display device 81, and FIG. 18C illustrates a case where the display screen illustrated in FIG. FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol, and FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of a special figure stop during V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a 1st embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a lucky time effect during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in (c), where the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in FIG. 19D, and FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure big hit type selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the per-accessory operation scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the per-figure operation scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario per ordinary ordinary drawing in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case where the game per ordinary drawing is executed in the normal state in the first embodiment. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the per-figure-per-game is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface BD. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation execution process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process performed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start opening winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V-pass process performed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory hit control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure change start process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a status command receiving process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating stop-related processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing general-purpose-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a hit-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed the big hit related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit ending processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed round number command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a notification command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing error command processing to be performed. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 2nd Embodiment, It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in a 2nd embodiment, and is the mimetic diagram showing the state where the ball which won the general winning a prize device can flow down to the 2nd special electricity operation port. (A) is a state in which the regular figure long hitting game and the accessory hitting game are overlapped and executed during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of FIG. 14B. FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a general figure long fluctuation in a time-saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and a game per accessory. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state in which are executed in an overlapping manner. FIG. 90 (c) shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90 (a) is displayed. FIG. 90D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than a predetermined period; (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is longer than a predetermined period; ) Is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed, and (d) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in the case where the symbol is held. (A), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case where the end condition of the per-accessory game executed during the regular long hit in the second embodiment is changed. (A), (b) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the case of changing the termination condition of the per-accessory game executed during the normal figure long fluctuation in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a general-purpose type selection table in the second embodiment. FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second per-principal operation scenario table in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a per-figure-period operation scenario table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two scenarios per time-saving general-purpose figure in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of three scenarios per time saving time drawing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power starting opening winning process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general map related process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the per-bonus-related process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start processing per accessory performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure residual change suggestion processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure related time update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A), (c) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering the danger time during V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 3rd Embodiment, (b), (b) FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a jackpot is discarded at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of a big hit interruption in the danger time during V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start opening winning process 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the danger time setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the counter etc. provided in RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small hit random number table in 4th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation | change pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation execution process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 departure stop process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st prefetching processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd prefetch processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in a modification, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change stop processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure change start processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed stop related processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of an end condition selection screen displayed at 81, and (c) illustrates a hold status of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the end condition selection displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 6th Embodiment, (b) is 3rd symbol display in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a V rush start screen displayed on device 81, and (c) shows a suspended state of each symbol when a display screen shown in Drawing 146 (b) is displayed. FIG. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special power start opening winning process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the switching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed end condition setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed end condition related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 7th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the partial perspective view which showed typically the structure of the right electric accessory in 7th Embodiment. It is the top view which showed typically the opening / closing lid of the right electric accessory in 7th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the elements on larger scale which showed some part of the right area | region in 7th Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a probable change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of shifting to a latent state from a probability change state displayed on 81. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is not started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a RUSH game performed in a latent state displayed on third symbol display device 81 in a seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the special figure holding ball is changed during a RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case where a special figure reserved ball reaches a specific number during a RUSH game displayed on a third symbol display device 81 in a seventh embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which shows the completion | finish of the super RUSH game displayed on the apparatus 81. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode which shows the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small random number 7 table in 7th Embodiment, (d) is 2nd random number 7 in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 7 tables for normal which the ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a seven-variable table included in the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 7 tables for latents which have. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hitting type selection 7 table held in the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table included in a ROM. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 7 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed stop related processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure discard setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process during the probable change performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed setting processing 7 during RUSH performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A)-(c) is a partial sectional view of a V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A), (b) is a partial sectional view of the V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A), (b) is a partial sectional view of the V winning device of a pachinko machine in a second modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in the modification of a 7th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. FIGS. 17A and 17B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in a latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 8th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of ROM of the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically contents of small hit random number table 202ga performed by main control device 110 in an 8th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 8 table which the ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 8 tables for probabilities changing which ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 8 tables for latents which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is the model which showed typically the content of the small hitting type selection 8 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 8 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation change processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a latent state displayed on 3rd symbol display device 81 in a 9th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 9 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection 9 table held in the ROM of the main control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal figure variation pattern selection 9 table included in a ROM. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of an icon display number selection table included in a ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a continuous effect selection table included in a ROM of FIG. It is a flow chart which showed winning a prize command processing 9 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed jackpot end processing 9 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the RUSH production effect setting processing 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit related processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modification of a 9th embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. FIGS. 6 to 9 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of a general winning award device 640 provided in a lower area, and FIGS. 6 to 9 show a special variable award apparatus provided in an upper left area of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the pachinko machine 65, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640, etc., into which a large number of nails and balls can enter, is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. Note that the inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that fires a ball on the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. A firing rail (not shown) or the like that guides the user is provided. The contents of the many entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having an approximately elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed below the right illumination unit 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general insert. The ball entrance 63, the special figure entrances 64 and 640, the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled and the peripheral portion thereof is It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the special figure entrance 64, the general winning device 640, the V winning device 65, the variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting between the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered on the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). The configuration is such that the shot ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 (wins). That is, the first symbol display device 37 is a display unit for displaying a lottery result of a lottery (special figure lottery) executed when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64. In the present embodiment, since the type of the special symbol is one type of the pachinko machine 10, the result of one type of special symbol lottery is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 having two types of (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to the type of each special symbol.

  In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses an LED to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a gaming state (for example, a normal state, a time saving state, or the like) by a lighting state, or a special symbol (first symbol) fluctuates. (In dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for indicating a lottery result) is indicated by a lighting state, or a symbol corresponding to a jackpot in which the stopped symbol is advantageous to the player or disadvantageous A lighted state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a big hit or a missed symbol, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighted state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and an error are displayed on a seven-segment display device. In addition, it is configured to be able to indicate the state in which the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted) by the lighting state. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emission colors. In the present embodiment, the various game states are informed by the combination of the emission colors of the light-emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify the various game states. For example, various game states may be notified by changing the length (blinking mode) of a period during which the light emitting unit is turned on and a period during which the light emitting unit is turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of special symbols) is performed when a ball is entered (winning) in the special figure entrance 64. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery). Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game that is in a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, the special winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which a ball can be easily won. The game which can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in a case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and an opening period (specific winning port of the variable winning device 650) for a predetermined time (for example, one second). (A period during which a closed state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball 650a), a round game period during which an open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. A period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A big jackpot game period is set.

  In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (fixed display), the ball is set at the timing when the specific winning opening 650a is opened during the jackpot game. Can be made to fire in any direction, so that the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the current jackpot game to the player, an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  Also, by setting the ending period as the last period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a new special symbol lottery immediately after the end of the last round game, For the game to be executed, preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction, so that the game can be switched smoothly.

  Note that the length of each jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery is determined by the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of jackpot won. Different lengths may be set according to, for example, as a game content to be executed after the end of the jackpot game, if the game content that is different from the game content at the time of the jackpot winning is won, a big hit is won. The ending period of the jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period of another jackpot game (for example, 2 seconds), and the jackpot game is ended for the player during the ending period. It is preferable that an effect for guiding in advance game contents to be executed later is executable. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  On the other hand, when the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the end of the jackpot game are won, the ending period of the jackpot (for example, 1 second) is changed to the other jackpot game. It is preferable to set so as to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

  Also, without using a configuration to actually determine the game content at the time of the jackpot win and the game content executed after the jackpot game, for example, based on the type of the jackpot won and the game state at the time of the jackpot win Then, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance in accordance with the specified contents.

  Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a game to be executed by a player, In the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), the game to be executed by the player is configured to be different from that in the time reduction state, compared to the game to be executed in the normal state. Is configured to be more advantageous to the player (the jackpot game is more easily executed).

  In other words, a jackpot game is won in the state where the normal state is set, and the time-saving state is already set in the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. The content of the jackpot game (operation scenario) is defined so as to be longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the state where the jackpot is won. You should leave it. Thus, the ending period suitable for the player can be set only by executing the jackpot game in accordance with the predetermined content.

  It should be noted that the period other than the ending period may be defined in advance in accordance with the type of the winning jackpot or the game state at the time of the winning, and the opening period and the interval period may be different. Further, even if the type of the winning jackpot is the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be made different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. This allows the player to be interested not only in the jackpot type in which the jackpot has been won (special symbol lottery result), but also in the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  Further, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the type of the jackpot is also determined. As will be described in detail later, as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is four, and a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is given after the end of the jackpot game. As the 4R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot type with a different duration of the time-saving state (after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving jackpot in which the time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning the jackpot The number of times (4 times) and the time-saving big hit (15 times of time saving) in which the time-saving state continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 15 times without winning the big hit.

  In this embodiment, if a special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot, it is determined to be out of place, and a bonus is not given to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In some of the cases where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as a result of the lottery, the privilege given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, the privilege of opening the V winning device 65 only for one round) is small. The winning game may be configured to be executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot (whether or not it is a small jackpot) as a stop symbol after the change, but also indicates the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, one of the “normal state” and the “time reduction state” is set as the gaming state. The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol large jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter, a special symbol low probability state, In the time saving state, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is set to a low probability (1/100) and the hit probability of a normal symbol is set to a high probability (300/1000). It is a gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state).

  Here, “4R jackpot (4 time savings)” refers to a jackpot game in which the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), followed by a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol). , A normal symbol high probability state), and a time saving state in which the number of time savings is four after the jackpot game is set.

  “4R jackpot (15 time savings)” means a jackpot game in which the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), followed by a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, ordinary symbol) (High-probability state), and a time-saving state in which the number of time savings is 15 after the jackpot game is set.

  In the present embodiment, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied after the time saving state is set. The number of times indicates a time saving end condition. In other words, the time saving frequency of four times means that the special symbol lottery is executed four times (the fourth special symbol change is stopped and displayed) without winning a jackpot after the time saving state is set. Is established, and the time reduction number of times 15 is defined as a time reduction when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 15 times (the 15th special symbol change is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set. It is stipulated that the termination condition is satisfied.

  That is, "4R jackpot (4 time reductions)" is a type of jackpot in which the time reduction termination condition that is more easily satisfied is defined than "4R jackpot (4 time reductions)" than "4R jackpot (15 time reductions)". )), The "4R jackpot (15 time reductions)" is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is easy to continue, and a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a condition relating to the number of times of the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state (time reduction number) is defined as the time reduction termination condition for terminating the time reduction state. For example, a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than a jackpot and the number of times of a specific lottery result (specific loss) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). Also, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time saving state was set, or a specific ball entry port (for example, a general entry port) during the time saving state An end condition that is satisfied when the number of balls entered in 63a) reaches a predetermined number (for example, five) may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, there are provided a plurality of left general entrances 63a from which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with a variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by ball entry (start winning) into the special figure entrance 64. (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and a normal symbol (second symbol) is variably displayed with the passage of the ball to the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21), so that, for example, the left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Mark). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. The decorative display according to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the general winning award device 640 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured such that a hit game (game for a normal drawing) that is only activated (open state) is executed.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is configured to be always constant (3 seconds) irrespective of the result of the ordinary symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol probability state (low probability state, high probability state). . With such a configuration, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute a game per ordinary symbol during the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (during the ordinary state), the time required for the variation display of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol variation time) is increased. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be longer in the normal state than in the time-saving state, the normal game (low-probability state of the normal symbol) is changed from the normal state (low-probability state of the normal symbol) in which the normal symbol hitting game (normal symbol hitting game) is hardly executed. When the gaming state shifts to a time-saving state in which a winning game is easily executed (normally high probability state of a symbol), a long-term ordinary symbol change executed during the normal state (a disadvantage to the player compared to the time-saving state). The transition to the time-saving state during the execution of the game (the usual game per game), and the period in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state is set for a long time even though the time-saving state is set Curb Door can be.

  In the present embodiment, the game content (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the game to be executed per ordinary figure is changed between the normal state and the time reduction state without changing the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. ing. More specifically, the game per day drawing performed during the time reduction state is more advantageous to the player than the game per day drawing performed during the normal state, that is, the ball is activated by the special power. The mouth 643 is configured to be easily won. Specifically, when the normal state is set, after the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a), the opening game period of 0.1 second is set, and the per-figure game ( In the case where the time saving state is set, the opening period of 3 seconds is set after the opening period of 0.1 second (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a). A winning game (a game with a reduced working hours) is executed.

  As described above, by executing the per-figure game in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is changed in accordance with the probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time is shorter than in the ordinary state (the ordinary symbol low-probability state). In the state (normal symbol high probability state), it is possible to make it easier for a ball to be won in the general electric winning device 640 during a game per ordinary figure.

  Further, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the game in the normal state and the time saving state during the game per ordinary figure to the special power operating port 643 is described. It is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball that has won the general-purpose winning award device 640 during the game per hour-saving general-purpose figure is better than the ball that has won the general-purpose award winning device 640 during the normal general-performing game executed during the normal state, It is configured so that the ball easily enters the special power operation port 643. With this configuration, when the normal state is set, it is difficult for the ball to win the general power winning device 640, and even if the ball wins the general power winning device 640, the special power operation port 643 When the time saving state is set, it is easy to cause the ball to enter the general prize winning device 640, and when the general prize winning device 640 is awarded, the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643. This makes it easy to enter the ball.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of processes until the fired ball enters the special power operating port 643, a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the special power operating port 643 and a state in which the ball is restricted are set. Since it is variable according to the game state to be played, the ease of entry of the ball into the special power operation port 643 can be reliably changed according to the set game state.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the gaming method that is advantageous to the player is the same in both the gaming state in which the normal state is set and the gaming state in which the time reduction state is set ( (Left-handed game). In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, even during the normal state, a random symbol lottery opportunity is established (a ball passes to the through gate 67), and the normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, if a win is won, since the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball fired by the left-handed game can be reached is controlled to be opened, Also, there is a risk that the ball may win the general-purpose winning device 640 during the execution of the normal per-figure game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the general-purpose winning device 640.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the winning ball to enter the special power operating port 643 even if the ball wins the general electricity prize winning device 640 during the game per ordinary game executed during the normal state. It is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which a game is executed by the same game method in the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) and the time reduction state (the high probability state of the ordinary symbol), Even if a ball enters the general winning award device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special power operating port 643.

  In the present embodiment, the same fluctuation time (3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time reduction state (high probability state of the normal symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the game state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol and in the case of a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, a normal symbol is used. May be configured such that the fluctuation time of the symbol is generally shorter in the high probability state (time saving state). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (in the ordinary figure high probability), other methods are used, such as increasing the probability of the ordinary symbol hitting, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. In the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set to a state in which the ball easily enters the general winning award device 640 than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set regardless of the gaming state. It may be constant. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state in the normal figure high accuracy, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and flows down the left area of the game board 13 among the balls fired on the game board. Most of the spheres (about 100%) pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is displayed. If the result is out of order, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided for one of the maximum number of holdings, and is disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display. This may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, but may be set to two or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of the normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 by the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.

  Next, a description will be given of a configuration of the general winning award device 640 which is opened when a normal symbol lottery is won. As shown in FIG. 2, the general winning award device 640 is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and has an open state in which a ball can be awarded therein and a closed state that is harder to win than the open state. An electric accessory 640a that can be changed to a state is electrically operated at a position where a ball flowing down a left area (an area on the left side in front view of the variable display device unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 reaches. An accessory 640a is provided. In the present embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game reaches the general winning award device 640 at a ratio of about one ball of three (or the general winning award device 640 if the electric accessory 640a is in an open state). (To reach a winning position).

  The electric accessory 640a is normally maintained in a closed state, and when a winning is achieved by a normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a is variably operated to be in an open state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. The game per day is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, a winning state is achieved by a normal symbol lottery, and a general winning game is executed, so that a state in which a ball is easily won in the general winning award device 640 can be provided to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, it is possible to establish a lottery opportunity of a normal symbol (allow a ball to pass to the through gate 67) and to execute a normal symbol. It is configured so that a ball can be won in the general winning award device 640 that is opened when a win is made in the lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that a chance to win a special symbol lottery can be established by the left-handed game. In addition, a variable winning device 650 that is variably operated by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery is also provided at a position where a ball fired by a left-handed game can win.

  With this configuration, the player can always play the same game method (left-handed game) irrespective of the game state, so that the trouble of changing the game method for the player is eliminated. The game can be smoothly performed without giving.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 5, the configuration of the general winning a prize device 640 and the flow of the ball that has won the general prize winning device 640 will be described in detail. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the general winning a prize device 640, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a flow in which a ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port 643. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in response to the ball passing through the through gate 67, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. A game per day is executed. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the open state in the game per ordinary drawing, the ball is brought into a state in which the ball can enter the ordinary electric winning device 640.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the general winning award device 640. The second movable valve 642 is a second flow path that connects the ball that has flowed into the general winning award device 640 and has flowed down the first flow path 641 a to the special power operation port 643 when the game per game is executed. It is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern between a first state that can be guided to the 641b and a second state that can be guided to the third flow path 641c communicating with the out port 644. The ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640s, and the number of prize winning balls to the general prize winning device 640 in a single game per game can be measured. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the number of balls that have won the general winning a prize device 640 in one game per general figure reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the time point is determined. The game is configured to end the game. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a prize ball (four) is paid out when a ball enters the special power operation port 643, and a prize ball is not paid out when the ball enters the out port 644. ing.

  In this general winning a prize device 640, a cover body is formed of an acrylic resin having transparency so that a player can visually recognize the ball flow in the general prize winning device 640, and the cover body is attached to the game board 13. ing. Accordingly, the player can visually recognize the flow of the ball in the general-purpose winning device 640, so that the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball that has won the general-purpose winning device 640.

  The electric accessory 640a provided in the general winning award device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition 640k2 as a base for rotation, and a closed state where a ball is difficult to win the general winning award device 640 (FIG. 3) and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the ball is more likely to win the general winning award device 640 than in its closed state (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640 a in the closed state is configured to be stored in the general winning award device 640, and specifically, on the left side of the vertical line of the second partition 640 k 2 ( The left end of the first partition 640k1 is configured to protrude (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and the closed motorized accessory 640a is positioned below the first partition 640k1. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the closed power-operated character 640a to come into contact with the ball fired by the left-handed game. it can.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the ball won in the general winning award device 640 wins in the special power operation port 643 according to the game state set at the time of executing the game per ordinary figure. The probability of winning (ease of winning) is configured to be different. Specifically, the period from the execution of the per-figure-period game to the opening control of the electric accessory 640a in a predetermined release pattern (opening-per-figure-period) is made different during the normal state. The ball that has won a prize in the prize winning device 640 in the per-figure game has a greater advantage than the sphere that has won in the prize-winning apparatus 640 in the per-figure game executed during the time-saving state. It is configured to make it difficult to win.

  With such a configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the game is played in the same game method (left-handed game) in both the normal state and the time-saving state, the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643 during the normal state. Winning can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, the per-figure per game executed during the normal state is more difficult for a ball to enter into the per-prize winning apparatus 640 than the per-figure per game executed during the time saving state. Is configured to be executed. Also according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 during the normal state. That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to measures to make it harder for a ball to enter the general winning award device 640 during the normal state than during the time saving state, when a ball wins within the ordinary power winning device 640 during the normal state. Has a countermeasure to make it harder for a ball to win in the special power operation port 643 than when a ball wins in the general electricity winning device 640 during the time saving state. As described above, by providing the configuration for suppressing the winning of the ball into the special power operation port 643 in the normal state in a plurality of stages, the configuration can be more reliably suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of a ball flow when a ball has won a prize in the prize winning device 640 in a per-figure game executed when the normal state is set. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a ball which has won the general winning a prize device 640 in a general game per game in a normal state. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid giving the player the trouble of changing the game method, the game can be always executed by the left-handed game. Therefore, even during the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, a lottery opportunity of the ordinary symbol is established (the ball passes to the through gate 67), and when the game per ordinary symbol is executed, the ordinary winning a prize device There was a risk that the ball would win within 640.

  That is, in the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), a ball is awarded in the general electricity prize winning device 640 as compared with the time saving state in which the ball is easily awarded in the ordinary winning prize device 640 (the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). Although the game state is difficult to play, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the time-saving state. There was a possibility that the ball would win inside.

  As described above, the special electricity prize operation port 643 is provided in the general winning award apparatus 640, which is a trigger for executing a game (game per role) for opening the V prize apparatus 65, and the ball is in a normal state. If the player hits the special power operation port 643 and the game per hit is executed, there is a problem in that an excessively advantageous game is provided to a player who is playing a game in a normal state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the balls that have won the general power winning device 640 during the normal state to the special power operation port 643 and the balls that have won the general power winning device 640 during the time saving state are the special electric winning devices. It is configured such that the ratio of entering the working port 643 is different from the ratio of entering the working port 643. Specifically, in the case where the game is executed in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state after the game is started in comparison with the case where the game is executed in the time reduction state, compared with the case where the game is executed in the time reduction state. (The first open state) is set long, and the second movable valve 642 that moves based on the start of the per-figure game starts moving the ball that has won the second state (the normal-prize winning device 640). The ball is configured to be able to win the general winning award device 640 only at the timing of maintaining the state in which the ball can be guided to the mouth 644).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 4, when a ball wins the general winning award device 640 during a general per game played during the normal state, the first ball with the ball flowing down period of about 0.5 second is designed. The sphere flows down the flow path 641a, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 located in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (to reach the second movable valve 642). (The period from when the ball reaches the out port 644 is designed to be about 0.3 seconds.) With this configuration, even if a ball wins in the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special power operating port 643, and thus the game in the normal state Providing an excessively advantageous game to a player playing the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, the ball is prevented from winning in the general electricity prize device 640 by the per-figure game executed during the normal state. Since there is no need to use a special configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the game-per-game executed during the normal state, the timing of changing the second movable valve 642 to the second state (at the start of the game-per-game) is determined by the electric accessory. The timing at which the 640a is in the open state (4.1 seconds after the start of the perpetual game) is started, for example, the perpetual game is started in a state where the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state. However, the configuration is such that the sphere does not reach the second movable valve 642 while the second movable valve 642 is variably operating. With this configuration, the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation comes into contact with the ball that has won the general winning award device 640, and the ball may be clogged in the general winning award device 640. In addition, a situation in which the second movable valve 642 breaks down can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 provided in the general winning award device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls and the ball enters the out port 644. The configuration is such that when a ball is hit, a prize ball is not paid out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A larger number of prize balls (for example, 10) may be paid out than in the case where the prize balls are paid out. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of the ordinary symbols according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the state where the normal state is set, more prize balls are given as a privilege to the player than in the time reduction state, and in the state where the time reduction state is set, to the player, In addition to the prize balls that are less than in the normal state, it is possible to provide a bonus game that is not (or hardly) given in the normal state as a bonus. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the result of the normal symbol lottery.

  The same number of prize balls (four) may be paid out when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 and when a ball enters the out port 644. In this case, It is preferable to make it difficult to recognize whether the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 has entered the special power operation port 643 or the out port 644. This makes it impossible for the player to know which ball entry port (special power operation port 643, out port 644) the ball has entered based on the number of paid out prize balls. After causing the device 640 to win a ball, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it seem that it is determined by a lottery whether or not a hitting game (game per accessory) for opening the V winning device 65 is executed. It is possible to enhance the production effect. Further, in this case, when the ball detection sensor 640s detects a ball, it may be configured to pay out a prize ball (four), whereby the player wins the ball to the general winning award device 640. , The prize ball given to the player can be paid out quickly.

  As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the open state, the distal end side of the first partition 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel, and a spherical flow path is formed therebetween. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a positioned in the open state receives the ball, it is possible to suppress the ball from bouncing out of the ordinary winning award device 640 due to the impact.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a description will be given of a ball flow when a ball wins in the general winning a prize device 640 in a general per-game game executed when the time saving state is set. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a ball which has won the general winning a prize device 640 in a game per public figure during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the per-figure-period game is executed during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is started after the per-figure-period game is started, rather than the per-figure-period game executed during the normal state. Since the period until the opening state (opening state first) is set short, the second movable valve 642 can guide the ball that has won the first state (general prize winning device 640) to the special power operation port 643. State) is maintained, the electric accessory 640a enters the open state.

  Therefore, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball wins the general winning award device 640). ), Since the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, the second movable valve 642 flows down the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a (the flow-down period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds). The ball enters the working port 643. Then, based on the detection of the entry of a ball into the special power operating port 643 by a detecting means (proximity sensor) (not shown), a bonus game in which the V winning device 65 is opened is started.

  As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, a sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is a second movable valve 642. The second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable up to a position where contact with the second movable valve 642 becomes difficult. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from frequently contacting the second movable valve 642 and causing the second movable valve 642 to break down. As will be described later in detail, when the game per game is executed during the time reduction state, the electric accessory 640a is opened 0.1 second after the game per game is started, and A ball can enter the winning prize device 640. Therefore, the shortest period from the execution of the per-figure per game to the arrival of the ball at the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state after the per-figure per game is started. (The value obtained by adding 0.1 second until the ball reaches the second movable valve 642) and 0.1 second until the ball that has won the universal winning device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642).

  The second movable 642 operates variably at the same time as the start of the game per ordinary drawing, and its variable operation period (a period required for changing from the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state)). Is set to 0.1 second. In addition, since the second movable valve 642 is configured to be variably operated one second after the electric accessory 640a is closed in the per-game game, the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. The second movable valve 642 is changed when a period (1 second) that is twice as long as a period (1 second) until the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 immediately before reaching the second movable valve 642 has elapsed. It is configured to work. Therefore, even in the normal time per game executed during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to contact the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A V winning device 65 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) so that a ball which is fired by a left-handed game and flows down the left area can win. Here, with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, a specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and a flow of a ball winning in the V winning device 65 will be described. In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 provided in the general winning prize device 640, a game per accessory that opens the V prize device 65 is executed. ing. Then, the configuration is such that a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when a ball wins in a V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the execution timing of the jackpot game (special figure jackpot game) which is established when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, when the ball wins a specific winning opening (V winning opening 165). There is an opportunity to execute the jackpot game to be established (V jackpot game). Thus, by providing a plurality of occasions for executing the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired.

  First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening / closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which balls easily enter the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which balls are less likely to win than in the open state. The opening / closing door 65a is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left area of the game board 13 can reach (see FIG. 2), and is changed to an open state when a game per accessory is executed.

  In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b through which a ball passing through the open / close door 65a in the open state flows is formed in a space between the first partition 65k1 and the second partition 65k2, and the first flow is formed. A storage valve 66a is provided at a position where the ball (flowing period 0.5 seconds) flowing down the path 65b reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a, so that the ball that first wins the V prize device 65 during the game per accessory is temporarily stored in the storage portion. Make up. A storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a, and is configured to be able to detect that a ball is stored in the storage unit. Further, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a ball that has won the V prize device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b. During the winning game, the number of balls that have won the V prize device 65 is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning ball is executed. As described above, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at a position where the ball that has won the V winning device 65 immediately flows down, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a specified number or more balls win the V winning device 65. In addition to this, it is possible to immediately give the player a prize ball being played per role.

  Further, a second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first out port 163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the second flow path 65 c does not directly flow the sphere flowing down the first flow path 65 b, but stores the first flow in a state where the sphere is stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66 a. The following sphere flowing down the path 65b is configured to contact the sphere stored in the storage part of the storage valve 66a and to be guided to the second flow path 65c. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and flows down the second flow path 65c ( After a falling period of 0.1 second), the ball that has entered the first out port 163a flows down a ball discharging path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  As will be described in detail later, the storage valve 66a is configured to store a ball in accordance with the progress of the per-accompaniment game (corresponding to an operation scenario in which the per-accompaniment game is executed), and a storage state in which the ball can be stored. It is configured to be variably operated between a released state in which the ball is less likely to be stored than the state. When the storage valve 66a is in the released state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other, and are stored in the sphere flowing down the first flow path 65b or the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The moving ball flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a flow path formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 65k1 and the third partition 65k3 and having a width of about 15 mm and formed linearly in the vertical direction.

  The first movable valve 66b is provided at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b has a guide position (projection position) capable of receiving a ball flowing down the third flow path 65d in a predetermined movable pattern when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, The ball is configured to be movable between a passage position (burial position) at which a ball flowing down the third flow path 65d cannot be received. Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 and is driven and controlled by the main controller 110, is configured to be movable in accordance with the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d. When the valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 66b is moved to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 66b is retracted from the V winning device 65, and the first movable valve 66b is moved to the first position. When the movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b moves to a guiding position (a position projecting from the game board 13) projecting into the V winning device 65. It is configured as follows.

  The first movable valve 66b located at the guidance position (projection position) is configured so that a ball can flow down the upper surface thereof. As shown in FIG. 6, the downstream end of the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b is the fourth flow valve. It is configured to incline downward toward the road 65e. Therefore, the ball (downflow period of 0.2 seconds) that has flowed down the third flow path 65d in a state where the first movable valve 66b is located at the guide position (projection position) moves the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b to the fourth flow path. It will flow down to 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and the sphere flowing down the fourth flow path 65e (downflow period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. The second out port 163b is a ball entry port for discharging a ball that has entered the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, similarly to the first out port 163a described above. The dropped ball flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in a state where the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other, and the sphere flowing down the third flow path 65d (flowing period 0.2 Second) flows into the fifth flow path 65f (flow-down period of 0.1 second). A V winning opening 165 is provided downstream of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning opening 165 is a winning opening that can be a trigger for executing the jackpot game. When a ball wins the V winning opening 165 in a state where the jackpot game is not executed, the jackpot game is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the V winning device 65 is provided with a first out port 163a and a second out port 163b. With this configuration, a ball that has won the V prize device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state can pass through the flow path (third flow) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 66a is in the release state. The flow into the path 65d, the fourth flow path 65e, and the fifth flow path 65f) can be reliably prevented. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the first outlet 163a is eliminated, the second flow path 65c and the fourth flow path 65e are communicated, and the storage valve 66a is in the storage state. Alternatively, the sphere flowing down the second flow path 65c may be configured to enter the second out port 163b. In this case, the third partition 65k3, which is linearly provided in the vertical direction in FIG. 6, is tilted from the upper end to the lower end in the lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. It is preferable to provide the fourth partition 65k4 on the right side (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 6) on the extension line in the direction. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sphere flowing down the second flow path 65c flows into the fifth flow path 65f.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there are two occasions for executing the jackpot game, that is, the case where the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, and the case where the ball There is a case where the jackpot game is executed when the winning is made to the winning opening 165. Hereinafter, when explaining the jackpot game by classifying the execution trigger, the jackpot game executed when the player wins the V winning opening 165 is also referred to as a V jackpot game.

  As described above, the V prize device 65 of the present embodiment is in an open state where balls can be won by executing a game per accessory, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a is in the third flow path. 65d, the ball flows down the third flow path 65d, and according to the operating state of the first movable valve 66b when reaching the first movable valve 66b, the ball wins in the V winning opening 165. Or not.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position with respect to 5 seconds (time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 165) at the guiding position (time). Since the ball is constantly moving in a movable pattern in which the time during which the ball can win the V winning opening 165) is 0.5 seconds, the ratio of the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d to the V winning opening 165 is , About 1/11.

  In addition, even if a plurality of balls are won in the V-prize device 65 in one game per role, the operation of the storage valve 66a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one. Therefore, the configuration is such that when the game per accessory is executed 11 times, the rate of execution of one big hit game is achieved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 9, a description will be given of the content of the ball flow that has won the V prize device 65 during the execution of the per-bonus game. First, with reference to FIG. 7, a description will be given of a ball flow in the first half period (period in which the storage valve 66a is in the storage state) of the per-proxy game. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the V winning device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in a storage state in a game per bonus item. Although the detailed description will be described later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be operated and controlled to be in the storage state from the time when the bonus game is executed to the time when the V winning device 65 is closed. ing. When a plurality of balls win the V-prize device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a, and wins at the next point. The ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

  As described above, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, a configuration is such that all winning balls (for example, the ball P2) other than the ball P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a enter the out port 163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls do not stay in the V winning device 65. Further, since the storage valve 66a is released from the storage state after the V opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after executing the operation control for closing the V opening device 65a), one-time operation is performed. It is possible to reliably reduce the number of spheres flowing down the third flow path 65d to one per game.

  With such a configuration, the ease with which a ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165 can be varied according to the timing at which the ball is awarded to the V winning device 65 during the per-game play and the number of winnings. Since there is no game, a fair game can be provided to all players.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a description will be given of the content of the ball flow (the latter half period of the game per accessory) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state and a new ball cannot enter the V prize device 65, the storage valve 66a is released (indicated by a dotted line in the figure). Upon shifting, the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, since the first movable valve 66b is located at the guiding position, the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, and the fourth flow path 65e is closed. The ball flows down and enters the second out port 163b.

  On the other hand, when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the first movable valve 66b is moved to the passing position. Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 9, at the timing when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b, if the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position, the fifth flow path 66f is switched to the fifth flow path 66f. It flows down and wins the V winning opening 165.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Below the variable display unit 80, a special figure entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special figure entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. When a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a privilege. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, out of the balls fired by the left-handed game, one out of every 15 balls can enter the special figure entrance 64.

  As shown in FIG. 10, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the process at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, and the second symbol hold lamp are connected to the input / output port 205. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing the opening and closing door for changing the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 between the open state and the closed state, and the V winning device 65 A V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening / closing door, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and a first movable provided in the V winning device 65 as well. The first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the valve 66b, the second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the ordinary winning device 640, and other various devices are driven. MPU 201 is connected through an input / output port 205. Et to send various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches (not shown) such as a switch that detects that a ball has entered each entrance and a switch that detects that the ball is located at a specific position. The switch 208 and a later-described RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected. The MPU 201 performs various operations based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Execute the processing.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launch strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch a ball is given by the main control device 110. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of turning operation (rotating position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and issues the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a special item drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated special effect, and the operation content of the frame button 22 is supported. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, or a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of upper, middle, and lower ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11B). The third symbol (special symbol) that changes in response to the variable display of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has identification information imitating the numbers “0” to “9”. It is composed of ten types of main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes according to the identification information that imitates a number. As described above, by using the display mode corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually notify the result of the lottery of the special symbol to the player, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  The main display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled up and down periodically to perform variable display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11A, the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction, and in a state where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, If all three symbols are stopped on the activated line L1 in a combination of big hit symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big hit video is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and each symbol The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, a symbol that combines an image of a figure or a character with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Is reduced, or the variable display area is moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it. In addition, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is configured to be changed (dynamic display). However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to perform variable display (dynamic display). In this case, the player determines whether the variation display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special symbol or the variation of the normal symbol. It is also possible to configure so that it is difficult to understand. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what privilege is given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to execute both the fluctuation display corresponding to the change of the special symbol (lottery) and the fluctuation display corresponding to the change of the ordinary symbol (lottery), the game content to be executed ( The target of the third symbol may be switched according to the (game state), for example, during the normal state, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is executed, and the time saving state is executed. In the middle, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the ordinary symbol may be executed. In this case, the third symbol may be variably displayed in association with the symbol type in which a lottery (a lottery on which the player looks more closely at the lottery result) that is advantageous to the player is executed. On the other hand, the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the symbol that is changing. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol stops on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), it is determined whether or not the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big hit). Overlooked or not) can be suppressed. Further, if the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit is determined, the big hit game is started, and the big hit video (opening effect) ) Is displayed.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure and there is a reserved ball, after a stop display (confirmation display) for one second, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball. Is started. When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for one second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that there is no ball entering the special figure entrance 64, and the third symbol is stopped. In many cases, the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Be executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls that is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls entered into the special figure entrance 64 and the through gate 67. And the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, and sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character may perform a specific operation. A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, if the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. When the ball enters the through gate 67, the number of times of ball entry is held up to a maximum of one, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. . In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of retained balls based on the entry into the special figure entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds1 has a through ball. The configuration is such that a reserved ball count symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on entering the gate 67 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 11 (b), while four reserved ball count symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, no reserved ball count symbol is displayed in the right half. This shows a state in which there are four reserved balls, but there are normally no reserved balls.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the ball entering the through gate 67 is held up to one time. Although configured, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  In the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm. However, the display area may be formed in other forms. The sub-display area Ds may be formed below the area Dm. In this case, the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably formed according to the set game state. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the game has shifted to a different game state only by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, a state in which the player is gazing at the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which the fluctuation display of the third symbol indicating that the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result has been won is high. In such a case, the display area of the sub display area Ds may be reduced, or the sub display area Ds may be hidden.

<About the effect contents on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, description will be given on the effect contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. This time saving state is continued until the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (until a predetermined time saving state end condition is satisfied). When the special symbol lottery is executed the specified number of times, the time saving state end condition is set. Is established, and the normal state is set.

  The time saving state is a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and an open state in which a ball can enter the general winning a prize device 640 by a game per public figure, compared to a case where the gaming state is a normal state, is provided. It is configured to be easily set.

  Then, when the player wins the normal symbol and the ball enters the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640, the game per hit is executed, and the ball enters the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65. A game for winning a prize is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a game ball fired aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a probability of 100%. Then, in a normal symbol lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the time saving state is set, it is designed to win with a probability of 3/10, and the normal symbol is designed. In the case of winning in the lottery of, the general-purpose winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is executed.

  In the time per game performed during the time saving state, most of the time (approximately 100%) can be achieved by continuously executing the left-handed game so that the ball can be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 (3 seconds). ) An ordinary winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened is executed.

  Further, in the general game per game executed during the time saving state, most of the balls that have won the general electric winning device 640 are configured to enter the special power operating port 643, and the balls enter the special power operating port 643. The game per accessory is executed when the ball is hit. Then, when the game per bonus is executed, the V winning device 65 is opened, and the ball that has won the V winning device 65 wins the V winning opening 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the V winning opening 165. The big hit game (V big hit game) is configured to be executed when the ball is won.

  In other words, during the time reduction state, a game (special electric game) aiming at a jackpot by causing a game ball to be awarded (V winning) to the V winning opening 165, rather than performing a game (special figure game) aiming for a jackpot by lottery of a special symbol. Since the (game) can more easily execute the jackpot game, the player executes the game while requesting a V prize (V jackpot game) by the special hit game in the special electric game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left side area of the game board 13 is used as a special electric game in order to allow the general winning award device 640 to win a ball (to pass the ball through the through gate 67, which is usually a trigger for executing a symbol lottery). You need to fire the ball aiming at. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the ball also enters the special figure entrance 64, so that the special figure Both a figure game (a game in which a special symbol is drawn) and a special electric game (a game in which a normal symbol is drawn) are executed.

  The time saving state in which the special electric game is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game is the time required for the special symbol lottery executed by the special game to reach the specified number of times (that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol for the specified number of times). Time), so that when the gaming state transitions to the time reduction state, the special symbol fluctuation time that triggers the end of the time reduction state and transition to the normal state elapses Executing a game while expecting a V prize by a special electric game is a basic game method during the time saving state in the present embodiment.

  Various effects are executed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to easily inform the player of the state of the time-saving game. As will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the jackpot game is executed, and at the end of the jackpot, a V rush mode for indicating that the gaming state is a time saving state which is an advantageous state for the player. To notify that the time saving state has been set. Then, various effects during the V rush will be described. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the time reduction state is referred to as “V rush”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12A, the big hit ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen of a big hit (game). When the last round of the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the character "V rush starts after the jackpot has ended!" Is displayed. This indicates to the player that the game shifts to the V rush mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game. Then, in the main display area Dm, the comment "V rush period 40 seconds get" of "40 seconds" is displayed in the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating a period in which the time reduction state set after the end of the big hit game is continued. Is done.

  Here, the display contents of the remaining short time period mode 801 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, an end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of drawing a special symbol reaches a specified number (for example, four) is set as the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state is continued until the time required for the special symbol lottery to reach the specified number of times (that is, the total time of the fluctuation times of the special symbols for the specified number of times) has elapsed. In the remaining time reduction period mode 801, a display mode indicating the total time obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the special symbols until the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied is displayed.

  Next, the holding status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special symbols can be stored and a maximum of one ordinary symbol can be stored. In FIG. 12 (c), the running special figure th0 for explaining the situation of the special symbol fluctuation during execution, and the special figure first holding th1 to special for explaining the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored. FIG. 4th hold th4, a running general symbol fh0 for explaining the situation of the running normal symbol fluctuation, a general diagram first hold fh1 for explaining the winning information of the normal symbol stored and stored, Is used to explain the situation of each symbol.

  FIG. 12C shows a state in which four special symbols in which a fluctuation pattern for 10 seconds is set are stored in the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure fourth hold th4. That is, in the period of this time saving state, 40 seconds, which is a value obtained by adding the fluctuation times of four special symbol lotteries, is set. Therefore, the character “40 seconds” is displayed in the remaining short time display mode 801 for indicating the duration of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to easily inform the user how long the V rush period will continue. it can.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush that is advantageous to the player is displayed in a specific number of seconds as shown in the remaining short time display mode 801. The remaining period may be known, and the indicator may be notified to the player using an indicator or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game with a more exciting feeling to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining short time period mode 801 is displayed in a display mode showing all of “40 seconds” calculated as the duration of the V rush. Not limited to this, at the time of notifying that the vehicle enters the V rush, only a part (for example, 30 seconds) of the value (for example, 40 seconds) calculated as the duration of the V rush is notified. Alternatively, a value corresponding to an unreported minute (for example, 10 seconds) may be additionally reported during execution of the V rush.

  In this case, for example, when the number of times saved is set to four, the fluctuation times of the special symbols corresponding to three special symbol holdings among the four special symbol holdings already acquired (special symbol holdings) are added. In the case of FIG. 12 (c), the total value of the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3, "30 seconds", may be displayed when the V rush enters. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush is displayed by adding the fluctuation times of a plurality of special symbol lotteries executed until the time saving state ends. ing. Further, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current number of special figure reservations, a display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many values of the remaining short time period mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush are the sum of the variable times corresponding to the suspension of the special figure. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of each special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, for example, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation pattern of the variation time is set differently depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or not, according to the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801, It is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the lottery result in the special figure reservation (whether or not winning information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the special figure reservation).

  In addition, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is selected, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, 20 seconds. A pachinko machine 10 configured to select a variation pattern of seconds or 30 seconds, wherein the special figure first hold th1 is “10 seconds”, the special figure second hold th2 is “30 seconds”, and the special figure second hold th2 is “30 seconds”. In the case where the third hold th3 in FIG. 3 is “20 seconds” and the fourth hold th4 in the special figure is “10 seconds”, “50 seconds” is set as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. It is preferable to configure the display. With this configuration, the period is shorter than “90 seconds” (the sum of the fluctuation times for four special figure reservations), which is the duration of the V rush, and is executed during the time reduction state. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special symbol lottery has won the jackpot (the first special symbol lottery for the reduced time has won the jackpot and the fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds).

  That is, when displaying only a part of the period, not the entire period in which the V rush continues, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (50 seconds) set when the big hit is won as described above is displayed. In addition to the configuration described above, for example, the display mode of “60 seconds” that makes the player think that the first time saving time is out of fluctuation (fluctuation time of 10 seconds) and the second time saving time is a big hit fluctuation (fluctuation time of 50 seconds). It may be configured to display the remaining short time period mode 801. In other words, a value that is smaller than the value indicating the duration of the actual V rush and that is calculated when a variation time that can be selected at least for the jackpot variation and a variation time that can be selected for the out-of-range variation is displayed. Just do it.

  In the present embodiment, the acquired number of reserved special figures is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode may be displayed. Even in this case, the display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations is displayed in a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the contents, so that the number of special figure reservations currently acquired for the player can be determined. Can be difficult.

  Next, the V-rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the jackpot ending period ends and the V rush starts. FIG. 12D shows the display screen shown in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation at the time of being displayed. That is, FIG. 12B shows the display screen at the time when the special figure reservation indicated by the special figure first reservation th1 at the time of the jackpot ending starts to change, and the special figure is displayed at the time of the jackpot ending. The special figure reservation that was the first reservation th1 is shifted to the running special figure th0, the special figure second reservation th2 is the special figure first reservation th1, and the special figure third reservation th3 is the special figure second reservation At th2, the special figure fourth hold th4 is a display screen in a state shifted to the special figure third hold th3, respectively. Further, there is no new ball in the special figure entrance port 64 since the start of the V rush, and the special figure fourth reserved th4 is empty. Then, as shown in the ordinary figure fh0, the lottery of the ordinary symbol has also started to fluctuate, and the state has been reserved in the first figure ordinary fh1 (see FIG. 12D).

  When the V rush is started, the characters “V rushing” are displayed in the main display area Dm as a game status notification mode indicating that the current time is the V rush period. Next to the main display area Dm, a character 810 imitating a rabbit is dynamically displayed as if trying to take out something from the bag 810a. This usually indicates that the symbol is changing.

  At the center of the main display area Dm, a timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush period that is advantageous to the player is displayed. The timer 812 displays a value obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the specified number of special symbols up to the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12 (b), the number of lotteries for the special symbol during the time saving state is defined as four, and the variation time of the running special figure th0 is 10 seconds, and the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third “40.0 seconds”, which is the sum of the fluctuation times up to the hold th3, is indicated by the timer 812. The timer 812 is displayed so that the value is subtracted every time the fluctuation time of the running special map th0 is subtracted, so that the player can easily understand that the V rush period is in progress. it can.

  In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V rush ends when the timer reaches 0!" Is displayed, and when the value of the subtracted timer 812 becomes 0, the V rush ends. This is notified to the player. As described above, during the V rush period, the player plays a game for the purpose of causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 165. Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (the remaining period) until the advantageous period ends by visually recognizing the state of displacement of the value displayed on the timer 812.

  Then, in the upper left display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the characters of "first series" are shown, and the jackpot is won from the normal state (so-called first hit), and after the V rush is started, the gaming state is changed. This shows how many V rush periods it is without shifting to the normal state. Further, “0pt” is displayed in the display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1, and the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot won during the V rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of times the V rush continues in the display area HR1 and the number of award balls acquired in the jackpot during the V rush in the display area HR2, The game history can be checked, and the convenience of the game can be improved.

  In the main display area Dm, a V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and in the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush fluctuation area 811, the symbol fluctuates (dynamic display). The display mode is displayed. In the V rush fluctuation area 811, information for indicating to the player the game situation during the V rush is displayed. FIG. 12B shows that the special figure and the ordinary figure are currently changing, and the V rush fluctuation area 811 indicates that the V rush period has elapsed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 (a), a display screen in a case where a winning is made per ordinary figure during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the case where a winning is made per ordinary figure during a V rush, and FIG. 13C shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13A. It is a figure showing each symbol situation in the case of. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general winning device 640 is opened so that the game ball can enter.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (c), during the execution, the normal drawing hold fh0 is indicated by “○” indicating that the winning has been achieved in the normal symbol lottery. At the top right of the main display area Dm, at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12 (b)), the character 810 searching for something from the bag 810a has won the lottery of the ordinary symbol and obtained the privilege. An animation is displayed for taking out the ticket 810b on which the character "lucky" is written, which is a notification mode for indicating. In the lower right display area HR3 of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general winning award device 640 is displayed, a normal symbol lottery is won, and the electric accessory 640a is open. Is displayed in. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V occupation chance if you enter a power tube!" Is displayed. These display contents allow the player to understand that the player plays the game while aiming at the electric chew, so that the correct game method can be guided to the player. That is, the above-described display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds are guidance notification modes for guiding the player to the contents of the game to be executed.

  The timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm displays 30.9 seconds as its value. In the game situation of FIG. 13A, the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure change shown in the running special figure th0 is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure first holding th1 to the special figure third holding th3. The special drawing lottery up to is the period of the V rush. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812. In FIG. 13A, the special figure fourth reservation th4 that is not stored at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12B) is reserved. Since the special figure lottery is executed after the elapse of the period, the fluctuation time of the special figure fourth hold th4 is not added. Therefore, “-” is indicated in the special figure fourth reservation th4 (see FIG. 13C).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13B, a display screen in the case where a character hits during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a game per accessory is executed during the V rush, and FIG. 13D illustrates a display screen illustrated in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation at the time of being displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a game ball wins in the special power operating port 643 in the general winning award device 640, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened. The game is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a display screen when a game ball wins in the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640 according to the general figure shown in FIG. 13A. In FIG. 13A, the reserved ball that has been reserved in the special figure first reserved th1 has been shifted to the running special figure th0 in FIG. 13B. Then, "?" Indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is 9.9 seconds and the fluctuation is temporarily stopped is shown (see FIG. 13D). In the present embodiment, when a bonus hit game or a big hit game is executed, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (temporarily stopped) until each hit game ends. are doing.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which has been decreasing with the fluctuation time of the special figure, is displayed in the main display area Dm until the fluctuation of the special figure (subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation). Is interrupted and displayed at the interrupted time (that is, the time when the special power operation port 643 is won). Further, a character "STOP !!" is displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of timer 812 is suspended. From these display contents, the player can know that the elapse of the V rush period has been interrupted. Then, in the display area HR3, the V winning device 65 with the V opening / closing door 65a opened is schematically displayed, and is displayed together with the characters "Aim!".

  Thereby, the player can understand that the V opening / closing door 65a of the V prize device 65 is open (the execution of the game per accessory) by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. it can. That is, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. 13B include a function of a game status notification mode for notifying a player of a game status during the V rush, and an accessory. And a guide notification mode for guiding a player to a game to be executed during a winning game.

  In the V rush fluctuation area 811, the character “V” is stopped and displayed in the left area 811a and the right area 811c, and displayed in a so-called reach display mode. Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Big hit if you enter V!" Are displayed. With these display contents, the player can make the V-winning opening 165 win the game ball soon. The game can be executed while having the expectation that the game can be performed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 11B, a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a lottery of a special symbol is executed, and a game (special game) executed while expecting that the lottery result is a jackpot win. In the game game), a plurality of identification information (each symbol (third symbol) dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81) for indicating a lottery result is changed and displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns). Reach display mode (e.g., the same combination of identification information) in which a plurality of symbol columns other than one symbol column are a combination of identification information for indicating a jackpot winning. ) Is configured to execute a reach effect that increases the expectation of the jackpot winning when the stop display is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special electric game) executed during the time reduction state (V rush) is not a special symbol lottery but a final symbol V lottery through various processes based on a normal symbol lottery. Since the game is a game in which a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by causing a ball to enter the mouth 165, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the specific game content of the special electric game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left region 811a of the V rush fluctuation region 811 and the middle region are determined in accordance with the progress of the special electric game having the above-mentioned complicated game characteristics (various processes until the jackpot game is executed). In the area 811b and the right area 811c, the variable display mode (dynamic display) of the symbols (characters) that are displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) is changed so that the effect mode is executed as if a special figure game is being executed. Make up. With this configuration, the player can grasp each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without grasping the specific game contents in the special electric game, It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 (a), a description will be given of a V winning screen during a game per hit during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a case where a gaming ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during a bonus hit game during a V rush and a big hit is given, and FIG. 14) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush, the game per role is executed, and when a ball is won in the V winning opening 165 during the game per role (when a V is won), the big hit game ( V jackpot game) is given.

  FIG. 14A is a display screen when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game shown in FIG. 13B. As described above, the special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped with the fluctuation time remaining for 9.9 seconds because the fluctuation of the special symbol is interrupted during the per-game play. The special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 are hold within a specified number of times of the current V rush, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period is “29.9 seconds” without changing from the time shown in FIG. 13B (see FIG. 14C).

  Then, when it is determined that the ball wins V and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the V rush period is not subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period). The display mode of “29.9 seconds” displayed by the timer 812 shown in FIG. 13B is displayed in the display area HR4 that is less noticeable than the timer 812. "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

  In the present embodiment, if a V prize (V jackpot game) occurs during the temporary stop of the special figure, a special symbol lottery executed after the temporary stop of the temporarily stopped special figure change is executed this time. The time saving state is configured to be continued until the number of time savings set in accordance with the jackpot type of the jackpot game is executed. In other words, the information (time savings) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated (subtracted) by the interrupted special symbol change (restart special figure change) executed after the end of the big hit game.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 14 (c), if four time savings are set after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure hold 4 during the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change (9.9 seconds). The sum of the special figure fluctuation times for the individual pieces is the duration of the next V rush. With this configuration, the special figure game is performed in the normal state, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is performed during the V rush against the time-saving state (at the time of the first rush of the V rush) set by winning the jackpot. The time-saving state (when the V rush continues) that is executed and set again after the end of the jackpot game can set the V rush continuation period longer by the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the restart special figure fluctuation, It is easier to provide a V rush advantageous to the player when the V rush is continued than when the V rush enters for the first time. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while further expecting the V rush to continue.

  It should be noted that another method may be used to set a time saving state in which the V rush continuation is more advantageous to the player than the V rush first entry, for example, the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied during the normal state. (Special drawing lottery wins), the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied in the time-saving state (V winning in special electric game), and the time-saving is completed after the jackpot game ends When the state is set, a different variation pattern may be selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the execution condition of the jackpot game is established during the normal state (special figure lottery). The jackpot game is executed in the time-saving state, and the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied (V prize in the special electric game), and the end of the jackpot game is smaller than when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. After it may be configured to more is easily selected movement pattern of long fluctuation time when time reduction state is set. With this configuration, the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state can be easily made longer during the V rush continuation than at the time of the first rush V rush entry. Can be extended. Therefore, an added value can be added to the player who has continued the V rush, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to that of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the information (the number of times of saving) for establishing the time saving ending condition is updated (subtracted) by executing the restart special figure change. It may be configured such that the special symbol change with a longer change time is more easily performed at the time of the first rush of the V rush than at the time of the continuation of the V rush. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the V rush from continuing excessively and to execute the V rush without executing the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the special electric game executed during the V rush. Is ended, and the willingness to play is reduced.

  In the case of using a configuration in which the interruption timing of the special figure fluctuation during execution greatly affects the duration of the V rush after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) as in the present embodiment, In a state where it is possible to interrupt the special figure change (for example, in a state where the normal winning game is won), the information for indicating the remaining change time of the special figure change being executed is notified to the player. Alternatively, the player may be configured to select whether or not to suspend the special figure change. In other words, if the remaining variation time of the special figure change being executed is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game for interrupting the special figure change (special power operation port 643 during the game per ordinary figure) (A game in which a ball is won to execute a game per role), a game aiming for a V-prize is selected, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In some cases, a game that does not interrupt the special figure change may be configured to be selectable.

  In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded due to a V prize, the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol and the special symbol within the specified number of V rushes held at that point in time are displayed. The variation time is displayed as a preset period of the next V rush. The time is displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can confirm the period stocked in the next V rush by confirming the display area HR4.

  Then, in the V rush fluctuation area 811 for indicating the gaming state during the V rush in the main display area Dm, "V" is stopped and displayed in the middle area 811b that has fluctuated in FIG. 13B. Since the character “V” is stopped and displayed in the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the hitting of the accessory is performed, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c are combined into “VVV”. Is displayed, indicating that the jackpot has been won. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “Congratulations !!” are displayed. With these display contents, a game ball is made to win in the V winning opening 165 during the hitting of an accessory, and the player is clearly shown that the big hit has been given.

  In the present embodiment, the V rush fluctuation region 811 stops and displays the left region 811a and the right region 811c when the hitting of the accessory is performed, and the middle region 811b when the V prize is hit during the hitting of the accessory. It is configured to stop and display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left area 811a is displayed when a hit is made per ordinary figure, the right area 811c is displayed when a bonus hit is executed, and the middle area is displayed when a V prize is won. 811b may be configured to be stopped and displayed. In this way, by configuring such that a staged effect is executed in response to the establishment of the game condition or the like, when the player visually recognizes the V fluctuation region 811, it is possible to instantaneously determine which stage the game stage is. it can. Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. Further, the character to be stopped may be any character that indicates that a big hit is given and the player can obtain a privilege, and may be displayed as “win” or “V prize”. By configuring such that a plurality of characters indicating the jackpot are displayed, it is possible to provide a more varied effect to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 (b), a description will be given of a screen that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the present embodiment and is in the middle of hitting an accessory during a V rush. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball does not win in the V winning opening 165 while hitting an accessory during a V rush. In the present embodiment, when executed for each accessory, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been executed is temporarily stopped. The change of the special symbol that was being played is resumed.

  FIG. 14B is a display screen in a case where a gaming ball has not been won in the V winning opening 165 since the hitting of an accessory is executed in FIG. 13B. In the V fluctuation area 811 of the main display area Dm that indicates a gaming situation during a V rush, a character “x” indicating that no V prize was won is displayed in the middle area 811b. Therefore, the V rush fluctuation area 811 displays an out-of-sync display mode of “V × V”. This allows the player to understand that the game ball could not be won in the V winning opening 165 during the current hit.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, the character "Resume !!" is displayed to indicate that the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special figure is restarted. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush indicated by the timer 812 starts to decrease again with the resumption of the change of the special figure shown in the executing special figure th0 (see FIG. 14D). Thereby, the player can easily understand that the player must execute the game with the aim of winning the V within the time indicated by the timer 812.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15A, the big hit ending screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the jackpot ending during the V rush, and FIG. 15C is a view illustrating each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 15A is displayed. It is a figure showing a situation. In the present embodiment, during a V rush period, when a jackpot is won or a V prize is won, the V rush period (time saving state) is set again.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a big hit ending screen awarded from the V prize shown in FIG. 14A. As described above, when the jackpot is awarded during the V rush, the fluctuation time between the temporarily stopped running special figure th0 and the special figure second hold th2, which is the specified number of times of the previous V rush period, is given. Is displayed as a time stock in the display area HR4, and the character of "time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed. Then, in the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3 in FIG. 15C, that is, during the V rush before the jackpot game is executed, the special figure not added as the V rush period (time saving period). The figure fluctuating time is calculated.

  As described above, when the big hit is given during the V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the big hit game. In the V rush period, a value is set which is the sum of the remaining time of the change of the special figure temporarily stopped during the big hit and the change time of the number of lotteries of the special figure given by the big hit type. In FIG. 15A, as shown in the display area HR4, the time stock is 29.9 seconds, that is, the remaining period of the suspended special figure change (9.9 seconds) and the time during the previous V rush. The total number of seconds (total 20 seconds) of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 already added and displayed on the timer 812 is already displayed as the time stock. At the end of the jackpot game, this time-stocked second number is a new value that can be added to the V-rush period, and the special-figure hold fluctuation time corresponding to the special-figure third hold th3 (15 seconds) Is added.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the ending screen of the jackpot game in which four time savings are given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. Since it is up to the hold th2 (for two special figure reservations), the fluctuation time of the remaining two special figure reservations can be added and displayed on the timer 812 as the current V rush period, but in FIG. Since there is only one special figure reservation that can be added and displayed on the timer 812 (since no special figure reservation is stored in the special figure fourth reservation th4), the fluctuation of the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3 Only the time is added and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, if a jackpot is given during the V rush and the number of special figure reservations that are time-stocked at that time is less than the prescribed number of time savings (V rushes) to be given this time, An effect of adding the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure reservation stored and stored until after the end of the big hit game to the value of the time stock is executed. In FIG. 15 (a), the special figure third reservation is performed. The character “+15 seconds GET” is displayed in the additional period display mode 802 in correspondence with the special figure suspension in which the 15-second deviation fluctuation pattern shown in th3 is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the joy that the period that is advantageous to the player has been further extended. Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect of adding the V rush period is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, the sense of expectation that the advantageous period may be extended at the time of the ending of the jackpot game. Since the player can execute the game while holding the game, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the performance during the jackpot.

  In addition, a character of "second series" indicating that the V rush has been continued twice is displayed in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, and a win in the V rush has been achieved in the display area HR2. “670P”, which is the number of award balls, is displayed. As described above, the game result is displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize the bonus, and the value is increased each time the big hit is performed and the privilege is obtained, so that the player can be more satisfied. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “V rush continuation” indicating that the V rush has been set again is displayed. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the V rush which is advantageous to the player is continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15B, a description will be given of the timer addition screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the timer addition screen during the V rush. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure holding newly won at the time of the jackpot ending executed during the V rush or the special symbol fluctuating time outside the period of the specified number of V rushes before the jackpot. Perform additional production. If the number of reserved balls for the specified number of V rushes is not reserved at the end of the jackpot, the number of balls newly increased during the V rush period until the special figure reservation for the specified number of V rushes is accumulated. Perform additional production for the number of pending balls.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a display screen when a game has progressed from the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 15A and a new game ball has been awarded at the special figure entrance 64. FIG. 15D is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the main display area Dm, a variable display mode indicating that the V rush fluctuation area has passed the period of the V rush is displayed. 15B, as shown in FIG. 15D, the running special figure th0 resumes the fluctuation, the remaining fluctuation time becomes 3.2 seconds, the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation In the th2, a hold in which 10 seconds are set as the fluctuation time is stored. Then, the special figure third hold th3 is a state in which a hold ball having a change time of 15 seconds is stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds in which these values are added.

  The state of FIG. 15A is a state in which the fluctuation time for two new special figure reservations can be added as the V rush period as described above, but only one new special figure reservation is acquired. This is the state (only the special figure third reservation th3). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15B, when a new special figure reservation is acquired next, the acquired fluctuation time of the special figure reservation is added and displayed.

  Specifically, it is shown that the special figure fourth hold th4 has an additional prize, and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is set in this new special figure hold. Therefore, an effect in which 20 seconds are added to the current V rush period is executed. Then, the character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm adds a V rush period, and throws a ticket 810b for indicating an extension of the advantageous period to the player to the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush. Is displayed. After this effect is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure which has been additionally won this time is added to the remaining period of the V rush to the remaining period displayed on the timer 812, and the value “58.2 seconds” is added to the timer 812. Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “Timer addition!” Is displayed, so that the user can easily understand that the V rush period has been extended (added).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16A, a V-rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen indicating the end of the V rush, and FIG. 16C is a diagram illustrating the state of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 16A is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, during the V rush period, when a game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 165, or when a jackpot is not won by lottery of a special symbol, the V rush period ends, The gaming state shifts to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (c), a display of "x" indicating that the running special figure th0f, which is the final fluctuation of the current V rush, has stopped due to deviation has been shown. The reserved balls are accumulated from the first special figure reserved th1 to the third special figure reserved th3, but these reserved balls are those that are out of the specified number of times of the V rush. During the execution, the general figure fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the general figure first reserved fh1 general figure reserved ball is accumulated.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a character “VGET × 2” indicating how many times the V rush has been continued this time is displayed. Characters are displayed to show how much you gained. Thereby, the player is notified of the V rush game result this time in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V rush end" for notifying that the advantageous period has ended is displayed. According to these display modes, it is possible to inform the player that the V rush period has ended in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, the V rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen indicating that the period of the V rush has been extended, and FIG. 16D illustrates a case where the display screen illustrated in FIG. 16B is displayed. It is a figure showing each symbol situation in.

  In the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the V rush effect is executed. Then, the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol change of a predetermined number of times ends. Specifically, when the number of times of saving time is set to four, the time saving state is set, and when the fourth special symbol change is stopped (confirmed display), the time saving state is ended and the state returns to the normal state. And it is configured to shift. Here, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the ordinary symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed independently, immediately before the end of the V rush period (the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time reduction state is stopped). In the case where the game per ordinary drawing is executed immediately before the display (after the display), after the time-saving state ends (after shifting to the normal state), it may be possible to execute the game per accessory.

  In this case, if the V rush effect ends at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, a situation in which the per-accessory game starts even though the V rush effect ends. This may be confusing to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game per ordinary figure is executed at the end timing of the V rush period (the final fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol in the time saving state), until the game per ordinary figure ends, Alternatively, the V rush effect is configured to be extended until the per-bonus game executed in response to the ordinary per-game is completed. Thus, the V rush effect can be executed in correspondence with the special electric game period aiming at the V jackpot game, so that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), a state in which the character "O" indicating that the player has won the game during the running game is displayed, that is, the final variation of the time reduction state during the game playing the game. When the special symbol change is stopped (the stop symbol "x" indicating that the running special symbol th0 is off and stopped) is displayed as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the third symbol display is performed. In the main display area Dm of the device 81, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush fluctuation area 811 for indicating the game situation during the V rush are displayed in a state of being changed. That is, this indicates to the player that the V rush is continuing.

  Then, the timer 812 displays “00.0 seconds” indicating that all the changes in the special figure for the specified number of times in the time saving state have ended. However, above the main display area, the character "V lash is being extended" is displayed. By being displayed in this manner, the player can know that the V rush, which he thought has ended, has been extended, and can get unexpected joy. Then, the character "Last Chance !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The player can easily understand that the V rush has ended.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16B, that is, when the ball is made to enter the special power operation port 643 during the extended display of the V rush, the game per accessory is performed as in the normal V rush period. Is executed. In this case, the display screen during the per-game play shown in FIG. 13B is displayed, and the character “Last Chance !!” is continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the V rush period ends if no ball wins in the V winning opening 165 in the current per-game game. Then, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 in the bonus game displayed as "Last Chance !!", the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, if the ball has not won the V winning opening 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), in the present embodiment, not a transition state of the gaming state, but a series of times during which a special electric game can be executed as a V rush period. It is configured to execute a V rush effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. 16A is not limited to after the final change of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, for example, the final change of the special symbol. Is started when the remaining period becomes a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display of the end screen is ended at the timing when the next special figure change is started. You may comprise so that it may be. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as a period until the end screen of the V rush is displayed.

  With this configuration, since the end screen can be displayed using a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, the game result during the V rush period is provided to the player. Can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. In the case of using such a configuration, for example, at the time of displaying the end screen of the V rush, the lottery status of the ordinary symbols is preliminarily determined, and within the period in which the end screen of the V rush can be displayed, If it is determined in advance that the winning game is to be executed, the extended screen shown in FIG. 16B may be displayed at the timing of displaying the V rush end screen, or the game may be ended once. After the screen is displayed, the end screen may be switched to the extension screen when a game per day is executed. By using the configuration in which the end screen is switched to the extension screen in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility of aiming for the V jackpot game even after the end screen is displayed. The game can be performed with a feeling. In the present embodiment, when the extension screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed, the normal state is set as the gaming state. When such a configuration is used, for example, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time reduction state is executed. It is good to configure so that Accordingly, the period during which the extension screen is displayed is a period indicating that the V rush period is about to end, and indicates a period in which an advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who is playing a game during the V rush period to play a game having a sense of expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is divided into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and a normal normal state so that the state can be managed, and the special normal state is set. Is set only when is set, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given, and when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state, almost a prize ball can be obtained as a penalty. Instead, a disadvantageous jackpot game in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game is completed may be configured to be executed. Further, without being limited to this, for example, if the display condition of the extension screen is satisfied at the time when the final change of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is not terminated and the extension screen display is performed. The time saving state may be terminated when the termination condition is satisfied. Accordingly, the timing at which the time reduction state ends is variable, so that it is difficult for the player to understand at which timing the time reduction state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17A, a special screen at the end of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the special screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, and FIG. 17C shows a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 17A is displayed. It is the figure which showed each symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot game is executed during the V rush, after the jackpot game ends, the V rush period is set again based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the fluctuation time. However, if there is a pending ball in which a variation time of 200 seconds is executed in the retaining ball at the end of the jackpot game, a heavenly mode effect indicating that the jackpot is always won after a predetermined period of time is executed. .

  FIG. 17A is a display screen in a case where a hit change of 200 seconds is suspended at the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the holding status of each symbol at the time of the ending of the big hit game shown in FIG. Not. Further, “↓” indicating that the running figure fh0 is fluctuating is shown, indicating that the figure first holding fh1 is stored. It is shown that the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 each store a hold ball in which a variation pattern of 10 seconds is executed.

  And, in the special figure third holding th3, a holding ball on which the hit variation pattern of 200 seconds is executed is shown. In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, as a variation pattern of a special symbol during a time reduction game (during a V rush), when the result of determination is a hit, the variation time is 200 seconds per hit long variation (hereinafter, a special variation). May be executed. Furthermore, in the jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) to be won in the special symbol lottery, a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, until the fluctuation of the special hit stops (in the heaven mode), even if the special winning game cannot be made to win in the V winning opening 165, the big hit game won by the special hit always wins the big hit. Since the V rush period is set again after the game is over, the special electric game can be executed with confidence. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball, but since the big hit game is executed in the special figure third reserved th3, the special figure third reserved Since the time period is set as the V rush period set after the end of the jackpot game executed by the holding ball of the th3, the fluctuation time is indicated by "-".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), when there is a special hit in the hold at the time of the ending of the big hit game, it is determined that there is a special hit in the hold in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The character "entering heaven mode" is displayed. Also, a first lucky character 820a and a second lucky character 820b that are not displayed when the gaming state is the normal state or during the V rush where there is no special hit in the hold are displayed. In addition, the character “Ultra lucky !!” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As described above, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed during the normal state or during the V rush that does not have a special hit in the hold, are displayed, so that the player can display a special game state. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the game may be performed, and to continue the game while being excited. That is, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b are in a special game situation suggestion mode for suggesting that the current game situation is a special game situation for the player.

  In the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 written as “220 seconds” is displayed. As the value displayed in the special period display mode 803, the time until the fluctuation of winning the special winning in the special symbol lottery is stopped, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode is displayed. In other words, a special game period notification mode for indicating a special game period to be executed is provided. Therefore, the value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is a value obtained by adding the fluctuation time of 200 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the special hit, and the fluctuation time of the number of reserved balls until the special hit is won. In FIG. 17 (c), the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 each have a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. Further, since the fluctuation time per special shown in the special figure third hold th3 is 200 seconds, "220 seconds" which is the sum of the fluctuation times from the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3 is calculated. , Heaven mode is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the period of the time saving state (V rush) is configured to notify the player on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, but the special symbol fluctuation time in the time saving gaming state Is configured to execute a fluctuation pattern in which at most 50 seconds is set as the longest fluctuation time except for 200 seconds which is a special hit fluctuation (see FIG. 25C). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, when an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the player must understand that the time saving state is set again. It is possible to execute a special electric game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, it is determined whether there is a special hit change in the reserved ball, and if there is a special hit, the player is notified at the time of the ending of the big hit game. However, the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, if there is a special hit in the hold, at the end of the big hit, the time until the special hit change is executed is notified, and when the change of the special hit is started, “200 seconds” is set. The player may be notified that the period has been extended. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected joy that the period of the V rush that seems to have ended is suddenly extended for a long period of time.

  Next, a screen in the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the heaven mode, and FIG. 17D shows each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, when there is a special hit in the holding ball at the end of the big hit, the time until the change of the special hit stops is referred to as a heaven mode, and the player can execute the special electric game with peace of mind. The period is set to be as long as possible. FIG. 17B is an example of a display screen in a case where the game progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17A.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm indicates that the gaming state is the tenth V rush period after the transition from the normal state to the time saving state (V rush). The character "10th station" is displayed. Then, in the display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, characters of "6000 pt" indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game executed after shifting to the V rush are displayed. Above the main display area Dm, the characters "during heaven mode" are displayed to indicate that the player can instantly judge the current game state. In the same manner as during the V rush, the V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and in each of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed, and the special electric game progresses. Is displayed. Also, as in the V rush, an animation in which the character 810 is searching for something from the bag 810a is displayed at the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that a lottery of a normal symbol is being executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (d), in the running special figure th0, a special symbol is changed with a remaining change time of 30 seconds. In the executing special figure th0, in the gaming state shown in FIG. 17C, the reserved ball in which the special hit shown in the special figure third reserved th3 is started to change. Therefore, the remaining period of the heaven mode executed in FIG. 17B is 30 seconds, which is the remaining fluctuation time of this executing special figure th0. Also, the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3 indicate that there is a reserved ball, but because the special figure lottery is executed outside the period of the heaven mode being executed. , And the fluctuation time is indicated by "-". In addition, “↓”, which indicates that the general drawing lottery is being executed, is shown in the running general drawing fh0, and the reserved ball is also stored in the first general drawing fh1.

  The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be decremented in accordance with the remaining period of the fluctuation of the running special figure th0. As shown in FIG. 17D, since the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is th0, the character “30.0 seconds” is displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17B). . In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character “Timer 0 may be good” is displayed. Suggests. In other words, in the sub-display area Ds, a suggested effect notification mode for suggesting a future game situation to the player is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the display mode in the heaven mode, which is a period until a special symbol is won and the symbol is stopped, is configured to be the same as the V rush mode. With this configuration, it is a basic game method that is advantageous for the player to execute the special electric game and make the game prize to the V winning opening 165 even in the heaven mode as in the V rush. It is possible to guide the player to something. Therefore, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  Note that the display mode is not limited to this, and an effect dedicated to the heaven mode may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of types of effects, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18A, a description is given of a chance effect screen in which a third character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 18A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a chance effect during a hit, and FIG. 18C is a diagram illustrating each of the screens when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 18A is displayed. It is a figure showing a symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a normal symbol is won and a game ball is awarded in the special power operation port 643, a bonus hit is executed, and a V winning in the V winning device 65 is performed during execution of the bonus. When a game ball wins in the mouth 165, a big hit is given. In FIG. 18 (a), a timing at which a game ball is likely to be awarded in the V winning opening 165 while a character is being hit is notified to the player as a chance effect from the game situation shown in FIG. 13 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 18 (c), the pending status of each symbol in FIG. 18 (a) indicates that the running special figure th0 is hitting a character, and that the change is temporarily stopped. It is shown. Then, each of the reserved balls from the first special figure holding th1 to the second special figure holding th2 shows a 10-second loss variation. Further, since the special figure third hold th3 is a special figure change executed outside the currently executed V rush period, the change time indicates “−”. Further, the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicates that it is not reserved. In addition, “普” indicating that a winning has been achieved in the general drawing lottery is shown in the running general drawing fh0.

  FIG. 18A is a notification screen for notifying a player that a game ball is likely to win in the V winning opening 165 during the hitting of the role illustrated in FIG. 13B. In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming balls that have won the V prize device 65 during the hitting of the accessory are stored in the storage valve 66a. The storage valve 66a is configured to be open such that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7) for 1.5 seconds out of the 3 second period. The first movable valve 66b disposed above the V winning opening 165 causes the game ball to flow to the V winning opening 165 for 0.5 second within 5.5 seconds regardless of the playing state. It is configured to be in an open state where it can flow down the road (see FIG. 27A).

  In other words, in order for the game ball to win in the V winning opening 165, the game ball flowing down the third flow path 65d after the storage valve 66a is opened while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state. It is necessary to make the ball enter the V winning hole 165. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is opened within two seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and the first movable valve 66b is opened within two seconds. If it is determined that the V lash change is made, as shown in FIG. 18A, the emphasis mode 811z is displayed around the V rush fluctuation area 811 displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a character "V prize great chance!" Is displayed. That is, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of a timing at which the player easily transitions to an advantageous game state. With this configuration, the player can understand the timing at which the V winning is easy, and the game can be easily executed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the V winning is easy is notified by the highlighting mode 811z and the comment in the sub-display area Ds. You may. With this configuration, a more kind game can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, a general-purpose stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the lottery of the ordinary symbols is stopped during the period of the V rush, and FIG. 18D is a view showing the display screen shown in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), it is possible to execute a special game in which a normal symbol lottery is won, a game ball is won in the special power operation port 643, and a V prize is aimed. This is the most advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, during the V rush, when the normal symbol lottery is not executed, the special symbol game cannot be executed, and the effect of prompting the firing of the game ball is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 18D, the holding status of each symbol during the V rush in FIG. 18A indicates that the running special figure th0 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds. ing. Also, the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 each store a hold ball for which a deviation change of 10 seconds is executed. The special figure third reservation th3 and the special figure fourth reservation th4 are in a state where the reserved ball is not stored. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. 18 (b) is 22.2 seconds which is the sum of the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 and the fluctuation time of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. It is. In addition, "-" indicating that the general drawing lottery is not executed is shown in the running general drawing fh0. Further, normally, the reserved ball is not stored in the first reserved fh1.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (d), when a normal symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush and stopped, the electric accessory 640a attached to the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state. It is impossible to allow a game ball to enter the special power operation port 643. In other words, it is not possible to execute the special electric game, which is a basic game method during the V rush, and the special figure lottery is executed. Ends. Further, in the present embodiment, in order to allow the special figure entrance 64 or the normal prize device 640 to enter a game ball, a left-hit game in which the game ball is fired aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. It is necessary that, when a left-handed game is executed, 100% of the game balls pass through the through gate 67, which is a trigger for a normal symbol lottery. In other words, the game situation in which the special figure lottery shown in FIG. 18B is being executed but the general figure lottery is not being executed is a situation in which no game ball is fired. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect for prompting the player to launch the game ball is executed.

  In the main display area Dm, the character "V rushing" is displayed, and further, the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the V rush as if it had been subtracted as time passed. are doing. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V rush game is being executed and the remaining period is decreasing. In addition, in the V fluctuation region 811 in which the fluctuation display has been performed when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed, “strike” is performed in the left region 811a, “tsu” is displayed in the middle region 811b, and “V” is displayed in the right region. The character "hit" along with "te" is indicated to the player by the animation guided by the character 810. In other words, the V-variation area 811 is a warning display mode for indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbols is not executed, and for indicating to the player that the V-rush has ended.

  In addition, the characters "Please start the game" are displayed in the sub display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to inform the player that the normal symbol lottery is not executed and the special electric game cannot be executed, and since the special figure lottery is executed, It is possible to warn that the V rush period, which is an advantageous period, will end. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending unexpectedly for the player.

  In addition, the effect of prompting the above-described firing of the game ball is not limited to this display mode. In other words, it is only necessary to inform the player that the normal symbol lottery has not been executed, and characters indicating a danger such as "WARNING" may be displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to further warn the player that there is a risk of loss.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, a special figure stop screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, and FIG. 19C is a view showing the display screen shown in FIG. 19A. It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the time-saving state (V rush) is continued until the special symbol lottery is executed the specified number of times, and the value obtained by adding the fluctuation time for the specified number of times is defined as the V rush. The period is configured to notify the player. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the specified period is not determined, and an effect is performed to make the player expect how long the V rush will continue.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), in the holding status of each holding symbol in the gaming status shown in FIG. It is shown. In addition, the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicate that the reserved ball is not stored. On the other hand, “普” indicating that the general drawing lottery is being executed is shown in the general-purpose drawing fh0 during execution, and the general-purpose first holding fh1 is also stored.

  In this way, when the special figure lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special electric game can be executed until the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times is executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, the characters “??? second” indicating that the special symbol lottery is not executed and the specified period has not been reached are displayed on the timer 812. In the V fluctuation area 811, a fluctuation display of “↓↓↓” indicating that a lottery of a normal symbol is being executed is displayed. In addition, in the sub display area Ds, a notification mode for indicating that the specified period of V rush has not been reached, that is, “How long do you keep going?” Is displayed. By these display contents, the player can execute the special electric game because the lottery of the special symbol is not executed and the remaining period of the V rush is not reduced because the lottery of the special symbol is not executed. I can understand that With this configuration, it is possible to execute the game while the player is excited to see how long a game situation advantageous to the player, in which the special electric game can be executed without the elapse of the V rush, continues. That is, the display content shown in FIG. 19A is a suggestion notification content for indicating to the player that it is in an advantageous state.

  In addition, as described above, when the reserved ball of the special symbol runs out during the V rush period, it is notified that the period of the V rush has ended once, and then the game ball enters the special figure entrance port 64. May be executed when the ball has entered the ball. With this configuration, the player thinks that the V rush period, which seems to have ended, is restored, and can obtain unexpected joy.

  Next, a lucky time screen during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19B is a diagram showing an example of a lucky time screen during the V rush, and FIG. 19D shows the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation during suspension and the number of time savings set after the end of the V jackpot game (4 The special symbol fluctuation time for the number of times) is set as a time reduction period (V rush period) after the end of the V jackpot game.

  Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the special symbol change suspended at the time when the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, although the V rush period is displayed (subtracted) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 using the display mode of the timer 812, the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is not displayed. Each time the special symbol change is interrupted, the player needs to play the game while expecting the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed to be long.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. Specifically, when the remaining time of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining time of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the changing time of the next special symbol change. Is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. With this configuration, when the game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player is motivated to play the game. Can be.

  When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters "Lucky time entry" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851. On the display screen shown in FIG. 19 (b), a lucky time effect indicating that the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the change time of the next special symbol change is executed. As shown in FIG. 19D, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is 20 seconds and the change time of the next special symbol change executed is 10 seconds, the difference is 10 Seconds are displayed in the period display mode 851. The number of seconds displayed in the period display mode 851 is subtracted and displayed in accordance with the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, and when 0 second is displayed, the lucky time effect ends.

  Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of “a chance of hitting a bonus during a lucky time” is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding a bonus during a lucky time to a player. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), an effect to notify the player to that effect. It is configured to be able to perform unlucky effects. In other words, when the V jackpot game is executed while the unlucky effect is being executed, the player can be made aware that the next set V rush period is likely to be short. .

  By executing the unlucky effect in this way, the player can actively perform the special electric game during the unlucky effect in order to execute the V jackpot game during the V rush period. Will be subtracted, but it will be possible to select whether to aim for a longer V rush period after the end of the V jackpot game without performing the special electric game until the end of the unlucky production, Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the lucky time effect and the unlucky effect described above are configured to be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the effect is to be executed by lottery, or to determine whether or not to execute the effect based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. May be configured. Furthermore, the execution frequency of the effect may be varied according to the length of the period that can be displayed as a lucky time effect or an unlucky effect. If the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution exceeds 50 seconds, a high level is set. You may comprise so that a lucky time effect may be performed with a probability.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19B, during the period in which the lucky time effect is being executed, a period that is advantageous to the player is notified to the player using the period display mode 851. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the display mode indicating the lucky time may be displayed without displaying the period display mode 851. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so that it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the length of the V rush period set after the end of the V jackpot game.

  Further, as the execution condition of the lucky time effect and the unlucky effect, the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of the special symbol fluctuation until the time saving state ends, is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more. It may be provided as an execution condition, or the lucky time effect or the unlucky effect may not be executed during the final change of the special symbol during the V rush period.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, transition contents of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing a flow of a game state set by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a high probability state of a normal symbol), It is configured to be able to set three game states, regardless of the game state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and during that time saving state, the time saving end condition (for example, the special symbol lottery wins The normal state is set when a predetermined number of times (four times) are satisfied and a condition that is satisfied) is satisfied.

  First, a case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated in the initial state (the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54)) is executed. In), the normal state is set as the game state. This normal state is a low-probability state of a normal symbol, and is a game state in which it is difficult to win a ball in the normal-density winning device 640 (it is more difficult to win than a high-probability state of a normal symbol). A left-handed game for causing a ball to enter the mouth 64 is executed.

  In the normal state, if a special pattern (special figure) lottery (special figure lottery) is won, the big hit type is set to either big hit A or big hit B, and the big hit game is executed. You. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, at the rate of 99% of the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure lottery, the jackpot type is “jackpot A (4R (round), four times of working hours). )) Is set, and "big hit B (4R (round), 15 time savings)" is set as the big hit type at a rate of 1%.

  In other words, if a jackpot is won during the normal state, the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the end conditions of the time-saving state differ according to the set jackpot type. ing. More specifically, the jackpot type (small jackpot A) that is easy to be set is set to be shorter than the jackpot type (small jackpot B) that is hard to be set. With such a configuration, in addition to the game aiming to win a jackpot by special drawing lottery, a jackpot type (jackpot B ) Can be made to play while expecting to be.

  Although detailed description is omitted, a dynamic display (effect display) for indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 while the normal state is set. By grasping the dynamic display mode (effect mode) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can predict the result of the special figure lottery being executed. . Also, as described above, during the normal state, since the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is difficult for the ball to win in the ordinary winning prize device 640 by the ordinary symbol lottery (the ordinary symbol lottery). On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the effect display for suggesting the result of the general figure lottery to the player is not executed, or the dynamic display mode for suggesting the result of the special figure lottery is It is configured to be executed in an inconspicuous display mode.

  With such a configuration, during the period in which the normal state is set, the effect performed based on the result of the special figure lottery is given to the player, rather than the effect performed based on the result of the general figure lottery. Since it is possible to gaze, during the normal state, it is possible to visually recognize that a game (special figure game) mainly performing a special figure lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Then, when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the general electricity winning device 640 becomes easy to open based on the general figure lottery, and A game (special electric game) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a per-character game executed by allowing a ball to enter the special power operation port 643 based on the lottery is a big hit game based on the special drawing lottery. It is configured to be a game that is more advantageous to the player than a game (special figure game) aimed at (special figure jackpot game).

  In this way, by changing the execution timing of the jackpot to be aimed at by the player according to the set game state, it is possible to cause the player to execute different games according to the set game state. Can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. In this embodiment, during the normal state, the special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure game aiming at the general figure lottery. By configuring the game so that it is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game aiming for special figure lottery, the content of the game to be executed by the player differs according to the game state, but it is not limited to this In addition, a plurality of special symbol types are provided (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player is made different according to the set game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the first special symbol is the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol To be more advantageous to the player than in the normal state (e.g., When the short state is set, the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the first special symbol. You may comprise so that it may be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board is configured to execute the same game method (left-handed game) both when executing the special figure game and when executing the special electric game. By configuring the game device 13, it is configured not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method every time the game state changes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is performed according to the set game state. The method may be made different. For example, during a normal state, a left-handed game (a game aiming at a game area (left area) formed on the left side of the variable display device unit 80) is executed, and during a time reduction state. May be configured to execute a right-handed game (game aimed at a game area (right area) formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). In this case, a special figure entrance port 64 is provided as a configuration for executing a special figure game in the left area, and a through gate 67, a general winning award device 640, V The winning device 65 may be provided, and a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game may be provided in a game region (lower region) where a ball flowing down the left or right region can reach.

  With such a configuration, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) can be made different depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a pleasure of changing the game method.

  In this way, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made different depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, the execution is performed on the player. It is configured to execute guidance notification (for example, a “right-handed” display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) for guiding a game method to be performed (left-handed game, right-handed game). Good.

  Furthermore, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made different according to the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, the ball flowing down the left area or the right area reaches By providing the variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game in a possible game area (lower area), even when the jackpot game is executed based on the special figure game, the jackpot game is executed based on the special electric game. Also in this case, it is not necessary to change the game method when the big hit game is executed, and the game can be smoothly performed.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol (number of times of the special figure lottery). In addition, the lottery of the ordinary symbols (general figure lottery) can be executed independently without being involved in the lottery of the special symbols (special figure lottery). In other words, the execution timing of the regular figure lottery is established regardless of the state of the special figure lottery.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643 provided in the special symbol change (special figure change) general electric prize winning device 640 and the game per accessory is executed, the special during execution is performed. The design change is interrupted, and the special symbol change that has been interrupted is restarted when the bonus game is completed. In addition, when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the interrupted special symbol change is restarted when the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be.

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state end condition (time-saving end condition) that can be satisfied based on the special figure lottery is satisfied, that is, the predetermined number of times. Until the special figure lottery (for example, four times) is executed, a special electric game aiming at a large number of V jackpot games is executed. As a specific example, when four special figure changes are set as the time saving end condition, a period until the fourth special figure lottery ends, that is, for each of the four special figure lotteries, When the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, the time saving state set this time continues until 40 seconds later (the timing when the fourth special drawing lottery ends).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, when there are four special figure reservations at the end of the jackpot game, “40 seconds” is set as the period until the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends. Is displayed.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the fluctuation time of the running special figure fluctuation is not subtracted while the game per hit and the big hit game (V big hit game) during the time reduction state are being executed. Therefore, the period in which the time saving state is actually set is the sum of the special figure fluctuation time until the time reduction end condition is satisfied and the interruption time in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is suspended. Become. As described above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure change is interrupted corresponds to the period in which the winning game (game per item, big hit game) is executed, and the execution period of the winning game is the game period of the player. Since the length of the period varies depending on the content, the interruption time cannot be accurately notified to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time (the special figure variation time) until the time saving state ends is displayed (see FIG. 13A), and when the subtraction of the special figure variation time is interrupted, the subtraction is performed. Until the time is resumed, a display mode (see FIG. 13B) is displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is interrupted. are doing.

  With this configuration, the display contents of the display mode (remaining short time display mode 801 in FIG. 12A) indicating the period until the time saving state displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 ends. And the period until the time saving state is actually ended can be provided without any difference, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  The ordinary symbol lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) executed during the time reduction state (ordinary symbol high probability state) is configured so that the probability of winning is about 33%, and the normal symbol lottery (ordinary symbol low probability) is performed. It is configured such that it is easier to win per regular figure than the winning probability (1%) of the ordinary symbol lottery (regular figure lottery) executed during (state). Further, in the present embodiment, a variation time of 3 seconds is set as a variation pattern of a normal symbol regardless of the set game state. Therefore, by continuously executing the left-handed game during the time-saving state, the game is executed once every 10 seconds, and the general winning award device 640 is opened.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, in the case where the game per day is executed during the time reduction state, the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 easily enters the special power operation port 643 ( It is configured so that it is easier to enter the ball than the per-figure game executed during the normal state), and it is possible to execute the per-principal game about the same number of times as the per-figure game execution. . Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165 and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed at about 1/11 in one role game is one. It is constituted so that it may become.

  That is, in the first embodiment, during the time-saving state, a game per accessory which is a chance to make the ball win the V winning opening 165 is executed at a rate of about once every 10 seconds. . In the case where the game result of the per-attribute game has succeeded in winning the ball to the V winning opening 165 (when the V-prize is obtained), after the per-attribute game, the jackpot game (the jackpot type of the jackpot C is the jackpot game (10R ( Round) and time savings 4) are executed, and the time saving state is set again after the end of the big hit game. That is, if a V jackpot game (a jackpot game executed by causing a ball to enter the V winning opening 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game. are doing. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, the time saving state does not end as long as the jackpot game is continued to be executed in the special electric game, so that the special electric game can be executed with a sense of expectation for the player. it can.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, if a jackpot game is executed by a special jackpot game, the suspended special map change will be resumed after the jackpot game ends. It is configured that the number of special figure lotteries (special figure fluctuations) for satisfying the time saving end condition is not updated by the figure fluctuation. In other words, the configuration is such that the time saving state is continued until the special figure change is executed four times after the special figure change after the restart is completed.

  That is, if the remaining period of the special figure change is a long time (for example, 30 seconds), the game per accessory is executed, and if the V jackpot game is executed by the per game, the setting is performed after the jackpot game. When the remaining time period of the special figure change is a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) while the period of the reduced time saving state is “30 seconds + four times of the special figure change”, Is executed, and the V jackpot game is executed by the bonus hit game, the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is “0.5 seconds + four special figure fluctuations”.

  With this configuration, it is advantageous for the player that the V jackpot game is executed earlier in the case of executing the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game during the time-saving state in which the termination condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time. Instead, it is possible for the player to be more advantageous to execute the V jackpot game in a state where the remaining period of the special figure change being executed is long. Therefore, even if the V jackpot game has not been executed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing while giving a sense of expectation. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, the number of time savings (the number of times the special figure is changed to satisfy the time saving end condition) is not updated (subtracted) based on the special figure changes restarted after the end of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time savings (the number of special figure fluctuations updated to satisfy the time saving end condition) may be updated based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the jackpot. . Even with this configuration, the longer the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after resumption, the more advantageous the player can be, so that a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set. Even if the V jackpot game is not executed in this state, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game while having a sense of expectation.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. In the case where the game result of the per-accessory game executed during the time-saving state fails to make the ball win the V winning opening 165 (in the case of the non-V winning), the special electric game is repeated until the time-saving state ends. Is executed.

  Further, when the special symbol change (special figure change) is completed in the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, whether the special figure change for the number of times set as the time saving end condition is completed. If the time saving end condition is satisfied, the gaming state shifts to the normal state, and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, when the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the next special figure change is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25C, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure lottery is a win (1/100) as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure lottery executed during the time saving state. In the case of, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 50 seconds or 200 seconds is set is selected, and in the case where the result of the special figure lottery is out of order (99/100), a fluctuation time of 10 seconds to 50 seconds is set. The selected variation pattern is selected. In other words, the special figure lottery executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied (or four special figure lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game if four time savings are set as the time saving end condition). In this case, it is possible to make it easier to continue the time-saving state for a longer period. Furthermore, if a special jackpot is won during the time reduction state, the time reduction state is set again after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an added value in the case of winning a jackpot by a special figure lottery within a limited period in which the time saving state is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol acquired at the end of the big hit game has the big hit information in which the fluctuation time of 200 seconds is set, the special symbol for notifying that fact is provided. An effect is configured to be performed (see FIG. 17A).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, a time-saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied (four times) and a time-saving end condition that is difficult to be satisfied (15 times) can be set. It is composed. Here, if 15 time savings are set, the time savings state is continued until the fifteenth special figure lottery executed during the time savings state is completed. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot during the time reduction state can be increased, and the time reduction period can be further extended by the long-term fluctuation pattern set at the time of winning the jackpot.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment causes a game to be played in the same game method (left-handed game) in a normal state, in a time-saving state, and in a jackpot game. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the special figure lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the change pattern of the special figure change is configured to be selected regardless of the number of special symbol reservations (special figure reservation number). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is set, it is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation pattern in which the longer fluctuation time is set becomes easier to select as the number of reserved special figures increases.

  With this configuration, in a stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during a jackpot game), it is possible to enthusiastically play a game to reach the upper limit (four) of the special figure reservation. . Further, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a state in which the special figure fluctuation is not executed during the time reduction state (a state in which the time reduction termination condition is not satisfied).

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the time saving state is set, that is, during the period until the predetermined number of special symbol changes (special symbol changes) is completed, the normal symbol It is configured to execute a lottery and finally execute a special electric game in which a ball is won in the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65. The V prize device 65 is configured so that a ball can be easily won during a game per role, and is configured such that a fluctuation time of a special figure change is not subtracted (interrupted) during a game per role. Furthermore, the game per accessory has a plurality of termination conditions, and more specifically, is established when the number of balls that have won the V prize device 65 during the game per accessory reaches a predetermined number (three). A first ending condition (ball prize ending condition), and a second ending condition (time lapse ending condition) that is satisfied when an elapsed period from the execution of the bonus game has reached a predetermined period (3 seconds). , And when one of the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied, the game per accessory is ended. In addition, during the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbol and during the execution period of the game per ordinary figure, the lottery of the new ordinary symbol (the ordinary figure lottery) is not executed, but the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643 during the game per ordinary figure. During the period in which the game has been won and the bonus per game is being executed, a new general-purpose drawing can be executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by executing the per-accessory game during the time saving state, the special electric game is executed with the aim of executing more per-accessory games while interrupting the special figure change. Done. However, a period during which a normal symbol is fluctuated until the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped or a period during which a ball cannot be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 during the execution period of the game per ordinary symbol (the electric accessory 640a (A period during which the game is closed) such as a period during which it is not possible to execute the per-accessory game, which is a period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol during the time-saving state is wastedly subtracted. There will be disadvantageous shorter working hours.

  Therefore, for example, as a variation pattern of a normal symbol set during the time saving state, a general figure short variation pattern (variation time of 3 seconds) and a general figure length variation pattern (variation time of 15 seconds) having a short variation time are used. In a case where is configured to be selectable, a game is played while expecting that the normal figure short fluctuation pattern is selected so that the above-mentioned disadvantageous short time period is shortened. Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the special figure change is interrupted during the execution period of the per-accessory game (the processing for subtracting the change time of the special figure change) is used as in the present embodiment, the disadvantageous time reduction By increasing the period in which the period and the suspension period of the special figure change overlap, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the special symbol from being subtracted during the disadvantageous short time period.

  Therefore, in order to shorten the disadvantageous shortening period during the time reduction state, when the game per hit is performed during the time reduction state, the remaining time of the normal figure change during execution is determined, and the remaining time is determined by a predetermined time (for example, If the time is longer than (10 seconds), it may be configured to execute an effect that prompts that it is better not to end the game per character by lapse of time but to end the game over time. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the execution period of the game per accessory, and accordingly, it is possible to shorten the disadvantageous short time period.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a first hit type counter C1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. A 1-initial-value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 having four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In the storage area 203a, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64. Each is stored.

  When the special symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. A special symbol change based on the value is started.

  In the present embodiment, one type of special symbol is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of special symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish a lottery condition of one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the entry of a ball into the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance), The above-mentioned values are stored in the 1 special symbol holding ball storage area, and the ball enters a ball entrance (for example, a second ball entrance) different from the special figure entrance 64 (first ball entrance). In order to establish a lottery condition of another special symbol type (for example, a second special symbol) based on the above, the above-described values are stored in a second special symbol holding ball storage area different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may store.

  When the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol or the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the reserved first area of the special symbol retaining ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. May be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and a special symbol change based on the various values stored may be started. With this configuration, even with the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, it is possible to smoothly execute each of the special symbol changes.

  Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area, second special symbol holding ball storage area) may have a special symbol execution area. good. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a deviation, but is not limited to this, for example, in a case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a deviation, A configuration may be made so that a smaller number of benefits (benefits different from those at the time of the jackpot winning) than at the time of the jackpot winning can be won at the small hit that can be given to the player. With such a configuration, even if a big hit has not been won, an opportunity to give a privilege to the player can be provided, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when the small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the obtained small hit type counter value is configured to be stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may refer.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, for example, the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the big win and the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the small win are configured to be different. For example, if a big hit is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big hit game, and further, based on the set big hit type, a new game state can be set after the big hit game ends. When the small hitting is won, the small hitting game may be executed while the gaming state at the time of the small hitting winning is maintained, and the gaming state may not be shifted after the small hitting game is finished.

  With this configuration, the presence or absence of the transition of the gaming state and the content of the transition can be made different according to the winning type (big hit, small hit) which has been won, so that a variety of games can be provided. it can.

  Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry of a ball (passing of a ball) into the through gate 67, which is a single holding area (first holding area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the values of the second random number counter C4 and the general symbol change type counter CS2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number to be the special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. If the value matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit in a special symbol lottery is defined.

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, a determination value for determining a jackpot is defined within a predetermined range, and a determination value for a predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23B, among the values of the first random number counter C1, “0 to 3” is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values (“4 to 399”) are determined to be out. Specified as a value.

  In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is configured to be the same regardless of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability is configured to be different depending on the game state. May be. Also, in that case, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be two types, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, a special symbol state and a normal symbol state may be configured so that the special symbol jackpot probability is different for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the special symbol states, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state may be set, and a different big hit probability may be set for each state.

  In the case where the special symbol lottery result can be won as “small hit”, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to “small hit” is defined in the first random number table 202a. What is necessary is just to configure. With such a configuration, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery of the special symbol can be executed by the same process, so that the main control lottery and the small hit lottery are executed in different processes. The processing load on the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of a large hit and a small hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referenced to determine the big hit type when the big hit is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first hit type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24A, the first hit type selection table 202c includes a special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and a V winning opening 165. And a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 which is referred to when the ball wins (V win).

  First, the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, this special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and includes a value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Different jackpot types are defined accordingly.

  Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "0 to 98", and "big hit B" is defined in the value of "99". I have.

  Here, the content of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the content of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content of the jackpot game (round game content) executed according to each jackpot type, that is, the operation content (opening timing, opening timing, and the like for the movable member (variable winning device 650) executed during the jackpot game Opening operation scenarios in which the number of times of opening are specified in a time series are stored in advance in various operation scenario tables 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Then, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read from the various operation scenario tables 202e and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Is done. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In a jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing control during a jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and a process based on the determination result is executed.

  With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of movable members are moved by one opening operation control, by using an opening operation scenario in which the operation content of each movable member is defined in a time series, a plurality of movable members Can be unifiedly managed. Therefore, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately as compared with the case where the operation control is separately performed for each movable member, and the other movable members can be set when one movable member fails. The operation process for the member can be smoothly performed.

  “Big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for four rounds is executed. The round game is a game in which ten balls are awarded to the variable winning device 650 or the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until the opening period elapses 30 seconds. In other words, in the “big hit A” in which four round games are executed, a big hit game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be won in the variable winning device 650.

  Further, the "big hit A" is defined so that a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game. Times ", that is, a time-saving period until a special symbol lottery is executed four times without a jackpot during the time-saving state (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed)). Have been.

  The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for four rounds is executed. It is defined that a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and "15 time reductions", that is, During the state, a time-saving period is defined until the lottery is executed 15 times without winning the special symbol lottery (until the result of the fifteenth special symbol lottery is stopped (fixed display)).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the jackpot game of four rounds is always executed, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. If the set jackpot type is “big hit A” (99% of the big hit), if the number of times of saving “4” is “big hit B” (1% of the big hit), It is configured so that the number of time savings “15” is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, a special hit game (a game in which a ball is thrown into the special figure entrance 64 and the aim is to win a jackpot by a special symbol lottery) during the normal state is a big hit. It is configured such that a special electric game (a game aiming for a big hit by causing a ball to be won (V winning) in the V winning opening 165 based on a lottery of a normal symbol as a base point) is easily executed, and the game is executed more easily than in the normal state. The time reduction state is configured to be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the "big hit B" in which the time-saving state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is difficult to end (the time-saving state end condition is difficult to be satisfied) is a big hit type which is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A". .

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed in all jackpots. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A different number of round games may be executed according to the jackpot type. Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed in all jackpots, and the number of time savings (time saving termination condition) is set according to the jackpot type. It is configured to be different, but without being limited to this, a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game according to the selected jackpot type and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set are provided. May be.

  Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. The V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table in which game contents of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed when the ball has won the V winning port 165 (V jackpot) are defined. Specifically, “big hit C” is defined in the entire range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 99”.

  The “big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds as the big hit game and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 10 rounds is executed. . It is defined that a time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and “4 time reductions”, that is, During the state, a time-saving period is defined until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning a jackpot (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed)).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game executed based on the V winning (the jackpot executed in the special electric game) is more than the jackpot game executed based on the special figure lottery (the jackpot game executed in the special figure game). (Game) is configured to execute a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds. In other words, in terms of the amount of privilege (the number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the time reduction state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured to be acquired based on the fact that a ball has been won in the special power operating port 643, and the process is executed based on the fact that a V-win has been achieved during the per-prize game. The big jackpot game (V jackpot game) is a V jackpot type selection based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of winning the ball in the special power operation port 643, which triggered the execution of the V-winning bonus game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference to the table 202c2.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one jackpot type (jackpot C) specified in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, the same content is obtained regardless of which of the bonus games per player wins the game. Although the big hit game is executed, a plurality of big hit types may be defined in the V big hit type selection table 202c2 according to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 without being limited to this. Further, a plurality of special power operation ports may be provided in the general power winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set in correspondence with the special power operation port where the ball has won among the plurality of special power operation ports. Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball has won the V winning opening 165 while the per-prize game is being executed, and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is obtained. You may be comprised so that a jackpot type may be selected based on it.

  In the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is selected regardless of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot or at the time of the ball winning the V winning opening 165. However, without being limited to this, the game state set after the jackpot game is variable according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot or at the time of the ball winning the V winning opening 165. In this case, for example, immediately before the end of the time-saving state (immediately before the stop of the final change of the special symbol in the time-saving state), a game per ordinary drawing is executed, and after the time-saving state ends, Only when the player wins a V during the bonus game executed in the state where the state is set, that is, only when the player wins the V in the special electric game during the normal state, after the end of the big hit game Short termination condition is satisfied difficult time reduction state (e.g., the time-shortening number 20 times time reduction state) may be configured to be set.

  In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot types are used. However, the number of types is not limited thereto, and two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. In addition, the same jackpot type may be set in a case where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and in a case where a V prize is won in a special electric game. Furthermore, the selection ratio and the type of the jackpot type selected this time may be made different based on the information on the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the content of the jackpot game or the transition of the game state). . With this configuration, the player can be interested in the past game history (big hit history). In this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestion effect capable of suggesting to the player a jackpot type that is likely to be set at the next jackpot based on the past jackpot history. This makes it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The rough display mode (variable time) such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, or the like is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) storing a random value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time table used when the time reduction state is set. Table 202d2. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the data table used to select the variation pattern according to the game state is different, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. be able to.

  Next, detailed contents of each table specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c). FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and has a longer fluctuation time when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit than when the special symbol lottery result is lost. Are defined so that the variation pattern of the pattern can be easily selected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25B, the lottery result of the special symbol (special figure) is “big hit”, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”. Various types of normal reach with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds are defined in association with each other, and a super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds is defined in the range of "51 to 198". In FIG. 25 (b), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198" to simplify the description of the variation pattern of the hit super reach. Actually, predetermined fluctuation times (for example, fluctuation time of 60 seconds, fluctuation time of 100 seconds, and fluctuation time of 120 seconds) are respectively defined in the corresponding value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “51 to 198”, “60 seconds to” corresponding to the obtained value is obtained. A variation pattern in which any variation time of “120 seconds” is set.

  When the lottery result is “out of range”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in a range of “0 to 179” in association with a short range of 8 seconds in the variation time, and in the range of “180 to 194”. A fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in association with the normal reach, and a range of "195 to 198" is defined with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds. Note that the content of the lottery result being “out of place” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 being in the range of “195 to 198” is for the same purpose as in the case where the lottery result is “big hit (hit)”. Yes, the explanation is simplified.

  That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the type of the variable time that can be selected is made the same, and only the rate at which each variable time is selected is made different. ing. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (hit), the rate of selection of the longer fluctuation time is higher than in the case of the loss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol fluctuation during execution becomes, the higher the expectation of the jackpot win can be raised. Therefore, when a special symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, the player is not allowed to change until the fluctuation time elapses. Can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In the present embodiment, that is, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time set for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a longer fluctuation time is set as the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is smaller. It is configured to be. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that a ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress the situation of sphere.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the set variable time is set by configuring the type of the variable time that can be selected to be the same regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. By grasping, it is configured so that the lottery result of the special symbol can be prevented from being exposed to the player in advance, but without being limited to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is The variation time selected only in the case or the variation time selected only in the case of the departure may be partially settable.

  As shown in FIG. 25B, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected based on a special symbol lottery result (win / fail determination result) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern may be selected based on a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won.

  Next, the contents of the time saving table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 25C, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern in the time reduction table 202d2.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), when the result of the hit / fail determination (lottery result) is "win (big hit)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 varies within the range of "0 to 99". A “hit short” with a time of 50 seconds is defined, and a “long hit” with a variation time of 200 seconds is defined in the range of “100 to 198”. In the case of “missing”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in a range of “0 to 149”, and “short missing A” with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, and in a range of “150 to 169”, "Short off B" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined, "Short off C" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "170 to 189", and the fluctuation time is set in the range of "190 to 196". Is defined as “long out-of-length A” of 30 seconds, and “197, 198” is defined as “long out-of-length B” with a variation time of 50 seconds.

  As described above, during the time reduction state, unlike the normal state, the type of the fluctuating time that can be selected is different depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is winning or not. , The fluctuation time that can be selected when a jackpot is won is longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of a loss.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time reduction state is set is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and during that time reduction period, the special electric game is executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbols. In addition, as an end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition), an end condition (the number of time savings) based on the number of times of changing the special symbol (the number of lotteries) is set.

  Therefore, when the long variation time is selected as the special symbol variation executed during the time reduction state, the period during which the time reduction state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, can be set longer. Then, in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, for example, when four time savings are set, the special symbol lottery for four times executed after the time saving state is set is a jackpot winning (1 / 100), a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected as the added value. With this configuration, when a special symbol jackpot is won within a limited period of time reduction, a more advantageous game can be provided to the player. Can be performed.

  In addition, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, since the fluctuation time selected as "10 seconds to 50 seconds" has a maximum difference of 5 times, the deviation fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time is selected. It is possible to play a game while expecting the player to perform the game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating the length of the time reduction state period (V rush period) is displayed on the big hit game end screen. The remaining short time period mode 801 is within the range until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is determined in advance based on the winning information included in the special symbol reservation already acquired. Is configured to display the value obtained by adding

  With such a configuration, whether the number of seconds displayed as the remaining short time period mode 801 is a display mode obtained by adding the fluctuation times of a plurality of out-of-place fluctuations, or a display corresponding to the fluctuation time of one jackpot fluctuation It is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict whether the mode is an aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 22, the description will be continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202b. Is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol (second symbol) when the value of the random number set as the hit is set. Also, the second random number table 202b is divided into two types, one for a low probability of a normal symbol and one for a high probability of having a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability, and is included in each. The number of random numbers to be a big hit is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  The contents defined in the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the acquired second random number counter C4 is set to the value of “0” for the ordinary symbol, and in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. In some cases, the per-figure winning is defined in the range of the acquired second random number counter C4 of “0 to 299”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/1000) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. Accordingly, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the time reduction state, which is the high probability state of the normal symbol, in the normal state, Since it is possible to make it harder to win per ordinary figure, it is possible to make it harder for a situation where a game per ordinary figure is executed during the normal state and a ball wins in the ordinary electric winning device 640 to occur. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (300/1000) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the normal symbol winning game based on the winning of the normal symbol during the time reduction state.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the per-figure per game executed during the normal state, the ball is less likely to win the per-figure perforation apparatus 640 than the per-figure per game executed during the time-saving state. In addition, even if a ball wins in the ordinary winning prize device 640 during the normal state, the winning ball does not easily enter the special power operation port 643. That is, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win a per-figure during the normal state, and even if the game is won per peri-figure, the ball will be awarded to the per-prize winning device 640 during the per-figure game. It is configured such that even if the ball wins the general electricity prize winning device 640, the winning ball does not easily win the special power operation port 643.

  As described above, in a plurality of processes (three processes) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the prize winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643, it is more difficult to progress the game in the normal state than in the time reduction state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 when a lottery of a normal symbol executed during the normal state is triggered, and a game per accessory is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described three processes, instead of controlling the winning of a ball to the special power operation port 643 based on the execution of the normal symbol lottery during the normal state, the normal state is not set. Even in the middle, a short variation time (3 seconds as in the time reduction state) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In other words, even if it is configured such that the lottery of the ordinary symbols is easily executed in a short period of time, the ball is restricted from winning in the special power operation port 643 by the regulation in the three processes described above. The ball is won in the special power operation port 643 at the occasion of the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed in the above, and it is possible to surely prevent the execution of the game per accessory.

  In this way, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal state to be short, at the timing when the game state is switched, for example, at the timing when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, the normal state (the low probability state of the normal symbol) ), The normal symbol change of the long fluctuation time executed during the transition timing of the game state is executed, and the special symbol change in the time reduction state is started, but the normal symbol change in the time reduction state is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a lottery cannot be executed. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the time-saving state is managed for a period, it is possible to provide the player with a game (special electric game) using the limited time-saving period effectively.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described three processes (probability of winning a normal symbol, winning rate of a ball to the general winning award device 640 in a game of a general winning time, and a ball winning the general winning award device 640 are performed by a special power operating port 643. (A prize winning rate), the prize of the ball to the special power operation port 643 in the normal state is configured to be restricted, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the sphere is configured to be restricted in two or less processes. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 does not win in the special power operation port 643, the ball enters the out port 644 so that a privilege (for example, a prize ball) is not given to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a ball enters the out port 644, more prize balls are paid out than when a ball enters the special power operation port 643. You may.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a ball from arriving at the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, and to obtain a different privilege (principle for executing a game per character) when the general prize winning device 640 is won. Can be provided to the player, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. Further, in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is possible to provide the player with an added value in the case of winning per ordinary symbol.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  The ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined by the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, it is configured such that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined using the acquired value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202b, a big hit type selection table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d and at least various operation scenario tables 202e. Note that the first random number table 202a, the second random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d have been described above when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. .

  The various operation scenario table 202e is a data table having an operation scenario in which operation contents of various movable members for which the main control device 110 manages operation control are specified in a time series in advance. , When the operation of the movable member is controlled. In the present embodiment, when controlling the operation of the movable member, an operation scenario that matches the current operation control condition is read from the various operation scenario tables 202e, and the read operation scenario is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 203. Remember. Then, in the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the storage area are periodically updated (in units of 4 milliseconds), and the updated values correspond to the updated values. When there is an operation scenario in which the movable member is variably operated in the area, an operation control based on the operation scenario is executed. Further, each operation scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set in units of one event (big hit game, general per-game, per-accessible game) for controlling the operation of the movable member. Therefore, in the operation scenario table corresponding to an event (for example, a game per ordinary drawing) in which the operation of a plurality of movable members needs to be controlled within one event, the operation control content to be executed for the plurality of movable members is defined. Have been.

  Here, the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e. As shown in FIG. 26A, the various operation scenario tables 202e include a jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, an accessory operation scenario table 202e2, an ordinary figure operation scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4. ing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26B, the contents of the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 26 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating various contents defined in the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2. The per-government operation scenario table 202e2 is a data table in which the per-government scenario in which the operation content during the per-government game is set is defined. From when the V prize device 65 is opened (until the V prize port solenoid 209b is set to ON), a round period (the maximum period during which the V prize device 65 is opened), an ending period (the V prize device 65). (The grace period from when the storage solenoid 209c is turned off) is set, and is set when the game per accessory is started, and is periodically (the main processing of the main control device 110). The operation control corresponding to the value of the scenario counter (not shown) to which the value is incremented by one (every time is executed) is executed.

  More specifically, when the bonus game is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to “1”. Since the operation scenario of setting the storage solenoid 209c to ON is defined as the corresponding operation scenario in the scenario counter “1”, the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON at the same time as the start of the per-bonus game, and the storage valve is set. The storage valve 66a is moved to a state where the ball can be stored in the storage section formed on the upper surface of the 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is added every 4 milliseconds, and the scenario counter “25”, that is, the opening period ends 0.1 seconds after the start of the game per character, At the timing when the value becomes "26", the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to ON, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker) is opened. That is, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 66a is configured to be changed to the storage state using the period from the start of the game per accessory to the opening of the V winning device 65. With this configuration, even if the ball vigorously wins the V winning device 65 immediately after the V winning device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a is already set at the timing when the V winning device 65 is opened. Is changed to the storage state, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from passing through the storage valve 66a and winning in the V winning opening 165.

  Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "375", that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have elapsed since the start of the per-prize game, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V (Attacker) is closed. Then, after executing the closing control of the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker), that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “376”, the ending period of the game per accessory is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF. It is stipulated that Until the value of the scenario counter reaches “750”, the closed state of the game per accessory (ending period) is set.

  In other words, in the per-bonus game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning device 65 is configured to open after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. The scenario is defined such that the storage solenoid 209c is set to be turned off after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter “375”). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring at the time of starting or ending the game per accessory, and to suppress execution of the game per accessory at an unintended timing.

  Next, the content of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The first movable valve 66b of the present embodiment is controlled so as to move in a predetermined operation pattern while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110 executed in the case where it has been performed (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The configuration is such that the value of the scenario counter is updated (1 added) by a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the first movable valve 66b in the present embodiment has a V winning state in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 165, and a ball winning in the V winning opening 165. It is configured to be located in any one of the V prize difficult state where it is difficult to make it. In the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on (when the ball moves through the first movable valve 66b to the V winning opening 165) for the range of the scenario counter from "1" to "1500". An operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which the ball cannot easily enter the V winning opening 165 with the first movable valve 66b) is defined.

  Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “1250”, that is, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off until 5 seconds elapse after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1251” to “1500”, that is, for 5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on. An operation scenario is defined to be set. Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit value “1500”, the value of the scenario counter is switched from “1500” to “1” when the next main processing (see FIG. 55) is executed. Thereafter, the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for allowing or prohibiting the winning of the ball into the V winning opening 165, is set for 0.5 second for 5.5 seconds. It is configured to perform a variable operation so as to switch to a state where a ball can be won in the V winning opening 165. Thereby, when a ball arrives at the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and wins the V winning opening 165 is 1/11. Make up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine which per game bonus game the ball wins in the V winning opening 165, and it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in all per bonus game games.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls wins in the V winning device 65 during one game per accessory, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is not increased. It is configured to be one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165) in the per-principal game is reduced to about 1/11, so that it is suppressed that the jackpot game is excessively provided to the player. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the first movable valve 66b is configured such that the same operation content is always set while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first operation pattern may be a predetermined operation pattern. For example, a first operation pattern defined as an off period (5.5 seconds) and an on period (0.5) seconds of the first movable valve solenoid 209d; An operation scenario is set in which an off period (3 seconds), an on period (0.2 seconds), an off period (2 seconds), and a second operation pattern defined as an on period (0.3 seconds) are set in order. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is also possible to provide a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time from the time, and to switch to a different operation scenario based on the measurement result by the measuring means. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within one hour after power-on, or three hours to three hours and ten minutes after power-on), the first operation scenario is compared with the normal operation scenario. It is preferable that the ratio of the period in which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on be higher than the ratio of the period in which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off. With this configuration, the jackpot game (V jackpot game) can be easily performed during the time-saving game only for a specific period, and the player can play the game for the period. Operation can be improved.

  Further, the control content of the operation scenario may be changed according to the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set to the initial state (scenario counter) at the timing when a specific big hit game is executed and the timing when it ends. Of the symbol “1”), or the result of the special symbol lottery continuously deviates for a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times which is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, a special operation scenario in which the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on is higher than the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off is set as compared with the normal operation scenario. May be configured. Then, once the special operation scenario is set, it is preferable that the time-saving state is set thereafter, and the time-saving state is set continuously until the time-saving state ends. With this, the special operation scenario is set, so that the player can continuously play the game. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notifying unit for notifying the player that the special operation scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the special operation scenario is set.

  Next, the contents of the per-figure-per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27B is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the per-figure per-operation scenario table 202e3. The per-figure-per-movement scenario table 202e3 is a data table that stores a per-figure per-figure game operation pattern that is executed when a win is made in the ordinary symbol lottery. An operation scenario corresponding to the set game state is set.

  Specifically, the per-figure per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 includes a per-figure per-figure per-figure scenario 202e31 in which a per-figure per-figure game operation scenario to be executed during the normal state is executed, and is executed during the time-saving state. A time-saving general-purpose per-scroll scenario 202e32 in which an operation scenario of a general-purpose per-game is defined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27 (c), the content of the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 will be described. FIG. 27C is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31. In the normal symbol winning scenario 202e31, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the winning winning ordinary symbol variation is stopped (confirmed) is the normal state ( This is an operation scenario to be set (S1118 in FIG. 48: No).

  The normal-purpose-per-drawing scenario 202e31 includes a general-purpose solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general-purpose winning device 640, and a general-purpose winning device for a scenario counter value in the range of “1” to “1050”. An operation scenario for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the flow destination of the winning ball to 640 is defined.

  Specifically, after the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “1025”, that is, after the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 is set (after the general-purpose per-figure game in the normal state is executed), 4 Until one second elapses, the general-purpose solenoid is off (the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is off (the ball is allowed to flow down to the out port 644), and thereafter, When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1026” to “1050”, that is, for 0.1 second between 4.1 seconds and 4.2 seconds after the execution of the scenario 202e31 per normal general-purpose figure, the general-purpose solenoid is turned on. The operation scenario is defined such that the power is turned on (the electric accessory 640a is open) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (the ball is caused to flow down to the special power operation port 643).

  In other words, when the game is executed in the normal state, the game in the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 seconds) are executed. Furthermore, even if the ball wins the general winning award device 640 during the open state for 0.1 second, at that time the second movable valve 643 causes the winning ball to flow down to the out port 644 (see FIG. 4). , It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning to the special power operation port 643.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the content of the time-saving general-purpose figure per-day scenario 202e32 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e32. In this time saving general symbol winning scenario 202e32, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the winning symbol variation stops (confirmed) is the normal state ( This is an operation scenario to be set (S1118 in FIG. 48: Yes).

  For the time-saving general-purpose scenario 202e32 and a scenario counter value of “1” to “1025”, a general-purpose solenoid for controlling the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general-purpose winning device 640, and a general-purpose winning device 640 An operation scenario for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e for controlling the operation of the second movable valve 642 for distributing the flow destination of the winning sphere is defined.

  Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “25”, that is, 0 after the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 is set (after the per-normal-period game in the normal state is executed). Until one second elapses, the state in which the normal electric solenoid is set to OFF (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON (the state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643). After that, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “26” to “775”, that is, 3 seconds between 0.1 seconds and 3.1 seconds after the scenario 202e32 per time saving general figure is set, The general-purpose solenoid is turned on (the electric accessory 640a is open), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is continuously turned on, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “776” to “1024”, that is, Until 3.1 seconds to 4.1 seconds elapse after the time saving general time per scenario 202e32 is set, the general-purpose solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on. (A state in which the ball is caused to flow down to the special power operation port 643), and when the value of the scenario counter becomes “1025”, that is, the upper limit value specified in the scenario 202e32 per time saving general drawing, the second movable state An operation scenario is defined such that the valve solenoid 209e is turned off (a state in which the ball flows down to the out port 644).

  In other words, when the per-figure-period game is executed in the time-saving state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the per-figure-period game is immediately executed for 3 seconds through a short-time closed state (0.1 second). Is done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the general winning award device 640 than in the normal game per game in the normal state.

  Further, in the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e32, during the period in which the ball can win the general-purpose winning device 640, the position at which the second movable valve 643 can win the ball to the special power operation port 643 (FIG. 5). ) Can be set, so that a ball can be easily won to the special power operation port 643 during a game per ordinary drawing.

  In addition, the above-described normal scenario per figure 202e31 and the time-saving general figure per scenario 202e32 define the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d to be the same. The operation control contents can be unified, and the process of controlling the variable members can be simplified.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the game per game drawing includes a time ending condition that is established based on the passage of time (a condition that the scenario per game is updated to an upper limit) and a game winning device. A winning ending condition that is satisfied when the winning number of balls to 640 reaches the upper limit value (for example, five) is set. When a normal game is played, the winning ending condition is set such that the time ending condition is satisfied first. Thus, for example, in a per-figure game, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally winning a large number of balls into the general-purpose winning device 640.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 55), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 54). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the NMI, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a winning number counter 203e, and an operation. Counter group 203f, gaming state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, big hit flag 203i, time saving end flag 203j, bonus per hit flag 203k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a stores various counter values obtained based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for storing.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the special symbol stops changing, the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Is a storage area in which various counter values are shifted and stored when various counter values are stored.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) include a first random number counter C1 obtained from a counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of a winning start, and a first hit type. The values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the counters C1 to C2, CS1 Is obtained and stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2, CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball. Shift to the execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b includes a second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) in accordance with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and a general figure variation type counter CS2. This is a storage area in which values are stored. When detecting that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , And acquires the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2 and stores it in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one holding area so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) at a maximum of one time. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), from the holding area where the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  When the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the ordinary symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored and a lottery of the ordinary symbol is won. And a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one starting winning is set to the normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, based on a winning in the special figure entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds, This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (the number of times of standby) in the variable display effect performed by the one symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one every time the variable display effect is executed.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the fact that a ball has entered the special special figure entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 stores the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). In the special symbol change start process (see S205 of FIG. 41), the data stored in the special symbol change process is referred to, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a special figure variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the ball passes through a through gate 67 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ) Is a counter that counts up to once the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on this. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of retaining balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. In the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54), zero is set as an initial value. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the normal symbol variation display is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

  The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 or the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the per-prize game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65, it is updated by being added one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, a detecting means capable of detecting the number of winnings in the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) and the number of discharged (the number of passing balls provided in each winning opening). Is determined, the number is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of various set operation scenarios, and is composed of scenario counters corresponding to each of the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. When any one of the operation scenarios in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, a counter value update process is performed as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). Is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed in duplicate. For example, a scenario related to a per-figure game and a scenario related to a per-accessory game are configured to be simultaneously executable. Therefore, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the scenario counters for the upper limit number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously may be provided. In this case, when the scenario counter is provided with a type and a new operation scenario is set, an unused scenario counter type is determined, and a scenario counter is set based on the determination result. Use information for indicating which operation scenario is used may be set, and the use information set in the storage unit of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 may be set. Further, the storage unit in which the usage information is set may be provided with a backup function capable of retaining the stored information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, similarly to the various configurations of the RAM 203. . With this configuration, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after the power is restored is continued from the state before the power failure. Becomes possible.

  The gaming state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set gaming state, and is a gaming state corresponding to the gaming state (setting state of the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of the jackpot game. Is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, the time reduction state is stored.

  Furthermore, in the state where the big hit game and the bonus game are being executed, a win game state (a big hit state and a bonus game state) indicating that each win game is being executed is executed. Type information indicating a jackpot type corresponding to a jackpot game is also stored. In addition, it is configured to also store the per-figure-per-game information indicating that the per-figure per-game is being executed.

  Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

  The information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the startup process (see FIG. 54), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is set.

  Thus, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the current game state.

  The time reduction counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and a value corresponding to a case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is set. After the jackpot game ends, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set in the time-saving counter 203j (S1914 and 1915 in FIG. 56). Then, when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. Thereby, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, and the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). When the value of becomes zero, the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, until the next big hit game is executed, You may comprise so that the high probability state of a symbol may continue. In this case, the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be set to “10000”.

  In the present embodiment, only the condition for terminating the time-saving state and the condition for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203j are the conditions for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203j based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the content of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted. May be. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order winning), or Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the time saving counter 203j may be subtracted, or when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643. Alternatively, the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be subtracted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is configured to be decremented by one. However, a plurality of values of the time reduction counter 203j are grouped (for example, 2) according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed such that the value of the time reduction counter 203j becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the time reduction counter 203j. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time reduction state will continue, and to make the player interested in the game during the time reduction state.

  Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be made different depending on the content of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (big hit type). As a result, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The big hit flag 203i is set to ON when the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the fact that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64. Is a flag to be executed. In addition, when the big hit game ends, it is set to off.

  The time-saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time-saving ending condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time-saving ending condition is satisfied. The time-saving end flag 203h indicates that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, that is, the current special figure variation is in the time-saving state. Is set to on when it is determined that this is the final variation (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that the switch is ON, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is reset to “0” and the time reduction state is set. A process for terminating the process is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45) and set to off (see S804 in FIG. 45).

  Further, during a special symbol change executed while the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON (during a final change in the time reduction state), when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165 and a V jackpot game is executed. Is also set to off (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

  That is, the present embodiment is configured to execute the subtraction process of the time-saving counter 203h at the change start timing of the special symbol and execute the end process for determining the time saving end at the change stop timing of the special symbol. I have. When the special symbol change is interrupted by the special hit game during the change of the special symbol, and the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed in response to the special hit game, the time reduction end flag 203h is turned off. It is configured to be set.

  Therefore, for example, even if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the time reduction end flag 203h is set to ON and the special symbol change interrupted after the end of the jackpot game is restarted, the restarted special symbol change is not performed. It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending at the fluctuation stop timing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, so that the subtraction process of the time saving end flag 203h may be executed when the special symbol change is restarted. There is no. Therefore, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, a process of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203j from the time when the next special symbol change after the restart of the special symbol change is started is executed. .

  With this configuration, the player can play the game for a longer time in the set time saving state, and the player's willingness to play can be increased. In the present embodiment, the process of updating the time-saving state only for the final fluctuation of the time-saving state is performed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the time-saving counter 203j may be a predetermined value (for example, 2 Also in the case of ()), the processing for updating the time saving state may be performed at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The accessory hit flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the accessory hit game is executed, and is set to ON when the accessory hit game is executed. The bonus per hit flag 203k is turned on when the ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the general per game is awarded to the special power operating port 643 and the per hit special game is not executed at that time. (See S1307 in FIG. 50). Then, in various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is referred to when judging whether or not a game per accessory is performed, and is set to off when the game per accessory is finished. In this embodiment, when the accessory hit flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol change is interrupted.

  The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped, and when set to ON, stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time and turns it ON. When the setting is turned off from the set state, updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol change is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol change is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Things. In the present embodiment, when a ball is won in the special power operation port 643, a game per accessory is configured to be executable, and when the game per accessory is executed, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed is stopped. It is configured to be.

  The special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S307 of S6 in FIG. 43). Is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the special symbol change execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. In the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether the value is 0 (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 203a is 0 (S204: No in FIG. 40), a special symbol variation stop process for stopping the special symbol that is changing (see S287 in FIG. 45). ) Is executed.

  Further, when a special hit game or a big hit game is executed, the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is configured to interrupt the processing for subtracting the value. Therefore, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not subtracted during the bonus hit game or the big hit game.

  The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that the ball has won the V winning opening during the game per role, and is set to ON when the ball has won the V winning opening during the game per role. Is what is done. The setting status of the V flag 203p is referred to in the accessory hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and when it is set to ON, the start of the big hit game (V big hit game) is started. This is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). Thereafter, it is set to off (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the open / close plate 650b of the specific winning opening 650a. A special winning opening solenoid 209a for opening / closing driving forward, a V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening / closing the opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65. The storage solenoid 209c for driving, the first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, and the second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the general winning award device 640. Also, a solenoid 209 including a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected. MPU201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the output port 205.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) (for example, a storage sensor 65s that detects a ball stored in a storage unit formed in a storage valve 66a in the V winning device 65) and the like. The various switches 208 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 are connected. The MPU 201 outputs a signal output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the above.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outlier, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the determination as to whether the change has been made, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, a variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed in accordance with the special symbol variation to be executed. . In this fluctuation effect, a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the determination of success / failure, and the acquired counter value for selection. By visually recognizing the fluctuating effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to perform a game (special figure game) while predicting whether or not the current special symbol fluctuation has won a jackpot.

  On the other hand, when the time saving state is set, a special effect for aiming at a V-winning game at the occasion of the ordinary symbol lottery is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 because the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is not executed. An effect (V rush effect) for guiding the game content is executed. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, various fluctuation patterns are defined as the fluctuation patterns that are referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the fluctuation patterns that are referred to when the gaming state is the time saving state. Absent. In the case where the third symbol is displayed small on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state in correspondence with the special symbol variation, the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 What is necessary is just to comprise so that only the fluctuating display mode corresponding to (fluctuating time) may be specified.

  The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the status of operation control for various devices being executed on the main control device 110 side. It is formed from the same data table as the operation scenario table 202e. When the operation scenario table 222b receives a command indicating the start of operation control (for example, a command indicating the start of a hit game) from the main control device 110, the operation scenario table 222b sets the operation scenario corresponding to the received command. Referenced. The operation scenario set here is controlled to be updated so as to synchronize with the update operation on the main control device 110 side.

  With this configuration, only the command indicating the start of operation control is output from the main control device 110, and the operation status of various devices and future operation development can be easily grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It becomes possible. In the present embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the sound ramp control device 113 for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The progress status of various operation scenarios included in the various operation scenario table 202e may be set as a command and output to the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol holding ball counter 223c, a special figure change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, effect counter 223f, slave state setting area 223g, look-ahead counter 223h, time saving period counter 223i, unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, interruption flag 223m, special hit flag 223n, extension flag 223p, V At least a rush flag 223q, a fluctuation time counter 223r, a notified suspended number storage area 223s, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and each of these areas stores winning information. You. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the result of the lottery of the reserved ball and the like can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 before the start of the change.

  The special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main control device 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the special figure entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 obtains the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223c. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, and also stores the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c after the storage. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 11B). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special figure change start flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a special figure change pattern command for notifying the change pattern of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 98. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by one and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223g, the current gaming state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113.

  The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of special figure reservations in which the fluctuation time is read ahead of the number of time savings set as the time saving state, and the number of time savings set when the time saving state is set. Is set, and the value is subtracted according to the number of reserved special figures for which the pre-reading of the variable time has been executed. Then, it is referred to when the value of the time-saving period counter 223i described later becomes 0, and when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, it becomes a state in which the special symbol change is executed despite the time saving state. , A special effect (see FIG. 19A) is displayed.

  The time reduction period counter 223i is a counter that indicates the time of the special symbol fluctuation (the special figure fluctuation time) until the time reduction state ends, and a plurality of times until the special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the condition for ending the time reduction state ends. A value obtained by accumulating the special figure fluctuation time is set. The value of the time reduction counter 223i is referred to and subtracted from the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio ramp control process 113 (see FIG. 60). 72 (S5303, S5304).

  The value indicated by the time reduction counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining time of the V rush in the V rush effect performed during the time reduction state (see FIG. 12C). . In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the game is performed in the same game method (left-handed game) as during the normal state, during the jackpot game, and during the time saving state, and is set after the jackpot game ends. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is configured to easily reach the upper limit (4) at the timing when the time saving state is started.

  Therefore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the number of times saved is set to four (see FIG. 12A), the special symbol holding information (the special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b) acquired at that time is displayed. Based on the winning information), the fluctuation time (total value of the fluctuation times for four special figure fluctuations) until the time saving state ends is displayed.

  Even if the number of time savings is a value larger than the upper limit value (4) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, or if the number of time savings is set to four, the special symbol holding number at the end of the big hit game ( If the number of special figure reservations does not reach four, the value of the time reduction counter 223i is set according to the special symbol reservation information acquired at that time, and the time reduction period is determined from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of special symbol reservations added to the counter 223i is subtracted. Then, when new special symbol hold information is acquired, the special symbol change time is added to the time reduction counter 223i based on the acquired special symbol hold information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

  The unreported period storage area 223j is in a state where the fluctuation time can be added to the time reduction period counter 223i, that is, in a case where the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, despite receiving the winning command, When the value of the special figure fluctuation time according to the included special symbol holding information cannot be added to the time reduction period counter 223i (for example, during a jackpot game or a bonus game), the special symbol holding information included in the received winning command is received. Is an area for temporarily storing the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to.

  The value (special figure fluctuating time) stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read out when the time saving period can be added, and is referred to when adding to the time saving period counter 223i. With this configuration, regardless of whether the time saving period can be added or not, when the winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute the process of reading the special figure variation time included in the winning command, The processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The unreported number-of-notifications storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of prize-winning commands in which the special-figure variation time is stored in the above-described unreported period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol reserved balls. Thus, the time is read when the time saving period can be added, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented in accordance with the read value.

  The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the time reduction period counter 223h is not subtracted, and is a state in which the value of the time reduction period counter 223h is not subtracted, that is, the game per bonus item and the big hit game are executed. It is set to on when it is turned on.

  The special hit flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when winning information indicating a special hit ("big hit B") is included in the special symbol stored and stored. The special hit flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the big hit end process (see S4914 in FIG. 69) that the winning storage indicating the special hit is included in the hold storage (see S5013 in FIG. 69). ).

  In this embodiment, if there is a special win in the special figure reservation acquired at the end of the big hit game, only the period until the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the special win is reduced during the V rush. It is configured to be displayed as a period, and further configured to execute an effect (heaven mode) for notifying the player that a special hit exists in the special map reservation (FIG. 17 (a)).

  With this configuration, after a predetermined period of time (after a short period of time displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), a jackpot game (a jackpot won by the special figure lottery) is given to the player. Since the execution of the game can be notified in advance, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to the special hit ends is notified as a shortened time period, so the big hit The remaining period of time and short-term at the time of a game (special hit) can be set to 0 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to easily inform the player how many seconds later the jackpot game will be executed, the V jackpot during the short time period in the heaven mode (during the time until the special jackpot game is executed). The game can be performed while the player can enjoy how many times the game can be executed.

  Furthermore, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to the special hit is ended is notified as a shortened time period, so that the special hit corresponding to the special hit is set. The special figure fluctuating time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired after the figure hold can be prevented from being determined in advance by the player. Thereby, for example, when the jackpot game corresponding to the special hit is executed at a stage where the time saving period is 10 seconds remaining, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol change to be executed is 10 seconds in advance. It is possible to suppress that the game motivation is reduced and the willingness to play is reduced.

  The extension flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the time-saving state game is being executed at the timing when the time-saving state end condition is satisfied, and is executed at the time when the time-saving state end condition is satisfied. It is set to on when it is set. In the present embodiment, as the operation scenario of the per-figure game, the per-figure per-scenario 202e31 corresponding to the per-figure game in the normal state, and the And a scenario 202e32, and is configured to variably set the game content of the per-figure game based on the game state set at the per-figure-per-game execution timing.

  Therefore, for example, when the game per day drawing is executed just before the end of the time reduction state, the game per day drawing during the time reduction state may be executed even after the game state has shifted to the normal state. When such a state occurs, an effect is produced in which the end timing of the V rush effect indicating the game mode during the time saving state is extended to the end timing of the game per ordinary figure (FIG. 16). (C)). This makes it possible to inform the player of the period in which the player should aim for the V prize (V rush period) in an easily understandable manner.

  The V rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating that it is a V rush period, and is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special figure lottery) in a normal state, and a condition for terminating a time-saving state. Is set to off when the condition is satisfied. The V rush flag 223q is configured to be continuously turned on even when a jackpot game is executed during a time reduction period (during V rush). This makes it possible to easily set the period for which various types of cumulative information (information indicating the number of acquired V jackpot games and the number of acquired balls during the V rush period) in the V rush period are to be calculated.

  The fluctuation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set, and the voice lamp control is performed. In the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process of the process 113 (see FIG. 60), reference and subtraction are performed (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72). The value of the fluctuation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the running special symbol fluctuation at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation can be interrupted, and is used to set a different effect mode according to the remaining period. Can be

  The notified number-of-reserved-numbers storage area 223s is an area for storing the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the variation time already added to the value of the time-saving period counter 223i, and the value of the unreported number-of-reserved-numbers storage area 223k is updated. In this case, the updated value is stored, and the value is subtracted when the special symbol change ends. Then, at the end of the jackpot game in which the new number of times saved is set, the value stored in the notified pending number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h, so that the new time saving state is set. In this case, the number of special symbol reserved balls already notified as the remaining period of the time reduction state is subtracted, and the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be newly added and displayed for the time reduction period corresponds to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. Used for

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the present embodiment, the effect that suggests the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired during the normal state to the player is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may be comprised so that the production | presentation aspect may be changed according to the special figure reservation content.

  For example, the special symbol stop type (combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot) may be variably set based on the variable time corresponding to the acquired special figure hold, and the total of the special figure hold change times is When a jackpot is won in a state where the time exceeds 100 seconds, a combination of the third symbols in which odd numbers are stopped and displayed at the same time may be displayed.

  Further, the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal state is configured to be variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning by the special figure lottery. You may.

  In the present embodiment, when the vehicle enters the V rush, all the variable times based on the acquired special figure reservation are notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to notify the player of only a part of the fluctuation time based on the hold, or the player may operate the operation means, thereby continuing the V rush (a period until the time-saving state ends). May be configured to be selectable for a game in which the special symbol fluctuation time for indicating the game is not notified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation times corresponding to a plurality of special figure fluctuations executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied are notified by summing up the fluctuation times. May be configured so that the technician can identify the variable time corresponding to the suspension of the special map. In this case, for example, a special figure hold display mode corresponding to a special figure change executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is displayed in a display mode imitating a character, and the display mode is simulated according to the type of the displayed character. You may comprise so that a player may grasp | ascertain roughly the length of the fluctuation | variation time of the special figure change corresponding to the said special figure reservation.

  In the present embodiment, since the time saving state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is always set after the big hit game is executed, the V rush flag is set when the big hit game is executed. However, for example, if the time-saving state and the normal state are set at a specific ratio after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed. Even after that, the time-saving state may not be set after the end of the big hit game. In this case, after the big hit game ends (during the ending period of the big hit game), whether or not the time saving state is set after the big hit game is determined based on the set big hit type, and the time saving state is set. , It can be changed after the suspension of the special figure acquired at that time.

  Next, the contents of the game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the per-figure per game is executed in the normal state. FIG. 32 is the timing chart of the game when the per-figure per game is executed in the time reduction state. 6 is a timing chart showing a flow.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of the game in the case where the game per ordinary figure is executed in the normal state will be described. In the present embodiment, a game (special electric game) that can proceed in the order of a game per a regular figure, a game per an accessory, and a jackpot game (a V jackpot game) can be executed in response to a winning in a regular symbol lottery. Make up. In other words, it is configured such that the jackpot game can be executed without performing a special symbol lottery.

  First, in the normal state, when a win is made in the ordinary symbol lottery, a general per-game winning game based on the normal general-purpose per-game scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27C) is executed, and the general electric winning device 640 performs opening control. Is done. As shown in FIG. 27C, in the per-figure game executed during the normal state, it takes four seconds (t1) from the start of the per-figure game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a. Then, after passing through the open state for 0.1 second (t2) and closing state for 1 second (t3), the game per ordinary drawing ends. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special power operating port 643 for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the per-game game. Thereafter, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

  Therefore, in the per-figure game executed during the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the general-purpose winning device 640, and even if the ball is won, the winning ball is guided to the out port 644. Will be. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably suppress the ball from winning to the special power operation port 643 during the normal state and the game per hit is executed. With such a configuration, during the normal state in which the special figure game aiming at the execution of the big hit game by lottery of the special symbol is executed, and during the special time game in which the special electric game aiming to execute the big hit game by the lottery of the normal pattern is executed. Even if it is configured to execute the same game method in the middle and the middle, it is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot game by the special electric game during the normal state, and to provide the player with the jackpot game excessively. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (four times or fifteen times) during the time reduction state, so that the special symbol lottery is completed. Must be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time saving state are configured to execute the same game method, so that during the time saving state, a game in which only the normal symbol lottery is executed is performed. This can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the per-figure game is set so as to prohibit the execution of the special electric game during the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the same operation scenario as that of the per-figure game executed during the time reduction state is selected in a part of the per-figure per-game. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play a surprising game.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. As described above, in the case where the game is performed per normal figure during the normal state, the ball that has won the general power prize device 640 does not win the special power operation port 643. There is no execution of the per-prize game executed at the time of winning, and the per-proxy game in which the V-prize device 65 is opened and the big-hit game in which the variable prize device 650 is opened are not executed. Then, a new normal symbol variation (normal symbol variation) is executed based on the end of the game per ordinary symbol. The first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31 (h)) is set to have an operation scenario in which the pachinko machine 10 is constantly driven while the power is turned on, so that the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31 (h)) is operated regardless of whether or not the per-accessory game is executed. , Are driven in an operation pattern based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27A).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow of the game in the case where the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed among the flow of the game in the case where the normal time hit game is executed in the time saving state will be described. .

  First, in the time reduction state, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a general time per game based on the time reduction general time scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) is executed, and the general power winning device 640 is controlled to be opened. As shown in FIG. 28, in the per-figure-period game executed during the time-saving state, it takes 0.1 second (t1) from the start of the per-figure-period game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a, After that, the game goes through the open state for three seconds (t2) and the closed state for one second (t3), and the game ends in the ordinary drawing. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special power operating port 643 for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the per-game game. Thereafter, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

  Therefore, in the game per day map performed during the time saving state, the ball is likely to enter the general-purpose winning device 640 (it is easier to win than the game per day map in the normal state), and the winning ball is activated by the special electric power. The mouth 643 is configured to be easily won (more easily than the game per ordinary figure in the normal state). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the special power operation port 643 in the regular game per game executed during the time saving state, and to facilitate the execution of the game per accessory.

  The passing of the ball (winning) is detected by the special winning opening switch (FIG. 32 (e)) (not shown), and the opening of the V winning device 65 is triggered by the detection result. A hit game is executed. When the game per role is started, after a standby period of 0.1 second (t5) has elapsed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) to open the V opening / closing door 65a. After that, during the 1.4 seconds (t7), a bonus hit game in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off is executed. Further, at the start of the per-principal game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to on for 1.6 seconds (t8) to position the storage valve 66a in the storage state. In other words, during the period in which the ball can enter the V-prize device 65 by the per game play, the storage valve 66a is kept in the storage state (see FIG. 7), so during one per game play, It is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning opening 165.

  When the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the elapse of the period t8, one ball stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down to the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 so as to alternately switch between a closed state of 5 seconds (t10) and an open state of 0.5 seconds (t9), and stores the stored state. When the ball stored at the valve 66a reaches the first movable valve 66a, if the first movable valve 66b is in a closed state, the ball flows down toward the second out port 163b, and the first movable valve 66b Is open, the ball flows down to the V winning opening 165. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 165, the passage of the ball is detected by a V winning switch (not shown) (FIG. 32 (i)), and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is started based on the detection result.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the game per game is executed during the time saving state, it is easy to make the general electric winning device 640 win a ball (rather than the game per game in the normal state). In the case where the winning ball performs a per-figure-performing game in which the winning ball easily enters the special power operation port 643 and the per-figure-performing game is executed during the normal state, the prize winning device 640 is used. Even if it is difficult to win the ball (it is harder to win than the game played per day in the time-saving state), and even if the ball has won the general-purpose winning device 640, the winning ball is sent to the special power operation port 643. It is configured to execute a game that is difficult to win.

  With such a configuration, in order to continuously execute the special symbol change during the time saving state, a game method aiming at the special entrance 64 serving as a special symbol lottery opportunity, and a through pattern serving as a normal symbol lottery opportunity. Even if the game method for aiming at the gate 67 is the same as the game method, the probability that the game per accessory will be executed can be greatly different depending on the game state. In addition, in a per-figure game in a normal state, an act of illegally winning a ball to the general-purpose winning device 640 (for example, a ball is stopped by a magnet near the electric accessory 640a, and the ball is synchronized with the opening timing). Even if the prize ball is executed), the winning ball can be prevented from winning in the special power operation port 643, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only a game for establishing a special symbol lottery trigger or a regular symbol lottery trigger, but also a left-hitting game for each of the general per-game, the per-accessible, and the jackpot games Therefore, it is possible to smoothly play the game without causing the player to feel troublesome to change the game method.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device According to First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 38) transmitted from the MPU 231 and described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a process of drawing the next one frame of image and a process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used when drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the above, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (the storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 shows a power-on state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main controller 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 34 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is “missing special symbol”, the image shown in FIG. The image to be displayed is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the special figure entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 34B and 34C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display it. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  When the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the special figure entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. FIG. 35B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “sky stage”, respectively. . FIG. 28 illustrates the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 35, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage” or “sky stage”, the MPU 231 First, the position between the position a and the position a 'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image extending over the mountain changes with time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue with the passage of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white with time, and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image repeatedly returning to the back image showing the morning is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 35A, the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage, "the city stage" is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "city stage" displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “sky stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is stored and resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup process after the power is turned on.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in a range from the position a to the position a ', and the position is shifted from the position a including the initial position to the position a'. Since the image data corresponding to the image during the period b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the fluctuation starts. When the stage change is determined by the lottery at the time, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back BD are immediately displayed in the third symbol. The display 81 can be displayed on the display 81 while scrolling or changing the color tone over time. Rukoto can. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the images in the partial range is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surfaces BD use the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to move the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data of the remaining image is displayed. The range of the image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the image data corresponding to the remaining images can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the images are being displayed. After that, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  On the rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 33) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  On the back sides B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b 'and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position “b” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b 'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 after the ball entry into the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, even though the variable effect has been started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. It is. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the character design is changed based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, image data necessary for drawing an image thereafter, from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, This is an area in which transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, for example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is out of place, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged scale than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size from the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. One or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the elapse of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, in the variable display data table, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified. The back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display any one of them or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the back A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage where the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variable symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 37) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image list to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the operation of the user, and thus the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 37 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes a start address (storage source start address) and a final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and a start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 37, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 33) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 33) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 38) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 38) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, (See FIG. 38), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, obtains transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time, and obtains the transfer data. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is stored before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 38, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count design 1, reserved ball count design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes the transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which no image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, a back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a) ) Of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. The display data table is set off when a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, and S6805 in FIG. 78B). 79 of FIG. 79). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the other than the confirmed display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 86 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 79, S6905). With the final display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in the present embodiment, 399, 99, respectively). 999), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) in the special figure entrance 64 and the ball entry (start winning) in the general electric winning device 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start-up port (through gate) 67 passes through the ball when passing through the ball. A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the special power starting opening winning process is executed (S108), and then the V entrance passing process (S109) and the V passing process (S110) are executed. The details of the special power starting opening winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the V-pass process is executed, a firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104) performs various determinations (acceptance determination) and determinations on the special symbol based on each acquired counter value, and performs the first variation in the variation display mode determined by the predetermined control. The first symbol display device 37 controls the variable display to enable the variable display, the third symbol display device 81 sets various commands for executing the variation display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol, and sets the determination result (whether or not the result is correct). The control for stopping the display in the display mode indicating (determination result) is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether a big hit game is being played (during a big hit) or a bonus game is being played (a hit bonus is being played) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a big hit game (big hit) or a big hit game (middle hit).

  In the process of S201, if it is determined that the big hit or the hit is being hit (S201: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S202). Is determined (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when the game per bonus is executed. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted) during the execution of the bonus per game. During this period, a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the special symbol change display is temporarily stopped on the first symbol display device 83 is displayed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the display of the change of the special symbol that has been executed along with the start of the per-bonus game is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust that the special symbol change has disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is being performed (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The display mode may be the same as the display mode in which the display is repeatedly turned off, or may be a display mode in which the flashing interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is being performed (for example, switching on and off at 0.5 second intervals) Flashing display mode). Further, when the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors as a display mode, a blinking display mode using a special color that can be displayed only when the temporary stop is being performed is used. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a hit, (S201: No), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, a special symbol. Is determined to be in a variable display (S204). When it is determined that the special symbol change is being displayed (the value of the special figure change time counter 203n is larger than 0) (S204: Yes), the special symbol change execution process is executed (S206).

  In this special symbol change execution process (S206), a process for changing (updating) the change display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the special symbol is changing is executed. Is done. This special symbol change execution process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the processing of S206 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol fluctuation execution processing (S206) is 0 (S207). When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is 0 (S207: Yes), the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S208), and thereafter, the processing ends.

  In the special symbol change stop process (S208), when the change time specified for the special symbol during the change display has elapsed, a process of stopping the change display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Details of the special symbol change stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 in the process of S207 (S207: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S204 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), that is, if it is determined that the current special figure fluctuation is not in progress, Next, a special symbol change start process is executed (S205). In the special symbol change start process (S205), a process for executing a new lottery (fluctuation) of a special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether or not a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (fluctuation) is executed. This special symbol change start processing (S205) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. After executing the special symbol change start process (S205), the present process ends.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which a lottery (fluctuation) of a special symbol can be executed, a fluctuation process related to a special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation process (S204 to S208). Is configured to be executed. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for a special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S205), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S205).

  In the special symbol change start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to 0. It is determined whether it is greater than (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S303).

  Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after the subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially transmitted to the execution area side. A shift process is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The details of this special symbol big hit determination processing (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The big hit determination is performed based on the set gaming state.

  Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307), which will be described in detail later, is performed based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting based on each counter value.

  After executing the processing of S307, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S308: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S309). When it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S310), and thereafter, the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  That is, in the present embodiment, during the time saving state, a process for updating the number of time savings at the start timing of the change of the special symbol is executed, and if the current special symbol change is the final change in the time saving state, the time Is configured to execute a process of setting the time-saving end flag 203j to ON without updating. Although the details will be described later, the setting status of the time-saving end flag 203j is referred to when the special symbol change is stopped, and when the special symbol is stopped, the setting of the time-saving counter 203h is set. It is configured to set the value to 0 and end the time saving state. Then, the special hit game is executed while the special symbol is fluctuating, and the special hit game is executed. When the big hit game is started, the processing for setting the time reduction end flag 203j to off is executed.

  With this configuration, for example, when the special symbol change is interrupted based on the fact that the special jackpot game is executed during the final change of the special symbol in the time saving state, the interrupt is performed after the jackpot game ends. The special symbol change corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol change that has been resumed is restarted, but if the special symbol change after the restart is stopped and displayed, the time reduction end flag 203j is set to off, The time-saving state never ends. Also, when the special symbol change is restarted, the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not subtracted.

  Thereby, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, the special symbol change interrupted in the number of time savings (four times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to the jackpot game Is set as the time-saving period in which the time-saving state is set. Therefore, the special figure game is executed during the normal state, and the special electric game is executed during the time reduction state, and the ball is transferred to the V winning opening 165, rather than the duration of the time reduction state set when the special symbol lottery is won. In the case where a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed in the prize, the remaining period of the suspended special symbol fluctuation is added, so that the duration of the time reduction state which is advantageous to the player can be easily extended. Can be.

  That is, when the time-saving state is set again based on the game during the time-saving state, the duration of the time-saving state that is set is longer than when the time-saving state is set based on the game during the normal state. Since the game can be easily performed, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting a more advantageous game state to be set.

  Further, when the special symbol change is restarted at the special symbol change timing, a process for updating the number of time savings and a process for ending the time saving state are used. Since the start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented. However, since the game state during the fluctuation period of the last special symbol change in the time saving state becomes the normal state, There has been a problem that it is not possible to provide the game during the time reduction state to the player as much as possible.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing for updating the number of time savings and the processing for ending the time saving state can be executed at different timings. Specifically, it is configured to execute a process for updating the number of time savings at a special symbol change start timing, and to execute a process for ending the time saving state at a special symbol change stop timing. . With this configuration, the time saving number is not updated when the special symbol change is restarted, and the time saving state can be set as the gaming state during the last special symbol change fluctuation period in the time saving state. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with the maximum number of games in the reduced working hours.

  In the present embodiment, the processing for terminating the time saving state is executed at the special symbol change stop timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is established, and until the next special symbol variation lottery is executed, for example, in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), the process of S305 is executed, and the process of S306 is executed. The processing for ending the time saving state may be executed at a timing before the processing is performed.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the management of the number of remaining working hours during the time saving state is performed on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, based on the reception of the information indicating the game state (information indicating that the time saving state is set, information indicating the number of time savings) included in the state command set at the end of the big hit game, By storing the state information and updating the remaining time reduction number based on the reception of the special figure variation pattern command indicating that the special symbol variation is started, the voice lamp control device 113 side enters the time reduction game. It is configured to manage the situation.

  With such a configuration, in the control processing of main controller 110, a command for indicating the number of remaining working hours or a command for indicating the final change in the working hours state (that the working hours end flag 203j is set to ON). , The sound lamp control device 113 can manage the game situation in the time saving state, and set an effect mode corresponding to the current game situation. Therefore, control processing in main controller 110 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one of the special symbol change start processes (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the big hit determination value, and the lottery is performed. A result (determination result) is obtained (S402).

  After finishing the process of S402, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S403). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot is determined to indicate the special symbol jackpot winning. The flag 203i is set to ON (S404). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won.

  Then, the special symbol lottery result is set as a big hit (S405), and based on the obtained value of the hit type counter C2, a special symbol big hit symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S406). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), a special symbol departure symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and the process ends.

  Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307).

  In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), it is set whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made is based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is turned on for the special symbol. The big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S404 in the special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 42) described above.

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol big hit is set (S501: Yes), the big hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the acquired first hit type counter C2 are set. The jackpot type is determined based on the value (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is obtained (S503), and the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, probable change) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. The variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to (state) is read (S504).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, a special figure variation pattern command is set (S506). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol. The external output processing (FIG. 55) of the main processing (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 is performed. In step S1801 in FIG. 55), the sound is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S507), the special symbol display device 37 is set to start the special symbol variation (S508), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n (S509), and this processing ends. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S507 includes the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of the current special symbol change, that is, information indicating a rough type such as out of reach or out of reach. Then, it is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out of place (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped and S503 is skipped. Move to the processing of.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol variation executing process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change execution process (S206). In the special symbol variation execution process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is executed.

  In the special symbol change execution process (S206), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

  In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure change restart command is set (S702), and the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is turned off. It is set (S703), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S704), the display of the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 40) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 44) (See S206 in FIG. 44), and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is updated (subtracted by 1) in the special symbol fluctuation execution processing (see S205 in FIG. 44). I have. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, and the value is decremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured as follows.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and the processing shifts to the processing of S704.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change stop processing (S208). This special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) is executed when the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is determined to be “0”, that is, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special figure) has elapsed. This is the process to be performed.

  When the special symbol change stop processing (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), then the big hit scenario won by the special symbol change this time is set (S806), and the big hit flag 202i and the time saving counter 203h are set. The value is reset (S807), information indicating that the current gaming state is a big hit (big hit game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. The gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to store a gaming state (normal state, time-saving state) relating to a lottery game and a gaming state relating to a winning game. The game state (normal state, time-saving state) related to the lottery game at the given timing and the game state indicating that the big hit is being performed are stored.

  With such a configuration, at the end of the big hit game, the gaming state set at the timing of winning the big hit can be determined.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to off, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is out of this time (S801: No), the time reduction end flag It is determined whether or not 203j is set to ON (S802). If it is determined that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation that has been stopped this time is the final variation in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter 203h Is reset to 0 (S803), the time saving end flag 203j is set to off (S804), and information indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S805). The process moves to S809. In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processing of S803 to S805 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S809.

  In the processing of S809, a special figure determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the special symbol is set (S809), and the special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. Is executed (S810), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), the processing (S809, S810) for stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery game) is executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643 and the game per role is executed, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the result of the predetermined determination performed when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643, the special symbol change being executed may be discarded instead of being interrupted. With this configuration, the case where the special symbol change indicating the duration of the time reduction state is interrupted and the case where the special symbol change is discarded can be made to appear, so that the duration of the time reduction state is suddenly subtracted ( (End), and an effect with a sense of tension for the player can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a description will be given of a start winning process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning). This is a process of storing each acquired counter value up to a maximum of four in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in each of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, Processing (so-called pre-reading processing) for predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. is performed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (start win) a special figure entrance 64 which is a start opening (S901). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves with respect to the special figure entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (904). In step S905, a reserved ball number command for notifying the retained number of start ports (the number of reserved special lottery rights) is set.

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the corresponding special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is handled. Each of them is held (stored) in the storage area of the number of held balls (S906).

  Next, a pre-reading process is executed (S907), and thereafter, the present process ends. The pre-reading process (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. However, based on the counter values newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the result of the hit / fail determination, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. Is determined. Note that, in the present embodiment, a process is performed to determine the result of determination as to whether or not it is valid, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like based on each of the newly stored counter values. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the result of determination as to whether or not all of the reserved memories stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determined fluctuation pattern, and the stop type are determined. Or the like may be configured to execute a process of determining the like.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when a special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the special symbol lottery right (winning information) is obtained. ) Is determined in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, or in accordance with the result of a lottery of a normal symbol, a lottery right for a special symbol (prize information). May be determined in advance.

  When it is determined in the processing of S901 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S901: No), or in the processing of S903, the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is the value (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is skipped, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the prefetching process (S907) based on the added information on winning (winning information) is executed. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the upper limit number (4) in the processing of S903 (S903: No), The prefetching process (S907) may be configured to execute a pre-reading process (S907) when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaching the upper limit. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can be made to continuously play the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. Further, when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to add an added value. Can be suppressed from decreasing the willingness to play when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64 in a state where the ball has reached.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the prefetching process (S907), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S907).

  In the pre-reading process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, a random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a change type counter, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol holding storage area 203a. Each value of CS1 is read (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the free storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1002).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading hold storage area, the result of the determination as to whether or not the answer is valid is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is performed based on the timing at which a new hold is generated (the timing at which a new hold (winning information) is stored in the special symbol holding storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since a time lag occurs at the timing of the game, it is difficult to predict the gaming state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing when the jackpot determination based on the winning information newly held this time is executed. It is.

  Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit determination is a jackpot (S1003). When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a winning command indicating a condition for winning a jackpot (game state set at the time of lottery) and a jackpot type when the jackpot is won is set (S1004). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in the processing of S1003 is not a big hit (S1003: No), a winning command indicating a loss is set (S1005), and then this processing is ended.

  Here, the winning command set in the processing of S1004 or S1005 includes, in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the success / failure (information giving a different meaning based on the result of the success / failure determination), as well as the common information of S1001 It is set including information for indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (look-ahead effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a preview symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the determination to the player as to whether or not it is possible can be executed.

  In this embodiment, since there is only one special symbol probability state (special symbol low probability state), the information (win / fail judgment result) set in the winning command can be set regardless of the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of special symbol probability states (a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability state), a winning / failing determination result in the special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability It may be configured to determine the winning / failing determination result in the case of the state and to set a winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in the high probability state, it is in the low probability state. Also, a determination value (a value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit may be specified, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big hit may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing the special symbol lottery based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and the hit / fail determination is performed based on the game state. May be configured to be executed. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing pre-reading, the game state at the time of starting the change can be determined by determining the order of change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and in the prefetching process, a pass / fail judgment is made. Although the configuration for predicting the determination is used in advance, the present invention is not limited to this. In the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information (holding storage) newly stored (stored) in the special symbol holding storage area 203a is stored. Information indicating the content (each counter value) may be set as a winning command, and the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is determined based on information included in the winning command received by the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured.

  With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It is preferable to configure so as to perform analysis (prediction of the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of the determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem that a result of the prefetching process executed without a title is illegally obtained by a player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The ordinary symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1101). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Up to the middle (until the winning game ends) is included. When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1101: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S1101: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is in the variable display (S1102). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, when it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is next activated. The value (M) is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol-reserved-ball counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S1105). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing the new normal symbol change (that the winning information for use in the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is held and stored. In order to execute the ordinary symbol change using the winning information, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is decremented by one.

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is normally shifted, such as symbol storage 1 → execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S1107).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current time is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (S1108), and it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to on. (S1108: Yes), the winning / non-permission judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202b for high probability (see FIG. 23C), and the process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is off (S1108: No), the hit / failure determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 23C) for low probability. Is acquired (S1110), and the process shifts to S1111.

  In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is a hit (S1111). If it is determined that the hit is a hit (S1111: Yes), the display mode of the hitting time “○” is determined. The display mode is set (S1112), and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern using the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter (S1114). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is not a hit (is a loss) (S1111: No), a display mode of “X” which is a display mode at the time of the loss is set. Then (S1113), the flow shifts to the process of S1114 described above.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that 3 seconds is always set as the fluctuation time regardless of the set game state. With this configuration, at the timing at which the gaming state is switched, specifically, from a normal state in which a generally long fluctuation time is likely to be set (a low probability state of an ordinary symbol), a time reduction in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be set At the end of the jackpot game in which the gaming state switches to the state (normally high probability state of the symbol), the ordinary symbol fluctuation for a long fluctuation time is executed, and the time reduction state is set even though the time reduction state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a special electric game (V rush) aiming at a big hit game (V big hit game) is executed in response to a normal symbol lottery during the time reduction state. ) Is configured such that the effect based on the ordinary symbol lottery is also displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, when performing an effect based on the normal symbol lottery (change), the amount of effect data can be reduced by unifying the change time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the game is executed during the normal state during the normal state, and the ball wins the general electricity winning device 640, the special electric operation port 643 which is a trigger for executing the game per accessory is transmitted. The ball is configured to be difficult to win. Therefore, even if only the same fluctuation time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the merit of performing the game by measuring the execution timing of the game per ordinary figure.

  In addition, the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the fluctuation time is varied according to the game state, the fluctuation time is varied according to the number of ordinary figure holding balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation is changed to the set ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state). ) And the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved ordinary symbols) may be variably set. Further, the ease of entering a ball into the general winning award device 640 may be changed depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  In this way, by changing the degree of the ball entering the general winning award device 640 in accordance with the length of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol that is set, the ball can enter the general winning award device 640. Since the ease of entering a ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various game properties can be created.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not in the variable display (S1102: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 elapses. It is determined whether the process has been performed (S1115). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1115: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1115 that the fluctuating time has elapsed (S1115: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, if the current symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol “○” is stopped (lit). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order, the symbol “x” is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is set to the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1117). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1117: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol of crying is not a hit (is out of range) (S1117: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a according to the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the ordinary symbol probability states (high-probability state, low-probability state) set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct (the timing of performing the processing of S1108 to S1111). The probability of the ordinary symbol set at the timing (period at which it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S1115) at which the ordinary symbol is determined to be correct or not and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high-probability state, low-probability state).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the variation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently. The probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process. Therefore, depending on the result of the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol, which is executed in parallel during the period in which the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the normal symbol is being executed, the timing at which the determination of the award of the normal symbol is made, Is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, a case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set may occur.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a (opening) When the pattern is set, the opening pattern executed when the electric accessory 640a is long opened (when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set) while the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of an ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is determined based on the determination result. The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a is set. This allows the electric accessory 640a to be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In the process of S1117, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), then the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol is determined. Next, it is determined whether or not the hour-saving counter 203h is on (S1118), and if it is determined that the hour-saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (S1118: No), a scenario operation per ordinary drawing is set (S1119).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the time reduction counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), a scenario operation per time reduction for general time is set (S1120).

  Next, based on the scenario set in the processing of S1119 or S1120, opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S1121), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the open / close control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the normal symbol hit game is performed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normal symbol win / fail determination. The configuration is such that the open pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the (open pattern). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the hit game of the ordinary symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured so as to be long opened only when it is in operation, and the timing for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is usually determined. Based on the game state is set, it may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric won game 640a.

  Although detailed description is omitted, various kinds of information (the result of the ordinary symbol lottery, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation, the scenario per ordinary symbol, and the like) determined in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are described below. Commands indicating the contents of various types of information are set, and are output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49, a through gate passage process (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the obtained ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (whether the reserved symbol number of the ordinary symbol has not reached the upper limit value) (S1203).

  In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (it is the upper limit value of 1) (S1203: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not larger than 1 (it is 0) (S1203: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is set to 1 Is added (S1204), a normal figure reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set (S1205), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the ordinary pattern. The data is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special power start opening winning process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special power starting opening winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special power operation port 643 in the general power prize winning device 640, and the ball wins the special power operation port 643 so that the V prize device 65 is activated. A predetermined variable pattern is configured to execute a game per accessory to be released. In this special power starting port winning process (S108), various processes are executed when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643.

  When the special power starting port winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special power starting port 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected has been output (or not) from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the ball that has won the special power operation port 643. In the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the gaming ball has not been won in the special power operating port 643 (S1301: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has won the special power operation port 643 (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current game is a regular symbol hit game (S1302). If it is determined that the current game is not a normal symbol hit game (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309) because a ball cannot be won in the special power operation port 643 (S1309). To end. By performing the processing of S1309, a state in which the game ball has won the special power operating port 643 outside the per-game time period, that is, a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the special power operating port 643, or It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a failure of a member (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642) attached to the special power operating port 643 has occurred.

  In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the current game is a normal symbol hit game (S1302: Yes), it is next determined whether the special power operation is in progress (the game is a special character game) (S1303). If it is determined that the special power operation is being performed (the game is being played per character) (S1303: Yes), the process is terminated because it is not possible to execute the new game per character. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special electric power is not currently being operated (the game is being played per accessory) (S1303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1304). If it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S1304: Yes), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), a special figure temporary stop command is set (S1306), and The hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the process shifts to S1308.

  That is, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is currently fluctuating, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed to interrupt the subtraction of the variation time of the running special symbol. As a result, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted when the bonus game is executed. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is determined that the special symbol is not currently fluctuating (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1308, a special power operation command is set (S1308), and thereafter, the process ends.

  As described above, the special power starting port winning process (S108) is based on the determination processing means for determining whether or not the winning is a normal one when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643, and the winning. Processing for determining whether or not a new special symbol change can be executed, and processing for a special symbol change (processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed, no new special symbol change is executed during the special hit game) And a means for executing a per-bonus game.

  Next, the V entrance passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

  In the V entrance passage process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401). If the storage sensor 65s is not on (storage sensor 65s01: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is on (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning opening is in the open period, that is, whether the game is in the per-accessory game (S1402). In the processing of S1402, if it is determined that it is during the V winning opening opening period (playing a game per role) (S1402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1403), and this processing ends. If it is not during the V winning opening opening period (S1402: No), an error command is set (S1404) because a gaming ball has entered the V winning device 65 despite the fact that the game is not being played per character. ), End this processing.

  The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1403 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect during the game per bonus item based on the ball entry into the V winning device 65.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the V passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the V-pass process (S110) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

  When the V passing process (S110) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501), and the game ball has won the V winning opening 165. If it is determined that there is no data (S1501: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current V is valid (S1502). In the process of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the operation scenario relating to the per-casual-game is set is during the V-valid period, and otherwise, it is determined that the period is not during the V-valid period.

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the game is in the V validity period (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game is currently being played per character (S1503). (S1503: Yes), a V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the current per-game hit is acquired (S1504), the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON (S1505), and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set. It is set to 0 (S1506), and the process moves to S1507.

  In other words, in the processes of S1504 to S1506, a process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 during the hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1503 that the game is not being performed as a bonus hit (S1503: No), there is no need to perform a new jackpot game, and the processing of S1504 to S1506 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1507.

  In the processing of S1507, a V-pass command is set (S1507), and this processing ends. The V-pass command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when receiving the V passing command during the per-game game, the effect during the V rush executed during the per-game game is successful, and Following the hit game, an effect for indicating that the big hit game is executed is executed. When a V-pass command is received during the jackpot game, the same effect as when a V-pass command is received during the accessory hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, if the V-pass command is not received at the predetermined timing during the per-game play, a disappointing effect to indicate that the V-challenge has failed is executed, and the V-pass command is executed at the predetermined timing during the jackpot game. If not received, a resurrection effect from the disappointing effect is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot game is continuously executed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 has been set, but no gaming ball has won the V winning opening 165. A command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating the fact may be set. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game balls that can enter the V winning opening 165 are only the game balls (for example, one) retained by the storage valve 66a, and thus are stored in the storage valve 66a. Number discriminating means for discriminating presence / absence (number) of game balls present, and detecting means for detecting passage of game balls to the hemorrhoid 2 out height 163b are provided, and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is provided. May be configured to set the above-mentioned V non-passing command when is detected by the detecting means. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is clogged in the V winning device 65.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1502 that the current time is not within the V validity period (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this processing ends. By performing the processing of S1508, a state in which the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 outside the V validity period, that is, a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the V winning opening 165, or a V winning is achieved. It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a problem has occurred in a member attached to the port 165 (for example, the V opening / closing door 65a, the storage valve 66a, the first movable valve 66b).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the operation scenario is defined such that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165 in the per-government game is the ending period of the per-government game. Therefore, the processing of S1506 to S1508 is performed in the V passing processing (S110), that is, the processing is performed at the timing when the ball wins the V winning opening 165. Without limitation, for example, in the case where the operation scenario of the game per role is defined so that the ball can always win the V winning opening 165 during the game per role, the V passing process (S110) , S1505 only is executed, and the processing of S1506 to S1508 is executed when the V flag is set to ON in the accessory hit control processing (see S1805 of FIG. 58). It may be configured to run as a process to be rows. Thereby, even if the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 immediately after the execution of the bonus game, the time-saving state can be continued until the jackpot game is started, giving a sense of incongruity to the player. The game can be performed without any trouble.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an NMI interruption process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1601). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704). If it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not, it is not stored (S1705: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S1712 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1712 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1705: Yes), S1707: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). Thereafter, the interruption is permitted (S1711), and the operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main processing, roughly, a counter update processing and a power-off processing are executed.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by the respective sub-controllers. An external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and if there is prize detection information, the payout control device 111 is notified of the prize corresponding to the number of obtained balls. Send a ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 40) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted. This is information for setting an effect (a fluctuating effect, a decorative effect, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, various commands set in the other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803). A command for executing the jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening the specific winning port (large opening port) 650a of the variable winning device 650 is executed (S1804).

  The details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57. In the jackpot control process (S1804), a specific winning port 650a (hereinafter, winning port) is set for each round of the jackpot state. It is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a) has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 650a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning port (specific winning port 650a) and the like are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an accessory hit control process related to an accessory hit game that is executed when the ball has won the special power operation port 643 (S1805). In this accessory hit control process (S1805), a predetermined scenario is set in which a period during which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened and a period during which the V opening / closing door 65a is closed are set for the V winning device 65 that is opened during the game per accessory. A process for setting based on (per-principal operation scenario) is executed. In addition. The details of the hit control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the ordinary winning award device 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1121 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. . In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, the first symbol display updating process is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) ends. The variable display is ended, and the stopped symbol is displayed in the first symbol display in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) in the display mode set in S507 by the special symbol variation stopping process (see S208 in FIG. 45). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the devices 37A and 37B.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (big hit symbol), the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a departure (a deviated symbol). The stop display for that purpose is also executed.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit is performed. In the second symbol display updating process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1116 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the process is executed in the second symbol display device. The changed symbol display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48). (Lit display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the processes from S1801 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1811 (S1812). In the process of S1812, the value of the general-purpose variation type counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and that the illegal game is executed at the timing at which the determination value corresponding to the hit is obtained. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the process of S1809, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 53 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1813 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1814). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S1701). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1804). The jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, information (commands) for executing various effects according to the jackpot is provided. ) And opening or closing a winning port or the like (specific winning port (large open port) 650a).

  In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the special symbol jackpot (S1901). Specifically, the process of S806 of the special symbol change stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol big hit is set, or the accessory hit control process (S1805 of FIG. 58). If the start of the jackpot is set, the operation counter is set corresponding to the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 of the various operation scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the operation counter matches the jackpot start timing specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot is started. If it is determined in the processing of S1901 that it is the timing to start the special symbol jackpot (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

  Note that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) according to a game state or a jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. When the special symbol jackpot or accessory hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and thereafter the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 2500 for jackpot C). 5000), an opening command may be transmitted. In this way, for example, in the case of a left-handed game and a jackpot in a special drawing lottery, the time until the start of the jackpot (the specific winning opening 650a is opened) is shortened, and the left-handed In the case of a game and a special hit game, as a result of a special hit game, a big hit is achieved, and the time until the start of the big hit (the specific winning opening 650a is opened) can be lengthened. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period in which the player who has watched the ball flow state during the game per accessory is prepared for the big hit game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that it is not the big hit start timing (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the current big hit is occurring (S1903). In the processing of S1903, the game information related to the hit game stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out to make a determination.

  As the jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and a predetermined symbol after the jackpot game is over. Including mid-hour. This also includes a case where a display indicating that the ball has won is displayed in the V winning opening 165. If it is determined in the processing of S1903 that it is not a jackpot (S1903: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a big hit is occurring (S1903: Yes), it is next determined whether it is a start timing of a new round (S1904).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that it is the start timing of a new round, that is, if it is determined that the acquired value of the operation counter is the start timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1904) : Yes), the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1905), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1906), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, if it is determined that the acquired value of the operation counter is the end timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), The special winning opening solenoid 209a is turned off (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1907 that it is not the timing to end the round (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1910). The start timing of the ending effect is the standby time (the present embodiment) in which the final round (the fourth round in the case of the jackpot A) in the jackpot game is completed, the specific winning opening 650a is closed, and the ball is played. When 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1910 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1910: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (S1912). Note that the jackpot end timing is specifically the jackpot game end timing in which the value of the acquired operation counter is specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (ending timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot B (S1913). If it is determined that it is the jackpot B (S1913: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 15 (S1914), and the process shifts to S1916. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B (the jackpot A or the jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process shifts to the process of S1915.

  In the process of S1915, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), and then a state command corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit is set (S1916), and the big hit end for setting the big hit end is set. This is set (S1917), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1912, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the big hit (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and thereafter, the process ends. Here, the winning process (S1918) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1918).

  In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S2001). The round validity period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period in which the specific winning opening 650a is open. If it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S2001: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S2001: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball has passed the specific winning opening 650a (S2002). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: Yes), the value of the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set (S2003). S2004). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  After executing the processing of S2004, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one immediately before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and thereafter, the present processing is ended. I do. In the process of S2005, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped and the process ends.

  With this configuration, as the end condition of the round game, an end condition that is established when time elapses (30 seconds have elapsed) and an end condition that is established when a ball is won (10 wins) are obtained. In such a case, the operation control of the jackpot game can be executed based on the same operation scenario regardless of which end condition is satisfied. Therefore, control processing of main controller 110 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 58, the control processing per accessory performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 (S1805) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the accessory hit control process (S1805). This accessory hit control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and the accessory hit flag 203k is turned on in the special power starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). Various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired value of the operation counter) of the operation scenario (operation scenario defined in the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2) set in response to the setting.

  In the accessory hit control process (S1805), it is first determined whether it is time to start a hit with an accessory (S2101). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the action counter corresponding to the accessory-based action scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26B) is 1. If it is determined that it is the start timing for the accessory (S2101: Yes), the opening command for the accessory is set (S2102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the timing of starting the hit of an accessory (S2101: No), it is next determined whether or not the present is a hit of an accessory (S2103). If it is determined that the character is not hit (S2103: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is hitting (S2103: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter corresponding to the accessory-based operation scenario table 202e is 26. If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and then the present process is terminated. Although not shown, processing for closing (setting off) the open solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) according to the value of the operation counter corresponding to the per-principal operation scenario table 202e of the V winning device 65 or Then, a process of setting the storage solenoid 209c to ON is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the accessory (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the accessory-based operation scenario table 202e is 750. If it is determined that the timing is the end timing of the accessory (S2106: Yes), the flag 203k for the accessory is set to off (S2107), and it is determined whether the V flag 203p is on. (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set off (S2111), and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing for the accessory (S2106: No), the V-pass detection process is executed (S2112), and thereafter, the present process ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing of S4117 is performed (see FIG. 60) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cutoff). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4117, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed through steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

  The reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to the process in S4006 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process shifts to the process of S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The process in S4102 to S4111 is a process related to display (staging), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114. An output process is performed (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and a sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illuminations 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then an effect update process is executed (S4111). Details of the effect update processing (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the process of S4111, the process moves to the process of S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process in S4111, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 so as to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4113, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a store clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the first command is sent from the main control device 110 to the first command. It is determined whether a movable valve operation command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), an update of the operation scenario is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202). finish.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in order to update the operation scenario without delay when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received. Is provided with a process for determining the reception of the first movable valve command in the highest priority determination order of the command determination process. With this configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control content on the main control device 110 side and the situation grasp content on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario (the first movable valve 66b) is performed only when a command (first movable valve operation command) related to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received. (Operation scenario for grasping the operating state of the main controller 110 on the side of the sound lamp controller 113), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main controller 110 may be set every predetermined period (every hour). It may be configured to output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b from the side or to output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b every time the jackpot game is executed. good. Then, a process of comparing the content of the received command with the content of the updated operation scenario and correcting the updated content of the operation scenario may be executed. This makes it possible to further enhance the accuracy of the operation of the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents of the operation control. Further, the processing for updating the operation scenario on the sound ramp control device 113 side may be executed in consideration of the time lag required before receiving the command output from the main control device 110 side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). Here, the special figure variation pattern command is a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure change pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure change start processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure change start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether a special figure stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S4206), and the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207). After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4205 that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), it is next determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). Here, if it is determined that the command of the number of retained balls is received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, ordinary symbol) of the received number of retained balls command is analyzed and stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value of the corresponding counter provided is updated (S4209). Specifically, when the special ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 included in the special ball number command (that is, the special symbol variation display hold) is included. The number of balls is extracted, and the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  When the command for retaining the number of ordinary balls is received, the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the retained number of balls command (that is, the number of retained balls for the variable display of the ordinary symbol) is included. Is updated, and the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued when the ball enters the various entrances (special figure entrance 64, through gate 67) (start winning) and the value of the various retained ball counter is added, or Since the main control device 110 transmits the value when the value of the various reserved ball number counter is decremented when executing the various fluctuation start processing, the processing of S4209 is performed every time a winning start or a fluctuation display is set. By the processing, the values of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol holding ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the values of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c and the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Can be matched.

  Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of the start winning, when the variable display is set, that is, when the reserved ball number command is notified based on the change of various reserved ball numbers, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is corrected. The number of various reserved ball counters of main controller 110 can be adjusted to the values of various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4208 that the command for holding balls has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4210). In the processing of S4210, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4211), and this processing ends. This winning command processing (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and stores the storage area (the sound lamp control device 113) corresponding to the analysis result. The processing for storing (storing) in the winning information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and the processing for executing an effect (pre-reading effect) based on the received winning information are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4210 that no winning command has been received (S4210: No), it is next determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4212). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4212: Yes), a status command receiving process is executed (S4213), and this process ends. The details of the state command reception processing (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64. However, based on the state command output from main controller 110, the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 (normal state, time reduction state) and the like. Then, a process of setting the winning game state (during a big hit or during a hit) in the slave state setting area 223g is executed.

  Next, in the process of S4212, when it is determined that a status command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4214). If it is determined that the stop-related command has been received in the processing of S4214 (S4214: Yes), the stop-related processing is executed (S4215), and this processing ends. A detailed description of this stop-related processing (S4215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main controller 110. And a process for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the fourth symbol are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when performing the special symbol variation as a period in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Even while the special symbol change is being executed based on the special symbol change, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the stop-related process (S4215), and stops the variation display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured to be able to. This makes it possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect state displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4214 that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether a general-purpose related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216). Is received (S4216: Yes), the general-purpose-related process is executed (S4217), and this process ends. Details of the general figure-related processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4216, when it is determined that the general command related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the hit related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4218), and the hit related command has been received. If it is determined that it has been performed (S4218: Yes), the hit-related processing is executed (S4219), and this processing ends. The details of the win-related processing (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. However, as a result of the special symbol lottery, an effect corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

  In the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4220), and this process ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. In the command determination process (S4112), the order in which the presence or absence of reception of various commands is determined. An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used.For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received may be performed more than the process of determining whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received. The determination order may be defined so as to be executed first.

  With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main control device 110 at the same time, that is, in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the main control device 110, Even if the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, a special figure variation pattern command is set, and then a status command indicating that the gaming state has been changed is set, the voice lamp control is performed. The game state currently set on the device 113 side can be determined before the special figure change pattern command.

  Next, the special figure change start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing (S4204). This special figure change start processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is performed according to the set game state. Then, a process of setting a display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for sub-variation) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Then, the display control device 114 sets the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure change start processing (S4204) will be described.

  When the special figure change start process is set, first. The special figure variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S4301), a variation pattern is extracted from the received special figure variation pattern command (S4302), and a detailed display mode is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4303). .

  Next, information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223g is read, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time reduction state (S4304). In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current time is not in the time saving state (normal state) (S4304: No), a display command in the normal state is set (S4305), and this process ends. When the display command is set in the process of S4305, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed as shown in FIG. In the main display area Dm as shown in b), an effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), a display command during the time saving state is set (S4306), and the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is set. Is decremented by 1 (S4307), a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern received this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 223r (S4308), and this processing ends.

  Next, the winning command processing (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4211). The winning command processing (S4211) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a type of the received winning command (special symbol, ordinary A process for setting an effect to be executed when a winning command is received (a so-called look-ahead effect) is executed according to the symbol and the current game state.

  When the winning command processing (S4211) is executed, first, it is analyzed which symbol type corresponds to which symbol type based on the information included in the received winning command, and is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4401). Then, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4402). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is not set to ON (S4402: No), the process proceeds to S4412, and then the present process ends. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4402: Yes), the variable time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (it is 0) (S4404: No), the change time (the change time of the special symbol) included in the winning information received this time is set as the remaining period of the V rush. Since it is in a state where additional notification cannot be performed, the extracted fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is incremented by 1 (S4411), and the processing of S4412 is performed. Move to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time of the special symbol) included in the winning command received this time is changed to the V rush time. Since it is in a state where additional notification can be made as the remaining period, it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is ON (S4405). In the process of S44405, it is determined whether or not the present time is the timing at which the additional notification can be executed. In the present embodiment, during the V rush, during the bonus per game period and during the jackpot game period, the remaining period of the V rush is not added and notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while concentrating on various hit games.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), it is next determined whether the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), since the additional notification can be executed at present, the value of the time reduction period counter 223i corresponds to the fluctuation time extracted in the process of S4403. Then, the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is incremented by one, and the flow shifts to the process of S4409.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the fluctuation time is added in the process of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set, and an additional notification effect is provided on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. a) is executed. Note that, in the present embodiment, as the additional notification effect, all values added in the process of S4407 are configured to be notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the added value is divided into a plurality of times up to the upper limit. May be configured to execute an additional notification effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggers the addition of the remaining period of the V rush (short time remaining), so that the player does not get bored early. Can be performed.

  In addition, the value added in the process of S4407 is notified until the value added in the process of S4407 reaches a predetermined value or the value of the time reduction counter 223i is reduced to a predetermined value. It is also possible to configure so as not to notify the user by summing the fluctuation times (variation times of special symbols) included in a plurality of winning commands. As a result, it is possible to make the length of the remaining short-time period added in one additional information notification effect surprising. Further, in this case, for example, when the time is added to the time reduction period counter 223i for the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds) of the length set at the time of winning the special symbol jackpot, the additional notification effect is provided. It is preferable that an additional notification effect be performed for 50 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the special symbol jackpot has been won, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the interruption flag 223m is determined to be on in the processing of S4405 (S4405: Yes), and when the special hit flag 223n is determined to be on in the processing of S4406 (S4406: Yes), the extraction is performed. The obtained fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), and the flow shifts to the above-described processing of S4411.

  When the process of S4411 is completed, the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), and then other processes are executed (S4412), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, the state command receiving process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S4212). This state command reception processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is performed according to the set game state. This is to execute processing for setting the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 differently. Hereinafter, the details of the status command receiving process (S4213) will be described.

  When the state command receiving process (S4213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223g is different from the gaming state indicated by the currently received state command. If it is determined in the processing of S4501 that there is no change in the gaming state (S4501: No), the processing of S4502 to S4508 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S4509. When it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4502).

  In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the status command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then, the current symbol is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not a hit is made (S4503). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S4503: No), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), and the information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the slave status setting area 223g. ) (S4509), and terminates this process.

  Here, when the command set in the processing of S4504 is notified to the display control device 114, the variable effect display during the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of various display modes (in the sound lamp control device 113) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the status command output from the main control device 110 ( Mode and background), and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each of the game states set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set gaming state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only on the basis of the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received fluctuation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the case where the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, The display controller 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the content of the display data after setting from the display controller 114 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp controller 113 is appropriate. A determination means is provided for determining whether or not there is, and when it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data that has already been set is set. It is desirable to rewrite the display data into simple display data.

  With such a configuration, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received from the main control device 110 by the audio lamp control device 113, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. Can be displayed, and a fluctuation effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the variable effect display having the content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special symbol) is executed and the player's willingness to play is reduced. Examples of the simple display data include display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller data amount than display data used in normal fluctuation effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern. May be configured.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then the changed gaming state is changed to the normal state. It is determined whether the game is in the time reduction state (S4507), and when it is determined that the gaming state is the time reduction state (the status command received this time is a command indicating the time reduction state) (S4507: Yes), the V rush mode is indicated. The display command is set (S4508), and the flow shifts to the process of S4509 described above. If it is determined that the gaming state is not the time reduction state (S4507: No), the processing of S4508 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4503, when it is determined that the present is a normal symbol (S4503: Yes), a display command indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), and the extension flag 223p is set on ( S4506), and proceeds to the processing of S4509 described above. When the display command is set in the process of S4505, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed as shown in FIG. The display mode indicating the extension screen shown in b) is set.

  Next, a stop-related process (S4215), which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related processing (S4215). The stop-related processing (S4215) sets a display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when stopped and displayed based on the result of another special symbol lottery) from main controller 110 is set. Is executed.

  When the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the stop-related command received this time is a special figure determination command (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a special figure fixing command (S4601: Yes), a display command for fluctuation stop is set (S4602), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure determination command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4603.

  In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure temporary stop command (S4603). If it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has been received (S4603: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set (S4605). Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the process of S4604 and S4605 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4606.

  When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set in the processing of S4605, the display mode (the character of “STOP”) indicating that the temporary stop is being performed is displayed as shown in FIG. At the same time, the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol change is interrupted.

  In the process of S4606, it is determined whether or not the stop-related command received this time is a special figure change restart command (S4606). This special figure change restart command is a command that is set when the change of the special symbol is restarted in the special symbol change execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 44). . If it is determined that the special figure change restart command has been received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to off (S4607), and a display command indicating the change restart of the special symbol is set (S4608).

  Then, it is determined whether the unreported information has been updated during the period in which the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether or not information indicating a new variable time has been stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported reserved number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there is no update (S4609: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is added in accordance with the update content (S4610), and the unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, The information of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is updated, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure change restart command has not been received (S4606: No), the present process is terminated.

  It should be noted that the value added by the processing of S4610 is the value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, that is, when the special figure change is restarted. Are added and notified at the timing of starting the subtraction. With such a configuration, in the state where the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped, the various pay games are watched, and at the same time, after the completion of the various win games, the additional notification effect is executed. Even after the end of the game, the player can be expected to add a large amount of the remaining period of the V rush.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a general-purpose-related process (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the general map related processing (S4217). This general figure related processing (S4217) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, details of the ordinary figure related processing (S4217) will be described.

  When the general figure related processing (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the general figure related command received this time is a general figure change pattern command (S4701). When it is determined that the received command is the ordinary figure variation pattern command (S4701: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the received command is not the general-figure variation pattern command (S4701: No), it is then determined whether the general-figure-related command received this time is a general-figure start command. (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is the ordinary figure start command (S4703: Yes), a small win winning command for display is set (S4704), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the received command is not the start command per general figure (S4703: No), it is then determined whether the general command related command received this time is a special power operation command (S4705). ). If it is determined that the received command is a special power operation command (S4705: Yes), a winning command per display V is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4707). ), When it is determined that the game is set to ON, that is, in the game per bonus game executed by the ball winning to the special power operation port 643 in the general game per game being executed at the end timing of the time saving state. If it is determined that there is (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4708), and then, the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the extension flag 223p is not on in the process of S4707 (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the received command is not a special power operation command (S4705: No), it is then determined whether or not the currently received general-purpose related command is a general-purpose end command (S4709). ). When it is determined that the received command is not the end command per ordinary figure (S4709: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the received command is the end command per ordinary figure (S4709: Yes), then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is on (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S4712), and the V rush flag 223q is set. It is set to off (S4713), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  In the processing of S4710, when it is determined that the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of the ordinary drawing is set (S4714), and then this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the game per game is executed in a state where the final change of the special symbol in the time saving state is stopped, the extension flag 223p is set to extend the V rush effect. Set to on. Then, the end timing of the V rush effect is made different depending on the progress of the special electric game executed based on the normal per-game. Specifically, when the ball does not win in the special power operation port 643 in the game per game, the V rush production ends at the end timing of the game per game, and the ball moves to the special power operation port 643. When a prize is won and the per-game per game is executed, the V-rush effect is terminated at the end timing of the per-game per game. In addition, when a ball wins to the V winning opening 165 in the per-prize game, the effect based on the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed with priority.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period in which the player can aim for the V jackpot game regardless of the game state, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the hit-related process (S4219) which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing (S4219). In the hit-related processing (S4219), the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the per-accompaniment game, which is executed when a special jackpot or per-prize is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, is executed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, a process corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a jackpot or an accessory is won is executed.

  In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, game per role), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is accumulated, A process of setting a display prize ball number command based on the accumulation result is executed.

  In the win-related processing (S4219), first, it is determined whether or not the command received by the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) is a big-hit-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4802). In the jackpot-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related processing (S4802), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received in the hit-related processing (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is ON (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current big hit is a special hit (big hit B) (S4911), and it is determined that it is a special hit (big hit B). In this case (S4911: Yes), the special hit flag 223n is set to off (S4912), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current big hit is not a special hit (big hit B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  In the process of S4903, when it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), the number of time savings to be given in the big hit executed this time is extracted (S4904) and stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The special figure prize information is read out (S4905), an object is selected up to the number of time savings extracted from the read special figure prize information (S4906), and the number of the selected special figure prize information is stored in an unreported reserved number storage area 223k. (S4907), calculate the fluctuation time included in the selected special figure winning information (S4908), store the calculated fluctuation time in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4909), and turn on the V rush flag 223q. This is set (S4910), and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4913). If the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4914), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes the current round. Calculate the number and set the display round number command. Good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4913, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S4915). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the big hit end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the big hit end processing is executed (S4916), and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot termination process (S4919), which is one of the jackpot-related processes (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot ending process (S4919).

  In the jackpot ending process (S4919), the number of time savings given in the jackpot executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), and the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h ( Then, the value stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k is read out (S5003). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). When it is determined that the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (it is 0) (S5004: No), an additional reporting effect is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15A). Since it is not possible to do so (because there is no change time information to be added), a display no-addition command is set (S5014), and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5004, when it is determined that the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, information indicating a variable time in which additional notification is possible (used for additional notification). If there is no special symbol fluctuation time information), the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted in accordance with the read value (S5005), and among the values stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k, the value of S5005 The value corresponding to the value subtracted in the processing is cleared (S5006), and the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the winning information (special figure reservation information) included in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) (S5008). If it is determined that there is no fluctuation time (S5008: No), an additional command for display corresponding to the read fluctuation time is set (S5009), and of the fluctuation times stored in the unreported period storage area 223j, The period corresponding to the fluctuation time used for the additional effect is cleared (S5010), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5008 that the winning information storing area 223b includes the winning information indicating the winning of the special winning (big hit B) (S5008: Yes), the processing until the special winning change ends. A display command corresponding to the fluctuation time is set (S5011). In other words, when the special symbol change executed one after another is a special symbol change corresponding to the special winning, even if the change time for four special symbol holdings is added as an additional notification effect, the state can be notified. Even if it is, only the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special winning fluctuation) corresponding to the special winning winning Is used for additional information production.

  Further, a display command indicating the special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special hit flag 223n is set to ON (S5013), and the process shifts to the above-described process of S5010.

  With this, if there is winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) in the special symbol holding at the end of the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 17A, the special mode (heaven mode) is entered. And a fluctuation time “220 seconds” until the special hit fluctuation ends. Therefore, the period until the special winning game (big hit game in which the big hit B is set) is executed can be easily notified to the player. Further, after the end of the special win game, the time saving state is set again, so that the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol stored and held after the special hit change is not notified to the player, the period of the time saving state (V rush) set after the big hit game is ended until the big hit game ends. It can be difficult for the player to understand.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a accessory-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is an accessory-related command (S4803: Yes), an accessory-related process (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the hit hit-related process (S4804), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the content of the accessory hit related process (S4804). In the accessory hitting related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a hit per hit game executed when the hit hit is performed is performed. Is executed, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the hit-related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) is a hit-start command (S5101).

  In the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the start command per accessory has been received (S5101: Yes), a start command per accessory for display is set (S5102), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the received command is not the accessory-based start command (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a V-entrance passing command (S5103). .

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5103: Yes), a winning command per display accessory is set (S5104), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the received command is not the V-entry passing command (S5103: No), it is next determined whether the received command is the V-passing command (S5105).

  In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (S5105: Yes), the display V-hit command is set (S5106), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the received command is not a V-pass command (S5105: No), it is next determined whether the received command is an ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5107: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5107: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S5108), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the received command is not the accessory hit related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether a prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to a value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after the addition is set (S4807), and this processing ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period in which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (advantageous continuation period). Are accumulated by the award ball number counter. Then, during a win game (big hit game, role hit game) or during a V rush effect, information indicating the number of prize balls according to the accumulated value of the prize ball counter is displayed (FIG. 12). (Refer to the display area HR2 in (c)).

  With this configuration, the total number of balls acquired during the period from the time saving state (V rush) to the end of the V rush (advantageous continuation period) is notified to the player in an easily understandable manner. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired in the game per accessory may be displayed separately. . In this case, the winning game state (during a big hit or during a hit) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the dependent state setting area 223g, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is preferable to provide a means for performing this. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

  Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period in which the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game are executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. You may comprise so that it may be. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of awarded balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means as history.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the V jackpot games executed based on the special electric game during the V rush period is configured to be cumulatively displayed (see the display area HR1 in FIG. 12C). In the case of using a configuration in which the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed as described above, the number of times the special symbol lottery result becomes a lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player, as described above. Or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

  With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and to eagerly play the game. Can be performed.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is performed based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. A process of setting a display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit C), a process of setting a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is turned off (S5201: No), it is determined that the special figure change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the process proceeds to S5205. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is ON (S5201: Yes), the special figure change start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5202).

  Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 61), the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set based on the variation pattern relating to (S5203), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5204), and the process shifts to S5205.

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113. You. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating a gaming state.

  In the process of S5205, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not set to ON (S5205: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type is set to ON (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as it is (S5207), and the display special figure stop is performed. The type command is set (S5208), and the process ends.

  Next, the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the effect update processing (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period. , To execute a process for setting an effect mode based on the updated counter value.

  In the effect update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300). If the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309. Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, when the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, when the special symbol change is not interrupted (S5300: No), it is next determined whether or not the value of the change time counter 223r is larger than 0. (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S5301: No), the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is greater than 0. (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then the updated time reduction period counter 223i. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the updated time reduction counter 223i is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the time reduction counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, like the other display commands. Is output. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13A).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter is a value indicating a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is a value indicating the remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small is set (S5308). The flow shifts to S5309. When the display command is set in the process of S5308, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the player. On the other hand, an effect mode (for example, an unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is small is set. Thereby, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution becomes 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining change time is short is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, before executing the process of S5308, a lottery process for determining whether to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short is executed, and the lottery process is performed. May be configured to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short only when it is determined that the display command is to be set according to the result. With this configuration, the effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is short is not set (unlucky effect on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is long or short.

  Further, in the processing of S5307, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r indicates the remaining period of 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation from the winning information storage area 223b (the next fluctuation time) Is read (S5313), and the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation being executed) is determined by the processing in S5313. It is determined whether it is longer (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the read next fluctuation (S5314).

  In the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation being executed) indicates the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the processing of S5313. If it is determined that it is longer (longer) than the number of seconds (S5314: Yes), if the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, if the V jackpot game is executed, V set after the end of the V jackpot game A display command indicating a lucky time for notifying the player that the rush period is likely to be long is set (S5315), and the flow shifts to the process of S5309. On the other hand, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation being executed) in the processing of S5314 is the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the processing of S5313. If it is determined that it is not longer (shorter) than the number of seconds indicating (S5314: No), the process skips S5315 and shifts to S5309.

  When the display command is set in the process of S5315, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to FIG. The display mode of the lucky time effect shown in b) is set. With such a configuration, the player can know a period that is more advantageous to the player in the V rush period, so that the game during the V rush period can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In the present embodiment, the case where the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the change time of the next special symbol change by 10 seconds or more is set as the execution timing of the lucky time effect. Without limitation, it is only necessary to be able to inform the player of the period during which the remaining fluctuation time becomes longer when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted by the lucky time effect, for example, regardless of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, The determination that the remaining period of the special symbol change is equal to or longer than a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 50 seconds) may be used as a lucky time effect execution trigger.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is read out in the process of S5313. Although the processing of S5315 is always executed when the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation is longer (longer), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, before executing the processing of S5315, A lottery process is performed to determine whether to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long, and the remaining fluctuation time is long only when the result of the lottery process determines that the display command is to be set. May be configured so as to set a display command indicating that. With this configuration, the effect mode (for example, lucky time effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is long is not set (the lucky time effect on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is long or short.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the updated time-saving period counter 223i is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the prefetch counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is larger than 0 (S5310: Yes), the special symbol change is not executed even though the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. A display command indicating continuation “???” is set (S5311), and the flow shifts to the step S5309. The display command set in the process of S5311 is the same as the other display commands in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. 114. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19A) indicating that the time saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5310, if it is determined that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S5312), and the V rush flag 223q is set to off. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S5309. In the processing of S5309, other effect update processing is executed (S5309), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effector.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start program of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), a simple image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) in the special figure entrance 64, and the main control device 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. If the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change image can be immediately displayed during the change effect period, and a simple change effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process has been executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 38 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / back out, reach out) is displayed. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display. (S6601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. A stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Note that the start of the change is always determined at least several seconds in the main control device 110, so that no more than two display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both turned off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a variation stop command for use (S6414: Yes), a variation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the special symbol of each special symbol in the main control device 110. At the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern (timing at which the main control device 110 sets the stop command), the display stop command (output from the sound lamp control device 113) 7 shows various display commands set in the fluctuation stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel). When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot), the other special symbol that is changing is changed to the end of a predetermined variation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence, the stop display is forcibly displayed with a symbol indicating the detachment.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a command set to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70). A display command (variable display) for variably displaying the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed). Stop command).

  In the present embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display based on the forced stop command received later is configured to be executed. That is, the forced stop command is processed prior to the normal stop command. Thereby, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

  In addition, the display fluctuation stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display command indicating the temporary stop. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is set as the fluctuation stop display data is configured.

  In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), display notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the (display) notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This processing is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

  In the notification command processing, first, a display (report) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (report) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is read. 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other related commands such as a light emission command other than a display command, a voice output command, and a command for driving an accessory are also received once, and the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. A configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in step (1) is added.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the type of the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420). If (S6420: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the warning image to be displayed.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6422 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like for each sprite are specified. And various parameters necessary for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like. And various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S7208: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The content is cleared (S7210) by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and store them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), the back image change flag 233w is provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the game board 13, a part of the configuration of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. are doing.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a special power operation port 643 and an out port 644 are provided as ball entrances into which a ball that has won the general winning award device 640 can enter. I was Then, when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643, the game per hit is executed. However, in the above-described first embodiment, there is only one operating port for executing the per-accessory game, and it is not possible to provide variations to the per-accessory game, so that the game becomes monotonous. In addition to getting tired of the game at an early stage, since the game per bonus is executed with the same operation pattern each time, the bonus game is executed at a timing that allows the ball to easily win the V winning opening 165 (Tokuden) There is a problem that the game is easily executed (a ball is won in the operating port 643).

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a second special power activating port 1643 is newly provided in the general power prize winning device 640, and a ball winning the general power prize winning device 640 is provided by the special power operating port 643 and the second special power operating port. The difference is that the player is able to win either the 1643 or the out port 644.

  Furthermore, it is configured such that a game per hit with an open pattern different when the ball has won the special power operating port 643 and when the ball has won the second special power operating port 1643 is executed. The game per bonus executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643 is more effective than the game per bonus executed when the ball wins, and the ball wins during the game per bonus. 165 (see FIG. 6).

  With such a configuration, the player can be more interested in the flowing state of the ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the per-game game. In addition, when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643 and when the ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643, a game with a different action pattern is executed per character, so that the ball wins in the V winning port 165. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to execute the accessory game at an easy timing (to make the special power operation port 643 win a ball).

  Further, in the second embodiment, the various fluctuations performed in the first embodiment described above are compared with the remaining fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol being executed when the game per hit is executed during the time saving state. Based on the first game method suggestion effect executed based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol change (special figure change) interrupted when the game per role is executed during the time saving state, 2 is different from the game method suggestion effect in that it is newly executable.

  In the first embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, as an effect for indicating the game content of the game (special electric game) during the time reduction state, the remaining duration of the time reduction state, the normal symbol An effect for notifying the lottery result, the execution status of the game per ordinary figure, the execution status of the game per accessory, is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the game during the time reduction state is displayed. It was an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

  However, in the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to inform the player of the game situation during the time-saving state (during V rush) in a manner that is easy to understand, but during the V rush. In, the player could not select a game method in order to cause the player to execute a better game. In other words, if the per-character game that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining change time of the special symbol change, which is the remaining period of the V rush (the period until the special symbol change that satisfies the time saving termination condition is satisfied), is executed, However, by causing the V winning device 65 to win a plurality of balls, it is better to end the game per role as soon as possible with the aim of winning the ball to the V winning opening 165. It was not possible to suggest (notify) to the player whether it was better to give up the ball and continue the game per role as long as possible.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect described above are configured to be executable, various suggestions executed for the player are provided. It becomes possible to select the game method of the game per role based on the effect contents of the effect. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, the player can be interested. In addition, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the result of the selection by the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  First, the configuration of the general winning award device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the general winning award device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram of the general winning award in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state which the ball | prize winning in the apparatus 640 could flow down to the 2nd special electric power operation port 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the above-described pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration in the general winning award device 640 is different. Identical. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the universal winning award device 640 of the second embodiment is different from the universal winning award device 640 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 3) in the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 (see FIG. 3). A notch is provided below the position divided by the movable valve 642), and a second partition 640k2 is formed to form a fourth flow path 641d through which a ball can flow from an opening formed by the notch. A difference is that a fourth partition 640k4 connected to the lower end side is provided.

  The second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path are used to cause the second flow path 641b to flow down to the special power operation port 643 without causing the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a to flow into the fourth flow path 641d. The normal position (see FIG. 88) for shielding the path 641d and the flow path where the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a flows down the second flow path 641b and enters the special power operation port 643 are blocked. The difference is that a variable movable third valve 1643 is provided at an operating position (see FIG. 89) for guiding to the flow path 641d.

  Although described in detail later, the third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving a third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. When the control of the per-figure game operation by the control device 110 is started, the operation is variably performed between the above-described normal position and the operating position in a predetermined variable pattern. The third movable valve 1643 is located at the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is set to ON (when energized), and when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when not energized). ) Is located at the normal position. Therefore, in the state where the game per day drawing is not executed, it is located at the normal position. In the second embodiment, the game content (operation) of the per-accessory game executed when the ball is won in the special power operation port 643 and when the ball is won in the second special power operation port 1643. The pattern is made different, and the configuration is such that when the ball is won in the second special power operation port 1643, the ball can be more easily won in the V winning port 165 during the game per role. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF, the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special power operation port 1643 so that the ball can be illegally placed in the second position. It is possible to suppress the act of winning the second special power operation port 1643.

  Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is located in the second state (a state in which the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88)). It is designed to be in a range that does not come into contact with the movable valve 642. With this configuration, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642.

  Then, when the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is located in the operating position, as shown in FIG. It is received on the upper surface of the valve 1642 and guided to the second special power operation port 1643. As will be described in detail later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern at the time of the start of the game per ordinary drawing, and the operation position (see FIG. 89) is changed. A variable operation of maintaining 0.2 seconds and maintaining the normal position (see FIG. 88) for 1.5 seconds is repeatedly executed. In other words, about 85% of the balls that have passed through the second movable valve 642 located in the first state win the special power operating port 643, and about 15% win the second special power operating port 1643. are doing. Therefore, during the regular game per game, the special power operation port 643 is an operation port in which a ball is more likely to win than the second special power operation port 1643.

  Further, when the ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643, the ball is more likely to win in the V winning opening 165 in the executed per-proxy game than when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, in the special electric game aiming for the V jackpot game triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery, the game result during the regular game per game (a ball is The winning of the ball into the V winning opening 165 during the game per role is different depending on whether the player wins the game or not. It will be closely watched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the operating port where the ball wins is the special power operating port 643 or the second special power operating port 1643 in the per-figure game executed during the time saving state by the third movable. Since it is determined by the variable operation of the valve 1642, the operating port in which the ball is likely to win is not changed by the per-game game executed, and the ball is always expected to win in the second special power operating port 1643. While it is possible to cause the player to perform the game of the ordinary figure while being motivated, the present invention is not limited to this. About 85% of the balls that have passed through the second movable valve 642 located in the state enter the special power operating port 643, and about 15% win the second special power operating port 1643. Be communicated It is now possible to set the per-figure per-figure type and the per-figure per-figure perforation type in which the per-figure per-figure game in which the ratio of the ball winning to the second special power operation port 1643 is higher than that of the normal per-figure per game is performed. You may comprise.

  By configuring in this way, for a player aiming for a V jackpot game by a special electric game, in the normal symbol lottery result (set per general figure type), the general figure per game, and the per game special game, The player can be watched closely, and the special electric game can be more eagerly played.

<About the effect contents performed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, the characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the remaining time period of the regular game long hit game is predetermined in the state in which the regular game long hit game and the character hit game are executed in an overlapping manner in the time saving state (V rush). FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display content displayed when the time is less than a period (less than 15 seconds), and FIG. 90B illustrates a general figure long hitting game and a role during a time saving state (V rush). A schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the remaining time of a general long game is longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds or more) in a state in which a game with a hit is repeatedly executed. It is. Note that the same display modes as the display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol change that satisfies the condition for terminating the time-saving state is completed. When the game per bonus is executed (middle), the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted). In other words, while the per-accessory game is being executed, the remaining period of the time reduction state is a period in which the remaining period is not subtracted. Therefore, the game can be performed without worrying about the remaining time in the time saving state from the time when the game per accessory is executed to the time when the ball is won in the V winning opening 165 (V winning).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time-saving state (during the V rush), a long fluctuation time is required as a special symbol fluctuation executed during the time-saving state. By setting, the method of lengthening the period of the time reduction state (the period until the time reduction end condition is satisfied) and the method of executing the game per character are shortened so that the remaining period of the time reduction state is reduced as much as possible. There are ways to interrupt. The former method is based on the result of the special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, when a short variation time is set as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, the game of the player is performed. There was a risk that the willingness would decrease.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the length of the period in which the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted can be changed depending on the skill of the player, It is possible to play the game eagerly.

  Here, a description will be given of a method of interrupting as much as possible the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state by shortening the interval at which the game per role is executed. The game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment during the time reduction state is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment. First, a normal symbol lottery is executed, and the game is executed based on the winning. . Then, during the per-game per game, the ball is made to win in the special power operation port 643 and the second special power operation port 1643 in the general power prize winning device 640 to execute the game per role, and the V prize device during the game per role. A game (special electric game) in which a ball is won (V win) in the V winning opening 165 in 65 and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed.

  Then, the lottery of the ordinary symbol, which is a trigger for starting the special electric game, is configured such that the lottery of the ordinary symbol has already been executed or that the lottery of the ordinary symbol is not newly executed during the game. In other words, it is configured such that the per-accessory game and the lottery of the ordinary symbol can be executed in an overlapping manner. Furthermore, a plurality of termination conditions are set for the per-game game, and when a predetermined number (three) of balls are won in the V-prize device 65 during the per-game game, or for a predetermined period (per-game item). The configuration is such that the per-accessory game is terminated by the elapse of a period in which the operation scenario of the game is updated up to the end timing of the per-accessory game.

  Therefore, by increasing the lottery period (fluctuation period) of the ordinary symbols, that is, the execution period of the per-actor game that is performed in an overlapping manner with the period in which the per-figure game is not executed, the per-figure game is executed. It is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol change in the period in which no special symbol is changed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the game per accessory from being lengthened by executing the special symbol change during the normal symbol lottery period (during the change period).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of opening operation patterns are configured to be executable as a per-figure-period game, and an open state in which a ball can be awarded to the per-prize-winning apparatus 640 during per-figure-period game (an electric accessory). (The state in which 640a is released) is configured to be able to execute the advantageous per-figure per-game in which the open state is set shorter than the advantageous per-figure per-game. I have. Further, in the disadvantageous game per game, after an open state in which a ball can be made to enter the universal winning device 640 is set, a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the universal winning device 640 is set for a long time ( (15 seconds).

  Even in the long-term closed state of the disadvantageous per-game, it is substantially impossible to execute a new per-game as in the above-described period of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, so that the In the case where the game and the unfavorable per-game are being executed in an overlapping manner, by executing the per-accompaniment per-game execution period longer, the execution of a special symbol change during a period in which a new per-accompaniment game is not executed The period can be shortened. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the game per accessory from being lengthened by executing the special symbol change during the closing period during the game per ordinary figure.

  As described above, during the V rush, a disadvantageous period in which a new per-accessory game is not executed (it is difficult to execute) is determined (a period during which the per-figure changes, a period during which the per-figure closes), and the disadvantageous period and the special figure fluctuation are determined. If the game period per role where the subtraction is interrupted overlaps, the execution period of the special symbol change during the disadvantageous period can be shortened by lengthening the execution period of the game per role currently being executed. In the present embodiment, when the disadvantageous period and the game per accessory overlap, the player can be informed of the overlap.

  That is, the game content displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that the player can visually recognize the game situation of the per-figure per game during the per-bonus game. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect may be changed according to the game situation of the per-figure per game in the per-proxy game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), while the per-accompaniment per game is being executed (the state of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted), a long time (15 seconds) in the per disadvantageous per game is required. If the closed period is in progress, the display area HR10 indicates "remaining period until the end of the disadvantageous game per game (remaining period until the end of the closed period)" as information indicating "10 seconds until the end of the general map". Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of “continue STOP with no winning per item” is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of extending the playing period of the game per item. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, by allowing the player to grasp the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the player can move the ball to the V winning device 65 for the per-principal game being executed by the player. A game aiming for a V prize by making a prize, that is, a condition for terminating a game per a role based on a ball prize is easily established, and a game period per a component is easily shortened. The first game that can be aimed at is executed, or the execution of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) due to the V prize is abandoned, and the condition for terminating the game per accessory based on the passage of time is satisfied, thereby extending the game period per item. It is possible to select whether to execute two games (games in which a ball is not fired).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), even in the case where the game per accessory and the long-term fluctuation of the ordinary symbol overlap, as in FIG. Information for selecting the first game and the second game) is displayed. Specifically, when the per-accompaniment-per-game is being executed (the state in which the special figure change is interrupted) and the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change being executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds), In the display area HR11, a comment of "15 seconds until the end of the ordinary symbol change" is displayed as information indicating the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of “continue STOP with no winning per item” is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of extending the playing period of the game per item. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the period in which the special symbol change is interrupted depending on the skill (the content of the game to be executed) of the player. (During the state) can be actively executed. In addition, regardless of which game is selected by the player, a game result that can be advantageous to the player in different points can be generated. The game results can be greatly different, and the game method can be more positively selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the operation pattern of the per-figure-period game executed during the time-saving state, the advantageous per-figure per-game and the disadvantageous per-figure per-game are configured to be at least executable, and are executed during the time-saving state. The fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol can be set to a long time fluctuation or a short time fluctuation. Then, in the case where the game per role is executed during the game with the advantageous ordinary figure, and in the case where the game per role is executed during the short-term fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, the ball is won in the V during the game per role. It is configured to be more advantageous to a player when a game (first game) for winning a prize to the device 65 is executed.

  As described above, the timing (the presence or absence of a disadvantageous period) that is a disadvantageous period (a period during which a new per-accessory game cannot be executed) during the time reduction state (during the V rush) is made variable according to the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game during the time reduction game (during the V rush) from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a per-accessory game, a ball per V-prize device 65 in which a ball winning in the V-prize device 65 is more likely to win (V-prize) into the V-prize port 165 and a per-advantage-per-game. The disadvantageous game per disadvantageous item is configured to be executable, and when the game per advantaged item is executed, the ball can be awarded at the V-prize at a rate of approximately 100% of the game per the privileged item. It is possible that, when a game per disadvantageous object is executed, the probability of winning a V is about 1/11.

  Therefore, in the case where the per-bonus game executed overlapping with the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is the per-bonus game, the effect shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B is not executed. ing. With such a configuration, a game (second game) that does not aim at the execution of the V jackpot game is executed despite the situation where the player can easily acquire the V jackpot game. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an excessively disadvantageous game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), a description will be given of an effect performed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation interrupted in the per-bonus game. I do. FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG. 91 (b) schematically shows the display contents on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time-saving state (during V rush), the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game Is configured such that a period obtained by adding the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change to the number of time savings (for example, four time savings) set in accordance with the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed is set as the period of are doing. That is, after the end of the special symbol change (special symbol change interrupted at the time of executing the big hit game) which is restarted after the big hit game, the reduction of the number of working hours is started.

  Therefore, even if a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, after the jackpot game ends, according to the remaining period of the special symbol change during the jackpot game (V jackpot game) The period of the new time saving state to be set will be different. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state has a playability aiming at a jackpot, and an element for terminating the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state. In the pachinko machine 10 used as (an element for setting the duration of the time saving state), it is desirable to execute the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol change is long. However, similar to the first embodiment described above, the remaining short time period mode 801 indicating the duration of the time reduction state (see FIG. 12A) does not indicate the remaining period of each individual special symbol change, and the time reduction state of the time reduction state is not indicated. Information corresponding to the total time until the end of the special symbol change in which the end condition is satisfied is displayed, and the timer 812 (see FIG. 12 (b)) indicates until the end of the special symbol change in which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. Is configured to be displayed as a countdown.

  In other words, in the effect mode described in the first embodiment, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol change that is interrupted by the execution of the per-accessory game for the player. Was something. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the effect mode of the first embodiment described above, an effect corresponding to the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is configured to be executable. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change during the per-prize game is 0.1 second (see FIG. 91 (c)), In the display area Ds, a comment of “It is better to make a VGET for the next role” is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change during the game for the role is reduced. In the case of 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91 (d)), a comment of "Large chance to get VGET per present character" is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the special symbol change during suspension is determined, and if the determination result is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the game is executed in the current per-accessory game. When a ball is won in the V winning hole 165 and a V jackpot game is executed, an effect indicating that the period of the time reduction state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened. When the remaining period of the executed special symbol change is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the ball is won in the V winning opening 165 in the current per-game game, and the V jackpot game is executed. When it is executed, an effect indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be long is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to make a selection (selecting whether or not to win the ball in the V winning opening 165) based on the contents of the effect of executing the game method during the V jackpot game, and Can greatly vary the game results during the V rush period based on the game method arbitrarily selected.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, in order to execute the effect shown in FIG. 91 (a), other effect execution conditions are provided. The first condition that is satisfied when the winning information that has been won is included in the already received ordinary symbol winning information), and the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation that is interrupted, which satisfies the time saving end condition). And the second condition that is satisfied in the case of not being a time saving final change). By setting the performance execution condition in this way, the time saving state is immediately terminated after selecting a game that does not allow the ball to win a V during a running per hit character game according to the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that occurs.

  It should be noted that the execution conditions of the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and (b) may be the execution conditions used in the present embodiment. For example, the remaining period of the special symbol change during suspension and the next execution A comparison means is provided for comparing the change time of the special symbol change to be performed, and if the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is longer, the V An effect for promoting winning (see FIG. 91 (b)) is executed, and if it is determined that the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter, an effect for suppressing the V winning during the current per-accessory game ( Fig. 91 (see (a)) may be executed, whereby the special symbol change period actually executed (the next special symbol change period) is interrupted. Since it is possible to relatively determine the remaining period of the special symbol change, Can perform highly accurate presentation (set) to person, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbol, the gaming state of the per-regular game during the per-bonus game during the V rush (during the suspension of the special symbol fluctuation), In addition, based on the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change, the effect to suggest a game method that can be advantageous to the player is executed so that the player can select the game method. It is configured to be able to provide fun, but without being limited to this, for example, the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbol during the game per role, the game state of the game per general figure, and the interruption An effect that indicates each of the remaining periods of the special symbol change may be executed, that is, only a situation suggestion effect that indicates various situations during the V rush period may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for a player who has grasped the situation suggestion effect to analyze the game situation during the V rush period, to provide a pleasure of predicting the most advantageous game method by himself and selecting the game method. Can be.

<About the flow of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, a description will be given of a flow of a game during a time saving state in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, as a game to be executed in a normal symbol lottery during a time reduction state, a game to be executed in a general figure, in which the period of the game in the ordinary figure is short, and the period of the game in the ordinary figure is short. It is configured to be able to execute a long game per game. In addition, the game with the long game period per figure is more open than the game with the figure game with the shorter game time per day. It is configured such that the ratio of the length of the period to be in the state becomes low. In other words, in a game with a short time per game, a ball can be won by the general game winning device 640 during the game with a normal time, and the game can be played in a short time (about 3.5 seconds). The per-figure per game where the per-figure game ends is a per-figure per-figure game, and the per-figure per-game is longer in the per-figure per game. The period until the end of the per-drawing game is long (about 17.5 seconds).

  Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, the above-mentioned disadvantageous per-winning game has the same variable operation as the advantageous per-winning game, after opening the general-purpose winning device 640, and then closing the general-purpose winning device 640. Is a game per ordinary symbol set for 15 seconds, and the 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of the special symbol change is wastefully subtracted.

  The timing at which the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is set and the game content of the per-principal game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the disadvantageous game per game (per game B) is executed. When the normal symbol lottery is won and the unfavorable symbol winning game is executed, the public winning device 640 is opened for 1 second, closed for 0.5 seconds, opened for 1 second, closed for 15 seconds, and opened for 0.1 seconds. A game per figure is executed. Then, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 during the first one-second opening period wins in the special power operation port 643, a game per accessory is executed with the winning.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the ball does not win the V winning device 65 during the special power operation (game per accessory). If the game is ended after a lapse of time, the special game change (special symbol change) is continued for 8.1 seconds because the special game is ended 8.1 seconds after the start of the special game. Variation time subtraction is interrupted. Therefore, a part of the disadvantage period set when the disadvantageous per game (per perigram B) is executed can be overlapped with a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted. The variation time of the special symbol variation to be subtracted can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), a specified number (three) of balls are awarded to the V prize device 65 during the special power operation (game per role), and the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning. In this case, the period of the game per accessory (the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is interrupted compared to the case where the game per accessory is ended after the time shown in FIG. Period), the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period increases.

  In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a period until the end of the game per ordinary figure is displayed in the display area HR10, and a special symbol change is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time is displayed, the player can easily select the game method in which the game is being played per accessory. When the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the unfavorable game per game (per game B) are executed. In this case, the disadvantageous period set in the case of the overlap is duplicated, so that there is no disadvantage to the player due to the setting of the disadvantageous period.

  Therefore, for the player, select a game method that prevents the running of the per-proxy game from being ended with the passage of time and prevents the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation from being unnecessarily subtracted. It is possible to provide a pleasure of causing a ball to be won in the V winning opening 165 by a hit game (prize winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of the flow of the game when a long-term variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation executed during the time saving state. I do. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of a game when a long-term variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation executed during the time reduction state. is there.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a short fluctuation of 1 second and a long fluctuation of 15 seconds are selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state. . Here, during the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbol in the time saving state, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is performed and the game is not executed per the general symbol, so it is disadvantageous period for the player. . Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the per-regular game described with reference to FIG. 92, the per-accessory per game period, that is, the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, and If the fluctuation period of the symbol fluctuation is overlapped so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not wasted during the disadvantageous period, the game during the time saving state can be executed efficiently.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), but as shown in FIG. 93 (a), a specified number (three) of balls are transferred to the V prize device 65 during the special power operation (game per character). In this case, when the game per role is ended based on the ball winning, the period of the game per role (compared to the case where the game per role is ended after the time shown in FIG. Since the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted becomes shorter, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period becomes longer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the ball is ended with a lapse of time without causing the V prize device 65 to win during the special power operation (game per role), the game per role Is started 8.1 seconds after the start of the game, the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure variation (special symbol variation) is suspended for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, the fluctuation period of the long normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period is reduced. be able to.

  In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the period until the fluctuation per ordinary figure ends is displayed in the display area HR11, and further, the special symbol fluctuation is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time is displayed, the player can easily select the game method in which the game is being played per accessory. In addition, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the per-principal game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the fluctuation period of the long-time ordinary symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) are set. Are not duplicated, so that there is no disadvantage to the player due to the setting of the disadvantage period.

  Therefore, for the player, select a game method that prevents the running of the per-proxy game from being ended with the passage of time and prevents the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation from being unnecessarily subtracted. It is possible to provide a pleasure of causing a ball to be won in the V winning opening 165 by a hit game (prize winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment described above. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the RAM of the audio lamp controller 113 are different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21). Is different from that of the first embodiment in that a new solenoid is added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the third movable valve 1642 is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the third movable valve 1642 for driving the third movable valve 1642 is provided. The difference is that a three-movable valve solenoid 209f is added. As will be described in detail later, the third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to be switched between an on state and an off state at predetermined intervals upon execution of a per-drawing game. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is changed between the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the normal drawing game. Accordingly, when the second movable valve 642 is operated during the per game drawing, and the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 flows down toward the special power operating port 643, the state of the third movable valve 1642 depends on the situation. , The ball switches to the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow state of the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, various operation scenario 2 tables 202aa are provided in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment described above in place of the various operation scenario tables 202e, and a general figure type selection table 202ab is newly provided. , A normal figure variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the ordinary figure type selection table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure type selection table 202ab. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a plurality of types are provided for the per-figure game executed during the time saving state, and the per-figure game with different operation patterns can be executed. ing. Although a specific description is omitted, in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the ordinary symbol variation won per ordinary symbol stops (S1117: Yes), the ball passes through the through gate 67. Based on the value of the second hit type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired at this time and the set game state, the hit type selection table 202ab is selected, and the hit type is selected. It is configured as follows.

  Specifically, the contents specified in the per-figure type selection table 202ab will be described. The set gaming state is a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) and is acquired. In the range where the value of the second hit type counter C9 is “0 to 89”, “Ultra figure hit A” is defined as the general figure hit type, and in the range of “90 to 99”, the general figure hit type is “ "B per ordinary figure" is defined. Although the specific operation contents of the per-figure game will be described later, when “per-figure per A” is selected (selection rate 90%), a plurality of times (two times) are performed over the entire per-figure game period. ), The electric accessory 640a is in an open state, and a game per day drawing is performed, which makes it relatively easy to win a ball to the universal winning device 640. On the other hand, if “per-figure-per-B” is selected (selection rate 10%), after the same per-figure-per-game as “per-figure-per-A” is executed (in the latter half of the per-figure-per-game period), A regular-time-per-game, in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state is set for a long time (15 seconds), is executed.

  As described above, since the per-figure game is executed without interruption of the special symbol change, the "per-figure A" is a special electric operation port 643 or It is possible to execute a game aiming at a per-acquisition game by making a prize to the second special power operation port 1643. However, “Public per hit B” is to make the ball to the prize winning device 640 in the latter half of the per-figure per game. Is set for a long period of time, the remaining period of the special symbol change is unnecessarily subtracted, resulting in a disadvantageous game per disadvantageous figure which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where such a per-figure game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is executing the per-accessory game, the per-attribute game is continued for a long time. And an effect (see FIG. 90 (a)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable game. I have. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time saving state continues based on the skill of the player, and thus the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95 (c), the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202ac will be described. FIG. 95 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202ac. The ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting an ordinary symbol variation pattern to be executed when a ball has passed through the through gate 67, and includes an ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48). ) Is normally referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the symbol.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, since the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is unified to 3 seconds, the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol (see S1114 of FIG. 48) takes 3 seconds. Only the change time (change pattern) is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a different variation pattern can be selected based on the set game state and the value of the variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation type of the normal symbol. It is composed.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS2. . In other words, in the normal state, the structure is such that the same three-second ordinary symbol variation as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, the short fluctuation is defined as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 1 second within the range of the fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of “0 to 179”. The long variation is defined as a variation pattern in which the variation time is 15 seconds in the range of “180 to 197”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the period during which the ordinary symbol fluctuates greatly differs depending on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the normal symbol fluctuation period in the time reduction state, the period in which the game per regular symbol is not executed is a period in which the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted. , Resulting in a normal figure fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the ordinary symbol fluctuation is executed in such a disadvantageous ordinary figure fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is executing the per-attribute game, the per-attribute game is executed. An effect (see FIG. 90 (c)) that allows the player to select a game for reducing the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the disadvantageous figure fluctuation by performing the operation for a long time (see FIG. 90 (c)). It is composed. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time saving state continues based on the skill of the player, and thus the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (a), the contents of each operation scenario table 202e that are different from the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 96A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the operation scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above is modified to partially change the per-figure per-operation scenario table 202e3. The difference is that a scenario table 202e5 is added. Other than that, it is the same, and the same content is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the detailed description is omitted.

  First, the contents of the second accessory-per-operation scenario table 202e5 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (b). FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second accessory-per-operation scenario table 202e5. The second action-per-accessory scenario table 202e5 is a data table in which a game-per-accessory operation scenario to be executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643 in the game per ordinary figure is defined. .

  Specifically, the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “1”, that is, immediately after execution of the bonus game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to off, and the storage solenoid 209c is in the off state. Is stipulated to continue until the end. Then, the value of the scenario counter is “25”, that is, the opening period (the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the game per accessory, and thereafter, the value of the scenario counter is changed. An operation scenario is defined in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON (a round period is set) for a value in the range from "26" to "400", that is, for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V opening / closing door 65a is opened, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65. The ball that has won the V prize device 65 during this round passes through the storage valve 66a that is moving to the ball non-storage state (retreat state), and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, a plurality of balls can be caused to flow into the first movable valve 66b during a single per-game game, so that the V winning probability during the per-game game can be increased.

  Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches “400”, the V winning opening solenoid 209 b is turned off, and the state in which the V opening / closing door 65 a is closed is set until the value of the scenario counter reaches “1650”, that is, The operation scenario is defined to last for 5 seconds. Thereafter, when the value of the scenario counter reaches “1650”, the value of the scenario counter becomes “2025” until “1675”, that is, after the V winning opening solenoid 209 b is set to ON for 0.1 second. During this time, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to off.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the above-described per-cascade operation scenario table 202e2 and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the second per-cascade operation scenario table 202e5 are described. Although the operation content of the storage valve 66a is different, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the per-accessory game to be performed, the operation content of the storage valve 66a is unified, and the V winning opening during the per-accessory game. It may be configured so that the winning ratio of the ball is changed to 165.

  Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is set such that the storage solenoid 209c is turned off for three seconds after the start of the game per accessory, the storage solenoid 209c is turned on for two seconds, and then the storage solenoid 209c is stored again. The solenoid 209c is set to be turned off, and when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643, an opening period (a period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in a closed state) is 0.1 second, and a round period (V opening / closing). An operation scenario is defined such that a game per accessory is executed in which the door 65a is in the open state (1.5 seconds) and the ending period (V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) is 1.5 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643, the opening period (the period in which the V-opening door 65a is closed) is 3.1 seconds, and the round period (the period in which the V-opening door 65a is open) is 1.5 seconds. In this case, the operation scenario may be defined so that a game per accessory is executed for an ending period (a period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) of 1.5 seconds. With such a configuration, in the per-prize game executed based on the ball winning in the second special power operation port 1643, the storage valve is set in a period in which the ball can be won by the V winning device 65. Since the ball 66a is in a retracted state in which the ball cannot be stored (ball non-reserved state), a plurality of balls that have won the V prize device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, and the prize enters the V winning port 165. Can be increased.

  Further, in the per-principal game executed based on the ball winning in the special power operation port 643, the storage valve 66 a is a protrusion capable of storing the ball in a period in which the ball can be won in the V winning device 65. Since the ball is in the state (ball storage state), only the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a among the balls that have won the V winning device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b. The probability of winning to the mouth 165 can be reduced.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the ease of winning a ball (V winning rate) to the V winning opening 165 during the per game play according to the type of the per game play to be executed. Of the opening pattern of the V opening / closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a, the V winning ratio can be changed only by changing the length of the period (opening period) until the V opening / closing door 65a is first opened. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the operation control in the game per accessory. In other words, only during the period from the start of the per-accompaniment game to the end of the opening period, an operation scenario is set for each type of per-accompaniment game, and thereafter, operation control of various devices is performed based on a common operation scenario. Can be executed, so that the operation control can be simplified.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the per-proxy game that is advantageous to the player (the per-principal game that is executed when the ball has won the second special power operation port 1643) is disadvantageous to the player. Making the V prize device 65 win the ball at an early stage after the start of the game per role than the game per role (game per role executed when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643). It is configured to be able to. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute a game that is advantageous to the player. In addition, as an operation content of the storage valve 66a, an operation advantageous to the player (an operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is made to play a ball in the V prize device 65 by a game per accessory which is disadvantageous to the player. Since it is set before the timing at which the game can be performed, the ball that has won the V prize device 65 during the per-proxy game that is disadvantageous to the player is clogged in the V prize device 65, or Even if the ball is intentionally kept, since the operation advantageous to the player (the operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed thereafter, the act of illegally placing the ball into the V winning opening 165 is suppressed. Can be.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the operation scenario defined in the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. As in the case of the second-per-accessory operation scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96 (b), a 15-second closing period and a 0.1-second opening period are defined in the latter half period of the per-accessory game. They differ in that they do.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the game per role is executed, the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning and the case where the game per role is terminated based on the passage of time. The game period of the hit game is configured to be greatly different. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the game result in the time saving state largely different according to the selection result of the game method during the game per hit, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97 (a), differences between the per-figure per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment and the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-figure-per-operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the operation content of the per-figure-per-game executed during the time-saving state is different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the second embodiment, the operation scenario of the per-figure-period game executed during the time-saving state is different from that of the first embodiment described above. It has a scenario 202e33 and three scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map.

  First, with reference to FIG. 97 (b), the contents of two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose figure will be described. FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map. In this time-saving two-time-per-figure-period scenario 202e33, an operation scenario of a per-figure-per-game to be executed when "per-figure-per-A" is selected as the per-figure-per-figure type is defined. The operation scenario defined in the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose figure described later, in which the ratio of the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state to the entire game period per general figure is 3.6 seconds. A higher game per day is executed.

  Specifically, an operation scenario in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON is defined for a scenario counter value of "1", and an operation scenario in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON is defined. Stipulated. The ON state of the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set until the end of the game per ordinary drawing (the value of the scenario counter becomes "900"). In other words, in the per-figure game executed in response to “per-figure A”, the ball that has won the electric accessory 640a must always pass to the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643. Make up.

  In addition, the third movable valve solenoid 209f has an ON period of 0.2 seconds (a period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at an operation position where a ball can enter the second special power operation port 1643) and 1.5 seconds. (A period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at a normal position where a ball can enter the special power operating port 643) is repeatedly set. That is, the ratio of a ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the second special power operation port 1643 is approximately 11%, and a ratio of a ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the special power operation port 643 is approximately 11%. It is configured to be 89%.

  Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state) continues until 0.1 second after the start of the per-figure game. The value is in the range from "26" to "274", that is, for one second, the full power solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), and the range is from "275" to "400". That is, for 0.5 seconds, the general-purpose solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed). Then, the general-purpose solenoid is turned on again for a range from “401” to “649”, that is, for one second, and thereafter, a general-purpose solenoid is set for a range from “650” to “900”, that is, for one second. An operation scenario in which the electric solenoid is set to off is defined. In other words, when the game for the general figure is executed based on the operation scenario defined in the two scenarios 202e33 for the time saving general figure, the opening operation for opening the electric accessory 640a for one second is performed twice. The game is executed, and a total of two seconds of the open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general electric winning device 640 for the entire game period (3.6 seconds) per ordinary figure. For this reason, approximately 40% of the game period per day is advantageous to the player (the special power game can be advanced (the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643 can receive a ball) ) Period).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose map will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose figure. In this case, the three time-saving per-figure per-scenario 202e34 defines an operation scenario of a per-figure-per-game to be executed when “per-figure-per-B” is selected. The contents defined in the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose map are the same as the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose figure described above until the value of the scenario counter reaches “650”. Detailed description is omitted.

  The value of the scenario counter is in the range of “650” to “3500”, that is, the normal power solenoid is set to OFF for 15 seconds, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “3501” to “3524”, that is, During 0.1 seconds, the general-purpose solenoid is set to ON, and thereafter, when the value of the scenario counter becomes “3525”, the general-purpose solenoid is set to OFF.

  In other words, the game per day map specified in the three scenarios per day map for time savings 202e34 has a length of the whole game period per day of 17.7 seconds, and the ball is played during the game per day map. It is configured such that the total period in which the device 640 can win a prize is 2.1 seconds. Therefore, the total of the open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general electric winning device 640 is 2.1 seconds for the period of the entire game per ordinary figure (17.7 seconds). Approximately 12% of the game period per day is advantageous to the player (the special power game can be advanced (the ball can be awarded to the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643). Period). Further, when the second electric accessory 640a opening operation is completed, the electric accessory 640a is closed for 15 seconds thereafter.

  Therefore, when the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving time drawing are set during the time-saving state, the period during which the ball cannot enter the general-purpose winning award device 640 is set longer, so that the time-saving per-time drawing which is disadvantageous to the player is set. Become a game. Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (the fourth special symbol change ends). In such a case, the time saving state is terminated, and the remaining period of the special symbol change is subtracted during the normal per-game game. In other words, even during the closed state for 15 seconds, the remaining period of the special symbol change is subtracted, so that it becomes a game per ordinary figure which is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, the general-purpose variation time counter 223aa, the general-purpose time counter 223ab, and the prohibition of firing are stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. The difference is that the suggestion flag 223ac and the effect setting completed flag 223ad are added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The general figure fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and when a general figure fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the voice lamp control device is set. In the main processing 113 (see FIG. 60), the counter value set in the effect update processing executed periodically (every millisecond) is decremented. It is configured such that various effects are executed based on the counter value, which are referred to when a per-proxy game is executed.

  The per-figure-period time counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a game period in which the per-figure-per-game is executed, and when a per-figure-period start command is received, the per-figure-per-game period corresponding to the received command. Is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update processing that is periodically (every millisecond) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 is subtracted. are doing.

  The firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON when performing a punctuation suggestion effect for puncturing a game per role (terminating a game per role over time), and in a state where it is set to ON, It is set to off when the hit game has ended. When the per game play ends, the display mode of the ending screen of the per game play is varied based on the setting status of the flag and the end conditions of the established per game play (winning end, time lapse end). Will be referred to.

  The effect setting completed flag 223ad is a punctuation suggestion effect indicating that the game per role is ended based on the passage of time, or an effect suggesting that a ball is to be awarded to the V winning device 65 during the game per role. This is for indicating that the setting has been made, and is set to ON when a dedicated effect is set during the per-accessory game.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the game per bonus item is different depending on the operating port (special power operating port 643, second special power operating port 1643) in which the ball wins during the game per ordinary drawing. Is greatly different in that it is configured to be executable. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary symbol variation time is determined based on the gaming state and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac (FIG. 95 (c)). Reference), and the difference is that it is configured to be able to execute a per-figure perpetual game having a different operation content as the per-figure perforated game executed during the time saving state. The control processing executed by main controller 110 is the same except for the contents described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the content of the special power starting opening winning process 2 (S108) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 2 (S108). This special power starting port winning process 2 (S108) is different from the special power starting port winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that the operating port (special power operating port 643, second The difference is that the hit type corresponding to the special power operation port 1643) can be set, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, regarding the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the control executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The following description focuses on differences from the processing. The control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment in that a command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) is performed. (See S4217 in FIG. 66) instead of the general figure-related processing (see S4217 in FIG. 66) executed in the hit-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67). The hit-item related process 2 (see S4851 in FIG. 103) is replaced with the hit-hit related process (S4804 in FIG. 70), and the effect update process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 105) is replaced with the effect update process (see S4111 in FIG. 72). ) Is executed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the general map related processing 2 (S4217) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general figure related processing 2 (S4217). This general figure related processing 2 (S4217) is different from the general figure related processing of the first embodiment (see S4217 in FIG. 66) in that the general figure related processing is executed when a general figure variation pattern command is received. The processing executed when a per-figure start command is received is different in that the processing is changed, and the other processing is the same.

  When the general-figure-related processing 2 (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether a general-figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701). If it is determined that the command has been received (S4701: Yes), the general-figure fluctuation start processing is performed. Is performed (S4751), and then the present process ends. The details of the ordinary figure change start processing (S4751) executed in the processing of S4751 will be described later with reference to FIG. 102, but processing for measuring the change time of the ordinary symbol change is executed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 95 (c)), and the advantage of the game executed during the time-saving state according to the selected fluctuation pattern is provided. The degree is variable.

  In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the general figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is determined whether a general figure start command has been received (S4703). S4703: Yes), based on the received command, sets the time per ordinary figure (END time of the corresponding game operation scenario per ordinary figure) in the ordinary time per time counter (S4752), and sets the display general figure start command for display. This is set (S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4703 that the start command for the general figure has not been received (S4703: No), the processing of S4705 to S4714, which is the same as the general figure related processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 66) described above, is performed. The process is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the ordinary figure change start processing (S4751) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure change start processing (S4751). When the normal figure change start process (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4771). If it is determined that the current time is not during the time reduction (S4771: No), The display general-purpose change command is set (S 4771), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S 4771 that it is not during the working hours reduction (S 4771: Yes), the general figure fluctuation time is extracted from the received general figure fluctuation pattern command (S 4772), and the extracted value is used as the general figure fluctuation time counter 223aa. (S 4773), execute the above-described processing of S 4774, and terminate the present processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the accessory-related processing 2 (S4851) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the content of the accessory hit related process 2 (S4851). This per-accessory-related processing 2 (S4851) is different from the above-described per-accessory-related processing (S4804) in that the content of processing executed when a per-accessory start command is received and when an ending command is received is described. The difference is in the changed point, and the other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the accessory hit related process 2 (S4851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a hit hit command is received (S5101). If it is determined that the hit hit command is received (S5101: Yes), the hit hit is started. The processing is executed (S5151), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that no ending command has been received (S5101: No), the same processing of S5103 to S5107 as the above-described accessory hit related processing (S4804) is executed, and the ending command is executed in the processing of S5107. If it is determined that it has been received (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the firing prohibition flag 223ac is set to ON (S5152).

  In other words, in the process of S5152, it is determined whether or not a state is being performed in which an effect to suggest that prohibiting the player from firing the ball is in an advantageous state is being performed. If it is determined in the processing of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not on (S5152: No), the same processing of S5108 to S5109 as the above-described accessory hitting related processing (S4804) is executed, and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5152 that it is set to on (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to off (S5153), and the end condition of the current per-figure-per-game is time-lapsed. It is determined whether there is (S5154).

  If it is determined that the end of the game based on the passage of time is completed (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating “success” is set (S5155), and the end of the game based on the passage of time is not the end. In other words, when it is determined that the game per game based on the ball winning has ended (S5154: No), a display command indicating "sorry" is set (S5156). As described above, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to fire the ball on the basis of the game content of the game per time map during the time saving state, and the game is provided to the player based on the prediction result. When an effect that suggests a method is executed, it is determined whether or not the per-figure-per-game is completed based on the suggestion contents, and the display mode of the per-figure-per-game end screen is changed based on the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player whether or not the current game method has been correctly selected.

  Note that, unlike the present embodiment, for example, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or unfavorable to launch the ball to the player based on the game content of the per-figure game in the time reduction state, and the prediction result In the case where an effect that suggests a game method to a player is performed based on the game, an effect that suggests a game method different from an actual prediction result (so-called, If the game is configured to be able to execute the game, it is determined in the process of S5154 whether or not the game (time lapse, ball prize) corresponding to the actual prediction result has ended the game per ordinary drawing, and the determination result The display mode of the end screen may be configured to be variable based on this. This makes it possible to execute a surprising effect for the player.

  Also, in this case, in addition to the effect that suggests a game method to the player described above, a situation notification effect (for example, an effect that suggests a type of game per ordinary map) for causing the player to predict an actual game situation is executed. Good. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict whether or not the effect suggesting the game method is the gassed effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the per-figure-per-game and the per-accessory-peripheral game are executed in an overlapping manner, an effect that suggests a game method to the player is executed, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, if the player can select a game method, an effect suggesting the game method to the player may be executed by the same method.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the content of the accessory hit start process (S5151) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory hit start process (S5151). In the bonus hit start process (S5151), various processes for varying the effect mode to be executed are executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the hit bonus game.

  When the accessory hit start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the winning special power operation port is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the current game per bonus is a bonus game executed when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643 (special power operating port 1) (S5302). If it is determined that it is not based on a winning (S5302: No), a display command for indicating a winning combination is set (S5303), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the result is based on the winning of the special power operation port 1 (S5301: Yes), then the value of the general-purpose variation time counter is read (S5304), and the read value is It is determined whether the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command for suggesting the end of the elapsed time per accessory is set (S5306), and the firing prohibition flag 223ac is set to ON. (S5307), and proceeds to the process of S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, a display mode (corresponding to a comment in the sub display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the launch of a sphere as shown in the display screen of FIG. ) Is displayed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the processing of S5304 is a value indicating 5 seconds or less ( (S5308) If it is determined that the time is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), the game per bonus item is terminated early, so that the game per bonus item can be executed again by the next game per regular drawing. Therefore, a display command for indicating the end of the winning per bonus item is set (S5309), and the process shifts to S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the processing of S5309, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a manner that prompts the user to fire a ball (for example, “fire a ball early, When the game is finished, a chance is displayed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5308 that the value is not a value indicating 5 seconds or less, that is, a value indicating 5 to 10 seconds, a display for indicating the hitting of an accessory is set without setting a dedicated display command. The command is set (S5310), the effect setting completed flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect are configured to be executable, the second embodiment is executed for the player. It is possible to select a game method of a game per role based on the effect contents of various suggestive effects. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, the player can be interested. In addition, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the result of the selection by the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the player can select the game method of the per-government game in accordance with the normal symbol fluctuation and the situation of the per-regular game performed during the per-gap game. Although it is configured to execute the suggestion effect, it may be configured to execute the same suggestion effect in a case where a plurality of games are executed in addition to the above, for example, the jackpot game end When the time saving state is set later, the end effect of the big hit game is configured to execute a suggestive effect that allows the player to select the end timing based on the length of the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change being executed. You may. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big hit game, the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) is executed for a long time, and during the time-saving state, It is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the normal symbol change is not executed becomes longer and the willingness to play decreases.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, based on the fact that the ball has won the special power operation port (the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643), a game per accessory is executed, It was configured to suspend the subtraction of the special symbol change during execution. In other words, the configuration is such that the more the per game play, the more advantageous the player is. Therefore, the game method during the time reduction state (during the V rush) becomes monotonous, and the player may be bored with the game.

  On the other hand, the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the second embodiment in that the content of processing for a special symbol change during execution in the case where a per-bonus game is executed is different. Specifically, in accordance with the game type per role to be executed (set), the process of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed and discarding (discarding the remaining variation time, Either a process of forcibly stopping when the lottery is missed regardless of the lottery result), or a process of terminating the time saving state in addition to discarding, is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the game situation during the time saving state based on the execution of the per-accessory game, so that the player can be provided with a tireless game.

  Furthermore, based on the effect performed during the time-saving state (V rush), an effect is provided that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the game per accessory. Thus, for example, when a game per bonus that ends the time-saving state is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from suddenly ending the time-saving state and giving a sense of distrust. it can. In addition, the player himself / herself can select whether or not to execute the game per role based on the content of the effect to be performed, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

<Production contents in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 108 and FIG. 109, among the effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. The effect performed in the present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the duration of the time reduction state (the duration of the V rush) is displayed in addition to the time-based subtraction display of the value displayed on the timer 812. A reduction display in which the value displayed on the timer 812 is greatly reduced when the special symbol change being executed is discarded by the execution of the hit game, It is greatly different in that the disappearance display for ending the state is configured to be executable.

  Furthermore, when the special symbol change during execution is a big hit (during the big hit change), a suggestion effect that suggests that the running big hit change is discarded by executing the per-accessory game. It is greatly different in that it is configured to execute. Other display contents are the same, except that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the above-mentioned differences. The same reference numerals are given to the same display contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 108 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content executed when the remaining period of the special symbol jackpot fluctuation reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds). It is the schematic diagram which showed the holding | maintenance state of each symbol when the display screen shown to 108 (a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, a display mode of “danger time entry” is displayed, and until the danger time ends (the jackpot fluctuation is stopped and displayed). “10 seconds” is displayed as the period display mode 851 indicating the period. In the same manner as the value displayed on the timer 812, the period display mode 851 is periodically reduced (countdown display) by the effect update process of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the V rush fluctuation region 811, in addition to the symbol simulating “V” corresponding to the success of the game during the V rush (execution of the V jackpot game), “skull” indicating a game result disadvantageous to the player Is variably displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "Pinch a large hit during the danger time" is displayed.

  In other words, when the danger time is entered, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot fluctuation may stop (execution of the jackpot game based on the special figure lottery) after a predetermined time (after 10 seconds). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, the danger time is configured to be executed even in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order.

  Therefore, when the player enters the danger time, the player does not execute the special electric game aiming at the per-accessory game until the end of the danger time (does not fire the ball) or executes the special electric game even during the danger time. Then, the player willingly chooses whether to go for the game per V.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the remaining period of the special change during the execution of the entry condition of the danger time reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The entry condition of the danger time may be different depending on whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not, and during the change of the jackpot, the remaining period is “27 seconds”, “17 seconds”, “10 seconds”, The configuration may be such that the danger time can be entered when "7 seconds", and the danger time can be entered only when the remaining period is "10 seconds" during the deviation. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed based on the remaining period display of the danger time displayed when the danger time enters.

  Also, in the above-described example, an example was given in which a special danger time entry condition was set during a jackpot change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be able to enter the danger time when the remaining period of “14 seconds” becomes “14 seconds”. This makes it possible for the player who understands that the player is in the departure change to play the game without firing the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (b), a description will be given of the display content when the bonus hit game is executed during the danger time and the big hit change is discarded. FIG. 108 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display content when the bonus hit game is executed during the danger time and the big hit change is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the accessory hit is executed during the danger time, the character “End” is displayed in the period display mode 851 to notify that the danger time has ended. Then, a symbol imitating a “skull” is stopped and displayed in the V rush variation area 811 in order to indicate that the jackpot variation being executed has been discarded. Further, a comment "Sorry ... pull back" is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  On the other hand, since the bonus game is being executed, a display mode for aiming at the V prize in the bonus game is displayed.

  In addition, since the special symbol change being executed is discarded, only “10 seconds” which is the change time of the next change is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the jackpot fluctuation has been discarded in an easily understandable manner.

  In addition, in the case where a bonus game in which the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted is executed during the danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, after the danger time is continued, it is notified that the V jackpot game has been executed. An effect is performed.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643, and the acquired first hit value is obtained. Based on the value of the type counter C2, the type (big hit type) of the big hit game (V big hit game) executed when the player wins the V winning opening 165 can be selected. Is partially different from that of the first embodiment. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 defines three types of jackpot types, and the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed, V The game state (number of times saved) set after the end of the big hit game and the influence on the special symbol being executed at the time of executing the bonus hit game are configured to be different.

  Specifically, the jackpot C is defined in the range of the acquired first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 79”, the jackpot D is defined in the range of “80 to 94”, and “95 to 99”. Is defined as a jackpot E.

  The "big hit C" (selection rate 80%) is the same as the V big hit game executed in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a 10-round (R) big hit game, four times reduced in time, a special symbol being executed. Is set to suspend. "Big hit D" (selection rate: 15%) is set so that a big hit game of 10 rounds (R), four times of saving time, and discarding a special symbol change being executed are discarded. "Big hit E" (selection rate 5%) is set so as to discard 15 rounds (R) of big hit games, 15 times of saving time, special symbol fluctuations being executed, and end the time saving state.

  As described above, when the "big hit E", which is the most disadvantageous to the player during the special symbol change during execution, is set, when the player wins a V during the bonus game, the player has the most advantageous effect. Since the jackpot game and the game state (number of times saved) after the end of the jackpot game are set, the last chance can be given to the player. In addition, for example, if the final fluctuation of the time-saving state is out of range and immediately before the end of the out-of-range fluctuation, that is, if the time-saving state ends in a few seconds after doing nothing, the “big hit” "E" may be the jackpot type most advantageous to the player.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a danger time selection table 222ca is added. The other parts are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The danger time selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred when determining whether to actually execute the danger time effect when the danger time entry condition is satisfied. It is configured to vary the execution probabilities based on the execution probability.

  Here, the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110 (c), the configuration is such that the danger time effect is more easily executed when the special symbol change being executed is a jackpot change than when it is a loss change. Thereby, when the danger time effect is executed, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the big hit is changing.

  Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination result) is a big hit, the execution of danger time is selected regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and the special symbol lottery result (special figure) is selected. If the judgment result is out of order, it is selected that the danger time effect is not executed when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 89”, and the danger time effect is executed in the range of “90 to 99”. Is configured to be selected.

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute the danger time production even if the result of the special figure lottery being executed is out of order, so that the game of prediction and selection can be added to the game of the player during the danger time. Since it can be held, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control processing contents in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing contents according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The present embodiment is different in that the content of the control process executed by the main control device 110 and the content of the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 111, the special power starting port winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 3 (S158). This special power starting port winning process 3 (S158) is different from the special power starting winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that a different jackpot type is selected when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643. The difference is that the configuration is made possible and the process corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special power starting port winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes as S1301 to S1303, S1305 to S1309 as the above-described special power starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed. Then, in the processing of S1303, it is determined that the special electric power is being operated (in the case of playing a special accessory), and if it is determined that the special electric power is being operated, the jackpot type selected this time is “big hit E”. Is determined (S1371), and when it is determined to be "big hit E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and a special symbol change stop process is executed (S1374). , To S1375. Note that the content of the special symbol change stop process (S1374) is the same as the content of the special symbol change stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1371 that it is not "big hit E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is "big hit D" (S1372), and it is determined that it is "big hit D". (S1372: Yes), executes the processing of S1374, and shifts to the processing of S1375. If it is determined in the processing of S1372 that it is not “Big Hit D”, that is, it is “Big Hit C” (S1372: No), the processing of S1305 and S1306 is executed, and the flow shifts to the processing of S1375.

  In the processing of S1375, the accessory hit flag is set to ON (S1375), a command corresponding to the current hit type ("big hit C" to "big hit E") is set (S1376), and a special power operation command is set. (S1308), this process ends.

  Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 3 (S4171). This effect update process 3 (S4171) is different from the effect update process 2 of the second embodiment (see S4151 in FIG. 105) in that the danger time setting process (S5371) related to the setting of the danger time effect is performed in the process of S5306. And the other is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the danger time setting processing (S5371) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371). In the danger time setting process (S5371), when the execution condition of the danger time effect is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the danger time is to be actually executed, and the process for setting the danger time effect is performed based on the determination result. Is done.

  When the danger time setting process (S 5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223 r is a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds (S 5601), and it is determined that the value is not a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds. If it has been performed (S5601: No), it means that the execution condition of the danger time has not been satisfied, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed (the special figure lottery result) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f are determined. The danger time effect is selected by referring to the danger time selection table 222ca (S5602).

  In the processing of S5603, it is determined whether or not to execute a danger time effect based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602. If it is determined that the effect is to be executed (S5603: Yes), the display for indicating the danger time effect is performed. The command is set (S5604), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5603 that the danger time effect is not to be executed (S5603: No), the present processing ends.

  The danger time effect shown in FIG. 90A is executed by the display command set in the process of S5604.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main control device 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, the special figure game in which the player enters the special figure entrance 64 is executed. Is easy to open, so that a special ball game is aimed at letting a game ball enter the special electricity operation port 643 in the general electricity winning device 640 and a game ball entering the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65. It is configured to be a gaming method that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a ball entry opening (second entry opening 1645) serving as a chance to draw a second special symbol is provided in place of the special power operation opening 643 (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening of the V opening / closing door 65a associated with the V winning device 65 is not triggered by a hit by a ball entering the special power operation port 643, but is triggered by a ball entering the second entrance 1645. This is a case in which a small hit is won by lottery of the second special symbol.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed (so-called simultaneous fluctuation). During the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to have a shorter fluctuation time than the lottery of the first special symbol, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. I have.

  In addition, when the total number of lottery times of the first special symbol (number of times of change) and number of times of lottery of the second special symbol (the number of times of change) is 100 times, as a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state. , And the special figure 1 time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol reaches four, is set, and the cumulative time saving end condition or special figure 1 is set. The time saving state is configured to end when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment having the above-described configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the time reduction state is the variation of the special symbol set during the time reduction state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. It is configured to have the same content as the pattern, and the playability during the time reduction state (during the V rush) is different from that of the first embodiment in that the ball enters the special power start port 643 and Instead of a game in which a game (a winning game in which the V winning device 65 is opened) is executed, a ball is thrown into the second entrance 1645 and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery to win the small hit game (V The point of using the game for executing the winning game (opening of the prize device 65) and the condition that the cumulative time-saving termination condition is satisfied before the number of times of variation (number of lotteries) of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four). Even if it holds A point using the game the short condition terminates, in different.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, a period for indicating a lottery result of the second special symbol (a fluctuation period of the second special symbol) can be variably set in comparison with the first embodiment described above. For example, as a fluctuation period of the second special symbol, a short fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation period of 0.1 second) and a long fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation period of 10 seconds) can be set. In addition, the interval of the small hitting game executed during the time saving state can be made to vary greatly according to the set fluctuation period of the second special symbol. Therefore, the variation of the game during the time saving state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the cumulative time saving end condition can be satisfied based on the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of small hit games executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege (V jackpot game) from being excessively given to the player during the time saving state. Furthermore, by configuring a short variation period (for example, 0.1 second) to be hardly set as the variation period of the second special symbol set during the time reduction state, the small hit game is frequently executed during the time reduction state. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus (prize ball) from being excessively given to the player in a short time.

  Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration and playability of the fourth embodiment will be mainly described. First, a description will be given of the update timing of the number of time savings and the determination processing timing for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment. As in the fourth embodiment, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine capable of executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol in parallel, the fluctuation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state In order to prevent the number of times from exceeding a specified number of times (for example, 100 times), an update process of the number of time savings and a determination process for ending the time saving state are executed at the change start timing of each special symbol. I was Thus, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the specified number of special symbol changes are executed, so that the 101st special symbol change exceeding the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) is reliably performed in the normal state. This can prevent the player from being provided with an extra privilege (special symbol change in a time-saving state). However, before the final change of the time reduction state (the 100th special symbol change) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol change is started, the time reduction state ends. There is a problem that the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened depending on the timing of determining (changing) the special symbol, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling.

  Specifically, for example, immediately after the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) as the first special symbol determination (fluctuation), the second special symbol determination (fluctuation), When the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th special figure change is executed (immediately before the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed). If the special figure change of the 101st rotation is not executed in the state where the special figure change of the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation If the special figure change at the 101st rotation is started after the special figure change at the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure change at the 100th rotation is executed. The state of the ordinary symbol during the change of the special figure There is a problem that uncomfortable feeling to the player for.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of special figure changes (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving end condition is satisfied. Timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied. , And the time-saving state is ended based on the timing executed earlier among the timings.

  With such a configuration, the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol is maintained until the timing at which the special symbol change at the specified number of times is stopped or displayed, or the timing at which the special symbol change at the number of times exceeding the specified number is executed. It can be set, and the maximum time period and the time reduction state can be provided to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the condition for enabling the execution of the special figure change at the 101st rotation can be determined as the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the time reduction state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time reductions, and executing the lottery of the special symbol in the time reduction state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the condition is satisfied first. The time saving state is configured to end based on the timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving time may be reduced based on only the timing at which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change that satisfies the time saving end condition. The state may be terminated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Make up. Then, when a V prize (a prize of a ball to the V prize opening 165) occurs during the small hit game and a big hit is awarded, the special symbol change temporarily stopped is resumed after the big hit game ends. It is configured so that: Then, in the fourth embodiment, the opportunity of the reduction of the number of time savings is configured to be subtracted when the change of the special symbol whose change has been started during the time saving game is stopped.

  By configuring in this way, since the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is a fluctuation started before the jackpot game, when the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol resumes and stops, Time savings are not subtracted. That is, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded due to a V winning, the period until the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in addition to the number of the time savings awarded by the jackpot. Set as a gaming state. With this configuration, the time saving state that is most advantageous for the player can be set as long as possible.

  Here, the fourth embodiment is a big hit due to the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (special symbol lottery and winning of a ball to the special power operation port 643) described in the first embodiment to the third embodiment. It is shown as an example for realizing (gaming ability aiming at a game) by another method, and the respective technical ideas described in the above-described first to third embodiments, the effect contents to be executed, and the like are appropriately determined. It may be diverted. It should be noted that detailed description of each technical concept and effect content used in the same manner as the above-described first to third embodiments will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is different from the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment in that a second ball entry unit 1640 is provided instead of the general winning award device 640. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second entrance 1645 is provided in place of the special power operation port 643.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, by executing the left-handed game, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64, and the through game is performed. By passing through the gate 67, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed, and when the winning is won, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which a game ball can enter the general winning award device 640. Then, when a game ball enters the special power operating port 643, a hitting of a bonus is executed, and the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened.

  On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is greatly different in that a second entrance 1645 serving as a chance for a lottery of a second special symbol is provided in place of the above-described special power operation port 643. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the small opening is won by the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entrance 1645, not the winning in the special power operation port 643, but the opening timing of the V opening / closing door 65a. This triggers the opening of the V opening / closing door 65a.

  When the game state is the normal state, the player fires a game ball toward the left area of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above, and makes the ball enter the special figure entrance 64, The game is executed while desiring to win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) at a rate of 100%.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if a game is executed while aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. In the case where the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed when the passing of the game ball to the through gate 67 is won, the second electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry unit 1640 is in the open state (the game ball is turned off). A state in which the ball can enter the second ball entry unit 1640) is set.

  In the second ball entry unit 1640, a second ball entry port 1645 is provided, and when a game ball enters, a lottery of the second special symbol is executed. And in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. When a small win is won, the V opening / closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to an open state, and when a game ball wins the V winning opening 165, a large win is awarded.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, it is defined that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (about 9/10). The time-saving state in which a game ball easily enters the second entrance 1645 is a state in which a V winning is likely to occur, and is therefore the most advantageous state for the player.

<Electrical Configuration of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, a special symbol lottery method is different from that of the first embodiment described above. If the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have a partially different configuration corresponding to the difference described above. I have.

  First, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a small type used to select a small symbol type of a special symbol. A hit type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used for selecting a change pattern are used.

  In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da corresponding to the entry into the special figure entrance 64 composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding). And a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203db corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second entrance 1645 comprising the first to fourth areas). Stores the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64. .

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 1645. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1 is stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). The reserved ball storage areas (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db) each have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

  In the present embodiment, since only the second special symbol has a small hit as a result of the lottery, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. You may comprise.

  Also, as in the present embodiment, in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) having no small winning as a lottery result, the small hit is also performed. The configuration may be such that the value of the type counter C5 is stored. Thus, regardless of the specification of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (special figure entrance 64, second entrance 1645), which is a special symbol lottery trigger. Is configured to store all the acquired counter values, and when the starting condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, the lottery of the special symbol is performed by using only the necessary value among the obtained counter values. , The same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not there is a small hit), and parts and technology are shared. And cost reduction can be achieved.

  Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, similar to the special symbol described above, a normal symbol holding corresponding to the entry (ball passage) into the through gate 67 including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). A ball storage area 203dc is provided, and the values of the second random number counter C4 and the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

  When the starting condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  In the present embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645 is held and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is stored. The configuration is such that the values are reserved and stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a function (retention storage function) for storing each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, ordinary symbol) is not provided. You may comprise so that it may be.

  With such a configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to a player as a lottery of one special symbol type and a disadvantageous lottery are switched according to a set gaming state. In a state where a lot of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired, a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol can be suppressed.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the above-described first embodiment, instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24A). The difference is that the big hit type selection 4 table 202db is replaced with a change pattern selection table 202e and a change pattern selection 4 table 202dc is provided, and a small hit random number table da is newly provided. Since the other components are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same components, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the small random number table 202da provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number table 202da. The small hit random number table 202da is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery are specified.

  Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202da, a judgment value to be judged as a small hit is defined for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol state (low Regardless of the probability state or the high probability state), a predetermined range of determination values is defined. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not specified, and the small symbol is determined by lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that there will be no winning.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of “4 to 399”. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (about 9/10). ).

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the small hit are configured to be different from each other. Is performed (process of determining the presence or absence of a hit) in a single process (a process of determining the presence or absence of a hit), and the determination of the success or failure of a large hit is continuously (simultaneously) performed.

  With this configuration, a lottery or a small lottery can be executed on one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value) with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened for a certain period (a state in which game balls can enter the V winning device 65). It is configured so that: During the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is open, a game ball is made to enter the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 to give a big hit. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring to win many small wins.

  In the present embodiment, the V opening / closing door 65a is configured to be opened for a predetermined period when a small hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened may be made different based on the hit type. In such a configuration, a small hit type table may be provided, and the small hit type may be determined with reference to the table. With this configuration, the player can be interested in not only winning the small hit but also the type of the small hit to be won, and the small hit where the V opening / closing door 65a is opened for a longer period of time. The game is executed while the player desires to win. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is defined differently in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, the player can be motivated to play a game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific game state (time saving state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is configured not to be executed frequently, so that the player On the other hand, a game can be enthusiastically performed so that a specific game state is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a table (first random number table 202a) referred to when executing the big hit lottery and a table (small random number table 202da) referred to when executing the small hit lottery are described. Although they are configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute a jackpot lottery and a small jackpot lottery. In this case, for example, the first random number table 202a may be configured so that the range of the counter value for winning a small hit is specified for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is determined in accordance with the determined value determined in advance according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. It is configured to execute the determination of the winning or the small hit winning, but is not limited to this, for example, according to the number of the big hits or the number of the small hits in a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied, The value of the first random number counter C1 defined as a big win or a small win may be varied, or a large lottery or a small win executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. A data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit or the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not specified as the data table for abnormal time referred to in the lottery It may be provided.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), and to execute both special symbols. However, there is a limit so that the jackpot cannot be won simultaneously (in parallel) (so that the jackpot game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a restriction, for example, during a period until a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win the jackpot, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not specified, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed by referring to the dedicated data table that defines only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit You may comprise.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment in that a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol Reserved ball storage area 203dc, first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, small hit flag 203dg, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 The difference is that a fluctuation time counter 203di, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, a special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, a special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and a time saving end standby flag 203dm are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). Is a storage area for storing. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db is obtained based on the number of game balls having entered the second entrance 1645 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing the various counter values obtained.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203da, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) start. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of a winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the counters C1 to C2, C5 , CS1 are obtained and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entrance 1645 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are read from the counter buffer. The values are obtained and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in a similar manner.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db described above. Is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc includes a second random number counter C4 obtained from a counter buffer (see FIG. 115) in accordance with detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and a general figure variation type counter CS2. This is a storage area in which values are stored. When detecting that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , And acquires the value of the ordinary symbol change type counter CS2, and stores it in the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203dc. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has four holding areas so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), from the reserved area where data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  When the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the ordinary symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored and a lottery of the ordinary symbol is won. And a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the general-purpose variation type counter CS2) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the ball storage area 203dc, the data corresponding to one starting winning is set to the normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de are provided with special figure detection detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (variable display effects performed by the third symbol display device 81) held on the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball opening 64 or the second entrance 1645 (the number of standby times) ) Is a counter for counting up to four times each. The first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de are set to zero as initial values by an initial setting process (see S1701 in FIG. 54) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball. When the counter value is stored in the area 203da, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is incremented by one. It is.

  The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the second entrance 1645 (start winning) and the second special symbol reserved ball is stored. When the counter value is stored in the area 203db, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 sets the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the first special symbol change start processing is performed. (See S255 in FIG. 123) or in the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed during the change display of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is changed during the change display of the second special symbol. This is set to ON when a symbol jackpot is executed. This special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 of FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the process of S952 of the second special symbol change start process (see S260 of FIG. 126), it is set to OFF.

  This prevents the second special symbol, which has been forcibly released and stopped and displayed with the symbol, from being executed again when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. be able to.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after executing the process for the first special symbol in one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the main controller 110 for the second special symbol is executed. By configuring so as to execute the processing, the fluctuation processing for each special symbol is executed without delay.

  Then, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), if any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the big hit control is performed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). The processing (S1804 in FIG. 56) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is a variation process for each special symbol (S254 in FIG. 119) when the current state is the big hit state or the small hit state (S251: Yes in FIG. 151). To S263) are skipped.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed while the big hit game or the small hit game is executed based on the special symbol lottery result. In the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation process for the first special symbol executed earlier. In this case, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, It is possible to suppress the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

  The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit is won. The small hit flag 203dg is set to ON when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and when the special symbol change in which the winning result is the small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON. When the state is set from on to off, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1652 in FIG. 133), and the special symbol fluctuation processing 4 ( 119 (refer to FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). If it is set to ON in the process of S252, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) in the same manner as during the change is executed (FIG. 119). S253). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thus, the fact that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped can be notified by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol change in-execution processing (see FIG. 123) that it is set to on (S751: Yes in FIG. 123), it is set to off (S753 in FIG. 123).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit, so the special symbol in which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special symbol. In the case where the lottery of the first special symbol can be won with a small hit, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided in order to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating the big hit (based on the fact that the big hit game is executed) T), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of the one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game ends).

  That is, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes in accordance with the result of the lottery of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result (for example, a jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress that the big hit is deleted by the small hit.

  The special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122). A value indicating the fluctuating time is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256 in FIG. 119: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing first special symbol ( Step S257 in FIG. 119) is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit (see S1555 in FIG. 132). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure at the time of the big hit stop display of the second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di remains, and the forcible display is forcibly performed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the first special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S956 in FIG. 129). A value indicating the fluctuating time is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262: Yes in FIG. 119), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 119) for stopping the changing second special symbol ( Step S263 in FIG. 119) is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit (see S855 in FIG. 124). Thereby, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure at the time of the big special stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly displayed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the second special symbol from restarting again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

  The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a fluctuation in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is used when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is determined to be a value larger than 0 in the first special symbol change start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120) (S358 in FIG. 120: Yes). Is set to ON (S359 in FIG. 120), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON in the time saving update processing (see S863 in FIG. 125) of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). (S2101: Yes in FIG. 125), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted (S2102), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103).

  In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 of FIG. 124). Similarly, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol change stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132). In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to OFF when a special jackpot is won in a lottery, if the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the jackpot game, the fluctuation is changed. At the time of the fluctuation stop after the restart, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125). If it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (FIG. 125). S2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203h (see S2102 of FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the change is executed.

  With this configuration, the jackpot game ends, the temporarily stopped change in the first special symbol resumes, and when the change stops, the remaining working hours are not updated (subtracted). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game awarded by the V prize is based on the remaining variation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol in addition to the number of special symbol lotteries determined by the jackpot. The time is also reduced to the time reduction game state. With this configuration, it is possible to set the time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous period for the player, longer.

  The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a fluctuation in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h should be subtracted when the fluctuation stops. In the second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (see S960 in FIG. 126), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0. When it is determined that the value is a value (that is, during working hours) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update processing (S1661) of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564), and when it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. . In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) (see S860 in FIG. 124), and the second special symbol is selected. When the jackpot is won in the lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if a big hit is won, and if the second special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped outside the fluctuation. As described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to be turned off. In addition, the processing for updating the value of the time reduction counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  The time-saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation that satisfies the time-saving state end condition has started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is changed four times or 15 times as a prescribed period of the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is ended. This indicates that the final change of the time saving is started, and the time saving state is a standby state to be ended.

  The time-saving end standby flag 203dm determines whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) (that is, the final variation of the specified number of times in the time-saving state). (S360), when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

  Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125), which is the timing to stop the change of the special symbol, is executed, or when a new special symbol is determined (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 121) It is referred to in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)), and when the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF. .

  With this configuration, in a state where the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (that is, a standby state), if any of the time-saving end timings arrives, it is ensured that each time-saving end timing is reached according to each timing. Can execute a time-saving ending process.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 119 to 136. In the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol overlap (in parallel with) the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The present embodiment is different in that it is configured to be executable, and the contents of the control processing corresponding to the above-described difference are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 119, a special symbol variation process 4 (S151), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 4 (S151). The special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) performs various determinations (win / fail determination) and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and performs predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display in the determined variable display mode, and causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol. Is performed, and control is performed to stop the display in a display mode indicating the determination result (whether the result is a pass / fail determination result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether a big hit game is being played (big hit) or a small hit game is being made (small hit) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a big hit game (big hit) or a small hit game (small hit).

  In the process of S251, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being performed (S251: Yes), it is next determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S252). Is determined (S252: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1)) is displayed. The process is updated (S253), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S252 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, the variable time set in the variable display (special figure variable display) for indicating the special symbol lottery result is not updated (subtracted) while the small hit game is being executed. During this period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which has been being executed along with the start of the small hitting game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the fact that the first special symbol change has disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that normal variable display is being performed (for example, at intervals of 0.2 seconds) The display mode may be the same as the display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing, or may be the display mode in which the flashing interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is being performed (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals). May be used. Further, when the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors as a display mode, a blinking display mode using a special color that can be displayed only when the temporary stop is being performed is used. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a small hit (S251: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S254). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuating time counter 203di is larger than 0) (S254: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuating process is executed (S254: Yes). S255).

  In the first special symbol change execution process (S255), the variable display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 is changed (updated) during the period in which the first special symbol is changing. Is performed. Then, when the process of S255 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first variation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation execution process (S255) is 0 (S256). If it is determined in the processing that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S257), and the processing shifts to the processing of S259 described later.

  In the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the change time specified for the first special symbol in the change display has elapsed, the change display is stopped in the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol being executed in a display mode indicating a detachment is performed. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S256 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S254 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S254: No), that is, when it is determined that the present time is not the special figure 1 fluctuation. Then, the first special symbol change start process is executed (S258). In the first special symbol variation start process (S258), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined that a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (fluctuation) is executed. The first special symbol change start process (S258) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the first special symbol change start process (S258), after determining in the process of S256 that the special figure 1 is changing (S256: No), or performing the first special symbol change stop process (S257). After the execution, next, a fluctuation process (S259 to S263) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed for change. If it is determined in the process of S259 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S259: No), it means that the current state is that the special figure 2 is not changing. Next, a second special symbol change start process for executing a new lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed (S260), and this process ends.

  In the second special symbol change start process (S260), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203b, a jackpot determination or selection of a variation pattern based on the retained data is performed. Processing is executed. In the second special symbol change start process (S260), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203i (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON.

  On the other hand, in the process of S259, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is changing now (S259: Yes), then the second The special symbol change execution process is executed (S261). The contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. However, the same processing as the first special symbol variation executing process (S255) described above is performed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

  Then, when the second special symbol fluctuation executing process (S261) is completed, it is determined whether the current value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S262). : Yes), a second special symbol change stop process is executed (S263), and the process is thereafter terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not 0 in the process of S262 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and the present process ends.

  The second special symbol change stop processing (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132, but is specified for the second special symbol during the change display as in the first special symbol change stop processing (S257). When the fluctuating time has elapsed, a process of stopping the fluctuating display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In the second special symbol change stop processing (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a departure. Processing is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or miss. Is performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In the first special symbol variation process, a variation process for the first special symbol (S254 to S258) and a variation process for the second special symbol (S259 to S263) are executed. Therefore, when it is possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process relating to the first special symbol is executed (prioritized) before the variation process relating to the second special symbol. In this way, by setting the processing order of each special symbol clearly, even if the timing of the stop of the change of the first special symbol and the timing of the stop of the change of the second special symbol are the same, the priority is given to the first. One special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation process relating to the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variation process relating to the second special symbol, but the variation process relating to the second special symbol is not limited thereto. The processing may be configured to be executed prior to the fluctuation processing relating to the first special symbol.

  In addition, in the set game state, a variation process for a special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed may be configured to be preferentially executed, and the player may be changed according to the set game state. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the user is executed is switched, a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the fluctuation process is executed may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from being lost (discarded) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the first special symbol change start process (S258), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S258).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S352). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd is decremented by 1 (S353). ).

  Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after the subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. The processing for sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, the first special symbol big hit determination processing is executed (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described later in detail, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set game state, a big hit determination is made as to whether or not a big hit is made.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the hit determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

  The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (S358). ). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S358: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S358 that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (S358: No), the game state is the normal state, and thus the processing is terminated as it is. As described above, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, that is, when the time reduction is in progress, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON, so that the start is performed during the time reduction when the fluctuation stops. It is possible to determine whether the change is a fluctuation, and to update the time saving termination condition (subtract the value of the time reduction counter 203h) when the fluctuation stops.

  After executing the above-described processing of S359, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether or not the final change is the end condition of the time saving state. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S361), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S360 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1, the processing is not the final change of the time saving gaming state, and thus the present processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S451). Then, in order to determine whether or not the end condition of the time saving is satisfied and the state is in a standby state, that is, whether or not the final variation of the time saving is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end is determined. It is determined whether the standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S452). When it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is on (that is, the second special symbol is undergoing the final fluctuation of the time-saving) (S452: Yes), the time-saving state period set this time ends. Therefore, the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S453), and the time saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set to off (S454). Next, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S452 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), the process is not in a state where the final variation of the time-saving status is being executed, and the processes of S453 to S456 are skipped. The process proceeds to S457.

  As described above, in a state of waiting for the end of the time reduction state (a state in which the final variation of the time reduction state has started in the other special symbol), the game is performed before the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained. By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, until the change of the special symbol in which the final change of the time-saving state is executed ends, the time-saving game state with the other special symbol ends The problem of executing a game based on the game can be eliminated. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  When the processing of S452 or S453 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the big hit determination value based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). Then, the lottery result (judgment result) is obtained (S457). Then, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S458). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S458: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON to indicate the jackpot winning of the first special symbol. (S459). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot, in addition to the information indicating the presence or absence of the jackpot. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the processing of S459, information indicating the big hit is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol in the big hit flag 203i.

  Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S460), and based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set ( S461), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S458 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S458: No), a symbol that is not the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and the process ends. I do.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot has been set (S551). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made is based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is turned on for the first special symbol. The big hit flag 203i is set on in the processing of S459 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 121).

  In the processing of S551, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S551: Yes), the big hit type selection 4 table 202db, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 and Is determined on the basis of (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is obtained (S553), and the current gaming state (normal state, hiding state) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. , The variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc corresponding to the “probable variation state” is read out (S554).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S553 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the process of S554 (S555), and the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 is selected. Based on this, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S556).

  Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S557), and the start of the change of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S558). Is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di (S559), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S551 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the big hit flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the process of S552 is performed. The process skips to step S553.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change executing process (S255). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), the process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and the special interrupted due to winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol are performed. A process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

  In the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, at the time of winning a small hit in one special symbol, if the other special symbol is in a variable display, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from a small hit winning to a small hit game). (A period until the end of the small hit game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period elapses (after the end of the small hitting game), the other special symbol change is restarted again.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation where one special symbol change is ended during one small hitting game and a game which is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Further, based on the fact that one of the special symbol lottery has won the small hit game, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery will not be discarded, for example, by winning a small hit, it will be a big win It is possible to prohibit (suppress) occurrence of a situation where a lottery result (a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small win) is discarded.

  In the process of S751, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S751: Yes), a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S752), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to OFF (S753), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is decremented by 1 (S754), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S755), and this processing is ended. .

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation execution process (See S255 in FIG. 119), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123). It is configured to Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, “15000” is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, and the value becomes 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S751 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S751: No), that is, when it is determined that the small special lottery is not won in the second special symbol lottery Skips the processing of S752 and S753 and shifts to the processing of S754.

  Next, a first special symbol change stop process (S257), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop process (S257). The first special symbol change stop process (S257) is performed when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is "0", that is, the change time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is present. This is the process executed when the time has elapsed.

  When the first special symbol change stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S851). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set on for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set on (S852), A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on is set (S853).

  Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S854), and the value of the special symbol 2 variable time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). Thereby, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (the special symbol 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure (the departure symbol). (Fixed display).

  After the processing of S855, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to ON (S856), and when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S856: Yes), the above-described processing is performed. In order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S854, the big hit flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to OFF (S857). ), Delete the storage information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S858), and shift to the processing of S859. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S856 that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processing of S857 and 808 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S859.

  In the process of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won by the special symbol change is set (see 809). Then, the jackpot flag 203i, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag corresponding to the first special symbol are set. 203dl, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is turned off, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current game state is a big hit (big hit game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S861). The gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to separately store a gaming state (normal state, time saving state) relating to a lottery game and a gaming state relating to a winning game (medium hit, small hit). By executing the processing of S861, the gaming state (normal state, time-saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the big hit and the gaming state indicating that the big hit is being performed are stored.

  With such a configuration, at the end of the big hit game, the gaming state set at the timing of winning the big hit can be determined.

  When the process of S861 is completed, a special figure 1 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the first special symbol is set (S863), and the first special symbol display device is set. At step 37, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, which is variable displayed, is executed (S864), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S851 that the big hit flag 203i has not been set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update processing (S862) is executed, and the above-described processing of S863 is performed. Move on to processing. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S862) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), the process (S859 to S864) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. If the current lottery result is a jackpot (S851: Yes), the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result will be off (S854). As described above, in the process of stopping and displaying (fixing display) one special symbol with a symbol indicating a big hit, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, it is possible to simultaneously perform the process. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol changes to be executed.

  That is, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation process related to the first special symbol and the variation process related to the second special symbol are sequentially executed, the variation process is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. The second special symbol variation process (forced stop process) is executed within the variation process related to the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing when the variation process related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing relating to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and to smoothly execute the processing.

  In this embodiment, at the timing when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit, the other special symbol is configured to perform the process of forcibly stopping at the symbol indicating the separation. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) ( In S458 of FIG. 121: Yes), the change of the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special change that does not win a jackpot for the other special symbol forcibly removed and stopped until the change of the jackpot of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the change in the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when one of the special symbols has won the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the big hit has been won.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Without limiting, for example, until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, the other special symbol change is interrupted, and after the big hit game ends, the interrupted special symbol change may be restarted. good. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discard of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

  In addition, in the case of controlling the other special symbol variation being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is changed according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol, when the lottery of the second special symbol is out of order (out of change), the lottery is performed. During the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for discarding the result and forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation, executing a forced stop process for indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

  In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the player is interested in whether a new second special symbol change is executed or the interrupted second special symbol change is resumed. A game can be played. Further, when such a configuration is used, a configuration is provided in which a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the status of the second special symbol (whether or not being interrupted) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol is performed. Good.

  Next, referring to FIG. 125, one of the special symbol change stop processing (first special symbol change stop processing (see S151 in FIG. 119) and second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132)) Is described (S862 (S1661)). FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)), when the gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed to the normal state. Execute the process of transitioning to the state. In the following description, a process in the case where the change of the first special symbol is stopped will be described. However, a similar process is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

  When the time saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, the variation of the special symbol executed this time starts to vary during the time saving game. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, it is determined that the fluctuation has started during the time saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103), and the processing shifts to S2104. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), the process of S2102 to S2106 is skipped because it is not a fluctuation stop that triggers updating of the time saving state. Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

  As described above, at the start of the change of the special symbol, if the gaming state is the time reduction state, the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type is set to ON to reduce the value of the time reduction counter 203h when the change is stopped. Can be. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be set until the final change of the time-saving game state stops. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a maximum period.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the change is not performed until the small hit game ends. It is configured not to restart. Then, during the small hit game, a V prize is generated, a big hit is awarded, and after the big hit game ends, the temporarily stopped first special symbol resumes the change. Further, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 137, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the jackpot game is started. Since the subtraction flag 203dk in FIG. 1 is off, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, when the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the big win game due to the V winning is stopped changing, the remaining short time count is not subtracted. With such a configuration, in addition to the prescribed time period set by the jackpot type, the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special figure is also set to the time reduction game, which is an advantageous period for the player. The time saving state can be set to be as long as possible. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the process of S2104, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104). When it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S2104: Yes), that is, the change of the special symbol of this time is the final change of the time saving, and the second special symbol (the other special symbol) has If the next change has not been started since the last change, the game state is shifted to the normal state, so that the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF (S2105), and the game state is stored. The normal state is set in the area 203g (S2106). Then, the process shifts to the process of S2107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the state in which the final change of the time-saving game is not executed, that is, the state where the time-saving state is continued. Therefore, the processing in S2105 to S2106 described above is skipped, and the flow shifts to processing in S2107. As described above, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the fluctuation that is the final fluctuation of the time reduction game is stopped, the fluctuation (the final fluctuation to the next fluctuation) exceeding the specified number of the time reduction gaming state is executed in the other special symbol. It is determined whether or not the game has been executed, and if not executed, the game state is shifted. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game without a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When any of the processes in S2101, S2104, and S2106 ends, the flow shifts to the process in S2107. In the processing of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the game state is set (S2107), and this processing ends.

  Next, the second special symbol change start process (S260), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start process (S260).

  When the second special symbol change start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) executed immediately before this process is executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). )) To determine whether or not a jackpot has been won.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), various kinds of processing for starting the change of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol and the second special symbol big hit symbol is displayed. After the special symbol is removed and the stop symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, the execution of a new second special symbol change is prohibited. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation process related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the processing of S951 (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, the second special symbol change start processing (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

  This is because the lottery (first special) of the first special symbol executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). Only when the jackpot is won in the symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), if the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol is thereafter obtained. The big hit game is started based on the big hit information (big hit scenario) set in the big hit determination processing (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the big hit game is performed by the processing in S251 of the special symbol change processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the process is completed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the change process of the other special symbol based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, and thus the control process executed by the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly displayed (stopped with a missing symbol) and the other special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to prevent a new change (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, and the other special symbol change process is performed. Is skipped once, but other configurations may be used.

  That is, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit lottery), the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) does not win a big hit until the big hit game based on the big hit lottery ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing a jackpot game is executed in a main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 described later, FIG. The variation stop flag 203df may be set to be off.

  With this configuration, even if the timing for turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit game is executed. The execution of the change (lottery) of the new second special symbol can be prohibited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON, the variation of the second special symbol is performed. The processing is skipped, that is, a new fluctuation is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on. If it has been set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol for exclusive use.

  In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. A period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed, and a period until reaching a specific timing during the jackpot game without executing the lottery of the second special symbol may be configured. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

  In addition, the contents of the above-described variation processing for each special symbol are configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device is provided. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the 81 main display area Dm can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the variable effect during the forced stop using the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is also good.

  In this way, the second special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, using the symbols (the third symbol and the fourth symbol) which are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols. Even in the case where the fluctuation effect is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol fluctuation has been forcibly stopped.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, when the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol (S951: No in FIG. 126), The processing of S953 to S959 is executed, and the process proceeds to S960 described later. The processing of S953 to S959 is different from the processing of S351 to S357 of the first special symbol variation start processing (S258 of FIG. 120) by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd and the first special symbol holding. The value of the ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S356), and the second special symbol holding ball number The counter 203de, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) Since they are the same except for the change, the description is omitted.

  Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S960 to S963, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is changed to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl with respect to each processing of S358 to S361 of the first special symbol change start processing (S258 in FIG. 120). Except for the point described above, the description is omitted because it is the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the gaming machine performs the change of the first special symbol and the change of the second special symbol at the same time, it is necessary to execute the same processing at the start of the change of both special symbols. Thus, in the other special symbol, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of remaining working hours is not subtracted.

  Next, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. And some other processing has been added.

  The second special symbol big hit determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1051 corresponding to the processing of S451, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S452 to S461. In the processing of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the processing of the above, when the target is changed from the special figure 1 (first special design) to the special figure 2 (second special design) and the lottery result of the special design is out of order The difference is that the executed processing is changed. Since other points are the same, the description is omitted.

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), when it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1062), and this process ends. I do.

  The special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062) is processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big hit, that is, a small hit or a deviation. Although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 128, when the lottery result is out of order, the same processing as the processing of S462 of the above-described first special symbol big hit determination processing (S356 of FIG. 121) is executed, If the lottery result is a small hit, a process corresponding to the small hit winning is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062).

  In the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1062), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1057 of the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see S955 in FIG. 127)) is a small hit. (S1151).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1151 that the small hit has been won (S1151: Yes), the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1153). ) Then, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1154), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1151, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of place (S1151: No), the out of place of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1155), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1062 in FIG. 128) executed as one of the second special symbol change start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126), that is, the change of the special symbol (lottery) When it is determined that the small hit is won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the small hit, the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON, and the setting status of the small hit flag 203dg at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol , It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small win.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S959).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following points. In the processing of S1251 corresponding to the processing of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and S552 to S559. In the respective processes of S1252 to S1256 and S1258 to S1260 corresponding to the processes up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (the variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. 2 is different from that of FIG. 2 in that the processing of the variation pattern selection processing (S1257) is added. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 130, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern executed in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (S959), which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (S260 in FIG. 126). The contents of the selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) will be described.

  When the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351). In the process of S1351, a determination is made based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S959 of FIG. 127).

  In the process of S1351, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained (S1352), and the obtained small hit type counter C5 is obtained. The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1353). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one small hit type, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the small hit type, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined for the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1352 and S1353. May be configured so as to select a different small hit type by the above processing.

  As described in the present embodiment, although there is only one small hit type, the processing of S1352 and S1353 is used so that, for example, during the development period of the pachinko machine 10, the specification of the game is changed. Even if it is changed, it is possible to easily respond to the change.

  When the process of S1353 is completed, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state is read (S1354), and a small hitting application is performed based on the read variation pattern selection table and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected (S1355). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the small hit fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S1355 is set (S1356), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1351 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (is out of place) (S1351: No), the process in the case where the lottery result is out of place (S1357 to S1359) is executed. In the process of S1357, first, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the game state is read (S1357), a variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1358), and a variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 sets the fluctuation pattern command (S1359), and ends this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the content of the second special symbol change executing process (S261), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change executing process (S261). In the present embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery is configured not to win a small hit, in the second special symbol variation executing process (S261), the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (S261) is performed. In contrast to S255 in FIG. 123), is a flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when a small hit is won (a small hit game executed) in the other special symbol set to ON? The difference is that the process of determining the special symbol is omitted, and the other points are the same except that the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and the detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to win the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined that the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (the small hit game is executed). A flag (for example, special figure 2 temporary stop flag) for indicating is provided, and in the second special symbol variation executing process, the same process as the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123). Should be executed.

  Next, the second special symbol change stop process (S263), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change stop processing (S263). In the second special symbol change stop processing (S263), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the jackpot is changed, and that the process of setting a flag for stopping the change of the other special symbol is omitted.

  That is, the point that the process of S852 in the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 of FIG. 124) is deleted, and the process target of S851 and S853 to S864 are changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513). And that when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S1551: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1558) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) executed in the second special symbol change stop processing (see FIG. 132) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564). This special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) is a special symbol corresponding to a case where the lottery result acquired in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than the big hit (small hit or miss). This is to execute the fluctuation stop processing.

  When the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON, (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1652), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON is set (S1652). S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). Then, when the special lamp 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special map 1) has been temporarily stopped (doing) is set. A display command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the process of S1653 is completed, a small hitting scenario (opening operation scenario for small hitting) corresponding to the small hitting game is set (S1654), the small hitting flag 203dg is set to off (S1655), and the gaming state is set. The hit information indicating that the small hit is being played (small hit) is stored in the storage area 203g (S1656), and the second special symbol is stopped (fixed display) with a symbol indicating the small hit (small hit symbol). Is set (S1657), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 stops changing (fixed display) with a small hit symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) for performing a process such as subtraction of the number of remaining working hours is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the small hit flag 203dg is set to off in the process of S1651 (S1651: No), this indicates that the second special symbol is to be stopped (fixed display) with a symbol indicating a departure (a departure symbol). Is set (S1659), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated from the second symbol to stop changing (determination display) (S1660). Then, the time saving update process is executed (S1661 (S863)), and this process ends.

  It should be noted that the time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) uses the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time saving update processing (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG. Since the only difference is that the subtraction flag is changed to the two subtraction flag 203dl, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first The special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other special symbol is displayed. Since the change display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when a symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although the display is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a description will be given of the start winning process 4 (S152), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning processing 4 (S152). In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), it is determined whether a ball has entered (start winning) the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 1645. The obtained counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol holding ball storing area up to the maximum number of holdings (up to four for each of the special figure entrance 64 and the second entrance 1645). This is a process of storing the data in each of 203 db.

  When the respective counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203db, processing (so-called pre-reading processing) for predicting a result of the determination of the success or failure, a selected variation pattern, or the like is performed in advance. . Hereinafter, the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described.

  In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (start winning) the special figure entrance port 64 which is the first starting port (S1751). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (the starting prize has been awarded) (S1751: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is obtained (S1752). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves with respect to the special figure entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added by 1 (S1754), and the sound lamp control device 113 In step S1755, a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of special figure entrances 64 (the number of lottery rights reserved for the first special symbol) is set.

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is read. Each of them is held (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of held balls 203a (S1756).

  Next, a first prefetching process is executed (S1775). The first pre-reading process (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135. However, the hit / fail judgment result and the variation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. , A process of determining the type of stop or the like is executed. Note that, in the present embodiment, a process is performed to determine the result of determination as to whether or not it is valid, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like, based on each newly stored counter value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the result of determining whether or not all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the determined fluctuation pattern, The processing for determining the type of stop or the like may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, that is, when a lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (prize information) is determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the lottery right of the second special symbol (prize information) is obtained. ) May be determined in advance.

  Then, after executing the processing of S1775, the processing of S1758 is executed next. If it is determined in the processing of S1751 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S1751: No), or in the processing of S1753, the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is the value (S1753: No), the process skips the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and shifts to the process of S1758.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added, the first prefetching process (S1775) based on the added information on winning (winning information) is performed. It is configured to execute, but is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined in the process of S1753 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is the upper limit number (4) (S1753) : No), that is, when a ball is thrown into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, the first look-ahead process (S1775) can be executed. You may comprise so that it may be possible. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to add an additional value. It is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of balls reaching the upper limit.

  Next, the processes in S1758 to S1764 are the same as the processes performed for winning the ball to the first starting port (special figure entrance 64) executed in the processes in S1751 to S1775. Is only a process executed for the second entrance 1645, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the present embodiment, since it is configured such that the small win can be won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1763.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a description will be given of the first prefetching process (S1775), which is one of the startup winning processes 4 (S152 of FIG. 134). FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the first prefetching process (S1775).

  In the first prefetching process (S1775 in FIG. 135), first, a random number counter per first counter C1 and a counter per second type C1 which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1822).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading hold storage area, the result of the determination as to whether or not the answer is valid is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is based on the timing when a new hold storage occurs (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since a time lag occurs at the timing of execution, it is possible to predict the gaming state (probability state of a special symbol) set at the timing of executing the jackpot determination based on the newly held winning information this time. Because it is difficult.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). And the fluctuation time set in accordance with the result of the lottery of each special symbol is set so as to be variable depending on the number of stored memories (number of reserved symbols) at the time of the special symbol lottery. This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of the game starts.

  If it is determined that the result of the determination in the process of S1823 is a jackpot (a jackpot only in the low-probability state, a jackpot only in the high-probability state, a jackpot in any of the low-probability state and the high-probability state) (S1823: Yes), A first winning command indicating a winning condition (a gaming state set at the time of a lottery) and a jackpot type in the case of winning is set (S1824), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of the high probability state or the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the outage is set. (S1825), this process ends.

  Here, the first winning command set in the processing of S1824 or S1825 includes common information as information in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the above-mentioned result (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result of the success or failure). The information is also set to include information for indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (look-ahead effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a preview symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the determination to the player as to whether or not it is possible can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading process is performed, the result of the discrimination is determined by determining whether the special symbol is in the high probability state and the result of the determination in the low probability state of the special symbol. It is configured to set the winning command based on the determination value. For example, even if the special symbol is in the high probability state or the low probability state, the determination value ( (A value of the first random number counter C1), and a winning command indicating a special symbol big hit may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing the special symbol lottery based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. You may be comprised so that execution may be performed. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing pre-reading, the game state at the time of starting the change can be determined by determining the order of change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed. In the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a is not limited to this. Information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the (hold storage) is set as a winning command, and it is configured to predict a winning / failing determination result based on information included in the winning command received on the sound lamp control device 113 side. good.

  With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It is preferable to configure so as to perform analysis (prediction of the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of the determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem that a result of the prefetching process executed without a title is illegally obtained by a player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the second prefetching process (S1764), which is one process of the start winning process 4 (S152 of FIG. 134). FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1764). The second prefetching process (S1764 in FIG. 134) is based on the fact that the above-described first prefetching process (S1775 in FIG. 133) has a ball (start winning) in the first starting port (special figure entrance port 64). The processing is to determine (read ahead) the pending data (prize information) in advance and perform various determinations. On the other hand, the target to be determined is determined to be the second start from the prize information based on the fact that the first start port has won the prize. Only the point is changed to the winning information based on the fact that the opening (the second entrance opening 1645) has won, and the other processes are the same, so that the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, details of the V passage processing 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V passage processing 4 (S153). In the V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment, a small hit is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the V passing process (see S153 in FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the small hit When a V prize occurs during a game, a process of setting off the time-saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description is omitted.

  In the V passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and when it is determined that the V validity period is in progress (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (S1571). ). If it is determined that the small hit is occurring (S1571: Yes), the above-described processes of S1504 to S1506 are executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S1572. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is not occurring (S1571: No), the processing of S1504 to S1506 and S1572 to S1575 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the processing of S1572, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is on (S1572). If it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S1572: Yes), a new time-saving state period is set after the end of the jackpot game awarded from the V winning. 203dm is turned off (S1573). As described above, when a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time-saving game, and a V prize is generated and a big hit is given, a new time-saving period is given. Therefore, when a V prize is won, it is possible to prevent a problem that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF and a transition to the normal game state immediately after a new time saving period is set.

  After executing the processing of S1572 or S1573, the flow shifts to the processing of S1574. In the processing of S1574, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574). That is, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol has been changed in parallel with the current change of the second special symbol, and the change of the first special symbol has not been stopped and has been temporarily stopped. . When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set off (S1575), and the process shifts to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process of S1575 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed at the time of winning the small hit, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, the configuration is such that the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the end of the small hit game is restarted. However, in the present embodiment, a V prize may be given during the small hit game and a big hit may be awarded. During the big hit game, the lottery of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the end of the jackpot game is restarted. However, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining hours is reduced when the fluctuation is stopped. However, there is a problem that the number is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the V prize occurs during the small win, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time reduction period is not reduced when the temporarily stopped fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, in addition to the period in which the time reduction is specified, the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped symbol can be set as the time reduction period for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to set a longer time reduction period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide joy for a longer period.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, the variation of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) outside the fluctuation. In addition, when a small hit is won, the change of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the small hit is won, the change of the other special symbol is changed. May be configured to be discarded. With this configuration, after a jackpot game is awarded due to a V prize, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot due to the temporarily stopped fluctuation and giving an excessive privilege to the player.

  In addition, when one of the special symbols wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol wins a small jackpot, whereby the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation can be discarded. Therefore, more various game characteristics can be provided to the player.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in parallel, and when the small hit is won, the other symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, if a V prize occurs during the small hit game and a big hit is awarded, the symbol temporarily stopped after the end of the big hit game resumes the change. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the time reduction state at the start of the fluctuation, the flag indicating that the value of the time reduction counter is scheduled to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation is set to ON, and the fluctuation is set. When stopped, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated.

  Therefore, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is set by turning off the subtraction flag when a V winning occurs, and the fluctuation is restarted. When the fluctuation is stopped, the time reduction counter is not decremented. That is, when the symbol that has been temporarily stopped resumes fluctuation and stops, the shortened time period is not updated. A fluctuation period can also be set. Therefore, it is possible to set the time shortening period that is advantageous to the player as long as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot given by the V prize is set to one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpots may be provided. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player. With such a configuration, the player can execute the game while not only determining whether or not a V prize is generated but also being interested in the jackpot type to be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that one small hit type is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be provided. Further, the lottery of the first special symbol may be configured to win a small hit. By providing a plurality of small hit types in this way, a player can execute a game while expecting a small hit that is more likely to generate a V winning.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be changed in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed (so-called winning order variation). In addition, when comprised in this way, it is good to comprise so that the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol may differ in the degree of advantage of the big hit type to be won. With such a configuration, the player can execute a game while desiring to win a jackpot when a lottery drawing of a special figure that is more advantageous is being performed. Games can be offered.

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when a small hit is won, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. However, by providing a plurality of small hit types, the first special symbol is provided. The small hits for discarding the fluctuation of the symbol (forcibly stopping due to the deviation) and the small hits for the temporary stop may be set separately. In the case of such a configuration, when a change in the other special symbol wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous for the player, it is good to execute an effect that prompts the player to discard it. . With such a configuration, various game characteristics can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, two types of game states are set (normal state, time-saving state), but three types (normal state, time-saving state, probability change state) may be used, or four types (normal state, time-saving state, (Probable change state, latent state). Also, two or less types may be used.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the game is executed with the aim of causing the game ball to flow down the left area of the game board 13. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right area of the game board 13 is not limited to this. May be executed. Then, the switching of the game method may be set based on the game state. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute a guidance display mode for indicating a current game method to a player. By this guide display mode, the player can grasp not only the game method but also the current game state.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the update timing of the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the number of times of saving time, and the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied are made different. As a configuration, after the time-saving state is updated, a configuration is used that determines whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied.However, without being limited to this, for example, it is first determined whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied. It may be configured to determine and execute the update processing of the time saving state when the termination condition is not satisfied. In addition, although the process of subtracting the number of time savings is performed after the special figure lottery is executed, the special figure lottery may be executed after the number of time savings is subtracted.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol final change in the time saving state (special symbol change executed in a state where the time saving end condition is satisfied), the special symbol change is performed. Is configured to end the time saving state at the timing when the stop display is performed, but is not limited to this. For example, if a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving until the small hitting game ends. The configuration may be such that the state does not end. That is, in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, if the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win), the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is preferable to change the timing for determining the establishment (delay at the end of the small hitting game). This allows the duration of the time reduction state to be varied based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end. .

  It should be noted that other than the above-mentioned contents (small win) may be used as the above-mentioned switching condition. For example, in a state where the time-saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining the establishment of the time-saving end condition, the normal symbol fluctuation The execution condition or the fact that the game per game is being executed may be set as the switching condition, and at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition, the special symbol reservation or the ordinary symbol stored and stored. The fact that the winning information included in the hold includes specific information (winning information) may be set as the switching condition. By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Combination modification of the Puden winning device 640>
Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the special power operation port 643 is provided in the general power winning apparatus 640, and when a ball that has won the general power winning apparatus 640 during the per game drawing wins in the special power operation port 643, an accessory is provided. Configure to run a hit game. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to solve a problem that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, a problem that the game motivation is reduced due to the monotonization of the game during the time reduction state. A plurality of special power operation ports (special power operation port 643, second special power operation port 1643) are provided in the general power winning device 640, and the V jackpot game is easily executed according to the special power operation port where the ball wins. It was configured to be able to execute a game and a bonus hit game in which the V jackpot game is hardly executed.

  Further, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted) when the execution of the game per accessory is triggered. However, since the period of the time reduction state is configured to be long, it is advantageous for the player to execute a lot of games per character during the time reduction state, and the game during the time reduction state becomes monotonous. Was. On the other hand, in the above-described third embodiment, the V jackpot type is configured to be selected based on the fact that the ball has won the special power operation port 643, and the bonus hit type is determined according to the selected V jackpot type. When the game is executed, any of a pattern for interrupting a special symbol change being executed, a pattern for discarding, and a pattern for discarding and also terminating the time reduction state is configured to be executed. By providing a new game property that allows the player to select whether or not to execute a winning game, the game during the time reduction state is prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, in the above-described first to third embodiments, the special power prize device 640 is provided with the special power operation port 643, and when a ball is awarded to the special power operation port 643, a game per accessory is executed. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a second entrance 1645 serving as a trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the first embodiment to the third embodiment are different from the first embodiment. The same playability is configured to be realized by a so-called simultaneous fluctuation type specification in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, as shown in FIG. 138, based on the configuration of the general winning award device 640 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (see FIG. 88), the second special power operating port is used. A second ball entrance 1645 is provided in place of the 1643, so that a ball won in the general winning device 640 can enter the special power operation port 643 or the second ball entrance 1645. Is different from the other embodiments.

  Then, the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and the ball wins in the special power operation port 643. In this case, the V winning device 65 is opened with the same content as the bonus game executed based on the above.

  With such a configuration, when the V winning device 65 is opened by the small hitting game, the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the end condition of the time reduction state is performed similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment. When the V winning device 65 is opened for the bonus per game, the element relating to the time saving end condition is not updated. Therefore, the number of times the V winning device 65 has been opened and the number of times the element that satisfies the time saving end condition is updated no longer match, so that the player is made to grasp the period until the time saving state ends. It can be difficult.

  In this modification, an example in which the same end condition as that of the above-described fourth embodiment is set as the end condition of the time saving state is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time saving termination condition may be satisfied even when the number of times reached reaches a specific number (for example, 50 times). With this configuration, whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied first based on the lottery of the second special symbol or whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the bonus per game is determined first. Can be played while the player is predicted.

  Further, in this case, as an effect to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, based on the time saving end condition that is established based on the lottery of the second special symbol and the execution of the per-accessory game. A suggestion effect for indicating to the player which of the time reduction end conditions to be satisfied is a situation in which the time reduction end condition is likely to be satisfied (for example, an effect indicating the number of times until each time reduction end condition is satisfied). May be configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know the period until any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, so that it is possible to make the player feel excited about the flow destination of the ball that has won the general winning award device 640.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in the present modification, the special power operation port 643 and the second entrance port 1645 are provided in the general winning award device 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special power operation port 1643 is also provided. The configuration may be such that the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 wins any one of the above three balls.

  Further, in the case of using the configuration of this modification, the small hitting game is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and the ball wins in the special power operation port 643. The process for the special symbol change that is being executed may be different from the case where the special hit game is executed based on, for example, when the small hit game is executed, the special hit game is executed. It is easier to discard the special symbol change that is being executed than in the case, and to make it easier to interrupt the special symbol change that is being executed when the small hit game is executed than when the small hit game is executed. It is good to configure.

  In this modification, a ball may be won to the special power operation port 643 in a state where the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are being executed. In this case, the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are interrupted. Then, after the game per bonus is finished, the suspended first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation are restarted. If the second special symbol change after the resumption is a small win, the small bonus game is executed based on the small win, and the first special symbol change being executed is interrupted, or , It is configured to be discarded.

  As described above, in the present modified example in which the first special symbol change (lottery), the second special symbol change (lottery), the ball prize in the special power operation port 643, and the three types of games can be simultaneously executed, It is possible to interrupt the first special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation time longer than the second special symbol fluctuation is easily selected in a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game regarding the timing and the period during which the first special symbol change is interrupted during the time saving state.

  Further, in this modification, the ball winning in the general winning award device 640 is configured to be able to win in the special power operation port 643 or the second ball opening port 1645, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play the game aiming at the second ball entry port 1645 or the special power operation port 643. Specifically, the special power activation device 640 includes a special power activation device. An opening 643 may be provided, and a second entrance 1645 may be provided in the right area (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of selecting a game method.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a method of setting various commands for outputting the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 side. The difference is that they are different and that a part of the control processing executed when the voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 has been changed. is there. The same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the effect of the effect (V rush) according to the special symbol change in the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is changed to the remaining period of the time reduction state (the time reduction). In order to variably set according to the special symbol fluctuation executed during the state), the sound lamp control device is set based on information (state command) output from the main control device 110 when the time saving state is set. The period until the time saving state ends on the 113 side, that is, the number of time savings (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) set as the end condition of the time saving state is stored, and information (fluctuation pattern command) indicating the start of the special symbol fluctuating is stored. When received, by executing a process of updating the number of time savings, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the remaining time in the time saving state.

  With such a configuration, the first embodiment in which the timing of updating the number of times saved (at the start of special symbol fluctuation) and the timing of determining whether the time reduction condition is satisfied (at the time of special symbol fluctuation stop) are different from each other. In the main controller 110 side, without setting a dedicated command, that is, a special symbol lottery such as a status command to be set when the game state is changed or a variation pattern command to be set when the variation of the special symbol is started. By using only the command indicating the content of the game using, the remaining period of the time reduction state can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the effect according to the lapse of the period during the time reduction state can be set. Was something.

  However, in the control content used in the above-described first embodiment, the update state of the game state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 having no backup function. Therefore, for example, when the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during a period in which the time saving state is set (a power failure occurs), and thereafter, the power supply is restarted, the audio lamp control device Various kinds of information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the 113 side are cleared (initialized), and there is a problem that the voice lamp control device 113 cannot determine the update state of the gaming state in the time saving state. .

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the main controller 110 executes the process of starting the special symbol variation (the process of setting the variation pattern command), a command indicating the update result of the number of time savings (the time savings command ) Is settable, and a command (time saving continuation command) for indicating the end determination result of the time saving state is set when executing the process of stopping the special symbol change during execution (the process of setting the fixed command). It is configured as follows.

  Then, the variation pattern command and the number of times saved command are configured to be output at the same timing, and the fixed command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is determined whether or not a command for the number of time savings has been received, and the current time saving status can be determined based on the determination result. When a command is received, it is determined whether a time saving continuation command is also received, and the current time saving status can be determined based on the determination result.

  With such a configuration, the status of the time saving state can be determined on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 based on a combination of the commands set by the main control device 110 and received by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if a power failure occurs during the symbol change display, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the status of the time saving state based on the command output from the main control device 110.

  In addition, since the configuration is such that the status of the time saving state is determined based on the combination of the commands received at the same timing, the main control device 110 side sets each command to indicate the status of the time saving state. Also, the types of commands set by main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of control processing in main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing contents of main controller in fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 139 to FIG. 141, a description will be given of the control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, which are different from the above-described first embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, a special symbol start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) is replaced with a special symbol change process (see S235 in FIG. 139) in place of the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41). The special symbol variation stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) is replaced with the normal symbol variation process 5 (see S106 in FIG. 48) instead of the process (see S208 in FIG. 45). (See FIG. 2), and the other points are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the number of the time reductions (the value of the time reduction counter 203h) is performed. ) Is updated (subtracted) (see S205 in FIG. 139), and a process for determining whether or not a condition for terminating the time-saving state when changing the special symbols is stopped (FIG. 45). (See S208).

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, in order to manage the status of the time saving state on the sound lamp control device 113 side, the status command output from the main control device 110 (the status command set in the process of S1916 in FIG. 56). ) And a fluctuation pattern command (the special figure fluctuation pattern command set in S506 of FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the special symbol starts to change or when the special symbol stops changing, in addition to the commands indicating the start and stop of the special symbol change, the state of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction) And the like to set various commands for indicating the status of the time saving state stored in the sound lamp control device 113 side (the sound lamp control device due to a power failure or the like). Even if the information stored in the RAM 223 of the 113 is erased), the status of the time reduction state (the number of remaining working hours) on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110 side. Is configured to be able to be grasped.

  First, the contents of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235). In the special symbol change start process 5 (S235), a process for updating the time saving state at the start of the special symbol change is different from the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the above-described first embodiment. Are different, and otherwise are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the above-described first embodiment, information indicating the processing content (update result) of the processing for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Since there is no need to perform this, a process (time saving) for temporarily storing whether or not the current special symbol change is the final change in the time saving state (until the special symbol change executed this time is stopped and displayed) is performed. The process of updating the value of the counter 203h and the process of setting the time reduction end flag 203j) are executed.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of time savings (remaining time savings) of the special symbol is set, and the command can be output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  The processing content of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 139. First, the same as the above-described special symbol change start process of the first embodiment (see S205 of FIG. 41). The processing from S301 to S308 is executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of S308 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, it is determined that the present time is in the time-saving state (S308: Yes), then the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371). ), It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S372).

  If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (is 1 or more), the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the subtraction, that is, a time-saving number command indicating the remaining number of working hours is set (S373). Then, the present process ends. The time reduction command set in the processing of S373 is the same as the special figure change pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol change pattern selection processing (see S307 in FIG. 43). An external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 55) is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113, the time-saving number command is also sent together with the reception of the fluctuation pattern command (special figure fluctuation pattern command) during the time-saving state. It is configured to determine whether or not it is received, and to determine the number of time savings (remaining time savings) corresponding to the current special symbol change based on the determination result.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the process of S372 in FIG. 139, the time saving number command is issued only when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after the update (after the subtraction) is 1 or more (S372: No). In the control process of the sound ramp control device 113, when the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time reduction state, the time reduction command is not received. Can be determined to be the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time saving state.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of S372, when it is determined that the value of the updated time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, when the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation of the time-saving state, the above-described process is performed. The time saving end flag 203j is set to ON as in the first embodiment (S311), and the process ends.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (more than 1), even if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0, the time-saving end flag is set. As long as 203j is set to ON, a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 at the special symbol change start timing (S308: Yes), the process of always subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203h is executed. Control processing can be shared.

  Further, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction (after the update) is greater than 0 (1 or more), the time saving number command is set, and after the subtraction (after the update). When the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the time reduction number command is not set. In addition, the time reduction command is set in the same process (special symbol variation start process) as the process of setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43). In the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (refer to FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, the main controller 110 is configured to output to the sound lamp controller 113 at the same timing. .

  With this configuration, when the fluctuation lamp command is received in the state where the time-saving state is set, the voice lamp control device 113 also determines whether or not the time-saving number command has been received. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state. In addition, when the time reduction command is received, it is possible to determine the remaining time (remaining time reduction) of the time reduction state updated by executing the special symbol change this time.

  Further, when the value of the updated time saving counter 203h becomes 0, that is, when the special symbol change executed this time is the final change in the time saving state, the time saving number command is not set. On the side of the sound ramp control device 113, when the variation pattern command is received in a state where the time saving state is set and when the command for the number of time savings is not received, it is determined that the final variation of the time saving state. Thus, an effect mode corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time saving state is set. As described above, when the final variation of the special symbol in the time reduction state (the final variation of the time reduction) is executed, the time reduction command is not set as the time reduction command but the time reduction command indicating zero remaining time reduction is set. With such a configuration, when the command for the number of time savings set in the main control device 110 cannot be received, for example, when the command cannot be normally received due to noise or the like, the time saving final change Will be performed.

  Therefore, without using the special effect data when the command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 cannot be normally received, and less than the actually set remaining working hours. Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times of remaining working hours 0, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give a player a sense of discomfort while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, as a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, the time-saving ending that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, four times). Although only the condition is provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol is changed, the end condition that is established based on the result of the special symbol lottery (specified by the special symbol lottery An end condition that is established when a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is won in the lottery result (for example, a small hit) of the game may be provided.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of ending conditions for ending the time-saving state, which of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied varies depending on the game content of the player. It is necessary to determine the update status until the end condition is satisfied with respect to the end condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the final change of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions that can be satisfied, even if any of the time-saving termination conditions are satisfied, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily determine that the current special symbol variation is the final variation of the time-saving state. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the special symbol change stop processing 5 (S238) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) differs from the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the above-described first embodiment in the update content of the time reduction state when the special symbol variation is stopped. And the other points are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special symbol variation stop process 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same processes as S801 and S802 as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the processing that the time-saving end flag 203j is not on (S802: No), it is next determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S871). Is large, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol change stopped and displayed this time is not the final change in the time reduction (S871: Yes), a time reduction continuation command indicating that the time reduction state is continued is set (S872) and described above. The same processing of S809 and S810 as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S871, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (S871: No), that is, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the processing of S872 is skipped and S809 is performed. Move to the processing of. In the process of S802, when it is determined that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation stopped and displayed this time is the final variation of the time reduction (S802: Yes), The same processing of S804 and S805 as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and then the processing of S809 and S810 is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processing of S806 to S810 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the special figure change command is set in the special symbol change stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping and displaying the special pattern change (fixed display). At the same time, it is configured to set a time saving continuation command. The special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command set in the special symbol change stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) are output to the external output executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 55). In the process (refer to S1801 in FIG. 55), it is output to the sound lamp control device 113 at the same timing. When receiving the special figure determination command in a state where the time saving state is set, the sound ramp control device 113 determines whether a time saving continuation command has been received, and based on the determination result, the current time stop display is performed. It is determined whether the special symbol variation is the final variation in the time reduction state (the final variation in the time reduction), and the effect form is set.

  Specifically, when the time reduction state is set and the audio lamp control device 113 receives the special figure determination command and the time reduction continuation command at the same timing, it indicates that the time reduction state is continued. In the case where only a special figure confirmation command is received, an effect mode for indicating that the time saving state is ended is set. In this way, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the current time saving state by combining a plurality of commands output from the main control device 110 at the same timing, the main control device 110 The types of commands set by main controller 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual commands are set to indicate the status of the time saving state.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol determination command and the time saving continuation command are set in the special symbol change stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140). Any command may be output at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the process (FIG. 55), and the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). , A special figure determination command and a time saving continuation command may be set within an interval of 4 milliseconds at which the external output processing (S1801) is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 is executed, since the previous external output process is executed, Although various commands set during the interval (4 milliseconds) are configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at one time (to be output as serial data), the present invention is not limited to this. When the special figure determination command is set, the output of the special figure determination command may be waited until the external output process (see S1801) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). With this configuration, it is possible to output the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing without setting them in the same process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S136) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136). This normal symbol change process 5 (S136) determines whether or not the current gaming state is a normal symbol high-probability state with respect to the above-described normal symbol change process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment. Are different from each other in that the processing is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and the state in which the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON are ordinary symbols. It is configured to be managed as information indicating the high probability state, and only the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more) indicates the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. This is different from the first embodiment that is managed as information.

  That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. In S235 of S139), the process of updating the time-saving counter 203h is simplified by reducing the value of the time-saving counter 203h to 0 by reducing the value of the time-saving counter 203h to 0. However, the difference is that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON in order to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the special symbol change is stopped and displayed. .

  Therefore, when the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the processes of S1101 to S1108, which are the same as the ordinary symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see S106 in FIG. 48), are executed. If it is determined in the processing of S1108 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, the time saving final time of the special symbol It is determined whether or not the symbol is fluctuating (S1171). If it is determined that the flag is set to ON (S1171: Yes), the normal symbol is in the high probability state, and the normal symbol variation of the above-described first embodiment is performed. The process in S1109, which is the same as the process (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed, then the processes in S1111 to S1114 are executed, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1171 that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), the current state is the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, and thus the first embodiment described above is performed. The same processing of S1110 to S1114 as the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1102 that the ordinary symbol is changing (S1102: Yes), the process of S1115 to S1118 is the same as the ordinary symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see S106 in FIG. 48). The process is executed, and in the process of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), a scenario operation per time-saving general drawing is set (S1120). Then, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set to start (S1121), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S1118: No), it is next determined whether or not the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON ( When it is determined that it is set to ON (S1172) (S1172: Yes), since the current state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48). The same processing of S1120 and S1121 as in (1) is executed, and this processing ends. In the processing of S1172, when it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), since the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol of the first embodiment described above is used. The same processing of S1119 and S1121 as the fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing ends.

  That is, in the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the length (dynamic display period) of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the normal symbol lottery result, Alternatively, the contents of the game per ordinary symbol (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) executed when a winning is achieved in the ordinary symbol lottery (general symbol lottery) are set differently according to the probability state of the ordinary symbol. In order to determine the probability state of an ordinary symbol, the setting of the time reduction end flag 203j is referred to in addition to the value of the time reduction counter 203h. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately determine the probability state of the ordinary symbol.

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 142 and FIG. 143, a control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the same as the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In relation to the processing, the special figure change start processing 5 (see S4254 in FIG. 142) is replaced with the special figure change start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the stop-related processing is replaced with the stop-related processing (see S4215 in FIG. 65). The processing 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) is different in that it is executed, and the other steps are the same. Detailed description of the same processing is omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, the types of commands output from the main control device 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and the time reduction state based on various commands output from the main control device 110 is added. It is configured to be able to determine the middle state (the number of remaining working hours) on the sound lamp control device 113 side. With this configuration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the time reduction state, and the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased. Even in this case, after the supply of power is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the actual state of the time saving state (remaining time reduction).

  First, the contents of the special figure change start process 5 (S4254) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure change start process 5 (S4254). This special figure change start processing 5 (S4254) is processing executed when a special figure change pattern command is received in the command discrimination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is a processing of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the diagram change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) in that the process content during the time saving state is changed, and is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure change start processing 5 (S4254) is executed, the same steps S4301 to S4305 as the special figure change start processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62) are executed, and this processing ends. I do. In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, that is, if a special figure variation pattern command is received while the time saving state is set (S4304: Yes), the current reception is performed. It is determined whether or not the received command includes a command for reducing the number of times (S4351).

  In the present embodiment, in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of main controller 110, audio ramp control is performed using serial data capable of storing a plurality of commands. It is configured to output a command to the device 113. Therefore, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main controller 110, when the special symbol variation pattern command and the time reduction command are set within the same process. In the same serial data, at least the special figure variation pattern command and the time reduction command are stored and output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S4351, it is determined whether or not the command received this time includes a command for reducing the number of time savings, that is, whether or not the serial data in which the special figure variation pattern command is stored includes the command for reducing the number of time savings (S4351). If it is determined that the number-of-times command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command received this time is the final variation in the time reduction state. Since it is not (time saving final variation), a display command for indicating that the vehicle is in the time saving state is set (S4306), and the special figure variation starting process of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62). The same processing of S4306 to S4308 as in ()) is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4351 that the received command does not include the command for reducing the number of time savings (S4351: No), the special symbol change corresponding to the current special figure change pattern command is the time change final change. A display command indicating the final change is set (S4352), and after the process proceeds to the above-described process of S4307, the process of S4308 is executed, and this process ends.

  With this configuration, when the special figure variation pattern command is received during the time reduction state, the type of the command received at the same time as the received special figure variation pattern command is determined, so that the status of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction) The number of times can be easily determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, the content of the stop-related process 5 (S4265) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related process 5 (S4265). This stop-related processing 5 (S4265) is different from the stop-related processing of the first embodiment (see S4215 in FIG. 65) in that the processing executed when a special figure determination command is received is changed. Are different. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the stop-related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure fixing command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that a special figure fixing command has not been received (S4601: No), The same processing as S4602 to S4611 as the stop-related processing (see S4215 in FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has been received (S4601: Yes), it is next determined whether a time saving continuation command has been received (S4631) and it is determined that the time saving continuation command has been received. If this has been done (S4631: Yes), a display command for fluctuation stop indicating continuation of working hours is set (S4632), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4602.

  If it is determined in the process of S4631 that the command for saving time has not been received, then it is determined whether a command for terminating the time saving has been received (S4633), and if it has been determined that the command for terminating the time saving has been received (S4633: yes). ), A display command for fluctuation stop indicating the end of the time saving state is set.

  As described above, when the special figure confirmation command is received, the time saving continuation command or the time saving end command is configured to be able to be received at the same time. Therefore, by executing the stop-related processing 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), The display mode (effect mode) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 depends on whether a time saving continuation command is received, a time saving end command is received, or no command is received. It can be set by making it variable. Therefore, a process for setting a display mode for fluctuation stop executed when a special figure determination command is received, a process for setting a display mode for indicating a status of a time reduction state (remaining time reduction), Can be executed in the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. In the above-described first embodiment, a game per a character is triggered by a game per a general figure executed when a win is made in a lottery of a normal symbol (in the general electric prize winning device 640 opened in a game per a general figure). While aiming for a ball to enter the special power operating port 643 provided), during the game per play (within the period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), the player goes to the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65. And the ball is won so that the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed by the player (special electric game).

  Then, the time-saving state in which the special electric game is executed is reached until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (four or fifteen times) (until the predetermined number of special symbol changes is stopped and displayed) or reaches the predetermined number of times. Until the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (before the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed), the special symbol is changed during the time saving state The longer the time, the longer the period in which the time reduction state is set (the time reduction period) can be increased, and the number of ordinary symbol lotteries executed during the time reduction period can be increased.

  Further, when the game per role is executed in response to the ball winning to the special power operation port 643 during the regular game per game, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is subtracted). The processing for interrupting the special symbol change (processing for subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol change) is performed after the end of the per-accessory game or the jackpot game ( After the end of the “V big hit game”, that is, when a condition that allows the execution of a new special symbol change is satisfied, the game is restarted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the execution period (time saving period) of the special electric game is variable depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol change and the interruption period of the special per game, so that the special electric game is performed. It was possible to make the middle player wish to select as long a fluctuation time as possible as a special symbol fluctuation, and to play the game eagerly to execute a lot of games per character. .

  However, during the special electric game, for example, during a period in which a normal symbol is fluctuating, or during a game per ordinary figure, a ball cannot be awarded to the ordinary electric prize winning device 640 (it is difficult to win). The closing period) is a period in which the game per accessory cannot be executed, and the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, so that the ball can be awarded to the electric accessory 640a. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a during the hitting game, that is, the period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is subtracted, but the disadvantageous period which is more disadvantageous to the player than the period in which the game per hit can be executed. It becomes.

  In addition, the special-period game in which the special symbol change is interrupted is an end condition (winning end condition) that is established when the number of winning balls in the V-winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (three), or The end condition (time end condition) that is satisfied when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the hit game is configured to end when any one of the end conditions is satisfied. In addition, according to the content of the game (whether the ball is fired) by the player during the per-accessory game, the per-accessory game ends when any one of the end conditions is satisfied.

  That is, in the first embodiment described above, in consideration of the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbol during the special electric game and the game state of the per-figure game, it is determined which end condition is satisfied with respect to the per-accessible per-game. The game had a playability to be selected. With this configuration, the disadvantageous period during the above-mentioned special electric game (the period in which the ordinary symbol fluctuates, the period in which the electric accessory 640a is closed for the game per ordinary figure) and the period in which the per-accompaniment game is executed depend on the skill of the player. Can be varied, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, since a plurality of ending conditions are set, for example, even though the player plays a game to satisfy the prize ending condition, the V prize device 65 Although the ball does not win as expected and the time end condition is satisfied, or even if the player plays a game to satisfy the time end condition, the ball previously fired is transferred to the V winning device 65. There is a problem that a prize is won and a prize ending condition is satisfied, so that a ending condition desired by a player cannot be satisfied.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player is able to select either the prize ending condition or the time ending condition as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if a period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has elapsed. Is configured such that the prize ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of prizes reaches the number at which the prize ending condition can be satisfied. With this configuration, when the termination condition desired by the player is satisfied, the game per accessory can be terminated, so that the player can more positively perform the game during the special electric game. .

  In the sixth embodiment, when the prize-winning condition is selected, when the time-period condition is selected without terminating the game-per-game based on the elapsed time during the game-per-game, Although it is configured such that the game per role is not terminated based on the number of balls won to the V winning device 65 during the game per role, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a prize ending condition is selected. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than an elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition is satisfied. When is selected, the compulsory prize ending condition that is established when the number of prizes (for example, 10) is larger than the number of prizes (for example, 3) set as the normal prize ending condition is set. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a long-period game per accessory from being executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 144, a characteristic configuration of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, operation means (a switching button 22za, a first selection button 22zb, and a second button) that can be operated by a player are different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). The difference is that a two-selection button 22zc) is newly provided, and the rest is the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side of the return button 43 provided on the ball lending operation unit 40 (on the right side in the front view of FIG. 144). In addition, a first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (the right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). The switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter, also referred to as an end condition switching button group 22z) are pressed by a detection switch (not shown) when the player performs a pressing operation. Is output to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21).

  Specifically, when the switch button 22za is pressed, a switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za is pressed, and when the first select button 22zb is pressed, the switch button 22za is pressed. When the detection switch for the first selection button (not shown) detects the pressing of the first selection button 22zb, and when the second selection button 22zc is pressed, the detection switch for the second selection button (not shown) is turned on. The second selection button 22zc is configured to detect pressing, and each detection switch is configured to output a detection result to the main control device 110.

  That is, the switch detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG.

  In the sixth embodiment, the above-described end condition switching button group 22z is provided at a distance of about 10 cm from the frame button 22. With such a configuration, in order to make the player interested in various effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an operation effect using the frame button 22 is executed, and the game is executed. When the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the end condition switching button group 22z.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10, the operation means for effect (frame button 22), the operation means for affecting the game performance (end condition switching button group 22z), Is provided, so that the player can arbitrarily select the contents in both the production side and the game performance side. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

<Production contents in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, a description will be given of the characteristic effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, as compared to the first embodiment described above, a selection effect for causing the player to operate the end condition switching button group, and a switch for indicating the operation result of the player with respect to the end condition switching button group. Direction and are configured to be executable.

  First, the display contents of the ending screen in the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the big hit ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is different from the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 12 (a)) in the first embodiment described above in that the display mode for prompting the player to operate the switch button 22za is displayed. The difference is in the points added, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same display contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a character "V rush starts after the end of the jackpot!" Is displayed, and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is shown to the player that the game is shifted to the V rush mode, which indicates that the game is to be performed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the comment "V rush period 40 seconds get" of "40 seconds" is displayed in the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating a period in which the time reduction state set after the end of the big hit game is continued. Is done. When the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the storage state of the special symbol (see FIG. 145 (c)) is displayed on the display screen of FIG. 12 (a) of the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the storage state of the special symbol when the special symbol is stored (see FIG. 12C), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, a display area HR20 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (the lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 145), and the display mode for prompting to operate the switching button 22za is “selection of end condition by button PUSH”. And an icon imitating the switch button 22za are displayed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the player can operate (press) the switching button 22za during the period in which the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, so that the end condition of the bonus hit game can be selected. . In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the end condition of the big hit game is configured to be selectable, and during the time-saving state (V rush) set after the big hit game, the big hit is played. It is configured such that the end condition of the game cannot be switched.

  With this configuration, the termination condition of the per-accessory game is frequently switched in accordance with the game situation during the V rush, that is, the special symbol fluctuation state and the normal symbol fluctuation state, and the It is possible to suppress providing a game situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, at the timing when the game in which the variable prize device 650 wins the ball in the jackpot game ends, and the timing before the special electric game is executed, it is possible to select the end condition of the per-principal game. Thus, a game in which a ball is fired and an act of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and a game which is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), it is configured such that the condition for ending the game per accessory can be selected in a state in which the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is notified. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game while grasping the remaining short time mode 801 displayed on the big hit ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time reduction state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time reduction period mode 801, the prize ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the per-accompaniment game, aiming at a special electric game in which the period for interrupting the special symbol change is efficiently set, the period of the time reduction state is long as the display mode of the remaining time reduction mode 801. When the display mode indicating (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, a time ending condition is selected, and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize device 65 in one game per bonus is increased by increasing the number of balls. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per time is increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which a player can select an end condition of a bonus hit game during a period in which the ending screen of a big hit game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, At any time during the big hit game, the end condition of the special hit game may be selectable.

  In addition, even when a standby screen (demo screen) which is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time saving state is displayed, the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected during the period in which the per-accessory game is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game at a timing at which the remaining time of the time reduction state (time reduction period) is not subtracted. The end condition of the winning game can be selected.

  On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during a period in which the remaining time in the time reduction state (time reduction period) is subtracted. With this configuration, during the special power game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) of the time reduction state is subtracted, the game is performed by concentrating on only the special power game, or an operation for selecting the termination condition of the per-accessory game. Can be selected by the player, and the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game in the future, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the player presses the switch button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the termination condition of the game per role will be described. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed as an end condition selection screen.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za has been pressed, the detection result is output to the main control device 110. The main controller 110 sets a command (switching command) indicating that the switch button 22za has been pressed, and executes the external output process (see FIG. 55) by executing the set command (switching command) in the main process (see FIG. 55). It is configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113 in S1801 in FIG. 55). Then, based on the reception of the switching command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b).

  The display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the hit per game will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 145 (b). Please select the termination condition. " By visually recognizing the comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is a screen for selecting the termination condition of the per-accessory game.

  In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions that can be selected by the player are defined, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end conditions, time end conditions) are defined. (Contents for satisfying the end condition) is displayed. Specifically, the display area HR21 is displayed in association with the prize ending condition as the end condition of the per-game, and the display area HR22 is displayed in association with the time ending condition as the end condition of the per-game. .

  In the display area HR21, a comment “It will end when three balls enter the V attacker” is displayed as a requirement for establishing the winning end condition, and “Winning end” for indicating the target end condition is displayed. It is displayed in the display area HR21a. Further, as a guide display mode 871 for guiding a selection button to be operated by the player when selecting a winning end condition, an icon (a circle with a numeral 1) imitating the first selection button 22zb is provided. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the display area HR22, as a requirement for establishing the time end condition, a comment “I will end after 1.6 seconds from the start of hitting an accessory” is displayed, and “the end condition of the target is indicated. "Time end" is displayed in the display area HR22a. Further, as a guide display mode 872 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the time end condition, an icon (a circle with a numeral 2) imitating the second selection button 22zc is provided. Is displayed.

  Further, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and characters of “time” are displayed to indicate the type of the end condition currently set as the end condition of the game per accessory. Have been. That is, FIG. 145 (b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the game per accessory. When a winning ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-prize game, the character “winning” is set in the display area HR23. In addition, in the sub display area Ds, a comment “Please select with a button” as a guidance display mode for guiding an operation to be performed by the player to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game, An icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed) is displayed.

  By displaying such a selection screen, it becomes possible for the player to easily select the game while grasping the contents of the end condition of the game per accessory. In the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b), when a selection screen capable of selecting the termination condition of the per-bonus game is displayed, the period of the time reduction state set after the end of the big hit game (time reduction period) 145 (a), the information suggesting the length (for example, the remaining short time mode 801 shown in FIG. 145 (a)) is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The remaining short time mode 801 may be displayed. Thus, it is possible to easily select the termination condition of the per-accessory game while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state set immediately after.

  When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed, the fact that the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) is indicated by the first selection button. The detection switch detects the detection and outputs the detection result to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, processing based on the operation of first selection button 22zb (processing for storing the selected end condition) is performed, and the first processing is performed. A command (operation command) for indicating that the selection button 22zb has been effectively operated is set.

  When an operation command is set in the control process of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device is used in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. The operation command is output to 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 sets the display mode after the end condition is selected based on the information (information indicating the type of the operated selection button) included in the received operation command. You. Here, an example of the display screen displayed after the end condition is selected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed after selecting a winning end condition as an end condition of a per-prize game.

  When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning end condition is operated (pressed) in a state where the end condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), A display area corresponding to the selected ending condition (winning ending condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the word “OK” indicating that the selection of the ending condition is completed is displayed above the main display area Dm. Is done. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the timing at which the result of the current selection is reflected, a comment “I will end the winning from the next character hit” is displayed and displayed. In the area HR23, the characters "win" indicating that the currently set end condition is the win end condition are displayed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the present embodiment is configured so that the end condition of the game per accessory can be selected a plurality of times within a period in which the end condition of the game per accessory can be selected. The end condition selected when the period in which the end condition of the game per object can be selected has elapsed is set as the end condition of the game per item. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly selects the end condition, the end condition can be selected again as long as the period during which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected elapses.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state where the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, the fact that the selection button has been operated is described. And an operation command indicating the type of the operated selection button, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, at the end of the period in which the end condition of the per-gaming game can be selected, the final It is configured to set a command (end condition command) indicating the end condition of the specially selected per-game.

  In other words, during the period in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, the player may select the end condition a plurality of times, so that only the operation of each selection button is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The display mode according to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and only the end condition finally selected is output to the audio lamp control device 113. are doing. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress output of useless commands from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113.

  Then, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, a display mode indicating that the V rush has started is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 146 (b). Is done. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146 (b) is the same as the situation (see FIG. 12 (c)) where the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (b) of the first embodiment is displayed (see FIG. 12 (c)). 146 (c)), and a display area HR23 for indicating the currently set end condition of the per-principal-game is formed with respect to the first embodiment described above. The differences are in the points, and the others are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), the display screen during the V rush displays "winning" characters indicating that the winning ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the end condition of the per-accessory-per-game executed during the V rush in an easily understandable manner. Although not shown, the display area HR23 is configured to be always displayed during the V rush period. Is configured to be easily grasped. When the end condition is displayed during the per-accessory game, an element for satisfying the end condition (or a V attacker (V winning device 65) when the winning end condition is set) is transmitted to the element. If the number of winning balls and the time ending condition are set, the update status of the elapsed time from the start of the game per character) and the value at which the ending condition is satisfied are displayed on the display surface. It is good to configure. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game per accessory ends suddenly and the player is confused.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment adds an end condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29). And the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ending condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the ending condition of the per-accessory game selected by the player. In the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, When it is determined that the second selection button 22zc) has been operated, an end condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, the end condition stored when the big hit game is ended is read out, and is referred to when an end condition command corresponding to the read out end condition is set. In addition, the game is read out when the game per accessory is executed, and the game per accessory is executed based on the read end condition.

  In the sixth embodiment, information indicating a winning end condition is stored as initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea. Specifically, in the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54), when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated (S1704 in FIG. 54: Yes), the process proceeds to S1714. As a part of the processing, information for indicating a winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea.

  In this way, by configuring such that at least one of the end conditions is stored as initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea as the end condition of the per-accessory game, a function capable of selecting the end condition of the per-accessory game is provided. In the pachinko machine 10 having the above, it is possible to surely prevent a situation in which none of the termination conditions of the per-accessory game is set. In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the prize ending condition is stored (stored) in the ending condition storage area 203ea as initial data of the ending condition of the end of the per game play. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least a prize ending condition and a time ending condition may be set as the initial data of the ending condition of the game per bonus.

  The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that it is a period during which the end condition of the per-government game can be selected, and is set to ON when the ending period of the big hit game is started, and the ending period of the big hit game Is set to off when the process ends.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the switch button 22za is operated in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the operation on the switch button 22za is invalidated. With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the processing based on the operation is performed. Execution can be suppressed.

  During the switching flag 203ec, the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during the period in which the termination condition of the per-government game can be selected (the period during which the switchable flag 20eb is set to ON), and the first selection button 22zb is set. Or a flag indicating that the end condition can be selected by operating the second selection button 22zc, and operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc. Is set to ON when a period in which the end condition can be selected in is set.

  In the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the switching flag 203ec is set when the switching button 22za is operated while the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 151). That is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the big hit game (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes), the switch is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 151).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the setting status of the switching flag 203ec is a period in which the operation on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151). (S2202 in FIG. 151), and is set to OFF when the end condition is selected based on the operation on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc (see S2206 in FIG. 151) (FIG. 151). S2209). In addition, when the selection operation is not performed by the player while the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, the selection is set to OFF at the end timing of the big hit game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, in the sixth embodiment, the end storage area 223ea is set in the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30B) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment of the first embodiment. The difference is in the points added, and the others are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected per-game play, and when an operation command is received in the end condition-related processing (see S4272 in FIG. 156), the operation is performed. Based on the operation information (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc was operated) included in the command, the corresponding end condition is stored (see S5706 and S5707 in FIG. 155). ). Then, when the end condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the content of the received end condition command (the type of the set end condition) and the end storage area 223ea are stored. The stored information (the type of the end condition stored in advance based on the operation command) is compared (S5710 in FIG. 155). If the comparison result is different, the content of the end condition command is added. The corresponding end condition is stored.

  That is, when an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated by the player is received, the end storage area 223ea is based on the received operation command. The end condition is stored, and the display mode of the switching effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. Then, when an end condition command for indicating the finally selected end condition is received, the end condition set on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command, the end condition actually set, Are compared, and if the comparison results are not the same, an end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which a command (end condition command) for indicating the end condition finally selected is set at the end of the big hit game receives the end condition command. At an earlier stage, it is possible to predict an end condition selected by the player based on the operation command, set an effect mode based on the prediction result, and execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is the end timing of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player can select a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc). When operated, an end condition command may be set in addition to the operation command. In the case of such a configuration, the display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the received end condition command, that is, based on the actually set end condition. Can be.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 149 to 153, control processing of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, a timer interruption process 6 (see FIG. 149) is replaced with a special power starting opening winning process (see FIG. 50) in place of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. The special power starting opening winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is executed instead of the special jackpot winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 56), and the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152) is executed instead of the big hit control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56). Different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the timer interrupt processing 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt processing 6. This timer interrupt processing 6 is different from the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) in that the special power starting port prize processing (see S108 in FIG. 50) is replaced with the special power starting port prize processing 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150). ) Is executed, and a switching process (see S171) is added. The other processes (S101 to S107, S109 to S112) are the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). Detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 6 (S178) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the content of the special power starting opening winning process 6 (S178). In the special power starting port winning process 6 (S178), the processing to be executed when the execution condition of the per-accessory game is satisfied is changed from the special power starting port winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). The differences are in the points, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals denote the same processing contents, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special power starting port winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the same processes of S1301 to S1307 as the special power starting port winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed, and thereafter, The end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, a special power operation command is set (S1308), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1302 that the current time is not a normal time (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the execution condition of the per-accessory game is satisfied, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set. By setting, the end condition of the game per accessory is made variable. As a result, when the termination condition selected by the player is satisfied, the game per accessory can be terminated, so that the player can select the size of the privilege given during the special electric game, and Motivation can be increased. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the executed per-game is set every time the execution condition of the per-game is established. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only at the time of the end of the jackpot game or the first execution condition of the per-accessory game after the end of the jackpot game, When it is established, the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read out, and a per-character action scenario corresponding to the end condition is set, and the setting is performed until the next big hit game is executed. It may be configured to execute a per-accessory game based on the performed per-accessory operation scenario.

  With such a configuration, each time the execution condition of the per-accompaniment game is satisfied, it is not necessary to execute the process of reading the information from the end condition storage area 203ea. A winning game can be executed.

  Also, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, A flag (end condition switch flag) indicating that the end condition has been switched is provided, and only when the end condition switch flag is set to ON, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read and the combination is read. It is preferable to switch the end condition of the hit game. As a result, in the case of executing a new per-game game with the same end condition as the previous per-game game, the process of reading the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea can be skipped. It is possible to simplify the control processing when executing the game per accessory.

  Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and a process based on a player's operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is executed.

  When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201), and when it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, that is, the present is the end of the big hit game. If it is determined that it is not during the period (S2201: No), this process ends as it is during the period when the operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is invalid. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the present is during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), then the switching is being performed. It is determined whether the flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

  In the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, and the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed). (S2202: No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation on the switch button 22za (S2203). If it is determined that the switch button 22za has not been operated (S2203: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2204), and the switching command is set (S2205). To end.

  Here, the determination processing in S2203 will be described. In the present embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switch button 22za, the switch button detection switch detects the pressed switch button 22za, and sends the detection result to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. Is output. Then, in the determination process of S2203, it is determined whether a detection signal is output from the above-described switch button detection switch.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za has already been operated (display of FIG. 145 (b)). If the screen is being displayed (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated (S2206). In the determination process of S2206, when the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the pressed first selection button 22zb is detected by the first selection button detection switch, and the detection result is determined by the main control device. Since the signal is output to the input / output port 205 of 110, it is determined whether the detection signal is output from the first selection button detection switch. When the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the pressed second selection button 22zc is detected by the second selection button detection switch, and the detection result is input / output port of the main control device 110. Since it is output to 205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is being output from the second selection button detection switch.

  In the process of S2206, if it is determined that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc has been operated (S2206: Yes), information indicating that the selection button has been operated and the operation performed An operation command including information indicating the type of the selected button is set (S2207), the end condition selected by the process of S2206 is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (S2208), and the switching flag 203ec is turned off. This is set (S2209), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S2206, when it is determined that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc has been operated, that is, from the detection switch for the first selection button to the detection switch for the second selection button, If it is determined that no detection signal has been output (S2206: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), at the timing when the operation on the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is determined to be valid, any one of the selection buttons When the (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated, information indicating the selected ending condition is stored in the ending condition storage area 203ea, and a command indicating the selected ending condition is set. Without setting, an operation command including information indicating that the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) are operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button is set. are doing. In addition, since the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF in the processing of S2209, the end condition switching button group 22z can be operated during the ending period of the jackpot game to select the end condition again. ing.

  In other words, since the ending condition is not determined until the ending period of the jackpot game ends, a command (end condition command) for indicating the selected ending condition is not output to the audio ramp control device 113. ing. With this configuration, when the end condition command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the information (end condition type) included in the received end condition command until the next jackpot game is executed. The effect can be set according to. Therefore, the control processing on the audio lamp control device 113 side is simplified as compared with the case where the end condition command is set each time the player operates the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc). be able to.

  Further, an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated in a state where the switching flag 203ec is set to ON can be set. During the ending period of the game, an effect based on the received operation command can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect without giving a sense of incongruity to a player who operates the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc).

  Next, the content of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854). In the jackpot control process 6 (S1854), the process executed at the start timing of the ending period and the end timing of the jackpot game are different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56). And the other processes are different, and the other processes are the same. The same reference numerals denote the same processing contents, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1911 as the jackpot control process of the above-described first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed, and the process of S1911 ends. Thereafter, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and the process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the ending period set after the last round game is completed in the big hit game is set, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, so that the player operates the switch button 22za. Is configured to be effectively determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1910 that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), it is next determined whether it is the timing of ending the big hit, that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1912). If it is determined that the timing is for jackpot ending (S1912: Yes), the same processes as S1913 to S1917, which are the same as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56), are executed. The setting process is executed (S1952), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S1912 that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S1912: No), the same processing as the big hit control processing of the above-described first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the processing of S1918 is executed. This processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the content of the end condition setting process (S1952). The end condition setting process (S1952) is executed in the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and selection of the end condition selection of the bonus per game executed during the ending period of the big hit game is selected. The processing based on the result is executed.

  When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to off (S2301), and then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to on (S2302), and the switch is turned on. If it is determined that it is set, that is, if the big hit end timing is reached while the selection screen for selecting the end condition (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed (S2302: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set. Is set to OFF (S2303), the information (finally selected termination condition type) stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read (S2304), and the termination condition is determined based on the information read from the termination condition storage area 203ea. The command is set (S2305), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec has not been set to ON, that is, if the switching button 22za has not been operated on the big hit ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)), or the process ends. If a desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the condition selection screen (refer to FIG. 145 (b)) (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S2304.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game, the end condition command is executed only for the end condition finally selected. Is configured to be set. Furthermore, it is configured such that the period in which the end condition of the per-prize game can be selected is only during the big hit game. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of end condition commands output to the sound ramp control device 113 side to one at the time of one big hit game, and to set the end condition included in the end condition command. Is applied at least until the next big hit game is executed.

  Therefore, on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, the effect based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next big hit game is executed. In the case where the effect mode is changed accordingly, it is possible to suppress the processing for changing the effect mode from becoming complicated.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. The sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61). Identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the command determination processing 6 (S4172) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the command determination process 6 (S4172). This command determination processing 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is different from the command determination processing in the above-described first embodiment (S4102 in FIG. 61) in that it is determined whether a command related to the end condition of the per-bonus game has been received. And a process executed based on the result of the determination process are different in that an additional process is added, and the other processes are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes in S4201 to S4219 as the command determination process in the first embodiment (see S4102 in FIG. 61) are performed. If it is determined in the processing of S4218 that no hit-related command has been received (S4218: No), it is next determined whether an end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, as the termination condition-related command, the switching command and the operation command set in the switching process of main controller 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151) and the termination condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153). The set end condition command corresponds to this.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4271 that the termination condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the termination condition related processing is executed (S4272), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4271, if it is determined that the termination condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the termination condition related processing (S4272) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the termination condition-related processing (S4272). In the end condition-related processing (S4272), when the player executes a selection operation for selecting an end condition of a per-government game, various processing for setting an effect mode corresponding to the selection operation is executed. You.

  When the end condition-related process (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played (S5701). If it is determined that a jackpot game is not being played (S5701: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. In other words, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the per-accessory game is configured to be selectable only during the jackpot game, so that when the end condition-related command is received other than during the jackpot game, the command corresponding to the received command is handled. The effect is not set. Therefore, when an incorrect command is received due to noise or the like, it is possible to suppress an effect not intended by the player from being executed.

  In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current game is a jackpot game (S5701: Yes), next, a switching command is received, that is, the player operates the switch button 22za during the jackpot ending period. (S5702). If it is determined that the switching command has been received in the process of S5702 (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating a selection screen is set (S5703), and this process ends.

  When the process of S5703 is executed, the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)) is switched to a selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) for selecting the end condition of the per-bonus game. The display command is set. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, like the other display commands. Is output. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S5703, it creates image data for displaying an end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)), and displays the third symbol display device. A selection screen is displayed at 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5702 that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), then it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is issued when it is determined that the player has operated (pressed) the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc), that is, during the ending period of the jackpot. 22za, a command to be set when a selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated in a state where the selection screen of the end condition is displayed, and which is set by the player. This command includes information for indicating the type of the selection button.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5704 that an operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), it is determined whether the operation command received this time is the operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, the information included in the operation command It is determined whether or not information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated is included (S5705). If it is determined that the information is the first selection button 22zb (S5705: Yes), the first selection button 22zb is displayed. A display command indicating a winning end (condition), which is a corresponding end condition, is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the process of S5706, an end condition selection screen (FIG. 146 (a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). Is displayed. After that, the set end condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and the process ends.

  In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time is the operation of the second selection button 22zc. Therefore, a display command indicating the time end (condition) is set (S5707), and this processing ends. When the display command is set in the process of S5707, an end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). Specifically, on the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146 (a), display area HR22 (see FIG. 145 (b)) is enlarged and displayed instead of display area HR21, and “time” is displayed on display area HR22a. "End" is displayed, and the characters "time" are displayed in the display area HR23. After that, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5704 that no operation command has been received (S5704: No), it is next determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and it has been determined that no end condition command has been received. If this has been done (S5709: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the end condition command received this time. It is determined whether the same end condition is indicated (S5710).

  In the process of S5710, when it is determined that the same end condition is satisfied, that is, when the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition. (S5710: Yes), the processing is terminated as it is. If the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command do not indicate the same end condition (S5710: No), the end condition that is actually set, Since the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is different, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition indicated by the end condition command. The display command for switching to the display mode to be displayed is set (S5711), and this processing ends.

  When a display command is set in the process of S5711, a comment corresponding to the end condition indicated by the end condition command is displayed in the display region HR23 while displaying a comment of "ending condition switching" in the center of the main display region Dm. The mode is displayed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select any one of the prize ending condition and the time ending condition as the ending condition of the bonus per game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if a period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has elapsed. Is configured such that the prize ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of prizes reaches the number at which the prize ending condition can be satisfied. With this configuration, when the termination condition desired by the player is satisfied, the game per accessory can be terminated, so that the player can more positively perform the game during the special electric game. .

  In the sixth embodiment, when the prize-winning condition is selected, when the time-period condition is selected without terminating the game-per-game based on the elapsed time during the game-per-game, Although it is configured such that the game per role is not terminated based on the number of balls won to the V winning device 65 during the game per role, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a prize ending condition is selected. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than an elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition is satisfied. When is selected, the compulsory prize ending condition that is established when the number of prizes (for example, 10) is larger than the number of prizes (for example, 3) set as the normal prize ending condition is set. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a long-period game per accessory from being executed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the player can operate (press) the switch button 22za during the period in which the big hit game ending screen is displayed, so that the end condition of the bonus hit game can be selected. ing. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the end condition of the big hit game is configured to be selectable, and during the time-saving state (V rush) set after the big hit game, the big hit is played. It is configured such that the end condition of the game cannot be switched.

  With this configuration, the termination condition of the per-accessory game is frequently switched in accordance with the game situation during the V rush, that is, the special symbol fluctuation state and the normal symbol fluctuation state, and the It is possible to suppress providing a game situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, at the timing when the game in which the variable prize device 650 wins the ball in the jackpot game ends, and the timing before the special electric game is executed, it is possible to select the end condition of the per-principal game. Thus, a game in which a ball is fired and an act of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and a game which is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the condition for ending the game per accessory is selectable in a state in which the period of the time saving state (40 seconds) set after the end of the big hit game is notified, the remaining time displayed on the big hit ending screen can be selected. In a state where the time reduction period mode 801 is grasped, it is possible to allow the player to select the termination condition of the game per accessory. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time reduction state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time reduction period mode 801, the prize ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the per-accompaniment game, aiming at a special electric game in which the period for interrupting the special symbol change is efficiently set, the period of the time reduction state is long as the display mode of the remaining time reduction mode 801. When the display mode indicating (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, a time ending condition is selected, and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize device 65 in one game per bonus is increased by increasing the number of balls. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per time is increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which a player can select an end condition of a bonus hit game during a period in which the ending screen of a big hit game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, At any time during the big hit game, the end condition of the special hit game may be selectable.

  In addition, even when a standby screen (demo screen) which is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time saving state is displayed, the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected during the period in which the per-accessory game is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game at a timing at which the remaining time of the time reduction state (time reduction period) is not subtracted. The end condition of the winning game can be selected.

  On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during a period in which the remaining time in the time reduction state (time reduction period) is subtracted. With this configuration, during the special power game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) of the time reduction state is subtracted, the game is performed by concentrating on only the special power game, or an operation for selecting the termination condition of the per-accessory game. Can be selected by the player, and the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game in the future, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time saving state is set, in all the games such as the hit game (game per part, small hit, big hit), the game board 13 Of the game area formed on the left side (left side of the variable display unit 80), a game in which the ball is fired so that the ball flows down (left-handed game) is executed.

  This makes it possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game without changing the game area in which the ball is fired to the player. Further, in each embodiment, as described above, it is not necessary to change the game method in the middle of the game (for example, when the winning game is executed). a)), or even in the case where a per-accessory game is executed (see FIG. 18 (a)), a guidance notification for changing the game method (for example, a comment display of "right-handed") is provided. In the display area HR3, a device which is opened during a hit game to be executed without being executed (for example, a general winning device 640, a V winning device 65, etc.) is notified to the player.

  However, in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13A) in each of the above-described embodiments, an image display schematically showing a prize device (a general winning device 640) corresponding to a hit game to be executed is simply displayed. There is a problem that it is only displayed and becomes unnecessary display for a player who understands the content of the hit game to be executed. In addition, since the area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, if an unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13A), other display is performed. There is a problem that the effect display area is narrowed and the effect of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. On the other hand, if each display area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set for the purpose of increasing the area for performing another effect display and enhancing the effect of the effect, the display area of the display area HR3 is changed. There has been a problem that the game becomes narrower and a game that is difficult to understand is provided to the player.

  On the other hand, in the second modification, a guide display mode (in the display area HR3) indicating a prize device (a general prize device 640, a V prize device 65, or a variable prize device 650) to be aimed by a player during a hit game. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the display mode of the displayed image can be variably set based on various conditions. Other contents are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, an example of a display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents displayed when a per-figure-per-game is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. 156 (b) is a schematic diagram of FIG. A schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) while the display screen illustrated in (a) is displayed. FIG.

  In the second modified example, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when a game per general drawing is executed, a ball can enter the general electric winning device 640. A special power operation port 643 is provided inside the general power winning device 640, and when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643, a game per hit that enables the ball to win in the V winning device 65 is provided. It is configured to be executed. Further, a V winning opening 165 is provided in the V winning device 65, and when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165, a jackpot game (V jackpot) in which a ball can win on the variable winning device 650 is provided. (Game). In other words, it is configured such that a plurality of possible hit games can be executed based on one winning game (general figure winning game).

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, for example, when the ball enters the special power operation port 643 during the game for the regular figure, the game for the role is executed continuously with the game for the regular figure. become. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed in accordance with the type of the hit game being executed, the guide display mode displayed in the display area HR3 at the timing of switching from the per-figure per-game to the per-accessible game. , There is a problem that the timing at which the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the prize device (V prize device 65) corresponding to the bonus per game is delayed. Also, taking into account the delay in the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed, for example, when the hit game switches from the per-figure-per-game to the per-acquisition-per-game, specifically, the per-figure-per-game ends. It is also conceivable to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) until the game per bonus is executed (after the ball wins to the special power operating port 643), but the waiting period is set. As a result, there is a problem that the sense of speed of the special electric game aiming at the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of flows is reduced, and the interest of the game cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), an image display which is a game per ordinary drawing and imitates the ordinary winning award device 640 as a guide display mode in the display area HR3 is displayed. In the running state, a hit game that can be executed next, that is, a hit game (game per role) executed when a ball is inserted into the special power operation port 643 in a running general game per game. ), A second guide display mode for guiding the player to the winning device (the V winning device 65) to be aimed at in advance is displayed in the display area HR30.

  With such a configuration, when the game result of the current general-purpose hit game is a specific game result (a game result in which a ball is won to the special power operation port 643), a hit game to be executed next is performed. The winning device to be aimed at can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that a game easy to understand for the player can be provided. In addition, by notifying in advance the game contents of the per-character game that can be executed next during the per-figure game, during the period from the end of the per-figure game to the execution of the per-character game, This eliminates the need to provide a waiting period for allowing the player to know the game content (prize device to be aimed) of the hit game (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) in a series of flows.

  In addition, as described above, since the game per role is configured to be executed when the game result of the game per general figure being executed becomes a specific game result, the display area is displayed during the game per general figure. The comment of “Aim” is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed on the HR 30. In addition, in a state where the execution of the per-accompaniment game has not been determined, that is, in a state where the per-figure per game is being played and the ball has not entered the special power operation port 643, a display imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed. The configuration is such that only a part of the image (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 in FIG. 18A) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily understand the first guidance display mode indicating the game content of the hit game being executed and the second guidance display mode indicating the game content of the hit game that can be executed next. Since the identification can be performed, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game aiming at the V winning device 65 during the game per ordinary drawing.

  In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a), as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, an image display imitating a winning device that is opened in a corresponding hit game is used. The first guide display mode and the second guide display mode may be set only by displaying characters, or may be set using both characters and images.

  Further, as an image display imitating the prize device displayed as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, photographing data obtained by actually photographing each prize device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be used. . This makes it possible to use an image obtained by actually photographing the prize winning device as an image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that an effect that is easier for the player to understand can be achieved.

  Conversely, a simple display that displays only the minimum necessary display information among the winning devices corresponding to the winning games may be used. In this case, the simple display can be diverted to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, so that the cost of developing the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the second modified example, when the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, the hit game currently being executed (for example, It is configured to also display a past history information mode for enabling notification of the type of a hit game that has triggered execution of a (big hit game).

  With this configuration, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it becomes possible to look back on the past game contents, so that the jackpot game executed this time has won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. To inform the player whether the game is a jackpot game executed on the basis of the above or a jackpot game executed based on the fact that a ball has won to the V winning opening 165 during the game per accessory. Can be.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the second guidance display mode displayed during the per-figure game is changed according to the progress of the per-figure game, that is, the special power operation port 643 in the on-per-figure game being executed. Is configured to be variably set according to a change in the degree of expectation that a ball will win. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of a per-figure-per-game from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (the general winning award) A display command indicating image data of the device 640 and a display command indicating second image data (image data of the V winning device 65) to be displayed as the second guidance display mode. Is set, and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The display control device 114 generates the image display data of the first guidance display mode and the image display data of the second guidance display mode shown in FIG. 156 (a) based on the reception of the above-described display command. , On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed immediately after the per-figure winning game is started. Then, when a prize command indicating that the prize sensor 640s detects that the ball has won the prize winning device 640 during the per-game game is output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 A command indicating the progress of the game per ordinary figure is output to the display control device 114.

  As a result, an image imitating the V prize device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode as shown in FIG. The image display data (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image imitating the V prize device 65 is displayed) that is more exposed than the display mode shown in a) is created, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is generated. To be displayed. Similarly, it indicates that a state where the ball is determined to win the special power operating port 643, for example, a state where the ball passes through the second movable valve 642 and flows down toward the special power operating port 643, is detected. When the command is output from the main control device 110, the entire image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a second guidance display mode.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode (second guide display mode) of the guide display for the next hit game that can be executed according to the progress of the hit game being executed. As the expected degree of winning a ball in the special power operation port 643 in the normal game winning game being executed increases, the guidance display for guiding the next game that can be executed next can be clearly displayed.

  The example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a) is merely an example, and in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games in a series of flows, during a period in which one winning game is being executed, It is only necessary to be able to guide the game method of the hit game that can be executed next. For example, according to the type of the hit game to be executed (for example, a regular game per game), the next hit game (for example, an accessory) In the case of using a configuration in which the probability of executing the per-game is different, the first guidance display mode displayed during the per-figure game or the The two-guidance display mode may be changed. Specifically, the display color and the size of the first guidance display mode are configured to be changed to a mode that is more noticeable to the player as the probability that the next winning game (for example, a game per role) is executed is higher. Good. In addition, the display mode of the second guidance display mode displayed at the start of the regular winning game may be changed. For example, a disadvantage that the probability of executing the next winning game (for example, a bonus game) is low. When the per-drawing game is executed, a display mode in which about half of the image of the V-prize device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode, which is advantageous in that the per-accessory game is more easily executed than the disadvantageous per-drawing game The horse where the per-game is executed may be configured to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode.

  With this configuration, by visually recognizing the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, it is possible to not only easily understand the game method of the hit game to be executed, but also to determine whether the hit game being executed is a player. Since it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the winning game is advantageous, the effect of the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode can be enhanced. In addition, as described above, the display mode is configured to be changed in a stepwise manner in accordance with the game result and the degree of expectation that are advantageous to the player, and in accordance with the degree of advantage of the hit game to be executed (regular game per game), By configuring so that the stage of the display mode initially set is different, that is, by changing the timing of displaying the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high, the execution is performed while using the common image data. Since the player can be notified of the degree of advantage of the winning game, the capacity of image data can be reduced.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned contents, the example where the per-figure per game and the per-proxy game are executed as an example of the hit game is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of the hit games are executed as a series of the hit games. Naturally, it may be used in all cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (b), the display contents displayed when the player operates the operation means (the frame button 22) during the game per ordinary drawing will be described. If the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed, a display area HR3 for guiding the game method of the per-usual-per-game being executed is displayed. Enlarged display. Thereby, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player who wants to know a game method of the hit game being executed. When the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is displayed smaller than the size shown in FIG. 156 (a). When the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen, When the button 22 is operated four times, the display returns to the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a).

  As described above, by changing the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the game method of the hit game being executed based on the operation of the player, the size desired by the player is provided. To display the guidance display mode. Further, when the guidance display mode is reduced or deleted, a display area of other effect displays (effect displays such as reference numerals 811, 812, etc.) displayed on the display screen overlapping the display timing of the guide display mode. Is configured to be large. Further, there is an effect display that is executed only when the display area of the other effect display is enlarged. This allows the player to positively operate the frame button 22.

  In addition, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging and displaying the first guidance display mode, a detailed display location of the first guidance display mode, for example, the second movable valve 642 in the general winning award device 640 is imitated. A configuration in which the display mode is a specific display mode different from the normal mode is configured to be visually recognizable to a player, and the specific display mode is configured to be easily displayed when a hit game advantageous to the player is being executed. Good. Thereby, even a player who has already understood the game method can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the example described above, the guide display mode is configured to be able to be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operation unit (frame button 22). However, the guide display mode is performed based on the operation on the operation unit. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a directional operation means (cross switch) capable of executing an operation indicating at least the left-right direction or the up-down direction as the operation means, the directional operation By operating the means, an area other than the prize apparatus targeted for the guidance display mode (near the area where the target prize apparatus is arranged on the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10) is displayed. The guide display mode may be changed, or the guide display mode may be changed so that the winning device to be the target of the guide display mode is rotated (horizontal rotation, vertical rotation). In this case, the display control device 114 previously stores image data indicating the entire game area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device, and stores the operation content for the direction operation means. When a command corresponding to the indicated operation signal is received, image data corresponding to the command may be created and displayed. Further, in this case, it is preferable that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed in the displayable area only when the direction operation means is operated. This allows the player to enthusiastically operate the operation means.

  As described above, in the second modified example described above, as in the first embodiment described above, all the games are configured to be executable by the left-handed game, but, for example, a plurality of hit games are performed as a series of games. In the case of an executable gaming machine, in a case where one hit game is executed as a left-hit game and the next hit game is executed as a right-hit game, the display area HR3 in which the first guidance display mode is displayed is changed to a third symbol. The display area HR30 formed on the left side of the display surface of the display device 81 and displaying the second guidance display mode may be formed on the right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest a game method to the player also by the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the player may be able to operate the position where the display area HR3 or the display area HR30 is displayed by operating the above-described direction operation means.

  As described above, in the second modified example described above, the case where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of games has been described. However, even when a specific winning game is executed alone, the effect of the above-described content can be obtained. Can be applied. For example, a special symbol change period and a jackpot game are set as a series of games, and during the special symbol change period, an image aiming at the special figure entrance 64 is displayed as the first guidance display mode, and the second guidance display mode is performed. May be applied to display an image showing the variable winning device 650. In this case, the first guidance display mode which does not need to guide the player to the game method may be deleted, and only the second guidance display mode may be displayed. In the case of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable prize devices 650 that are opened when a special symbol lottery wins, which variable prize device 650 is finally displayed as the second guidance display mode. May be configured to be able to execute an effect that inspires the player.

  In the above-described second modified example, the guide display mode in the case where the per-figure-per-game is executed has been described. However, for example, a per-prize is won by lottery of ordinary symbols, and the per-figure per-game is executed. In the period up to, only the first guidance display mode may be displayed. In addition, at that timing, the guide display mode is sequentially switched and displayed so as to sequentially show the flow of the game in the case where all of the examples of the games are successful, that is, the flow of the per-figure-per-game, the per-accessible-game, and the big-hit game. You may comprise so that it may be.

  Furthermore, the variable content of the guidance display mode displayed during the hit game may be set as appropriate. For example, the guidance display mode may be varied using blinking or discoloration in addition to enlargement, reduction, and rotation. Alternatively, the guidance display mode may be changed by causing a character to appear near the guidance display mode. Further, a game method may be guided by combining a decorative structure imitating an actual winning device and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in each of the above-described second modified examples, the image display using the image imitating the real thing is executed in order to guide the player to a game method that is easy to understand and is playing. For example, in which position of the target prize device is disposed in the game area, a portion of the prize device where the ball can enter, and an area where the ball can pass through the prize device In the case where a region advantageous to the gaming machine and a disadvantageous region are provided, a display image simplified to such an extent that the player can grasp at least one of the advantageous region and the location of the advantageous region is displayed. May be used. With this configuration, the minimum necessary information can be provided to the player, and the common image data can be used for different pachinko machines 10, so that the development cost of the pachinko machine 10, Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, or when the ball enters (special winning) the ball into the specific area (V winning opening 165) during the game per hit, the big hit game Can be executed, and a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game. In addition, as an end condition of the time reduction state, a time reduction end condition (time reduction number) that is established based on the fact that a predetermined number of (for example, four) special symbol lotteries have been executed without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be set. Further, if a game per bonus is executed during a dynamic display period (a special symbol fluctuation period) from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display period is subtracted. Is interrupted on the basis of the termination of the game per role, or the termination of the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the ball has passed (entered) the specific area during the game per role. The processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is restarted.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (the process of subtracting the number of remaining hours reduced) is executed based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the special symbol lottery is executed after the special symbol lottery is executed until the special symbol change is executed, and after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is configured to determine whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied. I have.

  With this configuration, during execution of the special symbol change, the process for subtracting the dynamic display period based on the execution of the per-accessory game is interrupted, and thereafter, the interrupted dynamic In the case where the process for subtracting the display period is restarted, it is possible to prevent the number of time savings from being updated when the dynamic display period after the restart elapses and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big hit game, the remaining dynamic display period of the suspended dynamic display is extremely short, and the number of time savings set after the end of the big hit game changes the special symbol change after the restart. With the stop display of, it is possible to suppress the instantaneous subtraction.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which it is determined whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is set as the timing at which the dynamic display period of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the time-saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in which the condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied is displayed, so that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is made as long as possible. Can be continued. Furthermore, during the dynamic display period of the special symbol, it is not determined whether or not the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied, so that the gaming state shifts from the time reduction state to the normal state during the dynamic display period of the special symbol. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  The contents described above may be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol. ) Is configured to be executable. If the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small hit, big hit), when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol change (the dynamic The processing for subtracting the target display period is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, if one special symbol lottery wins a big hit, the other special symbol change being executed is discarded, and if a small hit is won, the other special symbol change being executed is interrupted. Is configured.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the cumulative number of lotteries obtained by adding the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 100 ), Or when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, four), the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment performs the process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (the process of subtracting the number of remaining times) from the fact that the special symbol lottery is executed. Execution, the determination whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the timing for executing the determination whether or not the time-saving state end condition is satisfied, the timing when the special symbol dynamic display period has elapsed, or one of As a processing result of the process of subtracting the number of remaining hours saved during the special symbol change, during the execution of the special symbol change (the special symbol change in which the number of reduced hours becomes 0 after the subtraction) that can satisfy the time saving end condition, the other This is the timing when the condition for executing the special symbol lottery is satisfied and before the special symbol lottery is executed.

  With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) more than the specified number of times is not executed during the time saving state, and it is advantageous for the player. Can be continued as long as possible.

  In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the process for determining whether the condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied, and the time-saving state is ended based on the processing result (transition to the normal state) The processing is defined as the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), but may be any other timing. For example, the stop display of the special symbol elapses for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). If the special symbol change (final change in the time saving state) that satisfies the time saving end condition is a win (small hit or large hit), the hit game is performed. Is executed, a predetermined timing during a winning game (for example, one second after the start of the winning game), and an end timing of the winning game. . In other words, a process of updating the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state (a process of subtracting the number of remaining symbol reductions) is executed, and the special symbol variation that has been executed is stopped and displayed, and then the next special symbol is changed. Any period may be used until the lottery is executed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as the time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, a time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, four) is provided. The number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result other than the jackpot winning, and a part of the lottery result in the case of losing the winning) is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of times (for example, , Five times), a time saving termination condition that is satisfied when the number of balls passing through a specific end area in the time reduction state reaches a specific number (for example, 10), The time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the setting of the time-saving state exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) may be settable. Further, as in the fourth embodiment described above, if the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a hit game (small hit game) different from the big hit game, the number of times the small hit game is executed reaches the specific number. It is also possible to configure so that the time saving end condition that is satisfied in the case of being set can be set.

  Further, in the case where the end conditions of the time reduction state that are established under various conditions can be set, it is preferable to set different time reduction end conditions in accordance with the trigger for setting the time reduction state. Specifically, when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game, the time-saving termination condition may be set based on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning or the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot winning, The time-saving end condition may be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the jackpot is won. Further, the time-saving termination condition may be set based on the number of times that a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set over the big hit game. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the time-saving end condition set for the player.

  In addition, a configuration may be made so that the player can select a time-saving end condition set for the current time-saving state from a plurality of time-saving end conditions that can be set as the time-saving end condition. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting which time-saving ending condition is selected to execute the most advantageous game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, when the special symbol change is interrupted during the time saving state, the number of the time savings is not subtracted when the restarted special symbol change is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time savings may be reduced when the restarted special symbol change is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to execute a process of updating (subtracting) the number of times. Even in the case of using such a configuration, the length of the short time after the resumption will be different depending on the length of the remaining fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation at the time of interruption, so that the player At which timing the special symbol change is interrupted (whether the jackpot game is executed) or not, it is possible to give an interest.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the process of updating (subtracting) the number of times saved is executed during the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the start of the special symbol change. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined period (after 5 seconds) from the start of the special symbol change. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a case where the number of time savings is updated (subtracted) based on the special symbol change after the resumption and a case where the number of time savings is not performed based on the timing when the special symbol change is interrupted. Specifically, when the special symbol change is interrupted two seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process of the number of time savings is executed three seconds after the special symbol change is restarted. On the other hand, when the special symbol change is interrupted 10 seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process of the number of times reduced after the special symbol change is restarted is not executed. Therefore, immediately after the special symbol change is started, that is, even when the special symbol change is interrupted in a state where the remaining change time is long, a disadvantageous state may occur for the player, On the other hand, the player can be interested in the game after the restart (game during the time reduction state). In addition, when configured to execute the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times saved during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change pattern of the selected special symbol (change time, jackpot lottery result, stop type, etc.) ), The timing of executing the update (subtraction) processing for the number of times saved may be made different. With this configuration, the special symbol variation is advantageous to the player (the number of times saved is not updated due to the special symbol variation after resumption, or the time saving state set at the time of resumption can be continued for a long time). Can be made difficult for the player to understand, so that the player can play the game while predicting the content of the game to be executed later, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. I have. Specifically, when the remaining time of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining time of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the changing time of the next special symbol change. Is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. With this configuration, when the game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player is motivated to play the game. Can be.

  Further, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed, a method of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) (absolute determination) And a method (relative determination) of determining whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be executed next is configured to be executable. Thereby, the player can grasp the timing at which the special symbol change is advantageously interrupted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect of notifying the player of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is configured to be executable, but the interruption of the special symbol change that is advantageous to the player is performed. The effect may be any effect as long as the effect is predictable by the player, and the effect may be configured to be executed under conditions other than the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which the update process of the number of times reduced in the special symbol is executed during the change of the special symbols, the effect indicating that the update process of the number of hours reduced is executed is configured. May be.

  In each of the embodiments described above, when a specific winning game (game per accessory, small hitting game, big hitting game) is executed during execution of the special symbol change, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted or discarded. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to interrupt or discard the special symbol change being executed when conditions other than the winning game are satisfied.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the general symbol lottery is provided, and the general symbol winning device 640 is provided so that the ball can easily be won when the general symbol game is executed. When the ball has passed (entered) the specific area (special power operation port 643, special power operation port 1643, second ball entry port 1645), a game advantageous to the player (game per part, small hit) Depending on the result of the game, a game in which a jackpot game can be executed can be executed. Further, a game state (time saving state) in which the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 easily passes through the above-described specific area, and a game state (normal state) in which the ball is difficult to pass are settable.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the specific area even if the ball has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the game per game performed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress providing an excessively advantageous game to a player who is playing a game in the normal state.

  In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering a specific area during the normal state, a special game for preventing the ball from winning in the general electric winning device 640 by a per-figure game executed during the normal state. Since it is not necessary to provide the configuration on the game board 13, the design flexibility of the game board 13 can be increased. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls that have won the general winning award device 640, the balls that have not passed (entered) the specific area are configured to enter the out mouth, so that the player However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a first privilege (a game that can be a trigger for a jackpot game) to be granted when passing (entering) a specific area. ) May be configured to provide a second privilege (prize ball) different from the above.

  With such a configuration, the type of privilege given to the player by the ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 can be made different according to the set game state. Sexual games can be provided.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, a game state (time saving state) in which the ball winning the general electricity winning device 640 easily passes through the above-described specific area and a game state (normal state) in which the ball hardly passes are set. After being configured as possible, the specific area in which the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 during the time saving state enters the first specific area for executing the per-accessory game in which the chance to execute the jackpot game is easily established. (The second special power operation port 1643) or the second specific area (the special power operation port 643) for executing the hit game with a small hit, which is less likely to be executed than the first specific area. Switching means for switching (third movable valve 1642) is provided.

  With this configuration, the ratio (ease of passing) of the sphere that has won the prize winning device 640 passing through the specific region is made different depending on the set game state, and then the ball easily passes through the specific region. Either the first specific area in which the ball that has won the general electricity winning device 640 in the state where the gaming state (time saving state) is set is advantageous to the player, or the second specific area that is disadvantageous to the first specific area. Can be passed through. Therefore, even in a state where it is determined that the first privilege is given to the player by the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 (a state in which the first privilege is easily given), the ball enters (passes) any specific region. ) Can be interested in what you do. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game per day drawing executed during the time reduction state until the end.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the ease with which the ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165 in the per-proxy game executed in accordance with the type of the specific area (special power operation port) into which the ball enters is described. I make them different. In other words, the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the per-game per game is made different, but the execution probability is not limited to this. For example, the V jackpot game executed when the ball wins to the V winning opening 165 (The number of rounds, the game state (number of times saved) set after the end of the big hit game) may be configured to differ depending on the type of the specific area (special power operation port) where the ball enters.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first and second embodiments, when the ball wins the special power operation port 643, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (interruption processing of the change time is interrupted). However, as in the above-described third embodiment, the special symbol change that is being executed is discarded according to the condition that is satisfied when the ball wins the special power operation port 643 (the special symbol change is forcibly applied). May be stopped), or may be discarded and then the time-saving state may be terminated.

  Further, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute the lottery of a plurality of types of special symbols (the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol) in an overlapping manner. The technical idea of the second embodiment described above may be applied. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the second winning opening 1645, which is a trigger for executing the lottery of the second special symbol, is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the ball wins in the general winning award device 640 during the normal state. Although the configuration is such that the winning ball can easily enter the second ball opening 1645 when the ball wins in the general electricity winning device 640 during the time saving state than in the case, In addition, a right first ball entry opening serving as a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol is provided in the general winning award device 640, and a ball that has won the general award winning device 640 during the time saving state is a second entrance 1645 or Switching means may be provided so that the ball enters any one of the right first entrance. In this case, a lottery more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second entrance 1645 than in the right first entrance which is a chance for the first special symbol that can be executed even in the normal state. Is preferably executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to enjoy the result of the per-figure-per-game executed during the time-saving state to the end. In addition, in the case of using the configuration as in each of the above-described embodiments in which the number of lotteries (number of changes) of the first special symbol is defined as the end condition of the time saving state, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol during the time saving state is used. ) Can be prevented from occurring. Further, in this case, the operation of the switching means provided in the general winning award device 640 may be configured to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. If the time saving state is set and the first special symbol lottery is not executed, or if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small (for example, one), a general winning prize The switching means may be operated and controlled so that the ball that has won the device 640 easily enters the right first entrance. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably execute the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the general winning award device 640 is configured to be executed at the start of the game per general figure, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to be executed based on the timing at which the ordinary symbol indicating the winning of the per-figure is stopped or the timing at which the per-stop display period has elapsed, or a predetermined time after the per-figure-per-game starts. It may be configured to be executed at a timing after a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, or may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to a predetermined rule.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time-saving state is set, the specific game (the game per character) is completed before the time-saving state ends (until the special symbol change that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state ends). Or, the pachinko machine 10 having the gaming ability to aim at the big hit game (V big hit game) via the small hit game has been described.

  In the pachinko machine 10 having such playability, the longer the special symbol fluctuates during the time reduction state, the longer the time period in which the time reduction state is set (time reduction period) can be specified. It was possible to increase the number of executions of the game.

  Furthermore, when the specific game is executed, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol is changed. The change (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change) is performed after the end of the specific game or the end of the big hit game (V big hit game), that is, when a condition that can execute a new special symbol change is satisfied. It is configured to restart.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the short-term and the short-term varies depending on the variation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period of the specific game. While wishing to select a long fluctuation time, it was possible to make the player play the game eagerly so as to execute many specific games.

  However, for example, a game period for executing a specific game (a period during which a ball cannot be awarded to the general winning award device 640 during a fluctuation period of a normal symbol or during a game per ordinary figure (it is difficult to win)) ( The electric accessory 640a closing period)) is a period in which the specific game cannot be executed and the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is subtracted, so that the specific game can be executed in the game period ( Although the open period of the electric accessory 640a during the per-game game in which the ball can be awarded to the electric accessory 640a, that is, the period in which the variation time of the special symbol change is subtracted, the game per accessory is executed. (Period during which execution can be performed).

  In addition, the specific game in which the special symbol change is interrupted is performed when the number of winning balls to the variable ball entry means (V winning device 65) released during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, three). Either the ending condition that is satisfied (winning ending condition) or the ending condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game per bonus, (time ending condition) Is configured to be terminated when the termination condition is satisfied, and when one of the termination conditions is satisfied according to the game content (whether the ball is fired) by the player during the game per role, The hit game ended.

  On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the state in which the specific game is being executed and the above-described disadvantageous period overlap, the effect of the specific game can be changed based on the length of the disadvantageous period. Make up. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to select the content of the game during the specific game (the end condition to be established), so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, the special electric winning operation device 643 is provided in the general winning award device 640 as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol change being executed. Also, in the above-described fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the second winning opening 1645 serving as a trigger for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is provided in the general winning award device 640. In such a configuration, in the gaming machine, the period until the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port or the second entrance port (flowing period of the ball) is made random (delayed). It is preferable to provide delay means.

  That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, a period until a plurality of special symbol changes is completed is configured to be a time reduction period, and a time reduction state (number of reductions) is set by executing a jackpot game. In this case, the remaining time period of the suspended special figure change is added without subtracting the number of time savings. Therefore, in the state where the number of remaining hours is remaining, and in the state where the number of remaining hours is reduced, and the number of remaining In the case where the remaining period of the figure fluctuation is long, it is configured such that a case where the big hit game is executed (a case where the big hit game is executed after the time reduction period is shortened) is advantageous to the player.

  This may be advantageous to the player by providing a delay unit in the general winning award device 640 and delaying the timing at which the ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance port. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy at which timing the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power opening or the second entrance. In addition, it is possible to prevent a game in which a ball is inserted into the special power operation port or the second ball entry port in a state where the remaining period of the special figure change is long, from being intentionally performed.

  In this case, as the delay means, a croon member on which the ball rolls is provided, and when a plurality of balls flow into the clune member, the ball easily flows into a passage provided in the central portion of the clune member. And the ball passing through the passage opening may flow into the special power operation opening or the second entrance opening. With such a configuration, the sphere is provided with the special power operation port or the second ball entry port in accordance with the content of the game being played per ordinary figure (degree of winning of the ball into the ordinary power winning device 640) while providing the delay means. It is possible to control the timing of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that the ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance at an arbitrary timing.

  In addition, when the ball has flowed into the delay means (cloon member), a suggestive effect indicating to the player a period that is advantageous to the player (a period during which the remaining time of the special figure change is long) is executed. A result notifying means may be provided for notifying whether or not the timing of entering the special power operating port or the second entrance is a timing that is advantageous to the player (the remaining period of the special figure change is long). Further, in the above-described example, the example in which the cloon member is used as the delay unit has been described. However, any device that can change the falling period of the ball that has entered the general winning award device 640 may be used. A plurality of flow paths having different periods (flow-down periods) from when the ball enters the winning device 640 to when the ball enters the special power operation port or the second ball entrance are provided, and any one of the plurality of flow paths is provided. Distributing means for distributing the balls may be provided.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 192. Like the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery) are executed in an overlapping manner. By changing the length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which are selected according to the set game state, by changing the length of the fluctuation time, Among the two types of special symbol lotteries that can be executed in an overlapping manner, there is a type in which the special symbol type in which the lottery is easily executed is changed according to the game state. Specifically, when one game state (for example, a normal state) is set, a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is selected. A long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the symbol variation time, and when a specific game state (for example, latent state) different from the normal state is set, the first special A long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the symbol, and a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. There is a configuration in which the first special symbol lottery is easily executed and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the small special lottery is configured to win the small hit with a high probability (for example, about 1/1) in the second special symbol lottery, and the small hit executed based on the small hit win In some cases, a latent state in which a game is frequently executed is set to a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, a game (advantageous game) in which small hitting games are frequently performed can be executed only in a specific game state (latent state), so that the player is expected to shift the game state. It was possible to play the game while playing. However, since the fixed fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the latent state, the small hitting game during the latent state is performed. It is not possible to provide a large difference in the execution frequency. In other words, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a small hit is almost won. Since the difference is provided in the frequency, there is a possibility that the game in the latent state becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the range that can be selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, the configuration is such that as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is smaller, a shorter variation time is more easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, by executing the game in the latent state (right-handed game), the start winning of the first special symbol (holding storage) and the starting winning of the second special symbol are both performed. Depending on the small hit type that is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the running of the first special symbol change is interrupted, or the change is forcibly stopped (discarded) with the lottery result indicating the deviation It is configured to be able to do. By forcibly stopping the change of the first special symbol during execution, the number of reserved first special symbols can be positively reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the number of storages of the first special symbol based on the result of the lottery of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a latent state. A certain state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set. The detailed state will be described later, but the latent state is configured as a gaming state most advantageous to the player. Then, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, the probable change state is configured as a game state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the game state may be indicated by using the name of the effect mode executed during each game state, for example, the normal state is referred to as a normal mode, the probable state is referred to as a probable mode, and the latent state is referred to as a rush mode. In some cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 2). The V winning device 65 and the motor-operated accessory 640 are deleted, and instead, a right variable winning device 1650, a right motor-operated accessory 164, and a right second ball entrance 645 are provided. Further, the difference is that the positions of the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are different. The other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, each of a left area (left area) and a right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80 in the game area formed on the game board 13 is provided. A prize port (ball entry port) is provided so that a ball can be awarded (ball entry). Therefore, different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, a game in which the ball flows down to the left area (left-handed game) and a game in which the ball flows down to the right area (right-handed) Game).

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the seventh embodiment, the player is configured to execute a different game depending on the set game state, and when the normal state is set, In order to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64, a left-handed game is executed. If the certainty-change state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order to allow the right motor-operated role product 164 to win the ball. In the case where the latent state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order to make the ball enter the right second entrance 645. In addition, even when a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, a right-handed game is executed.

  That is, when a game advantageous to the player is executed, a right-handed game is performed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player know whether or not the current situation is advantageous by the game method, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Although details will be described later, during the game state (probable state, latent state, and various hit states) in which the right-handed game is executed, the right-handed game is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed so as to display a guidance display mode for executing As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entrance 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80, but a ball that has flowed down the left area by a left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64. The ratio and the ratio of the ball that has flowed down the right region by the right-handed game into the first entrance 64 are made different depending on the nails and various structures planted on the board of the game board 13. Specifically, it is configured such that about 15 balls that have flowed down the left area by the left-handed game, one ball enters the first entrance port 64, and the right-handed area is formed by the right-handed game. It is configured such that about every 250 balls that have flowed down, one ball enters the first entrance hole 64. Therefore, in the normal state in which a ball is inserted into the first entrance hole 64 to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, performing the left-handed game is the most advantageous game method for the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 157, the right variable winning device 1650 and the through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650 are provided in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80). A right electric entrance 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67, and a right electric accessory 164 having an opening / closing door 164r1 capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first entrance 164r. In a state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed, the ball that has flowed (passed) on the upper surface thereof can enter the second right ball entry port 645 and the above-described respective ball entry ports without entering the ball. A variable winning device 650 is provided in a downstream area where the ball flowing down the right area reaches.

  As shown in FIG. 157, only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 in the state where the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed) are in the second right entrance 645. A flowing path of the game ball is set so as to be reachable. In other words, even if a right-handed game is performed in a high probability state (probable change state) of a normal symbol, in which the right electric accessory 164 is likely to be opened, almost all the game balls passing through the through gate 67 are in the right first entry. Since the ball enters the ball opening 164r, the game ball cannot enter the second right entrance 645. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that the game can be advanced by the right-handed game even in the probable change state (probability change mode).

  In the seventh embodiment, the variable member (opening / closing door) 1650a is configured to be variable so that almost all balls flowing down the right region by the right-handed game can win the open right variable winning device 1650. I have. The right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable ball-taking means) that is opened in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  In a state where the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (a state in which the small hitting game is not executed), about a half of a ball flowing down the right region is an area where the through gate 67 is provided (a right variable winning game). Of the left and right areas defined by the nails implanted on the left side of the device 1650, it flows down the right side area (first path), and the remaining half is left side area (second path). Flow down. The ball flowing down the left area (second path) flows down to the variable winning device 650 without entering the right motorized accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 1645.

  On the other hand, all the balls flowing down the right area (first path) where the through gate 67 is provided flow down toward the upstream side of the right electric accessory 164 (the upstream end side of the opening / closing door 164r1). Then, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 flows down from the upstream side to the downstream side. Then, about ／ of the balls ejected from the upper surface of the right electric accessory 164 enter the right second entrance 645, and about １ ／ of the remaining balls enter the right electric accessory 164 and the right second The ball passes through a gap formed between the ball and the entrance 645 and flows down to the variable winning device 650.

  In other words, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of paths are provided for the ball fired to the right region by the right-handed game to reach the variable winning device 650, and each of the paths is different so that the period required for the ball to flow down is different. A path has been formed. Specifically, the configuration is such that the falling period of the sphere in the right area (first path) is about 2 seconds, and the falling period of the sphere in the left area (second path) is about 1 second. With this configuration, a ball fired at a different timing (a ball fired by a right-handed game), specifically, a plurality of balls fired at 0.6 second intervals can be changed at the same timing. It is possible to reach the winning device 650. Therefore, during the period when the variable prize device 650 is in the open state (during the jackpot game), a plurality of balls can be easily made to simultaneously enter the variable prize device 650, so that the player is allowed to flow down during the jackpot game. You can be interested in the behavior of the sphere.

  The right electric accessory 164 is opened when a winning is achieved in a normal symbol lottery (general figure lottery) in which a lottery condition can be satisfied when a ball passes through the through gate 67 (when a general figure winning game is executed). It is a variable ball entry means to be operated. Here, the contents of the ordinary symbol lottery (general figure lottery) and the game per general figure lottery in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described.

  In the seventh embodiment, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball can enter the right electric accessory 164 by the right-handed game although the probability is low, even if the probability is low. For example, when a right-handed game is played during the normal state, the ball can be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 at a ratio of about 1 in 50 balls. This ball entry ratio is set to be lower than the ratio of balls entering the first entrance 64 (the ratio of approximately 20 balls) when a left-handed game is played in the normal state. The ball that has entered the right motorized accessory 164 is configured to always enter the right first entry opening 164r. Then, when a ball is made to enter the right electric accessory 164, a lottery right for the first special symbol is acquired (satisfies lottery conditions), as in the case where a ball is made to enter the first entry opening 64. ).

  Furthermore, when a ball is made to enter the first entrance opening 64, prize balls (four) are given in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol as a privilege of having the ball enter. On the other hand, when a ball is made to enter the right electric auditors product 164, a prize ball (one piece) is given as a privilege of having made the ball enter, in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol. In other words, when the normal state (low probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed when the left-handed game is executed rather than the right-handed game. It is configured so that the number of prize balls awarded when the ball is thrown into the entrance where the ball is thrown in in order to easily obtain the right and to draw the ball for the first special symbol lottery right is increased. ing. Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

  When a right-handed game is played during the normal state, about one third of the balls flowing down the right region enter the right second entrance 645. When a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a lottery right for executing a lottery of the second special symbol is given, and one prize ball is given. As will be described in detail later, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to set a long time (10 minutes) as the fluctuation time. In the present embodiment, the lottery right of the second special symbol is not stored (reserved). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is not performed smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 157, when the jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is performed, and a game in which a ball is awarded to the variable winning device 650 is executed. Since the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the execution of the jackpot game, a ball enters the first right entrance 164r of the right motorized accessory 164 during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game ends. Later, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls) becomes the upper limit.

  Thereby, when the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, the game is started with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being the upper limit. In the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and a long variation (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. ) Is selected. Then, a game (small hit RUSH) of acquiring many prize balls while frequent wins in small hits in the second special symbol lottery is executed.

  Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent state reaches a predetermined number (one or two), the number of balls is not more than the predetermined number (0, 3, or 4). It is configured such that a short variation time is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation. In other words, the period in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes the predetermined number during the latent state is the period in which the number of small hit games executed per unit time tends to be the largest, and the game period advantageous to the player Becomes

  As described above, since the present embodiment does not have the hold storage function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game during the latent state. Then, the first special symbol is configured to change for a long time (10 minutes) during the latent state. Therefore, during the latent state, it is difficult to reach the predetermined number (one or two) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol after the elapse of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a part of the second special symbol lottery where a small hit is won is configured so as to forcibly stop (discard) the first special symbol variation that is being executed. This allows the player to perform a game for reducing the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol while performing a game aiming for a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the advantage period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) in the latent state is set based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and further, the second special symbol lottery is performed. When the game to be executed (right-handed game) is executed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased. Therefore, when the advantageous period of the second special symbol lottery (change) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the advantageous period will continue.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the hold storage function of storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined based on the number of the hold of the first special symbol. Is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second special symbol is stored based on a value obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol. May be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the long variation time is always selected for the variation time of the first special symbol selected during the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation time of the first special symbol variation in the latent state may be selected such that the variation time of the short variation (for example, 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of about 1/10. With such a configuration, it is possible to include the lapse of the variation time of the first special symbol in a realistic method of causing the storage of the first special symbol to occur during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to substantially have a plurality of triggers for reducing the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol in the latent state.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when the discarding condition is satisfied in a part of the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol change being executed is discarded. Although it was configured as described above, a discard condition that can be satisfied regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol may be used. For example, the number of balls that have entered the right variable winning device 1650 during the execution of the small hit game May be set based on a predetermined winning condition (for example, 11 winning conditions), or may be set in any of the game areas (right area) of the game board 13. Discarding conditions that may be satisfied when a ball enters the ball opening may be set. As described above, the discarded state to the first special symbol is established by various factors, so that it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the advantageous period is set.

  Next, the configuration of the right electric accessory 164 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 (a) is a front perspective view schematically showing a closed state of the right electric accessory 164 (a state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed). FIG. 158 (b) is a front perspective view of the right electric accessory 164. It is the front perspective view which showed typically the open state (state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 was open).

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 so as to prevent the game balls from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the door 164r1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, and flows down the door 164r1 from the left side to the right side along the outer periphery of each convex portion 164r1a to 164r1c. That is, on the opening / closing door 164r1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. For this reason, compared with the case where each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c is not provided (that is, the case where the game ball flows down linearly from the left to the right in front view on the opening and closing door 164r1), the opening and closing door 164r1 is provided. The time required to completely flow down the upper surface can be increased. Thus, a plurality of balls (subsequent balls) can easily reach the upper surface of the door 164r1 while one ball flows down the upper surface of the door 164r1. Therefore, the period during which the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 can be lengthened, and the ball can easily be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 when the per-drawing game is executed. can do.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, in the present embodiment, when a high probability state (probable change state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state, most of the balls passing through the through gate 67 are rightward. In order to enter the electric accessory 164, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the operation content of the game per ordinary symbol, and the path of the ball passing through the through gate 67 are designed. With this configuration, the probability change state increases the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery from that in the normal state, and performs the right-handed game, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is performed than in the normal state. Can be easily executed. In addition, during the probable change state, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player playing the game during the probable change state. it can. In the present embodiment, if a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the probable change state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time (60) shorter than the normal state is used. Second) is selected.

  With such a configuration, during the execution of the second special symbol change for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the state shifts from the probable state to the latent state, and the state shifts to the latent state. Nevertheless, the occurrence of a situation where the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed for a long time is suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as a transition condition for transitioning the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the probable state is a predetermined number (50 times). A first transition condition that is satisfied when the arrival is reached, and a second transition condition that is satisfied when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state. are doing. That is, in the probable change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (when the second shift condition is satisfied), the probability of the change is determined. Even if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) executed during the state has not reached the predetermined number (50 times), it is possible to shift to the latent state.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the opening / closing door 164r1 slides from the front side in the front view to the rear side in the front view, and moves inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. Is stored. Thus, the right first entrance 164r is opened. Although not described in detail, the opening / closing door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can be switched between an on state and an off state based on an instruction from the main control device 110. When current is supplied to the solenoid, the solenoid is turned on and the door 164r1 is opened. In other words, the structure is such that current flows to the solenoid only when a normal symbol lottery is won and a normal symbol winning game is executed. This eliminates the need for power during the period when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and when the open / close door 164r1 occupying a large proportion is in the closed state, so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed. .

  When the first ball entrance 164r is opened (when the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened), the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can win the right electric accessory 164. Further, since the interval in the height direction of the opening for accommodating the opening / closing door 164r1 is sufficiently small with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 is moved when the sliding movement of the opening / closing door 164r1 is started. The game ball flowing down is not stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening / closing door 164r1, and when the opening / closing door 164r1 slides into the inside of the game board 13, it is located on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. The ball can be dropped from the door 164r1 toward the first entrance 164r.

  In the seventh embodiment, by providing three convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 164r1, the configuration is such that the game ball bypasses the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, and the game ball passes through the opening and closing door 164r1. Although the passage period is configured to be long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 has a higher coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, and the like). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to make the game ball difficult to roll (for example, to provide irregularities on the surface).

  FIG. 159 is a plan view of the opening / closing door 164r1 viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 159, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of a sphere are embedded in a zigzag path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 where the sphere can roll (easy). These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other by a distance at least exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. The known outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f become H (high) when a game ball is arranged above them, and output L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the above. It is composed of an optical sensor. In the seventh embodiment, a combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Then, the passing state of the ball on the opening / closing door 164r1 is calculated based on the combination of the outputs of the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the ball passing state notification based on the calculation result can be executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know how close the ball shot by the right-handed game has approached the right second entrance 645 during the probable change state. Therefore, by shifting the execution timing of the right-handed game during the probable change state based on the content of the ball passing situation notification to be executed, the interest of the game during the probable change state can be improved. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are provided only on the opening / closing door 164r1, but the invention is not limited thereto. A passage detection sensor is provided in an area from the passage to reaching the top of the opening and closing door 164r1 and an area after passing through the top surface of the opening and closing door 164r1, and the number of balls reaching the opening and closing door 164r1 and the top surface of the opening and closing door 164r1 are determined. The number of passed balls may be configured to be detectable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, a description will be given of a flowing state when a ball fired by a right-handed game flows down the right region. FIG. 160 (a) is a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), and schematically shows a ball flowing state when the ball enters the right second entrance 645. FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flowing down state when a small hitting game is being executed in a latent state.

  In the seventh embodiment, when a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, a ball is inserted into the right second entrance 645 by a right-handed game. The game to be played is configured to be the most advantageous game for the player. When the right-handed game is executed during the latent state, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the open / close door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 that is in the closed state. 2 Enters the ball entrance 645.

  As will be described in detail later, in the latent state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is reduced to １ ／. It is configured such that 30 seconds is set as a period (variation time) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the stop display (confirmation) of the lottery result. In other words, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set (a normal state, a latent state, and a big hit game state), the through gate 67 is set at a ratio of one ball to two balls. Is passed, one ball per four balls is won per ordinary figure, and a game per ordinary figure is executed once every 60 seconds.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a meandering spherical flow path (passing period 1.. (3 seconds), by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to cause a plurality of balls to stay on the open / close door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state with a high probability. Make up.

  Therefore, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is possible to cause one or two balls to be awarded to the right electric accessory 164 in one minute. In addition, since it is configured so that the ball can easily stay on the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric auditorium 164, even if the game period per game is set to a short period (for example, 0.2 seconds open), The ball can easily be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 during the per-game game.

  By setting the game period of the per-figure per game to be short in this way, when it is determined that the per-figure per-game is to be executed based on the stop display mode of the ordinary symbol, when the right-handed game is executed, the ball By the time the player reaches the right electric combination 164, it is possible to end the game per day drawing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game in which the right-hitting game is executed after it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and the ball is efficiently won in the right electric auditors product 164.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable winning device (second attacker) that is opened during a small hit game is provided above (upstream) the through gate 67. Is provided. Therefore, even in the state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, if the second special symbol lottery can be smoothly executed in the gaming state (the latent state), the small hitting game is executed. It is possible to suppress the ball from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric accessory 164.

  With this configuration, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is more difficult for the right electric accessory 164 to win a ball in the latent state than in the normal state or during the jackpot game. can do. Therefore, in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, the right electric accessory 164 is made to win a ball, whereby the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number) can be acquired to the upper limit. However, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls due to the right-handed game executed during the latent state.

<Production contents in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161 to FIG. 165, characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the flow of the effect from the setting of the probable state as the gaming state to the setting of the latent state, and the flow of the effect executed during the latent state will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, a description will be given of the flow of the effect from the setting of the probable change state as the gaming state to the setting of the latent state. In the present embodiment, a part of the case where the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery is configured such that a probable change state (a high probability state of the special symbol, a high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. I have. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state where the probable change state is set, the game state is transited from the probable change state to the latent state. Specifically, as the probability change state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a big hit after the probability change state is set, the game state is changed from the probability change state to the latent probability state. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the probable change state is set, an effect for indicating a period until the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set is executed. This makes it possible to inform the player of the conditions until the latent state is set in an easily understandable manner.

  FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a state in which a probable change state (probability change mode) is set. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied in the probability change mode. .

  As described above, the seventh embodiment is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous latent mode (latent state) by elapse (addition) of the number of time savings in the probable change state. Therefore, in the probable state (probable mode), an effect aiming at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs a rocky mountain. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, the character “Aim for the top!” Is displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811, the probability change mode Is displayed, indicating the remaining number of times of change (number of lotteries) up to the end of the number of times (a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) has elapsed). The example of FIG. 161 (a) illustrates a case in which the character “50 m remaining” is displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display up to the top is subtracted and displayed by 1 m each time the variable display (variable display of the third symbol) is executed once. ) Can be easily understood to be the remaining number of fluctuations before shifting to the latent mode.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the above-described display area HR2 is changed (subtracted) every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the meter display after the change (subtraction) is performed. When the display mode becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”), the gaming state is configured to transition from the probable state to the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is configured so as to be added each time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the latent mode is set when the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is added to a specific numerical value. You may. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the meter display every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed. For example, when the variable display of the third symbol is executed a plurality of times, the display mode of the meter display is changed. It may be configured to be variable. With this configuration, the timing at which the display mode of the meter display changes can be made different from the variation display timing of the third symbol. By performing the effect of greatly reducing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display at a time while recognizing the approximate period until is set, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2, it is assumed that the period until the latent mode is set is short (the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied is approaching). In order to notify the player, only the effect of subtracting the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is executed, but a specific transition display mode (for example, "Remaining 0 m" may be displayed. For example, an effect of temporarily increasing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display may be executed while the probable change state is set. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the latent state is set, so that the player can play the game while always expecting the latent state to be set.

  Note that in this case, at least a plurality of transition conditions, specifically, a jackpot type that triggered the setting of the probability change state, and a transitional condition at the time of winning the jackpot as transition conditions for transition from the probability change state to the latent probability state. A first shift condition (e.g., 20 times reduced) that is likely to be satisfied and a second shift condition that is less easily satisfied than the first shift condition (e.g., 20 time reductions) are set as time reduction end conditions for ending the reduced time state according to the gaming state. (For example, the number of time savings is 50 times), a time saving end condition is set, and when the probable change state is set, a display indicating a period until the first transition condition, which is likely to be satisfied, is satisfied. An effect in which a mode (for example, “remaining 20 m”) is displayed in the display area HR2, and when the actually set time saving end condition is the first shift condition, the display mode of the meter display is directly subtracted. When the time saving termination condition that is actually set is the second transition condition, the specific transition time is satisfied at the timing when the second transition condition is satisfied while increasing the display mode of the meter display based on the number of remaining time reductions. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a transition display mode may be displayed. With this configuration, in the case where the probable change state is set after the jackpot game is over, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time saving end condition set for the current probable change state is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set in a probable change state set after the execution of a specific jackpot game. More specifically, the first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol change (lottery) executed during the probable change state has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50), The second time reduction end condition that is established when the result of the special symbol change (lottery) performed is a specific result (for example, a small hit C win) is set. The display area HR2 is configured to display a meter display based on the first time-saving end condition capable of calculating the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied in advance. That is, during the probable change state, the meter display is decremented each time the special symbol change is executed, and when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”), the latent display state is set. The effect of notifying that the operation is performed is executed. On the other hand, before the above-described first time-saving termination condition is satisfied (before the display mode of the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode), if the second time-saving termination condition is satisfied, the display of the meter display is displayed. As a shortened effect in which the mode (numerical value) rapidly decreases, an effect in which the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”) is performed after the effect in which the character 811 climbs the mountain vigorously.

  In this way, by configuring the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 to be variable in various modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the transition to the latent state is made, and thus the Can be performed while always expecting the player who is playing the game to shift to the latent state. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the transition to the latent state can be notified to the player by displaying the specific transition display mode as the display mode of the meter display, An easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probable change state. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the number of time savings has elapsed (the time saving end condition has been satisfied) in the probable change mode (probable change state). As shown in FIG. 162 (a), when the time-saving end condition (for example, a predetermined number of special symbol changes) is satisfied, an effect of causing the character 811 to reach the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is displayed. The character “Arrive at the top!” Is displayed. In addition, the character “0 m remaining” is displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the state has shifted to the latent state (latency mode).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed more than when the gaming state other than the latent state is set. Is configured to be easily executed, and in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a high probability (higher probability than the lottery of the first special symbol). Then, by executing the second special symbol lottery frequently, the small hit game is frequently executed, and the player is executed a game that can acquire many benefits (prize balls). . Hereinafter, a game in which the small hit game is frequently executed by the second special symbol lottery in the latent state will be referred to as “RUSH”, and the effect performed during the RUSH game will be referred to as “RUSH effect”.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows the state from the transition to the latent state (latency mode) to the state in which a prize ball can be actually acquired (until the small win in the second special symbol lottery). It is a figure showing a display mode in an interim state (preparation state). As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the preparatory state, the character "Right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm3, and "Start right-handed RUSH!" In the display area HR1. Is displayed. In addition, the text “RUSH in preparation” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the player enters a RUSH state in which a prize ball can be obtained by performing a right-handed game.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probable state, but the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the latent state is set. It may not be possible. Specifically, when the second special symbol change is executed during the probable change state, and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol change while the second special symbol change is being executed. Means that the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state while the second special symbol change is being executed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol variation in the latent state is not executed until the currently executing second special symbol variation (the second special symbol variation whose variation started during the probable variation state) is stopped and displayed. .

  As described above, when a period during which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly performed after the latent state is set occurs for a predetermined period, the display screen (RUSH preparation) shown in FIG. Screen), it is possible to notify the player that the RUSH game will be executed later, so that even if the latent state is set, the RUSH game is not executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state, the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or more). In the case of, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is configured to be executed. However, after the game state in which the advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed is set, the advantage is actually set. If the length of the period until the execution condition of the game is satisfied is a predetermined period, it may be configured to inform that the advantageous game will be executed later. For example, during the disadvantageous game (probable change state), In a pachinko machine 10 in which a game method (for example, left-handed game) to be executed by a player and a game method (for example, right-handed game) to be executed by a player during an advantageous game (probable state) are different, Latent state is set Using the period until the second special symbol variations are actually executed by the right-handed player since the, it may be configured to perform RUSH preparing display shown in FIG. 162 (a).

  Furthermore, for example, in the disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is easier to win the normal symbol lottery than in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the selected fluctuation time is longer. A pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be easily configured, and that is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easily performed during a general symbol per game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won. Then, when the advantageous game state is set, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is executed during the period until the normal symbol change executed during the disadvantageous game state is stopped and displayed. May be configured. In this case, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (a), the display mode of “right-handed” displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 is not displayed (is hard to see), or “preparation” is displayed in the display area HR1. Please wait for a while. " That is, although the latent state is set, the player is notified that the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (is difficult to execute) even if the right-handed game is executed. The RUSH preparation period display may be displayed as described above. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the RUSH game is not executed in spite of the execution of the right-handed game, and the player is not distrusted.

  Then, when the second special symbol change (lottery) is executed during the latent state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (b) is displayed, and a RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the latent state and the second special symbol change in which the small hit is won is executed, the display area HR1 is displayed. Displays the character "RUSH START" in the sub display area Ds. Further, an icon (treasure box 812) imitating a treasure box is displayed in the main display area Dm. Thereby, during the RUSH game, the effect (RUSH effect) using the icon (the treasure box 812) imitating the treasure box can be easily notified to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, display contents of a RUSH effect executed during a RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display content displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, from the opened treasure box 812, an effect is executed in which a lottery result display mode indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery this time is displayed. As the lottery result display mode, for example, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the character "" is displayed. Is displayed, and if it is off, a display mode imitating a "cross" is displayed. As described above, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 can be displayed on the treasure box 812 that is always displayed, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed. And the effect of displaying the treasure box 812, the effect of opening the treasure box 812, and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812, in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter. Also, since the number of effects to be executed can be reduced, it is possible to execute effects that are easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 and FIG. 165, a description will be given of an effect performed during a super RUSH game that is more advantageous to the player during a RUSH game than during another RUSH game. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the latent state is configured to be variable based on the number of special figure reservations stored (the number of storages of the first special symbol). Specifically, in the second special symbol change executed when the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, 1), the second special symbol variation executed when the number of special figure reservations is other than the specific number is performed. It is configured such that a shorter variation time is more easily selected than a special symbol variation. As described above, while the latent state is set, an effect of giving a bonus (prize ball) to the player is performed by causing the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol lottery to frequently occur. .

  Therefore, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the latent state, the larger the ratio of the small hitting game period to the unit period can be, so that the game state can be set to be more playable by the player. it can. Hereinafter, during the RUSH game, the RUSH game during the period in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a specific number and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation becomes short will be referred to as a super RUSH game, and will be described.

  First, a description will be given of the effect contents executed when the RUSH game is switched to the super RUSH game. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents executed in a state where the special figure reservation number is easily subtracted during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, when a specific small hit (for example, a small hit B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent state, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly removed. Is configured to stop display. Further, a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is easily selected for the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state. Furthermore, it is configured such that a reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) can be acquired by a right-handed game executed during the latent state. In other words, it is configured such that it is difficult to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls based on the elapse of the fluctuation time while performing the RUSH game during the latent state.

  Therefore, in order to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls until the condition for executing the super RUSH game is satisfied, it is necessary to win a specific small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol variation that has won the specific small hit is executed, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the character "Aim for more customers" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the main In the display area Dm, an effect for the character 811 to aim at a higher position is executed.

  Specifically, a display mode indicating a stage corresponding to the difference between the currently acquired special figure 1 reserved ball number and the special figure 1 reserved ball number that is a condition for executing the super RUSH game is displayed. In the display area HR71 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display for suggesting a situation until the super RUSH game is executed to the player is displayed.

  Then, when a specific small hit is won a plurality of times during the RUSH game and the number of reserved special figure 1 balls reaches a specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164 (b) is displayed. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents displayed when the execution condition of the super RUSH game is satisfied. When the execution condition of the super RUSH game (for example, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 becomes 2) is established, the character 811 reaches the top, and the display mode for notifying that the execution condition of the super RUSH game has been established is manually set. The effect taken is executed. Then, in the display area HR71, a display mode "2" indicating that the current number of reserved special figure 1 balls has the execution condition of the super RUSH game is displayed.

  164 (a) and (b) are displayed, that is, after the effect mode indicating the super RUSH entry is set in the special figure discarding setting process (see S4643 in FIG. 186) described later, a new mode is set. When the special figure 1 suspension is acquired, the super RUSH game may not be executed when the first special symbol change being executed is discarded. Therefore, in a state where FIGS. 164 (a) and (b) are displayed, a process of determining whether or not a special figure 1 reservation has been newly executed is performed. Is executed. For example, when the special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired, an effect in which the peak shown in FIG. 164 (a) moves away in accordance with the number of the newly acquired special figure 1 reservations is executed. Thus, even if the super RUSH entry trigger disappears during the execution of the effect indicating the super RUSH entry, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, in FIGS. 164 (a) and (b), the effect contents when the super RUSH game is executed by decreasing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls have been described. Even when a super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, an effect indicating super rush entry is executed. In this case, a process is performed to determine whether or not the present time is a state in which an advantageous period (a period during which a super RUSH game is executed) is set by increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations by one (an increasing advantageous state). When it is determined that the game is in the increase advantage state, it is determined whether or not the game per ordinary drawing is executed. In this determination, the pre-reading process based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol variation being executed and the information held in the ordinary symbol (the same process as the pre-reading process for the special symbol executed in each of the above-described embodiments is performed by the ordinary symbol) It is determined whether or not the per-figure-per-game is executed based on the pre-determination result (pre-read result) as to whether or not the information for winning the per-figure is included. Then, when it is determined that the game per ordinary drawing is to be executed, a super RUSH entry effect for indicating that an opportunity to increase the number of special figure 1 reservations will come soon.

  As a production mode of the super RUSH entry performance, the player is notified that the super RUSH game is to be executed by increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations (by making the right electric role 164 win a ball). The notification mode is set. Thereby, it is possible to easily establish a condition for causing the player to execute the super RUSH game. In the present embodiment, the player can grasp the conditions for executing the super RUSH game, that is, the case where the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and the case where the special figure 1 reserved In the case where the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, it is configured to execute an effect in which the player can identify the super RUSH game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the super RUSH game is executed. A configuration in which the player is notified only that it is in a state in which the condition to be easily satisfied is established, and the player is allowed to select whether to execute a game for increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations or to execute a game for decreasing the number. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of the effect performed during the super RUSH will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the super RUSH. When the super RUSH game is executed, the second special symbol change with a shorter change time than the normal RUSH game is easily executed, and as a result, the execution interval of the small hit game is shortened, and the small hit game is executed in a unit time. The number of times can be made larger than in a normal RUSH game. Therefore, during the super RUSH game, the game period becomes more advantageous for the player than during the normal RUSH game. Then, during the Super RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), the character "Super RUSH" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a plurality of treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the letters "speed up" are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In other words, during the Super RUSH game, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol change becomes short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the second special symbol lottery is drawn using one fluctuation period of the second special symbol change. Since it is difficult to execute the effect that suggests the result (the effect of displaying the treasure box) and the effect of informing the lottery result (the effect of opening the treasure box and display the contents), it is difficult to execute the The treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed, and an effect of opening the treasure box based on the lottery result is executed as appropriate.

  Specifically, a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes (for example, colors and designs) are displayed in advance, and an effect of opening a treasure box according to a lottery result of a second special symbol to be executed is executed. It is composed. In this case, as a lottery result in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is advantageous to the player, for example, when a jackpot in which the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game is won, a rainbow or gold As a lottery result that opens the luxurious treasure chest and is disadvantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when a jackpot that ends the RUSH game is won, a tattered An effect to open the treasure chest is executed.

  In this way, by displaying a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes in advance, the lottery result can be changed without executing an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box displayed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. (The effect of changing the display mode of the open treasure chest) can be easily executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game (super RUSH game) does not have the hold storage function, for example, the winning information of the second special symbol stored and held is stored. It is determined in advance, and based on the result of the preliminary determination, an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) indicating a lottery result cannot be executed from a period before the second special symbol change based on the winning information is executed. Is configured. Therefore, since it is difficult to set a long period for performing the effect indicating the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, the effect of displaying the plurality of treasure chests having different display modes in advance as described above can be further enhanced. it can.

  In the case of using a configuration in which a plurality of treasure boxes with different display modes are displayed in advance as in the present embodiment, the number of treasure boxes displayed simultaneously and the display mode may be set at random, The display mode may be configured to be variable according to the number of games (the number of executions of the special symbol lottery) in the state. Also, the current number of special figure reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is read, and it is determined whether or not the super RUSH game is easy to end based on the read result. May be configured to change the display mode and the number of displays. With such a configuration, not only the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery but also the game status of the Super RUSH game can be grasped by the player using the display mode and the number of display of the treasure box, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165 (b), a description will be given of the effect contents of the effect indicating the end of the super RUSH game during the super RUSH game. FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed in an end suggestion effect indicating the end of the super RUSH game. As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game is executed when the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is a specific number (one or two). The right area of the game board 13 is configured such that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) can be increased by a game (right-handed game) executed during the super RUSH game. (See FIG. 157).

  Therefore, during the Super RUSH game, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls may increase, that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls may increase from two to three, and the super RUSH game may end. In such a case, an end suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 165 (b) is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 165 (b), the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is two, and during the Super RUSH game, a normal symbol is won (the winning probability is 1/30), and the right electric accessory 164 is displayed. The main display area Dm displays a display mode indicating that the character 811 is squatting down and that the super RUSH game is to be ended. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “Pinch to end” is displayed.

  By executing the end suggestion effect in this manner, a ball is awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 during the super RUSH game, and the super RUSH game shifts to a normal RUSH game due to an increase in the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (b), in the state where the Super RUSH game ends, that is, when the Super RUSH game ends due to the increase in the number of special figure 1 retaining balls, the special figure 1 Although it is configured not to notify the player that the state is likely to increase (a state where the game is executed per day), the present invention is not limited to this. A guide message may be displayed to make it difficult for the ball to enter the right electric auditors goods 164 during the per-game game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the super RUSH game from ending based on the increase in the number of reserved special figure 1 balls, and to display the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to the player during the super RUSH game. Can be watched, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the execution timing of the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 165 (b) may be the start timing of a per-figure per game, or the normal symbol fluctuation (variation time of 10 seconds to 30 seconds) that has been won per per-figure. The start timing, the timing when the remaining variation time of the ordinary symbol variation reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and the information included in the ordinary symbol holding ball are determined in advance, and a predetermined value set based on the preliminary determination result. The timing (for example, 30 seconds before the game per day is executed) may be used.

  Furthermore, when executing the above-described guidance notification (guidance notification that interrupts the right-handed game to make it difficult for the ball to win the right electric auditory product 164 during the per-game game), the notification content of the guidance notification When the right-handed game is interrupted after grasping, the ball fired by the right-handed game executed before the interruption is guided to the right motor-operated role 164 in such a period that the ball cannot be won. The notification may be executed, for example, the guide notification may be executed 10 seconds before the game per day is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player who has grasped the guidance notification to reliably execute the game without increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. In addition, in the case where the game per ordinary figure is not actually executed, or in the case where, for example, the information included in the ordinary symbol holding ball is determined in advance, and the game is preliminarily determined that the game per ordinary figure is executed 60 seconds later, The above-mentioned end suggestion effect (so-called gaseous effect) may be executed at a timing when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 cannot increase without interrupting the hitting game.

  In FIG. 165 (b) described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is increased and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is no longer a specific number (1 or 2), and the super RUSH game can be ended. Contrary to the above, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is not the specific number (one or two), and the super RUSH game is terminated. In some cases, you can.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 166, an end suggestion effect that is executed when the super RUSH game ends when the number of reserved special figure 1 balls decreases will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect screen of the end suggestion effect performed when the super RUSH game ends when the number of reserved special figure 1 balls decreases. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state in which the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is one, and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, an end suggestion effect is executed in the main display area Dm on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 165 (b) described above. .

  In this case, the first special symbol change is stopped and displayed after 1.5 seconds, and the next special symbol change is started, so that the number of reserved special figure 1 balls becomes 0 and the super RUSH game ends. Become. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “Pinch to end! By executing the end suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the Super RUSH game will end unless the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is increased.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of occasions for reducing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls are provided, and as shown in FIG. There is a case where a specific small hit (small hit B) is won in the special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded). In any state where the opportunity is established (can be established), by executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the game is provided to the player when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game. It is possible to suppress giving a strange feeling to the person.

  As the timing for executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed or the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation winning the small hit B is determined. It is also possible to calculate the remaining period until the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes 0 based on the determination result, and execute the calculation at a timing when the calculation result becomes a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 30 seconds) from the timing when the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is reduced from two to one. In other words, the state in which the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is one is a state in which the super RUSH game continues even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases by one, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes zero. The end suggestion effect may be executed so as to reduce the number of reserved special figure 1 balls to two without discriminating the timing of obtaining.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game is configured to be able to end even when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases or decreases. Up to now, it is possible to execute a game in which the super RUSH game is continued by increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and a game in which the super RUSH game is continued without increasing the special figure 1 reserved number. It is possible to provide a novel game ability that is not available.

  It should be noted that the effect content is different from the effect content of the present embodiment. For example, an end suggestion effect executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is easily established by increasing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls (FIG. 165) (Refer to FIG. 166) and the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 166) performed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is easily satisfied by reducing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is made the same. Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the player is made to select whether or not to continue the right-handed game in the sub display area Ds. As a result, the game method selected by the player, that is, a game method for continuing the super RUSH game by executing a right-handed game to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls The duration of the Super RUSH game can be varied depending on the game method in which the Super RUSH game is continued by interrupting the right-handed game so as not to allow the player to actively play the game. Can be. In addition, when the player selects an incorrect game method, the game method is a game method that facilitates establishment of the end condition of the super RUSH game, so that the game method selected by the player is changed to a later game result. The effect can be increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the period in which the super RUSH game is executed is configured to be in the specific range (one or two) in which the number of reserved balls 1 is continuous. Without limitation, for example, the special figure 1 reserved ball number in which the super RUSH game is executed may be set in a discontinuous range. For example, the special figure 1 reserved ball number may be one and three. In such a case, a super RUSH game may be executed. In this case, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 can be changed from 1 to 0 and in the case where the number of reserved balls can be changed from 3 to 4, as the end suggestion effect, the above-described FIG. 165 (b) and FIG. When a similar end suggestion effect is performed and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 can be changed from 1 to 2 or from 3 to 2, instead of indicating the end of Super RUSH, the super RUSH game It is preferable to configure so as to execute a standby effect as an effect indicating transition to the standby state. In other words, according to the above-described example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is two, even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases or increases, the super RUSH game is executed, Compared to the case where the number of reserved balls 1 is 0 or four, the super RUSH game is more likely to be executed (standby state), so the standby effect is executed to inform the player of the fact. It can be informed clearly. Also, in this case, the first special symbol change executed when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is two (special figure 1 reserved ball in a state where the special figure 1 reserved ball used in the first special symbol lottery this time is subtracted) The variation time selected in the first special symbol variation when the number of balls is 2) is configured to be shorter than when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is zero or four. May be. As a result, the transition from the standby state to the super RUSH game can be facilitated, and the player who has transitioned to the standby state can be motivated to play the game.

  Next, a game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of a gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in the present embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, the low probability state of a normal symbol) and the probable change state (the high probability state of a special symbol, the high probability state of a normal symbol) are used as the game state. , A latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set. And the amount of privilege given to the player who plays a game differs according to the set game state. More specifically, when the latent state is set, the player is given the most privilege, and then the probability is gradually reduced, and the amount of privilege given to the player in the normal state is reduced. Make up.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the normal state is set as the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). During the normal state, the left-hitting game is easier to execute the special symbol lottery when the left-hitting game is executed than the right-hitting game. Therefore, the left-hitting game aiming for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Is executed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 during the normal state, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200 is executed. In the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which the normal state is set again after the jackpot game is completed at a rate of 35% is set, and the probability is changed after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 45% The jackpot type (jackpot B7) in which the state is set is set, and the jackpot type (jackpot C7) in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed is set at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when a special symbol lottery in the normal state is won in a jackpot, it is most likely to shift to the probable change state, and then to the normal state, and to shift to the latent state most. It is configured to be difficult. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game property in which a latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set by passing through a plurality of game states.

  Next, when the probable change state is set, since the state becomes the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the opening operation of the right electric accessory 164 becomes easier than that of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the first ball entry is performed by the left hitting game. Rather than letting the ball enter the mouth 64, it is easier for the ball to enter the right first entry opening 164r by the right-handed game, so that the game for executing the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game is executed. . Further, during the probable change state, the special symbol is in a high probability state, and a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/60 is executed. If the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state, the big hit type (big hit A7) in which the normal state is set after the big hit game is set at a rate of 35%, and the big hit game is set at a rate of 45% A jackpot type (spot B7) for which a latent state is set after the end is set, and a jackpot type (spot C7) for which the probability change state is set again after the end of the jackpot game is set at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the probable change state is configured to be more easily shifted to the latent state when the jackpot is won than in the normal state which is the initial state. With this, when the jackpot is won during the normal state and the state shifts to the probable state, the state of the probable change can be set to a state that is more easily shifted to the latent state than the normal state, so that the player It is possible to make it easy to continue playing the game.

  Also, if the special symbol change is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot in the state where the probability change state is set, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (time saving termination condition) is satisfied. , So as to shift to a latent state. That is, when the probability change state is set, the first transition condition (the probability of establishment is approximately 35%) that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without the jackpot winning (the winning probability of 1/60), When the jackpot is won during the state and the jackpot B7 is set, the latent state is set when any of the second shift conditions (satisfaction probability is about 30%) that is satisfied is satisfied. Will be. The first transition condition described above is one in which the probability of establishment varies according to the remaining period of the probable change state. For example, if the special symbol change is performed 49 times during the probable change state, it is executed next. The first transition condition is satisfied (the probability of establishment is about 90%) when the winning is achieved (the winning probability is 59/60) in the 50th special symbol change.

  As described above, in the case where a plurality of transition conditions for transitioning the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state are provided, the transition condition in which the probability of establishment varies according to the number of executions of the special symbol change (first transition condition). And a transition condition (second transition condition) in which the establishment probability does not vary in accordance with the number of times of execution of the special symbol change, the player who is playing the game in the certain change state is provided with a game The desired game result can be changed according to the progress of the game. Therefore, immediately after the probability change state is set, that is, the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition is smaller than the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition. During the period in which the second transition condition is higher, an effect is performed to inspire the player to determine whether the second transition condition is satisfied. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability change state was set, that is, the first transition condition was satisfied. During the period in which the probability that the latent information is set based on the second transition condition is higher than the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition, the first transition condition is satisfied for the player. It is possible to perform an effect that inspires or not.

  Next, the flow of the game during the latent state will be described. When the latent state is set, the RUSH game corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (the number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is executed as described above. Specifically, when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is 0, 3, or 4, a normal length is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation during the latent state. When the RUSH game is executed and the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is one or two, a length shorter than usual is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation during the latent state. It is configured such that an easy super RUSH game is executed. In this manner, by changing the variation time of the second special symbol change according to the game situation (special figure 1 number of reserved balls), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time, and thus the small hit game Can be varied, so that the player can perform a game in the latent state while expecting a more advantageous RUSH game to be performed.

  Both the RUSH game and the super RUSH game described above are games executed during the latent state, and the winning probability of the special symbol (winning in the second special symbol) is set to common (1/60). ing. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to be high (59/60). If a jackpot is won during the latent state, a jackpot type (jackpot D7) in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set at a rate of 35%. Is set again. On the other hand, when a small hit is won during the latent state, the gaming state does not change. That is, once the latent state is set, the RUSH game (game in the latent state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% of the jackpot winning) is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, and a sound lamp control provided in the main control device 110 are provided. The difference is that a part of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116) in that the first random number 7 table 202fa is replaced with the first random number table 202a. The small random number 7 table is substituted for the small random number table 202de, the second random number 7 table 202fc is substituted for the second random number table 202b, and the large jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd is substituted for the large jackpot type selection 4 table 202db. The difference is that a variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe is provided in place of the pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and a small hit type selection 7 table 202ff and a general map variation pattern selection 7 table 202fg are newly provided. ing. Although not shown, the seventh embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the range in which the value of the first random number counter C1 can be updated ranges from “0 to 399” to “0 to 599”. The difference is that the range in which the value of the second random number counter C2 can be updated is changed from "0-999" to "0-299". The other configurations are the same, and therefore, are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.

  First, the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b). FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa. The first random number 7 per hit table 202fa is determined to be a hit based on the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). The difference is that the value of the first random number counter C1 is defined.

  Specifically, regardless of the type of the special symbol for which the special symbol lottery has been executed (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot determination value (special The range of the value "0 to 2" of the first random number counter C1 is defined as a value determined to be a big hit in a symbol lottery, and when the special symbol high probability state is set, the first hit random number is set as the big hit determination value. The range of the value “0 to 9” of the random number counter C1 per one is defined. In other words, in the seventh embodiment, even if a special symbol lottery of any type is executed in a state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/200, and the special symbol is selected. Even if any type of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state in which the high probability state is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/60. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit for each special symbol type is commonly defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the random number counter C1 per one may be defined to be the jackpot determination value, or the number of values of the first random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot determination value for each special symbol type may be made different. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value ("0 to 2") of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit when the low probability state of the special symbol is set is set to the special symbol. Even when the high probability state is set, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is configured. With this configuration, the first look-ahead process (see S1775 in FIG. 135) and the second look-ahead process executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) performed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the process (see S1764 in FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes the information for winning the jackpot without executing the process of determining (predicting) the gaming state at a certain point in time. In addition, without being limited to this, at least a part or all of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is not determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The contents of the first random number table 202fa may be defined. With this configuration, when the same value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained, the value is set when the jackpot determination is performed using the obtained value of the first random number counter C1. The determination result can be made different depending on the game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal act of acquiring the value of the specific first random number counter C1 to be performed.

  Next, the contents of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents defined in the small hit random number 7 table 202fb. The small hit random number 7 table 202fb is different from the small hit random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the fourth embodiment in that the range of values that the first random number counter C1 can take is changed. The type is different only in that the range of the small hit determination value in the second special symbol is changed to “10-599”, and other types are the same, so that detailed description thereof is omitted. That is, the seventh embodiment is configured such that a small hit is won with a high probability (590/600) in the lottery of the second special symbol without winning in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 168 (d), this second random number 7 table 202fc indicates that the acquired second random number counter C4 has a value of “0” when the ordinary symbol is in a low probability state, as shown in FIG. When the normal symbol is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol hit is defined in the range of the acquired second random number counter C4 of “0 to 299”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/299) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. As a result, it is possible to make the execution probability of the game per ordinary symbol different between the ordinary state and the latent state, which are the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the probable state, which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same game method (right-handed game) is executed in the probable state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the latent state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. It is configured so that: In the right-handed game executed during the latent state, a game is executed in which a ball is inserted into the right second entrance 645 (see FIG. 157) to execute the second special symbol lottery. In the right-handed game to be executed, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by causing the right electric accessory 164 to enter a ball is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, details of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd. Like the big hit type selection table 202d in the first embodiment, the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored for each special symbol type.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment includes three jackpots of "big hit A7" to "big hit C7" as the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, two big hit types of "big hit D7" to "big hit E7" are defined as the big hit types of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 169, as the big hit type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 34”, and the big hit type is “big hit A7”. It is defined in association. The "big hit A7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds (R) normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the special symbol is set to the normal state after the end of the big hit. In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (the time reduction state) of the ordinary symbol is set varies. More specifically, when the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0). That is, if the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 35 random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit A7", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit A7" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit B7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". The “big hit B7” is a type of big hit (8 round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the special change state after the big hit end. In addition, when the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, 50 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while when the "big hit B7" is won in the probable state and the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0.

  That is, when the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the relatively advantageous probability change state (50 times). On the other hand, when the "big hit B7" is won in the probability change state or the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, if the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, it is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. On the other hand, when a win is made in a game state other than the normal state, the jackpot type is the most advantageous in the game state.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B7” is 45, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit B7" is determined is 45% (45/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit C7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". The “big hit C7” is a type of big hit (eight round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds and the special symbol is set to the special change state after the big hit end. In addition, when the "big hit C7" is won in the probability change, 50 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while when the "big hit C7" is won in the normal state and the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. Is set to 0.

  That is, during the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit C7" than to win the "big hit B7". The player who wins is more advantageous to the player. Further, during the latent state, the advantage degree does not change between the case where the "big hit B7" is won and the case where the "big hit C7" is won.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit C7" is 20, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot C11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the rate of transition to the gaming state (latent state) which is most advantageous to the player is determined. The latent state is set at 20% during the normal state, 45% during the probable state, and 65% during the latent state, so that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game. . With this configuration, when the gaming state transitions, for example, if the jackpot is won during the normal state, and if the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to the latent state than the normal state. Since it is possible to provide an easy advantageous state, it is possible to enthusiastically continue the game for a player for whom the latent state has not been set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 34”, while the jackpot type is “big hit D7”. Is associated and defined. The "big hit D7" is a big hit type in which the same content as the above "big hit A7" is defined, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the type after the big hit is set to the normal state of the special symbol. Jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot). In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (the time reduction state) of the ordinary symbol is set varies. More specifically, when the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probable state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit D7” is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the ratio of determining the “jackpot D7” is 35% (35/100). In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed when the most advantageous gaming state (latency state) is set for the player. This is an end opportunity to end the game state (probable state) that is most advantageous to the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit E7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". The "big hit E7" is a type of big hit (eight round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds and the special symbol is set to the certain change state after the end of the big hit. In addition, when the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. On the other hand, when the "big hit E7" is won in the probable state and the latent state, the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0.

  That is, when the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probable change state (100 times). On the other hand, when the "big hit E7" is won in the probability change state or the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit E7" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when the winning is made in the normal state. On the other hand, when a win is made in a game state other than the normal state, the jackpot type is the most advantageous in the game state.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E7” is 65, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E7" is determined is 65% (65/100).

  As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, in the most advantageous gaming state (latent state) for the player, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) mainly executed. Is configured such that the latent state loops at a rate of 65% and the latent state ends (the normal state is set) at a rate of 35%. Therefore, in the state where the latent state is set, the player obtains the prize ball by the small hitting game executed with a high probability (59/60), and wishes not to win the “big hit E7”. Will be executed.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The variation pattern selection table 202fe determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 as in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment. It is a data table for performing. In the seventh embodiment, the content of the data table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state is partially changed from the first embodiment described above as the variation pattern selection table 202fe. Is different in that a 7-table for probable change 202fe2 referred to in the case of a probable change state and a 7-table for latent search 202fe3 referred to in a probable state are added.

  First, the contents of the normal 7 table 202fe1 referred to when the gaming state is the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal seven table 202fe1. The normal 7 table 202fe1 is different from the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above in that the variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) as the symbol type and the second special symbol It is greatly different in that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a symbol (special figure 2) is defined.

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when a large hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls in a range of “0 to 99” and a normal variation (10000 milliseconds (10 seconds) )), The super fluctuation (15000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) in the range of "100 to 179", and the special fluctuation (20,000 milliseconds (20 seconds)) in the range of "180 to 198" Are associated.

  In FIG. 170, the length of the variation time specified for each variation pattern is shown in millisecond units (1/1000 second unit). However, for convenience of explanation, the length of the variation time will be described in the following description. Will be described in units of seconds.

  As the variation pattern determined when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost, the variation pattern of the short variation (1 second) which is out of the range of “0 to 180” is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. , "181 to 197", the out-of-range middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated, and the out-of-range super fluctuation (15 seconds) is associated with the value of "197, 198".

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, a long fluctuation (hit long fluctuation, out-of-long fluctuation) (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the lottery result. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, when a change pattern of the special symbol change is selected, the change pattern is selected with reference to the total value of the number of reserved memories of all the special symbols. In the present embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have the hold storage function, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is substantially changed based on the number of hold storages (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol. , And the variation pattern of the second special symbol are selected. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 of FIG. 139) is executed at a later stage than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation pattern is not selected when the number of special figure reserved balls is four. On the other hand, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 of FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery, as in the above-described fourth embodiment. The variation pattern may be selected in a state where the number of balls (the number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is four.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (a), a description will be given of the contents of the 7-table for probable variation 202fe2 which is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the probable variation state is selected. FIG. 171 (a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probable change seven table 202fe2. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the probable change state is set, a game in which a ball is made to win in the right electric accessory 164 by a right-handed game and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state is performed. Done. For the first special symbol change during the probable change state, a change pattern having the same content as that of the above-described normal seven-table 202fe1 is defined. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern in which a variation time (60 seconds) shorter than the variation pattern defined in the normal 7 table 202fe1 is defined. The other elements are the same as those in the above-described normal seven-table 202fe1, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the probable change state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball is less likely to enter the right second entrance 645 by opening the right electric accessory 164 with a high probability. It is configured to be. In other words, the configuration is such that it is more difficult to enter a ball into the right second entrance 645 when performing a right-handed game in the probable change state than when performing a right-handed game in the normal state. . Furthermore, when the normal state is set, a game in which a ball is thrown into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is an appropriate game method, and when a probable change state is set, a right-handed game is performed by a right-handed game. It is configured such that a game in which a ball enters the electric accessory 164 is an appropriate game method.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball can easily be made to enter the right second entrance 645. By setting a variation pattern in which a long variation time (10 minutes) is specified as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the right-handed game during the normal state, the second special symbol is executed. The act of executing a lottery is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the right-handed game, which is an appropriate game method, is executed during the probable change state, as described above with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, most of the balls fired by the right-handed game play the right motor combination. Although the ball enters the object 164, the ball flowing down the right area has an irregular behavior, for example, if the balls flowing down the right area collide with each other and jump over the open door 164r1, the right second entry. There is a case where the ball enters the ball opening 645.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the appropriate game method is executed as described above, when the ball flows down in an unpredictable manner and the ball enters the right second entrance 645, When a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state ( (60 seconds). Furthermore, although details will be described later, when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change state is set to the latent state regardless of the number of special symbol changes executed during the probability change state. It is configured so that it can be shifted to.

  Thereby, the player who is executing the game in the probable change state is caused to closely watch the behavior of the ball flowing down the right side area, and actively performs the game while expecting the second special symbol lottery to be executed. Can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the 7-table for latent accuracy 202fe3 which is referred to when a variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the latent state is selected. FIG. 171 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the seven tables for latent reliability 202fe3. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state where the latent state is set, the ball is made to enter the second entrance 645 by the right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. A game to be performed is performed. Then, by executing a long change (10 minutes) for the first special symbol change executed during the latent state, the number of reserved special symbols (first special symbol) stored in the latent state (the first special symbol) is stored. (The number of reserved balls in FIG. 1) is the upper limit number. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the latent state is made different according to the number of stored special symbols (first special symbols) (the number of reserved special balls 1). Make up.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the variation pattern determined in response to the first special symbol lottery includes the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Regardless of this, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (per-super long fluctuation, out-of-super long fluctuation) is associated. In other words, the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured such that a variation time of 600 seconds is always set.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a winning (big hit), the fluctuation pattern is determined when the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation number) is “0 to 3”, The long variation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the counter CS1 “0 to 198”, and when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations) is “4”, the total of the variation type counter CS1 is A short variation (1 second) corresponds to a range of “0 to 198”.

  In addition, as a variation pattern determined when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost (including small hits A and C), the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figures 1) is “1, 2”. Is associated with a short variation (0.5 seconds) that falls outside the entire range “0-198” of the variation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation number) is “0, 3, 4”. In this case, the entire range “0-198” of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the middle variation (10 seconds).

  Further, as the fluctuation pattern determined when the small hit B is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figures 1) is “0, 1, 2”, The small hit middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of the type counter CS1. The small hit short fluctuation (0.5 second) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of CS1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set for the second special symbol variation executed during the latent state is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. As a variation pattern, a short variation of 0.5 seconds and a long variation of 10 seconds are set, and the small hits A and B set at about 95% of the small hits are won. In this case, if the number of reserved special figures is a specific number (1, 2), a game (super RUSH game) in which a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is set is executed, and other than the specific number (0, 3, 4) ), A game (RUSH game) in which a long variation (10 seconds) is set is executed.

  With this configuration, the number of small hit games per unit time can be varied according to the number of special figure reservations in the latent state (special figure 1 number of reserved balls). The amount of privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained by the player can be made different. Therefore, the player who is executing the RUSH game during the latent state can be motivated to play the super RUSH game which is more advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, when the small hit B is won, that is, when the small hit type in which the process of discarding (forcibly stopping) the first special symbol change being executed is executed, the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation) When the number of balls is larger than the specific number (1, 2), a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is set in (3, 4), and the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 number of reserved balls) becomes the specific number (1). , 2) or less (0, 1, 2), the length variation (10 seconds) is set. In other words, if a special jackpot that can reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is won, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reservations) is larger than the specific number, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls It is configured such that the fluctuation time is shorter than when the (special figure reservation number) is smaller than the specific number.

  With this configuration, when the special figure 1 reserved ball count (special figure reserved number) is larger than the specified number and the small hit B is won, the first special symbol change being executed is immediately discarded. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (special figure reserved number) to a specific number. On the other hand, when the small hit B is won in a state where the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) is smaller than the specific number, a long-term fluctuation time is set as the small hit fluctuation, so The period required until the first special symbol change is discarded can be lengthened, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (special figure reserved number) can be suppressed from decreasing below the specific number. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation) of the second special symbol variation is greater when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit, than when the number of special figure reserved balls is other than the lower limit. It is configured to easily set a long-term variation (10-second variation) as the time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), when the number of reserved special figure balls is “0”, which is the lower limit, a long-term fluctuation (10 seconds (Variation) is set.

  In this way, by imposing a penalty that the long-term fluctuation is likely to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit value, the special figure 1 reserved ball number after the latent state is set. The game is interrupted until the (special figure reservation number) becomes “0”. Specifically, the game is performed until the first special symbol change in the latent state in which the change time of 10 minutes is set is executed four times. After the interruption, the act of executing the game in the latent state can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the degree of advantage during the latent state is divided into two stages according to the number of reserved special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The medium degree of advantage may be divided into three or more stages. In this case, for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol set when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0” which is the lower limit, a fluctuation time longer than the above-described long-term fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) (for example, , 30 seconds) can be set, and when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit, the penalty that long-term fluctuation is likely to be executed may be made larger, or special figure reserved Of the specific numbers (1, 2), one (for example, 1) of special figure reservations has a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 second) than the other (for example, 2) special figure reservations. It may be configured so as to be settable, so that an advantageous game which is more advantageous to the player can be executed.

  In addition, when the latent state is set, i.e., when the jackpot is won after the jackpot game is completed and the latent state is set, and when the latent state is set via the variable probability state, It is configured to refer to a different variation pattern table, and when one of the triggers (for example, the trigger for setting the latent state after the end of the big hit game) is established, the one that sets the latent state is the other trigger ( For example, an advantageous game (second special symbol variation) that is more advantageous to the player during the latent state than when the latent state is set due to the establishment of the latent state via the probability change state (A game in which a short variation time is easily selected as a variation pattern) may be easily executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected (determined) with the same specified content regardless of the number of times the special symbol variation is executed during the latent state. For example, the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first period (first half period) after the latent state is set and the second period (second half period) after the elapse of the first period 171 may be changed. In this case, for example, the number of times of the special figure change (first number) after the latent state is set with respect to the latent table 7fe 202 shown in FIG. Different fluctuation patterns are defined according to the special symbol fluctuation and the number of times the second special symbol fluctuation is added, and the advantageous game (the second special symbol fluctuation) in which the second period is more advantageous to the player than the first period is Short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of Which is likely to game) may be configured so is easily performed. With such a configuration, the latent state can be maintained for a long period of time, that is, the longer the period during which the jackpot is not won during the latent state (the so-called “harry period”), the more advantageous the player can be. It is possible to provide a novel game.

  In addition, when the probable change state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and based on the fact that the small hit C is won, the specific symbol change is not performed for the specified number of times (50 times). When the state is shifted to, the advantageous game (the game in which the short variation time is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) which is most advantageous to the player may be executed. In this case, for example, with respect to the probability change 7 table 202fe2 referred to when the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern data referred to during the probability change state is changed to the special symbol fluctuation a specified number of times (50 times). It suffices to define the period corresponding to the execution, and also specify the special variation pattern data to be referred to when the state shifts to the latent state within the specified number of times. In other words, the special symbol variation executed during the certainty variation state within the defined number of times is stored in the probability changing 7 table 202fe2 in which the variation pattern data is defined for the range of the number of times of the special symbol variation being the defined number of times (50 times). And the variation pattern data for the special symbol variation executed during the latent state may be defined in advance.

  With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while further expecting the second special symbol change (lottery) to be executed during the probable change state. In this case, after the number of executions of the special symbol change executed after the end of the big hit game reaches the specified number (50 times), the change is made with reference to the seven-level latent table 202fe3 shown in FIG. 171 (b). It may be configured to set a pattern, and even after the number of executions of the special symbol change executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches the specified number (50), the state shifts to the latent state within the specified number. The special variation pattern data referred to in such a case may be set continuously.

  As described above, the variation pattern (variation time) set corresponding to each game state has been described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. However, the variation pattern (variation time) is not limited to the example described in the present embodiment. The variation time of each variation pattern that is set based on the game state being played, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of success / failure is within a range that does not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment (compared with other variation patterns). A range that does not relatively deviate from the technical idea may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, an example is described in which a specific variation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions. A different variation pattern (variation time) may be configured to be selectable according to the value of the counter CS1. In this case, it is specified that the selection ratio of each variation pattern that can be latent and the average value calculated based on the variation time of each variation pattern do not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment. For example, as a variation pattern for the special figure 1 defined in the seven tables for latents 202fe3, the variation pattern is executed with a small probability (for example, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "1") during the latent state. The variation time (for example, 1 second) that is shorter than the variation pattern (fluctuation time) that can be set for the second special symbol variation may be configured.

  With this configuration, it is possible to rarely provide the player with unexpected games without changing the flow of the main game executed during the latent state, and Can be improved. In the above-described example, the variation pattern selected for the latent state is taken as an example. However, based on the same technical idea, the variation pattern selected when another game state is set. Of course, the same technical idea may be applied.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table that is referred to when the small hit type is selected after the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and is associated with the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. It is defined that three types of small hits, "small hit A7", "small hit B7", and "small hit C7" are selected.

  When the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, the small hit operation content, the symbol fixing time (the period required for fixing the stop display of the special symbol), the special symbol being executed according to the selected small hit type. The configuration is such that the processing content for the fluctuation can be made different. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to the small hit random number 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 168 (c)), the small hit random number is determined only by the lottery of the second special symbol. In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) executed by the control device 110, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is referred to.

  The contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 74”, “small hit A” is associated with the value. , “75-79” is associated with “small hit B7”, and “80-99” is associated with “small hit C”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate at which "small hit A" is selected at the time of the small hit winning is 75% (75/100). The rate at which "small hit B" is selected is 5% (5/100), and the rate at which "small hit C" is selected is 20% (20/100).

  When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Further, “0.2 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the first special symbol being executed (special figure 1) is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the variation time lapse of the first special symbol change being executed is performed. Be executed. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, and the first special symbol (special) is set while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to ON. A process for skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) in FIG. 1) is executed. Then, upon the end of the small hitting game, the restart condition is satisfied (the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to off), and the interrupted processing of updating the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is restarted. . With such a configuration, while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied), it is possible to prohibit the remaining change time of the first special symbol change being executed from decreasing. Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the first winning special symbol change is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed in duplicate. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since the process of measuring the change time of the special symbol change being executed is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be resumed. Therefore, the result of the already executed special symbol lottery can be reliably notified to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied triggered by the winning of the small hit, the processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol fluctuation during execution may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the first special symbol fluctuation may be interrupted after the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed. That is, even if the interruption condition is satisfied, the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation is continuously executed, and if the update process is performed until the preset variation time has elapsed, the interruption is performed. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, stop display of the special symbol change is not executed until the restart condition is satisfied. This eliminates the need to interrupt the updating process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in a state where the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol change is interrupted, that is, in a state where the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 change time counter 203di is skipped, On the display surface of the three-symbol display device 81, the interruption effect in which the variation display of the special symbol variation (the first special symbol variation) is interrupted, and the game state that the first special symbol variation is being interrupted as the current game situation. A notification display for notifying a player and a guidance display for indicating that the interrupted special symbol change is resumed after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the small hitting game has ended) are configured to be displayable. Thus, when the special symbol change is interrupted, it is possible to notify the player of the fact easily.

  Further, as the above-described interrupted effect, for example, an effect mode of a variable display effect (a variable display effect using a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to be configured to be able to execute different interruption effects according to, for example, at the time when the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol change is interrupted, the third symbol changes at high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, In other words, when the third symbol is fluctuating at a speed at which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol, an effect of continuing the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol until the restart condition is satisfied is executed as an interrupted effect. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol. Is a low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol as a pause effect It may be configured to perform the production to continue until the resumption condition is satisfied. In this way, by changing the variable effect mode (interruption effect mode) during the period in which the interrupt condition is satisfied, according to the variable effect mode of the third symbol at the time when the interrupt condition is satisfied, The interruption effect can be executed without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, when the interruption condition is satisfied immediately before the stop of the fluctuation of the third symbol, for example, out of a plurality of symbols, other symbols except one symbol are stopped at a combination indicating a jackpot winning (a combination of symbols indicating the same number). The interruption condition during the variable production (so-called reach production) that is displayed and inspires whether or not the remaining one symbol stops at the combination indicating the jackpot winning (whether or not all the symbols stop at the same number) Is established, the interruption effect of continuing the fluctuation display for the remaining one of the symbols described above may be executed, or one of the symbols in the fluctuation display may be displayed to indicate that the interruption condition has been satisfied. The stop display may be performed in an aspect (for example, "once a break!") To end the reach effect. Then, after the resuming condition is satisfied, the character of “End of break!” Is displayed, and the result of the reach effect that was executed before the interruption is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect. good. Accordingly, various effects can be executed in accordance with the timing at which the interruption condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to diversify the effect performed based on the satisfaction of the interruption condition, and to enhance the effect of the effect. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 172 (a), the description will be continued. When "small hit B" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Also, “0.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of discarding the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of discarding the running first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed, the first special symbol variation is performed regardless of the lottery result of the running first special symbol variation and the remaining variation time. Is executed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, a process of clearing the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) to 0 is performed. Execute and set a forced stop command indicating that the first special symbol change has been stopped and displayed. Further, if the first special symbol change to be forcibly stopped has a big hit, the information indicating the big hit set at the start timing of the first special symbol change is cleared (special figure 1 big hit flag) 203i is turned off).

  When the forced stop command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the forced stop command (when the forced stop display condition is satisfied), the third symbol change being executed (the third symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol change). A forced stop effect for switching the variation display mode of the third symbol variation displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is executed.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the forced stop condition is satisfied based on winning of the "small hit B", and the special symbol change is forcibly stopped, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result has been forcibly stopped due to an error. Further, the effect form of the forced stop effect for forcibly displaying the third symbol change being executed is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the forced stop condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, in the state where the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, in a state where the third symbol fluctuates at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the changing third symbol. When the forcible stop display condition is satisfied, an effect is performed in which the forcible stop display is executed in a short period (first period) with respect to the third symbol change display during high-speed fluctuation as the forcible stop effect, and the third symbol is displayed. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol, a low speed fluctuation is performed as a forced stop effect. It is configured to execute an effect in which the forced stop display is executed using the second period longer than the above-described first period with respect to the middle third symbol change display.

  That is, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuation-displayed third symbol. Therefore, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating sudden departure, the game is stopped. In order not to give a sense of incongruity to the player, the third symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a short period (first period) for the purpose of immediately informing the player that the forced stop condition has been satisfied. On the other hand, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, since the player is able to identify the fluctuation-displayed third symbol, if the forced stop effect is suddenly executed in this state, the execution is executed. If the effect of the third symbol change in the middle is suddenly changed, the player will feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the forced stop effect is to stop and display the third symbol in a display mode finally indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the effect mode of the third symbol change being executed is suddenly switched. After that, the third symbol is displaced and displayed, and the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol. As a forced stop effect, an effect in which a forced stop display is executed using the second period longer than the above-described first period for the third symbol change display during the low speed change is configured to be executed. The effect form of the forced stop effect to be executed during the second period is set according to the contents of the third symbol change display, and finally the off display is executed. Therefore, according to the variation effect mode of the third symbol at the time when the forced stop condition is satisfied, the time from when the forced stop condition is satisfied to when the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the effect mode and the effect period different, a forced stop effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When "small hit C" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Also, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of discarding the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed in the same manner as the above "small hit A". Further, when "small hit C" is selected in the high probability state (probable change state) of the ordinary symbol, a process of shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state is executed. That is, "small hit C" is set as a time saving end condition for shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the processing to be executed for the first special symbol change being executed is different according to the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. I have. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in which small hit type is selected when the small hit is won. Further, according to the content of the processing (interruption, discarding) executed for the first special symbol change, the degree of advantage of the game executed later can be made different.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol determination time is made different depending on the small hit type selected. Thereby, the period from when the special symbol for indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed until when the small hit game is executed can be made different depending on the selected small hit type. Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing at which the small hit game is executed and to make it difficult to execute the game in which the ball is fired.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured that the small hitting game is executed with the same open contents regardless of which small hitting type is selected. Depending on the type of the small hit, the type of the attacker to be opened in the small hit game may be different, or the content of the opening operation (open time, number of releases) may be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172 (b), the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg will be described. FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg. The normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol lottery, and stores the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 and the set game state. Each data is defined so that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected according to the data.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the value of the second variation type counter CS3 is set in the range of “0 to 198” and the variation time is set in the range of 10 to 30 seconds. Each variation pattern (long variation) is defined. More specifically, a variation pattern of “10 seconds” is in a range of “0 to 99”, a variation pattern of “20 seconds” is in a range of “100 to 149”, and “30 seconds” is in a range of “150 to 198”. Are associated with each other. In this way, by configuring the variation patterns of different variation times to be selectable according to the value of the second variation type counter CS3 acquired when the same game state is set, the player is provided with a normal The stop display timing of the symbol change, that is, the normal symbol change is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the general symbol hit, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the general symbol game is executed.

  Further, during the probable change state, a change pattern (short change) of “0.8 seconds” is associated with the entire range of the obtained second change type counter CS3 of “0 to 198”. With this configuration, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67, which is a trigger for executing a normal symbol lottery in a right-handed game executed during the probable change state, is likely to enter the right electric accessory 164 with a high probability. Can be.

  On the other hand, when the latent state is set, the acquired second variation type counter CS3 is associated with a variation pattern of “0.1 second” in a range of “0 to 169”, and “170 to 198”. Is associated with a fluctuation pattern of “10 seconds”. With this configuration, it is possible to make it harder for the ball to enter the right electric role-playing object 164 during the latent state than during the probable change state, and to appropriately move the ball during the latent state. The ball can be entered into the object 164.

  Next, contents specified in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that a probable change flag 203fa for storing a high probability state of a special symbol is added. is there. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and numbers of game states that can be set are different from those in the above-described fourth embodiment. For example, they can be stored in the game state storage area 203g. Although the type and number of the information are different, the role of the gaming state storage area 203g and the processing content for updating the stored information are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to the probability change state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the probability change state is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the end condition of the probable change state is satisfied.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. This embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment described above in that the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the change number counter 223fc, the preparation state flag 223fd, and the special figure 1 change time counter 223fe The difference is that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, the RUSH flag 223fg, the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, and the super RUSH flag 223fi are added, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be described. The special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are different from the special figure change start flag 223d and the stop type selection flag 223e in that the target is changed to the second special symbol. are doing. Therefore, in the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the process of determining whether to set the flag on and the process of determining the setting status of the flag are the first special process. While the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are turned on in the processing executed based on the second special pattern change, while the flag is executed based on the pattern change. A process of determining whether to set the flag and a process of determining the setting status of the flag are executed. The other elements are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The change number counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of changes in the special symbol change, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol change.

  The preparation state flag 223fd is a flag for indicating whether or not the apparatus is in the preparation state. When the flag is on, it means that the apparatus is in the preparation state (see FIG. 162 (a)). Means no. In the latent state, the preparation state flag 223fd is referred to to determine whether the preparation state has already been completed (switched to the display of RUSH), and whether to perform the preparation state effect. , RUSH state effect is determined.

  The RUSH flag 223fg is a flag for indicating whether or not a RUSH game is being performed (rensou mode). This means that the game is not in the RUSH game (in the extended play mode). In the latent state, the ready state flag 223fd and the RUSH state flag 223fg are referred to determine which state to set the effect mode for.

  The ceiling effect execution flag 223fh indicates whether or not the effect (top reaching effect) of the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rock mountain, which is executed in the state where the number of probable changes or the number of time savings is 1, is remaining. Is a flag indicating If the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, it means that the effect of reaching the top (see FIG. 161 (b)) is being executed; if it is off, it means that the effect of reaching the peak is not being executed. I do. When the symbol stop timing is reached in a state where the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, the mode shifts to the extended-villa mode and a preparation state is established. In the present embodiment, even if the remaining number of times of the probability change (the number of time savings) in the probability change state is not 1, the time saving ends when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result of the lottery (small hit C). The condition is established, and the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON. In this case, the staging mode is gradually changed according to the subtraction state of the number of times of the probability change, and the top reaching effect is suddenly executed as compared with the case where the top reaching effect is executed. A warp effect may be executed as a dedicated top-reach effect based on the information indicating that C has been won and the setting state of the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh. As a result, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 can be performed without discomfort, and the player reaches the top at an earlier timing than expected (the latent state has been set). Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The super RUSH flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the number of special figure reserved balls becomes a specific number in a state where a RUSH game is being executed and a RUSH game advantageous to the player is being executed. If it is off, it means that a super RUSH game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that it is not in a super RUSH game. The super RUSH effect (see FIG. 165) is executed by setting the super RUSH medium flag 223fi to ON.

<Main Control Process in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 175 to FIG. 182, a description will be given of the contents of control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed. (Special drawing 2 lottery) is configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner, and a function (temporary storage function) for temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol is deleted from the above-described fourth embodiment. And the point where the high probability state of the special symbol can be set, and the case where the small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the type of the small hit type to be set is increased, and the small hit type to be set is set. That the processing to be executed for the first special symbol change (special figure 1 change) being executed is made different depending on the type of game, and that the small hit type is set to a specific small hit type. Transition the state (normally transition the high-probability state of the symbol to the low-probability state) And the point was sea urchin configuration, in are different. Also, as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the contents are different in that the contents specified in various data tables referred to in the control processing executed by main controller 110 are different. . Other than that, the fourth embodiment is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described. This first special symbol change stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) is different from the first special symbol change stop processing (see S258 in FIG. 124) of the fourth embodiment in that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set. When it is determined that it is not set to ON (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol change that is stopped and changed this time is a deviation change, the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 124) is executed. The point changed to the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) and the case where it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), that is, the first special symbol that is fluctuated and stopped this time Among various processes executed when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, a process of clearing various flags and various counters based on the stop of the large jackpot fluctuation (start of the big hit game) To S860) in FIG. 124, and differs in that executes a process to add the probability variation flag 203fa (S870 in FIG. 175), but is otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol change stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176). In this time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176), it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON with respect to the time saving update process in the above-described fourth embodiment (see S862 in FIG. 125). The difference is that the game state set in the case (S2104 in FIG. 125: Yes) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, as the gaming state, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) and the probability change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the ordinary state) It is configured to be able to set three types of game states: a high probability state of a symbol) and a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol). Then, when the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state. The state changes from the state in which the probable change mode is set to the state in which the latent mode (RUSH game) is executed.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). The seventh embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the second special symbol is not provided with a hold function of the second special symbol, and thus the variation of the second special symbol is started. It is determined whether the start condition for starting the special symbol change is satisfied or not).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON. (S951) If it is determined that it is set to ON (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to OFF (S952), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S951 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), the ball is then moved to the second entrance (right second entrance 645). It is determined whether the ball has entered (S974). In the present embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have the reserved memory function (because it does not have the second special symbol reserved ball number counter and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area), the second special symbol. In the state where the fluctuation start processing 7 (S280) is executed, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 and has acquired the execution right of the second special symbol lottery.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645, the second special symbol change start process 7 is performed in the control process of the main control device 110. The configuration is such that the detection signal is output during a period in which (S280) is executed a plurality of times, and is shorter than the shortest variation time set for the second special symbol variation, The configuration is such that the detection signal indicating that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 is not lost due to the processing timing of various control processes executed by the main control device 110. Here, in the process of S974, when the winning of the ball is detected once, a process for starting the second special symbol change is executed, and the second special symbol change is executed for a predetermined change time. Therefore, even if the detection signal is output for the length of the period during which the second special symbol change start processing 7 (S280) is executed a plurality of times in the control processing of main controller 110, one detection is performed. Based on the output of the signal, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol change from being executed a plurality of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a flag is set so that the currently output detection signal becomes invalid when a process for starting the second special symbol change is performed based on the reception of the detection signal. Processing may be added. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably prevent the second special symbol change from being executed a plurality of times based on one output of the detection signal.

  In the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance (right second entrance 645) (S974: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed. (S978) Thereafter, the same processes as S959 to S963 as the above-described second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) are executed, and this process ends. In the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance (the right second entrance 645) (S974: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the content of the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. I do. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). The second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is different from the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot determination corresponding to the probability state is executed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, the same S1051, S1052 as the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) are performed. If it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1052: Yes), the processes of S1053 to S1056 are performed, and the process proceeds to S1071. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm has not been set to ON (S1052: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S1071.

  In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON, that is, whether the current state is the special symbol high probability state (S1071), and it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON. (S1071: Yes), the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) with reference to the data defined in the high probability state of the first random number table (first random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)). To get. On the other hand, in the processing of S1071, if the probability change flag 203fa is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (S1071: No), the first random number table (first random number 7 The lottery result (acceptance determination result) is acquired by referring to the data defined in the low probability state of the table 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)).

  After acquiring the lottery result in the process of S1073 or the process of S1072, the processes in S1058 to S1062, which are the same as the above-described second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127), are executed. The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) will be described. This special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S956 in FIG. 129) for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation. Yes, this is a process executed when a variation pattern is selected in a case where the result of the target second special symbol lottery is not a large hit (is a small hit including a small hit).

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277). As shown in FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 of FIG. 130) is performed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is selected, the difference is that the content of processing when selecting (determining) the small hit type with respect to the small hit which has been won this time is different, and the other is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special pattern 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the same S1371 processing as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the second special If it is determined that the symbol lottery result (special figure 2 lottery result) is not a small hit (S1371: No), the processing of S1377 to S1379, which is the same as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 of FIG. 130). Is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1371 that the small hit is a small hit (S1371: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1372), and the small hit type is determined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The small hit type is selected with reference to the selection 7 table 202ff (S1391). Next, the same steps S1374 to S1376 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) are executed, and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the process of selecting the small hit type is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is determined in the determination process (second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) that the current lottery result is a small hit), a process of selecting a small hit type is executed. Alternatively, a different small hit determination value is defined for each small hit type, and is made to correspond to the small hit determination value (the value of the first random number counter C1) used when it is determined that the small hit has been won. The configuration may be such that the small hit type is determined. As a result, the types of counters can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (S283) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (S283). The second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283) is a process executed when the change time of the second special symbol change has elapsed and the changing second special symbol change is stopped. The difference from the special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) is that a part of the process executed when the second special symbol change to be processed is the jackpot change is changed. Are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (S283) is executed, first, the same processing from S1551 to S1559 as the above-described second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) is executed. 2, the big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol lottery among the big hit flags 203i), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time saving end standby flag 203dm, and the probability change flag 203fa are set to off. The value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

  In other words, when one special symbol change is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed, the remaining change time is completely discarded, and the stop display is performed. All the information on the playing state (probable change flag 203fa, time saving counter 203h, time saving end standby flag 203dm) is also reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during the jackpot game, a bonus other than the bonus (prize ball) obtained by allowing the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) opened by the jackpot game to win a ball is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege is excessively given to the player.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the simultaneous fluctuation specification, the special symbol change executed before the big hit game is resumed after the big hit game is ended, or the number of times of shortening is reduced by the information based on the special symbol change executed before the big hit game. Since the game is not played, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. After the processing of S1580 is completed, the processing of S1561 to S1563, which is the same as the above-described second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S263 of FIG. 132), is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584). This special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) is a case where it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON with respect to the above-described special figure 2 departure stop processing (see S1564 in FIG. 133) (S1651: Yes) in that the small hitting process (S1671) is executed. Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description is omitted. Here, the content of the small hit processing (S1671) executed in the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit processing (S1671). The small hit processing (S1671) is executed when the second special symbol having the small hit is stopped and displayed. The small hit processing (S1671) according to the selected small hit type (interruption processing, forced stop ( (Discarding) processing) is executed for the first special symbol change being executed.

  When the small hitting process (S1671) is executed, first, in the small hitting type set for the current second special symbol change (special figure 2 deviation change pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179)). The selected small hit type is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit A" (S1683). When it is determined that it is "small hit A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is during the special figure 1 change (the first special symbol is changing) (S1684), and the special figure 1 is changing. If it is determined (S1684: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1685), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set (S1686). Then, the present process ends. In the process of S1684, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1683 that the small hit is not “small hit A” (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit C” (S1687), and “ If it is determined that the small hit C "(S1687: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the present time is in a probable change state (in a normal symbol high probability state). (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the probable change state (S1688: Yes), that is, the second special symbol change that has been won as the "small hit B" in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state is the current processing. If it is a target, then it is determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not ON (S1689: No), If it is determined that the state is not the final change, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690), and the flow shifts to S1684. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the processing of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the current time is not in the probable change state (S1688: No), or the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the processing of S1689. If it is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the final change in the probable change state (S1689: Yes), the process skips step S1690 and shifts to the above-described step S1684.

  In other words, when the "small hit C" is won during the probability change state, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON even if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not reduced to 0. Before executing the special symbol change (lottery) a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to shift the game state from the probable state to the latent state. Therefore, the "small hit C" winning is set as an end condition for ending the probable change state (normal symbol high probability state). In the present embodiment, since the latent state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the probable state, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probable state is small, that is, the jackpot is won during the probable state. By setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h to 0, the latent state can be set to 0, because the state can be shifted to the latent state in a state in which the possibility of transition to the normal state is low without shifting to the latent state. The end condition that is established by winning the "small hit C" is an end condition that is more advantageous to the player than the end condition that shifts to. When the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), that is, in the case of the normal state or the latent state, the processing for terminating the time saving state is not executed. , And the same processing is executed when “small hit C” is won and when “small hit A” is won.

  In the process of S1687, when it is determined that the small hit is not “small hit C”, that is, when it is determined that the read small hit type is “small hit B” (S1687: No), the present figure is changing the special figure 1 (S1691), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing (S1691: Yes), a special figure 1 change stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 change. Is set (S1692), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is deviated from the first symbol symbol and stopped and displayed (S1693), and the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the big hit flags 203i) is set to ON, that is, whether the first special symbol change being executed is the big hit change ( If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the big hit flags 203i) is set to ON (S1695: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag (big hit flag 203i) The flag corresponding to the first special symbol is set to off (S1696), the storage information for the special figure 1 big hit is deleted (S1697), and the present process ends. In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (S1691: No), the process is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of S1695, the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol of the big hit flag 203i) is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol variation being executed is a deviation variation. If it is determined (S1695: No), the processing of S1696 and S1697 is skipped, and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 183 to FIG. 192, the contents of control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents of the command determination processing 7 (S4192) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61), and received from the main control device 110 in the same manner as the command determination process 7 (S4192) described above. It executes processing corresponding to various commands.

  When the command determination process 7 (S4192) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4231). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), a status command reception process is performed (S4232). Then, the present process ends. This reception command processing (S4232) executes processing similar to the reception command processing (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61). Although a detailed description is omitted, a state command indicating the current game state is received, a mode effect mode according to the game state is set, and a corresponding effect mode (for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is set. , A back image) is set. For example, when a status command indicating a probable change state is received, a display command corresponding to an effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 climbs a mountain is set, and when a status command indicating a latent status is received, A display command corresponding to an effect mode for indicating the preparation state shown in FIG. 162 or the RUSH game state shown in FIG. 163 is set. Note that the details of the control of the switching of the presentation mode during the latent state will be described later.

  In the command determination process 7 (S4192), the order in which the presence / absence of the status command is determined is different from the above-described command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to determine whether a status command has been received before determining whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute the processing based on the special figure variation pattern command after determining the current game state. The present invention is not limited to this, and various command determinations may be executed in the same order as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61).

  If it is determined in the process of S4231 that no status command has been received (S4231: No), then it is determined whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received (S4203), and if it has been received (S4203). : Yes), the change start flag (special figure change start flag 223d, special figure 2 change start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special figure change pattern command is set to ON (S4233), and the change pattern command is changed from the received command. It is extracted (S4234). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4203 that no special figure variation pattern command has been received (S4203: No), then it is determined whether a special figure stop type command has been received (S4205), and it has been determined that it has been received. (S4205: Yes), set the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command to ON (S4235), and The stop type is extracted (S4236). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4205 that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), the same processing of S4208 to S4214 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 of FIG. 61) is executed. If it is determined in the processing that a stop-related command has been received, stop-related processing 7 is executed (S4236), and this processing ends. The details of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4214 that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the same processing of S4216 to S4218 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 of FIG. 61) is executed. If it is determined that the stop-related command has been received in the process (3), the hit-related process 7 is executed (S4237), and this process ends. Although the detailed description of the hit-related process 7 (S4237) is omitted, the above-described hit-related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67) is based on the reception of the small hit-related command instead of the accessory hit-related command. Is executed. The small hit related command is a small hit start command indicating the start of the small hit game, and indicates the start of the round game opened by the prize device to be operated during the small hit game, similarly to the above-described accessory hit related command. At least a round command and an ending command indicating the end of the small hitting game are included, and processing for setting a display command corresponding to each received command is executed. Thereby, an effect mode corresponding to the small hit game executed by the main control device 110 can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4220: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the content of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) executed in the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the content of the stop-related process 7 (S4236). This stop-related processing 7 (S4236) is different from the stop-related processing described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65) when a special figure determination command is received (S4601: Yes). (See step S4642), and a process of determining whether a special figure discard command has been received is executed (S4642). If it is determined in step S4642 that a special figure discard command has been received (S4642: Yes), the difference is that a process of executing the special figure discarding setting process (S4643) is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the preparation state setting processing (S4641) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641). This preparation state setting processing (S4641) is processing for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162 (a)) as described above. In this preparation state setting process (S4641), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on (S8001). If it is determined that it is off (S8001: No), the process proceeds to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility that the process is performed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8001 that the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on (S8001: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to off (S8002), and the display mode during RUSH preparation ( 162 (a) are set (S8003). Next, both the RUSH flag 223fg and the ready flag 223fd are set to ON (S8004), and the process ends.

  By executing the preparation state setting process (see FIG. 185), the display state of the preparation state can be set from the time when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode (RUSH game).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the latent state is changed to an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily performed and the small hitting game is frequently performed (rensou mode). And the normal state was configured as the most disadvantageous normal mode. Then, by terminating the number of times of probable change (50 times) in the probable change state, the mode is shifted to the most advantageous extended-villa mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to shift from the probable change state to the most advantageous game state directly without going through the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause a game to be played in the probable change state with one goal being to elapse the number of probable changes.

  Here, heretofore, there has been known a gaming machine which sets a latent state to a most advantageous gaming state and allows the latent state to be set after a jackpot win. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the latent state is not set unless the jackpot is won, the ball is held while the player stays in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won). Since the disadvantageous state which is easily reduced is formed, the player is not satisfied with the feeling, and there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the number of probable changes is ended (elapsed) in the probable change state that is more disadvantageous than the latent state, and thus the most advantageous extended-villa mode (the latent state ). In other words, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state where the prize ball can be easily and intermittently obtained simply by continuing the right-handed game without winning the jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of probable changes can be ended, the player can be given a greater sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (small hit C) in the state where the probability change state is set, the most advantageous consecutive play mode without elapse of the probability change number. (Latent state). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even for a lottery result other than the jackpot winning during the probability change state.

  In addition, the lottery result (small hit C) described above can be won only in a special symbol (second special symbol) which is hard to be executed in the probable change state. Therefore, when the game ball fired by the right-handed game in the probable state enters the right second entrance 645 with an irregular behavior and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the player has an expectation. Can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since there is no hold memory of the second special symbol, a small hit C cannot be won unless the ball is made to enter the second entrance 645 during the probable change state. Make up. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch the behavior of the ball in the probable change state. Note that only a part of the configuration of the present embodiment described above may be employed. For example, a second special symbol holding function may be provided, and for example, the second special symbol acquired during a jackpot game in which a probable change state is set. The second special symbol lottery based on the reserved storage of the special symbol may be executed during the probable change state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second special symbol change a plurality of times immediately after the probable change state is set. In this case, as an effect during the period in which the second special symbol change is executed, for example, as a stage before the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 (a) aims at the top, an effect to inspire whether or not to get on the helicopter. When the character 811 gets into the helicopter and performs the effect of reaching the top shown in FIG. 161 (b) when the result of the drawing of the second special symbol is “small hit C” by executing the (warp fanning effect) and the lottery result of the second special symbol is “small hit C”. good.

  As a result, immediately after the probable change state is set, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the period in which the transition to the probable state is easy is set. Further, in this case, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the probable change state, when the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the probable change state is set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times), It is preferable that the short fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) is easily selected. Thereby, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the jackpot game can be smoothly executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the right electric accessory 164 is frequently opened during the probable change state, so that the ball fired by the right-handed game is unlikely to enter the right second entrance 645. However, for example, a variation pattern of a long variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is selected with a small probability (for example, a probability of 1/100) as a variation pattern of an ordinary symbol, and the right pattern is temporarily set. It may be configured such that a state where a ball easily enters the second ball entrance 645 can be formed. This makes it easy to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery during the probable change state. Therefore, in the state where the probable change state is set, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small hit C), and the opportunity to shift to the latent state can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the "small hit C", which is a trigger for shifting from the probable state to the latent state, can be won only by the second special symbol lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. Also in the special symbol lottery, it may be configured to be able to win with a small probability (for example, 1/200) lower than the second special symbol lottery.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a configuration in which a transition from the shift to the extended-shelf mode (latent state) to the first win of the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is notified as a preparation state. When a situation in which a prize ball can be actually acquired is reached (that is, when a small hit change is started), an advantageous state (RUSH state) is notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a prize ball cannot be obtained for a long time even though the RUSH state is notified, and the player does not feel dissatisfied.

  In the seventh embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/1 (59/60). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the small hit probability may be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure discarding setting process (S4643). The special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed when a special figure discard command is received in the stop-related process 7 (see S4236 in FIG. 184). In the present embodiment, by executing the right-handed game during the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed while the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) is secured. RUSH game to execute the small hit game.

  Then, during the latent state, the variation time set as the first special symbol variation is configured to easily become a long time (600 seconds). Furthermore, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured to be different according to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. Specifically, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is The configuration is such that the smaller the number is (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 or 2), the shorter the fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation. In addition, when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded (forced stop).

  That is, in the present embodiment, during the latent state, while the small hitting game is frequently executed in the second special symbol lottery, and the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by the specific small hit winning, A game aiming at an efficient game (a game for increasing the number of small hit games executed within a unit time) is executed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RUSH game executed during the latent state is a normal RUSH game, and a super RUSH game in which the number of small hit games executed within a unit time is larger than that of the normal RUSH game, To the player, and when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, a suggestion effect suggesting a shift to a super RUSH game (see FIG. 164). ) Is configured to be executable. Thereby, the player who is executing the game in the latent state is informed clearly that the more advantageous state (super RUSH game) exists and the situation until the super RUSH game is executed. And the player's willingness to play can be further increased.

  When the special figure abandonment setting process (S4643) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101). Since the current state is not the latent state (RUSH game), the processing skips steps S8102 to S8107, which will be described later, and proceeds to the processing in step S8108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read. It is determined whether the current number of special figure reserved balls is three. That is, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three and the state is forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, if it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is 3 (S8103: Yes), an effect mode indicating super rush entry (see FIG. 164 (b)) is determined, and the super RUSH flag is set to ON. Then, the forced stop mode of the first special symbol is determined (S8108), a display command for indicating the determined various modes is set (S8109), and the process ends.

  Here, the process of S8108 will be described. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapping). The timing at which the second special symbol change winning in the win B7) is stopped and displayed is determined independently of the change timing of the first special symbol change. Therefore, the first special symbol change may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the start, or may be forcibly stopped (discarded) at a timing immediately before the stop display of the first special symbol change. Then, the variation mode of the third symbol (decorative symbol variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that is variably displayed in response to the first special symbol variability is variable based on the elapse of the variation time. If the pachinko machine 10 is operated, for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the player executes the high-speed fluctuation display to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol. In general, a low-speed fluctuation display is executed in which the fluctuation speed is reduced to such an extent that the player can discriminate.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, based on forcibly stopping the first special symbol change, the third symbol change being executed is changed to the third symbol display device at the timing of receiving the command indicating the forced stop. If the stop display is performed in the display mode displayed on the display surface 81, for example, when the third symbol is displayed at a low-speed fluctuation, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit. There was a possibility that it would happen.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, based on the remaining period of the first special symbol change being executed as the forced stop mode of the special figure (first special symbol) in the process of S8108, the high speed fluctuation mode and the low speed Any one of the fluctuation stop modes is determined. Then, it outputs to the display control device 114 by the display command set in the process of S8109. The display control device 114 determines the forced stop display mode of the third symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the forced stop mode included in the received display command. Then, display control based on the determined forced stop display mode is executed.

  Specifically, when a display command indicating the high-speed fluctuation mode is received, the image data of the display mode indicating the forced stop is interrupted in the image data prepared for performing the high-speed fluctuation display, and the high-speed fluctuation mode is interrupted. The display control is executed so that the display is suddenly switched to the display mode indicating the forced stop. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped without delay. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuating third symbol during the high-speed fluctuation, even if the display mode indicating the forced stop is suddenly stopped and displayed, the image is replaced. There is no discomfort to the player.

  On the other hand, when the display command indicating the low-speed fluctuation stop mode is received, the image displayed (displayed) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is read, and the reach state (the combination indicating the jackpot winning) is displayed. 3 symbols are displayed). If it is determined that the current state is not the reach state, the image corresponding to the display data in which each third symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (established line) among the display data used for the low-speed fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. The image is determined, the low-speed fluctuation is continued until the forced stop image is displayed, and then the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. In the case of the reach state, image data is created by replacing one symbol included in the remaining third symbol row during the change with a forced stop symbol indicating forced stop, and the forced stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable display data for forced stop is generated as described above, and the display control based on the variable display data for forced stop is executed.

  As described above, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, the third symbol is forcibly stopped in accordance with the variation display mode of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the processing different, the third symbol can be stopped and displayed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player no matter at what timing the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

  When the above-described display control is executed, the period from the forcible stop of the first special symbol variation to the stop display of the third symbol variation display is changed to the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed. In this case, for example, in the case where the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped, a period from the time when the first special symbol change is forcibly displayed to the time when the forced stop is determined, or the case where the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped. The symbol determination period from when the special symbol indicating the small hit B win in the second special symbol variation in which the forced stop condition for forcibly stopping the symbol is satisfied until the symbol is fixed is defined as a predetermined period (for example, one second). Then, within the predetermined period, various forced stop display controls for stopping and displaying the third symbol change may be executed. Then, a third symbol display mode (for example, “123”) for forcible stop determination is displayed based on the command (determination command) indicating that the determination period has elapsed being output from main controller 110. good. With this configuration, when the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped, the period until the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped is changed according to the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed. In this case, the third symbol change display can be forcibly stopped within the fixed period, and the third symbol can be displayed in the same display mode for the forced stop determination after the fixed period has elapsed.

  Returning to FIG. 186, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8103, if it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is not 3 (S8103: No), then it is determined whether the number of special figure reserved balls is 4 (S8106) and determined to be 4. If it has been performed (S8106: Yes), an effect mode aiming at the top (for example, an effect mode in which the character 811 goes up one level from the effect screen shown in FIG. 164 (a)) is determined (S8107), and the process proceeds to S8108. Transition. If it is determined that the value is not 4 in the process of S8106, the process of S8107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8108.

  Next, the content of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153). This variable display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is used to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. And generates and sets a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5201: No), it is in a state where the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the processing of S5234 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the change number counter 223fc (S5231), and the special figure change start flag 223d is set to off (S5202). Then, a rendering mode setting process for generating a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (S5232), and the data in the prize information storage area 223b is deleted. The processing is shifted (S5233), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5234.

  In the process of S5234, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5234). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5234: No), the change pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the process of S5238 is performed. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is ON (S5234: Yes), the value of the change number counter 223fc is added by 1 (S5235), and the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is set to OFF (S5235). (S5236) Then, the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 is executed (S5237). Details of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) will be described later with reference to FIG. Upon completion of the process in S5237, the process proceeds to S5238.

  In the process of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5238). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is not on (that is, it is off) (S5238: No), no change pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. Since this is the state, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is ON (S5238: Yes), the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is set to OFF ( (S5239) Then, the display special figure 1 or the special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described effect mode setting process (S5232) will be described. The effect mode setting process (S5232) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the change type of the first special symbol notified by the change pattern command, as described above. In this effect mode setting process (S5232), first, it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S8201). If it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the current state is the probable change state. (S8202). In the processing of S8202, if it is determined that the state is not the probable change state (S8202: No), it means that the apparatus is in the latent state (rensou mode), the ceiling effect setting process is executed (S8203), and the determined effect mode is determined. Is set (S8208), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8202 that the first special symbol is in the probable variation state (S8202: Yes), the value of the variation number counter 223fc is set to determine whether the current first special symbol is the final variation in the probable variation state. It is determined whether it is 1 (S8204). In the process of S8204, when it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), the ceiling effect setting for selecting the effect mode of the last change display effect before shifting to the RUSH game. The process is executed (S8206), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, in the process of S8204, when it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, since there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (the extended mode), the fluctuation pattern command indicates The effect mode corresponding to the variation type is determined (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then the effect mode for the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined. (S8207), and the process proceeds to S8208.

  Next, the ceiling effect setting processing (S8202, S8206) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, in the winning information storage area 223b, data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read (S8301), and the read execution is performed. It is determined whether or not the data in the area is data corresponding to the jackpot (S8302), and if it is determined that the area is a jackpot (S8302: Yes), that is, it is determined that the current special figure 1 change is a jackpot change. In this case, the presentation mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (the presentation mode for informing the jackpot is determined (S8303), and this processing ends. That is, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Is a performance in which the jackpot game is executed without shifting to the latent state, so that the effect of notifying the arrival at the top (see FIG. 161 (b)) An effect mode for notifying the jackpot (for example, an effect mode for displaying a jackpot winning display while climbing a cliff) is determined without determining the mode. In spite of the fact that the top reaching effect has been executed, the jackpot game is executed, and thereafter, a game state other than the latent state is set, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. .

  In the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S8302 that the special symbol variation has won the jackpot, the top reaching effect is not executed regardless of the selected jackpot type. Without being limited to the above, if a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game has been won, a top reaching effect is executed, and then an effect of displaying a display mode indicating the jackpot winning on the top is executed. You may comprise so that it may be. Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is performed so as to determine whether or not to execute the top reaching effect in the final variation of the probability variation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the jackpot in which the latent state is set after the end is won (during the change of the jackpot), after the top reaching effect is executed, an effect of displaying a display mode indicating the jackpot winning on the top is executed. You may comprise. Thereby, the effect mode of the effect (the effect in which the character 811 aims at the top) executed during the probable change state can be changed based on the remaining period of the probable change state and the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, In addition, when a top-reach effect is executed, the latent state can be reliably set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8302, when it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not the data indicating the jackpot (S8302: No), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (FIG. 169 (b)) Reference) is determined (S8304), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON (S8305), and the process ends.

  By executing the ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), the top reach effect (see FIG. 169 (b)) according to the prefetch result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the latent state. Can be suitably set.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 190, details of the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5237) executed in the above-described variable display setting processing 7 (see S4153 of FIG. 187) will be described. The special figure 2 change display setting process 7 (S5237) is a process for setting a change effect corresponding to the change pattern of the second special symbol change. When the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401), and it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is off. In the case (S8401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, it is then determined whether the probable change state is set (S8402).

  In the process of S8402, when it is determined that the probable change state is not set, that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state (S8402: No), the process corresponding to the change type indicated by the change pattern command is performed. (2) The variable display mode of the special symbol is determined (S8403), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the probable change state (S8402: Yes), the probable change setting process for setting the fluctuation display mode of the second special symbol fluctuation during the probable change state ( S8404), and the process ends. The details of the setting process during probable change (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S8401 that the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), it is next determined whether the preparation state flag 223fd is on (S8405). If it is determined that the 223fd is off (S8405: No), it means that the RUSH game is in progress (the preparation state is completed), and thus the second special symbol in the latent state (RUSH game). The RUSH setting process (S8410) for setting the variation display mode of the variation is executed, and the process ends. The details of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8405, when it is determined that the preparation state flag 223fd is turned on (that is, the preparation state is being made) (S8405: Yes), the fluctuation pattern of the small hit is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is determined (S8406) whether or not the small hit variation type has been notified (S8406: Yes), the preparation state flag 223fd is set to off (S8407), and the present variation display effect is produced. As a mode, an effect mode (refer to FIG. 162 (b)) of a RUSH entry effect for notifying the RUSH entry is determined (S8408), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the processing contents of the probable change setting processing (S8404) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the setting process during probable change (S8404). In the probable change setting process (S8404), the effect mode when the second special symbol change is executed during the probable change state is set. A process for setting an effect mode (shortcut effect mode) when the latent state is set is executed without elapse of 50 times). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed during the probable change state, most of the balls flowing down the right area win the right electric combination 164, and the first special symbol change is executed. It is composed. However, when the balls flowing down the right region collide with each other, the ball rarely enters the right second entrance 645 when irregular behavior is taken, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. There are cases. Then, when the small hit C is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state, the probable change is not performed for the number of probable changes (50 times), which is the end condition of the probable change state. The state can be shifted to the latent state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the probability change state, a special effect is executed to indicate to the player that a chance to shift to the latent state has come. .

  When the in-probability change setting process (S8404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current second special symbol change is a change in which the small hit C is won (S8501). If it is determined that it is the small hit C (S8501: Yes), the value of the change frequency counter 223fc is read out (S8502), and the probability of remaining change is 5 based on the value of the change frequency counter 223fc read out in the process of S8502. It is determined whether the number is less than or equal to the number of times (S8503). If it is determined that the number of times is less than or equal to 5 (S8503: Yes), an effect mode indicating entry of a small hit RUSH (RUSH game) is determined, and the process proceeds to S8506 to be described later. Transition.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8503 that the number of probable changes is not less than 5 (it is 6 or more) (S8503: No), an effect indicating that a shortcut enters a small hit RUSH (RUSH game). The mode (for example, a warp effect) is determined (S8504), and the flow shifts to the process of S8506. If it is determined in the process of S8501 that the current fluctuation does not win the small hit C (S8501: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S8506.

  In the process of S8506, the effect mode (for example, the character 811 wears a flame from the display mode illustrated in FIG. 161 (a)) indicating that the special 2 change (second special symbol change) has been executed during the probability change ( The display mode of the character 811 is changed), the effect mode of climbing the mountain vigorously) is determined (S8506), and the display pattern command indicating the determined various effect modes is set (S8507), and the process ends. .

  Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the content of the RUSH setting process (S8410). In this RUSH setting process (S8410), a process for setting various effects for the second special symbol change executed during the RUSH game is executed.

  When the RUSH setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601). If it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601: Yes), the next step is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation has won the small hit B (S8602). When it is determined that the small win B has been won (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol change being executed at the time of the change stop is forcibly stopped, so that the end suggestion effect indicating a pinch of the end of the super RUSH is performed. This is set (S8603), and the effect mode for RUSH corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8604), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8602, if the current fluctuation does not win the small hit B (S8602: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8601 that the super RUSH flag 223fi is not set to ON (S8601: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S8604, and the process ends thereafter.

<Another example using the game board configuration of the seventh embodiment>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path through which the ball passing through the through gate 67 can flow is formed in the right area of the game board 13, and the right electric accessory 164 is provided in the flow path. In addition, while the right electric accessory 164 is in the closed state (the state in which the ball is difficult to win in the right electric accessory 164), the ball is placed on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164. A flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down, and the right second ball inlet 645 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 can enter the ball. Then, in accordance with the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of a game per ordinary figure), a sphere that flows down the right side area, and thus a sphere that can flow down the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 (hereinafter, a specific flow path). The ratio of the ball flowing down the flow path to the right electric accessory 164 (the right first entrance 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (the first special symbol lottery trigger). The ratio of entering the starting opening) and the ratio of entering the right second entrance 645 (the ratio of entering the starting opening serving as a lottery trigger of the second special symbol lottery) are varied. It was configured to be able to.

  Specifically, when the probable change state is set as the game state, the change time of the normal symbol change and the right electric change so that most of the balls flowing down the specific flow path enter the right electric accessory 164. The opening pattern of the accessory 164 is defined, and when the latent state is set, the ball flowing down the specific flow path wins the right electric accessory 164 more than when the probable state is set. The change time of the normal symbol change and the opening pattern of the right motor-accessory 164 are defined so as to reduce the ratio of the change. In addition, when the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is defined so that the rate of winning in the right electric auditors character 164 is further reduced than when the latent state is set. ing. In the latent state and the normal state, a low probability state of a normal symbol is set for both, and the opening operation pattern (opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164) executed for the game per ordinary figure is the same. However, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the interval at which the game is executed per ordinary symbol is changed, and as a result, the ratio of the ball flowing down the specific flow path to the right electric accessory 164 is changed. Was configured.

  According to the configuration of the above-described seventh embodiment, the starting ports (the right first ball entry port 164r and the right second ball entry port 645) into which the ball easily enters are made different according to the set game state. By performing the right-handed game, it is possible to easily change the type of the special symbol in which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Therefore, when a different game state is set for the player, a different game is performed. Sex games can be played, and the interest of the games can be improved.

  However, in the above-described seventh embodiment, a special symbol type in which a special symbol lottery is mainly executed is defined for a set gaming state (for example, a probability variation state). Is configured such that the first special symbol lottery is easily executed and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state. Therefore, unless the set game state is variably set, the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed mainly cannot be changed, and a player who has been playing a game for a long time in the same game state cannot be changed. There was a problem of getting tired of the game early.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, it is preferable to use the following components or a combination of the components in place of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Structure example 1: structure of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the variation pattern is defined in accordance with the set game state and the value of the second variation type counter CS3, and the variation pattern is selected. When a process is performed, a variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is selected. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the same game state is set, a fluctuation pattern having the same content is defined regardless of the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the game state. The configuration is such that the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the second variation type counter CS3 acquired from the data table. On the other hand, in the present configuration example 1, according to the number of special symbol fluctuations executed in the state where the specific game state (probable change state) is set (the number of special symbol lottery executed after the end of the probable variable jackpot game). The general-purpose variation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected variation time and the length of the selected variation time can be varied.

  That is, in contrast to the configuration of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172 (b)) of the above-described seventh embodiment, different variation patterns corresponding to the number of special symbol variations after the game state is set. They differ in the provisions. Specifically, when the number of times of the special symbol change after the probability change state is set is 1 to 2 times, the change pattern of the change time is 2 seconds, and in the range of 3 to 50 times, the above is described. A variation pattern in which the variation time is 0.8 seconds is defined in the same manner as the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment.

  With such a configuration, a variation pattern having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as a normal symbol variation from the setting of the probable variation state to the execution of the special symbol variation twice. Therefore, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbol change is executed twice) after the probable change state is set is more right than the predetermined period (the period after the special symbol change is executed twice). It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 645. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery only during a part of the period in the probable change state. Therefore, a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery only during a certain period during the probable change state, and the probable change is made without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period (50 times of probable changes). This makes it easier to shift from the state to the latent state that is more advantageous to the player than the probable state.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol that can be selected so that the predetermined period after the probable change state is set is more advantageous to the player than the period other than the predetermined period is defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a certain period elapses after the probable change state is set, a change pattern of a normal symbol that is advantageous to the player may be easily selected. With this configuration, when the specific period has elapsed without terminating the probable change state, a game more advantageous to the player than in the specific period can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a player who is performing a long-time game without changing the game state to play the game.

  Further, in the configuration example 1 described above, different variation times (variation patterns) are selected according to the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the number of special symbol fluctuations, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.8 seconds are configured to be selectable, and the probability of each fluctuation pattern being selected is determined by the number of special symbol fluctuations. , And specifically, when the number of special symbol changes since the probable change state is set satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a special symbol executed after the probable change state is set) A variation pattern (when the number of variations is less than two or when the number of variations of the special symbol after the probable variation state is set is even) is more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. S variation pattern) may be configured such is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to easily set a period in which a game advantageous to the player is executed only by variably setting the selection ratio of each variation pattern in accordance with the number of times the special symbol is varied.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the general-purpose variation pattern selection table referred to when the probable change state is set is one type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the jackpot type that triggers the probable change state to be set. It may be configured to select the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol by referring to a different data table. In this case, even if the jackpot type in which the same probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the won jackpot Depending on the type, it is possible to select a variation pattern (variation time) of ordinary symbol variation by referring to a different data table (general symbol variation pattern table). In this case, according to the jackpot type, the length of the advantageous period (the period in which a game (for example, the second special symbol lottery) which is more advantageous to the player than other periods is more easily executed) and the timing at which the advantageous period is set are set. It is good to make it different. In addition, when a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the probable change state is set to the advantageous period, and when a specific disadvantageous jackpot type is set, the advantageous period is set for the entire period of the probable change state. You may comprise so that it may not be set.

  In addition, as described above, in a period in which a specific game state (probable change state) is set, in a case where a game that is more advantageous to the player than another period can be executed in some periods, For the player, in addition to the current playing state, the player determines whether the present period is an advantageous period (a period in which a game (eg, the second special symbol lottery) more advantageous to the player than other periods is more easily executed). It is preferable to execute a period suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) to the user. For example, during the hill-climbing effect (see FIG. 161 (a)) executed during the probable change state in the above-described seventh embodiment, the rabbit Is changed to a display mode in which the character 811 imitating the character is powered up, the character "powerful zone rush" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect that can reduce the period until reaching the top is executed. Good.

  With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the current period is the advantageous period. Therefore, for example, a plurality of general figure fluctuation pattern tables having different advantageous periods are prepared as the general figure fluctuation pattern table referred to during the probability change state, and based on the jackpot type set at the time of the probability change jackpot, one Even in the case where the general-purpose variation pattern table is configured to be selectable, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous period in an easily understandable manner. It should be noted that the above-mentioned period suggested effect is intended for all effects configured to be more easily executed during the advantageous period than during the outside of the advantageous period, and the present time is provided to the player in the advantageous period. Even if it is a production other than a production that directly explains something, at the time the production is executed, the possibility of the current advantageous period is higher than the possibility of being outside the advantageous period, so the period suggestion Included in the production. Therefore, the period suggestion effect only needs to be performed at a frequency lower than the advantageous period, and may be executed in a period (a disadvantageous period) outside the advantageous period.

  Further, in addition to the above-described period suggestion effect, that is, an effect for suggesting to the player that the current time is likely to be an advantageous period, the general map change pattern table referred to in the current state of change is determined by the probability change It may be configured to execute a state suggestion effect that indicates that the table is a general-purpose variation pattern table in which an advantageous period is easily set among a plurality of general-purpose variation pattern tables that can be referred to during the state.

  Further, in the case where the probability change state is set, when a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a notification for notifying that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645. The production mode of the production may be configured to be different based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the current time is a favorable period. For example, a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the favorable period. In this case, since the ball is entered with a high ball entry frequency (during the advantageous period), the notification effect is executed without setting an effect mode that excessively celebrates the player, and the ball entry frequency is low. In a state (during a disadvantageous period), when a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a notification effect that can be set when the ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the advantageous period It is preferable that an effect mode for congratulating the player is set rather than the effect mode of (1). In the case where a plurality of periods in which the ease of entering a ball for a specific entrance is different can be set as described above, by changing the presentation mode of the notification effect according to the set period, When a ball can be made to enter a specific entrance during a period in which it is difficult to enter, a notification effect of a special effect mode can be executed.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the specific flow path (through gate 67) is changed by changing the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in accordance with the predetermined condition (big hit type, game state, number of times of special symbol change, value of the change type counter CS3). It is configured so that the ratio of the ball flowing down the flow path through which the passed ball flows down) to the right second entrance 645 is variable, but is not limited to this. In the case of winning, the length of the period from the stop of the display of the winning regular symbol change until the execution of the game for the ordinary figure (the ordinary figure fixing period) is determined by the type or the type of the elected ordinary figure. It may be made different depending on the type of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern. That is, the period from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation to the execution of the per-bonus game is determined by predetermined conditions (big hit type, game state, special symbol fluctuation frequency, fluctuation type counter CS3 value, general drawing lottery result, etc.). May be configured to be variable in accordance with

<Configuration example 2: Opening configuration of right electric accessory>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, one example of the opening operation pattern of the right electric accessory 164 in the per-figure game executed during the probable change state is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. A plurality of types of opening operation patterns of the right electric accessory 164 in the per-figure per game performed during the game can be set, and the right electric accessory 164 during the per-figure per game is set according to the set opening operation pattern. The length of the period during which the ball is in the closed state (the ball flows down the opening / closing lid 164r1 to the right second ball entrance 645) may be different in length. With such a configuration, the sphere that has flowed down the specific flow path (the flow path in which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) according to the hit type of the perpetual game executed during the probable change state is the right second ball. The ratio of reaching the entrance 645 can be varied.

  Further, for example, as the opening operation pattern of the game per day, the first open state (the state where the ball easily enters the right electric accessory 164) is in the first closed state (the ball is moved to the right electric accessory 164) for 2 seconds. The opening operation pattern in which the second open state is set for 0.5 seconds and the second open state is set for 0.5 seconds is set when the ball wins the right electric accessory 164 during the game per ordinary drawing. It may be configured such that the game per day is ended.

  With this configuration, for example, if the ball is made to win the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the game per ordinary drawing ends at that time, but during the first open state, By executing the game so that the ball does not win the right electric accessory 164, it is possible to easily make the ball reach the right second ball entrance 645 during the game per ordinary drawing. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the opening operation pattern in which the game for the ordinary drawing ends when the period of the first opening state elapses can be set. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select whether or not to fire the ball during the game per ordinary drawing (whether to execute the right-handed game).

  In the seventh embodiment described above and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment, in the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the ball passing through the through gate 67 in the right area of the game board 13 is used. Is formed so that the right electric accessory 164 is disposed in the flow passage, and the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the sphere wins in the right electric accessory 164). During a difficult state), a flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, and the ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 can enter the ball. The right second ball entrance 645 is arranged at a certain position. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of a game per ordinary figure), a sphere that flows down the right side area, and thus a sphere that can flow down the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as a specific flow path). The ratio of the spheres flowing down the flow path to the right electric accessory 164 (the right first entrance 164r (the first special symbol lottery provided in the right electric accessory 164). The ratio of entering the starting port) and the percentage of entering the right second entrance port 645 (the rate of entering the starting port that is a chance for the second special symbol lottery) are varied. And the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery during the probable change state. In other words, the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific flow path is configured so that a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed as compared with the starting port provided on the downstream side, and the starting port provided on the upstream side is formed. The winning ratio of the ball to the starting port on the downstream side where the lottery that is advantageous to the player is performed by changing the winning ratio of the ball is configured to be variable, but is not limited to this. The configuration is such that a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific area than when the ball enters the starting port provided on the downstream side. May be.

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, no matter what trigger sets the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, specifically, the jackpot is won after the jackpot game ends. However, even if the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, or even if the predetermined transition condition (for example, the number of times of the probability change is 50) is satisfied during the positive change state and the latent state is set, the latent state is set. Is set during a jackpot game or a probable change state in order to facilitate a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first special symbol holding storage (special figure 1 holding) is secured. In such a right-handed game, a special figure 1 reservation can be obtained. Specifically, when the first special symbol change is executed during the probability change state, and the first special symbol change is not executed during the jackpot game, the latent state is set when the potential win is won. Is more likely to be executed in the state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is the upper limit value (4) than when the latent state is set via the probability change state.

  When the latent state is set, the game (second special symbol lottery) having a different degree of advantage (different fluctuation time) is executed according to the number of special figure 1 reservations. It was configured such that the smaller the number, the more advantageous the game is executed to the player than the case where the special figure 1 reservation number is large.

  In other words, when the number of times of probable change (the number of special symbol changes executed during the state of probable change) reaches 50 during the probable change state, the special figure It was configured so that the number of reservations could be the upper limit (4) with a high probability. Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the small hit C is won in the second special symbol lottery during the probability change state, the probability change state is changed to the latent state before the probability change count reaches 50 times. It was configured so that it could be migrated. Therefore, for example, when the small hit C is won immediately after the probability change state is set and the state shifts to the latent state, the latent state is set as compared with the case where the latent state is set based on the satisfaction of other transition conditions. Since the execution period of the right-handed game before the certainty state is set is shortened, the number of special figure 1 reservations at the time when the certainty state is set can be easily reduced. Therefore, it is possible to set a transition condition more advantageous to the player than the other transition conditions described above (transition conditions that are satisfied when the number of times of change of probability reaches 50).

  In this manner, a plurality of transition conditions (big hits, the number of probable changes of 50, small hit C winning) are set in advance in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state), and the type of the satisfied transition conditions is set. By changing the degree of advantage after the specific game state is set in accordance with the game state, the player is interested not only in the game state set for the player but also in the transition condition that is established. be able to. Furthermore, in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state) in a state where the same game state (for example, a probable state) is set, a plurality of transition conditions (the number of times of probable change is 50, a small hit C win) A transition condition that can be satisfied without passing through a jackpot is set in advance, and the degree of advantage after a specific game state is set according to the type of the satisfied transition condition is configured to be variable. A game aiming to win a jackpot and a game aiming to establish advantageous transition conditions can be performed in parallel. Further, the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) set in advance is configured so that the degree of advantage after setting the latent state is easily changed according to the timing to be established. In the case where the transition condition is satisfied in a state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is small, an advantageous game (super RUSH) is easily executed after the latent state is set. The game can be played while expecting whether or not the transition condition is satisfied. Further, since the specific transition condition (small winning C win) can be satisfied regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations, the player can always be expected to satisfy the specific transition condition. .

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, of the plurality of shift conditions for shifting to the latent state, the shift condition established by the small hit C win is configured to be most advantageous to the player, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, a configuration in which the number of times of probability change reaches 50 times may be more advantageous to the player. In this case, for example, the probable change state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the latent state, or the latent state is set with a large number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and the latent state is set with a small number What is necessary is just to comprise so that a game advantageous to a player may be performed rather than a state being set.

  Further, as the effect (hill-climbing effect) performed during the probable change state shown with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) and (b), the effect mode of the effect performed when the transition condition is satisfied is shown at the time. It may be changed in accordance with the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. For example, when an execution condition for executing an advantageous game after setting the latent state is satisfied (for example, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is one) In the case where the transition condition is satisfied in the state of, the effect of reaching a luxurious summit (for example, an effect mode in which the summit is a flower field) is executed as compared with the case where the transition condition is not satisfied, and It may be configured to notify that the transition condition has been satisfied in an advantageous state. In addition, when the small hit C is won (the time when the second special symbol change in which the small hit C is won is started) or when it is determined that the number of times of the probability change reaches 50 times (the special figure 1 reservation is read ahead and the At the time when it is determined that the big hit is not won until the number of times reaches 50), an effect prompting to interrupt the right-handed game may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an unnecessary increase of the special figure 1 reservation.

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, in the state in which the latent state is set, the game is interrupted until the first special symbol change (10-minute change) of a long-time change is executed a plurality of times, thereby forcibly. It is possible to play a game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, but on the other hand, by interrupting the game for a long time during the latent state, the game most disadvantageous to the player is executed It is good to set a penalty as follows. Specifically, it is configured such that the selected general symbol variation pattern is made different depending on the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols (number of reserved ordinary symbols), and is selected when the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols is zero. It is preferable that the general figure variation pattern is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the general figure variation pattern selected when the number of stored ordinary symbols is more than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, the configuration may be such that a general-purpose variation pattern in which a long variation time is set is easily selected.

  With this configuration, when the game is suspended for a long time during the latent state, and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is set to 0, the player in a disadvantageous situation where it is difficult to increase the special figure 1 reservation from 0. Can play the game. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the general figure change pattern may be configured to be selectable on the basis of the number of reserved general figure and the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. In the case where the number of reserved figures is one or two, a short variation time is easily set so that the number of retained special figure 1 balls tends to be three or more as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the number of reserved ordinary figures is 0. When the number of special figure reservations is 0, it is preferable to set a long fluctuation time so as to make it difficult to newly acquire special figure 1 reservation.

  Further, a configuration in which the normal pattern variation pattern is changed according to the number of the normally stored symbols may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration. Specifically, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, a through gate 67 is provided also in the left area with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. A position where a ball can be won (for example, a first ball entry) regardless of whether a game is played (a game in which a ball flows down in the left area) or a right-hit game (a game in which a ball flows down in the right area). The position of the variable winning device 650 that is opened during a jackpot game is provided at the game board 13 in a different configuration, and a left-handed game and a right-handed game are played during the jackpot game. Is configured to allow the user to make a selection. Then, the rate at which the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 is made different between when the right-handed game is played and when the left-handed game is played. This makes it possible to vary the number of stored ordinary symbols (the number of reserved ordinary symbols) acquired at the end of the big hit game, depending on which game is played during the big hit game. Then, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, a first game state in which a larger number of regular figure reservations is more advantageous than a case in which the number of regular figure reservations is smaller, and a second game state in which a larger number of regular figure reservations is more disadvantageous than when the number is smaller. The game state is settable.

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of selecting a game method during the big hit game while predicting a game state set after the big hit game ends.

<Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery) can be executed in an overlapping manner. In the specification, when a specific game state (for example, a latent state) is set, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern as a fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation is changed to a second special symbol fluctuation. The configuration is such that a short-term (for example, one second) variation pattern is set as the variation time, and further, it is configured such that a small hit can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery.

  With this configuration, the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery can be made larger than the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state, and the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Frequent small hit games can provide a game that is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in a modified example of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called so-called “lottery”) capable of executing a lottery of a first special symbol and a lottery of a second special symbol in an overlapping manner. , Simultaneous fluctuation specification), when a specific game state (for example, a probable change state) is set, the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) becomes longer (for example, 10 minutes). In some cases, the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is configured to be shorter (for example, one second) so that the other special symbol lottery is preferentially executed.

  Then, the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol) is more advantageous than the lottery of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol) (for example, the second special symbol lottery). It is easier to win the small hit than the first special symbol lottery, or the content of the jackpot game executed when the big hit is won), and is advantageous to the player during a specific game state (for example, a probable change state). There are things that make the game easier to play.

  In the above-described gaming machine, at least during the period in which the probability change state is set, the first special symbol lottery becomes a disadvantageous lottery disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery becomes an advantageous lottery advantageous to the player. . Further, in the above-described gaming machine, at least one of the ending conditions for ending a specific gaming state (for example, a probable change state) includes a lottery result of one special symbol lottery (for example, a first special symbol lottery). Set the ending condition that is established when the lottery result (for example, a loss winning or a jackpot winning) is obtained, and provide a gaming ability to execute many advantageous special symbol lotteries until the ending condition is satisfied by the disadvantageous special symbol lottery By doing, there is something that improves the interest of the game.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (for example, a probable change state) that is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the period in which the advantageous gaming state continues is the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible for the player to actively play the game while expecting the advantageous game state to continue for a long time. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a lottery result for terminating the advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result is shown. The period until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result is started) is a period in which the advantageous gaming state is continued, and once the period in which the advantageous gaming state is continued is set. However, there is a problem that the period cannot be changed (discarded).

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) mainly executed during the advantageous gaming state, the disadvantageous special symbol variation (the (1 special symbol variation) can be discarded. That is, if the result of the disadvantageous special symbol change being executed is a result of ending the advantageous gaming state (for example, a result indicating a jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result is displayed. By discarding, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued). In addition, when the disadvantageous special design change (first special design change) being executed is discarded, the number of the disadvantageous special design change is not updated (added) by the discarded disadvantageous special design change. Therefore, as a termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state, a variation number termination condition that is satisfied when the number of disadvantageous special symbol variations in the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, two) is set. Also in this case, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued).

  With this configuration, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is continued can be changed based on the result of the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol). It is possible to cause the player to play the game.

  Further, in the present modification, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery in the advantageous game state (probable change state), the small hit type in which the above-described disadvantageous special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed is discarded. (Small jackpot B) and a small jackpot type (small jackpot C) for terminating the advantageous gaming state after discarding the disadvantageous special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed. ing.

  In other words, in the present modified example, an end condition that is established based on a lottery result of an advantageous special symbol (a second winning symbol) is set as an ending condition for ending the advantageous gaming state. By providing a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the advantageous gaming state in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues.

  In addition, since an end condition that can be established based on the result of the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol) in the advantageous gaming state is set, a surprising game can be provided to the player. In addition, as described above, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the set small hit type, When a small hit is won in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol), the player can watch the game contents thereafter.

  Further, in the present modified example, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (first special symbol) (the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the advantageous special symbol) The variable time of the variation of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol) can be variably set in accordance with the number of the reserved balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (the first special symbol). The smaller the number of reserved balls and the number of retained special symbols and the number of retained balls), the shorter the fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the advantageous gaming state (during the probable change state). It is configured to be easy.

  Thus, by winning a small win in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) and discarding the disadvantageous special symbol variation being executed, it is possible to increase the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the advantageous gaming state. .

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol high probability state continues until the next special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. The probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (specific small hit winning or execution of a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries) is satisfied. Was configured as follows. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, once the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery can be increased until the next jackpot winning, so that the player can play the game with confidence. On the other hand, if the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state will not end until the jackpot is won, so the special symbol high probability state There is a problem in that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a condition in which the high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low-probability state is added. It is configured to be able to transition to the probability state. As a result, even when the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state may end without winning the jackpot, so the player is playing during the special symbol high probability state. It is possible to cause a player to play a game with a sense of tension.

  In addition, in this modified example, when the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, When the second transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. When the first transition condition is satisfied before the second transition condition, the state is changed from the probable change state to the time saving state (the low probability state of the special symbol). State, high probability state of normal symbol), and when the second transition condition is satisfied before the first transition condition, from the probable state to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low level of normal symbol) (Probability state). When both transition conditions are satisfied, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set.

  In other words, the system is configured to finally transition to the normal state through different processes depending on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition that can be satisfied during the probable change state are satisfied. With this configuration, the player who is playing in the probable state is not only interested in when the probable state ends, but also about the game state to which the probable state changes. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation while the latent state is set, and the normal state is set. Is set, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation, and the special symbol lottery is used as in this modification. When a first transition condition (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is 50) that can be satisfied even if no winning is set, a normal state set based on the first transition condition being satisfied is set. In the meantime, both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change may change for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the player cannot play the game smoothly. was there.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, from the gaming state (for example, the probable change state) in which the long-term fluctuation is set as the fluctuation pattern of one special symbol fluctuation (for example, the first special symbol fluctuation), the other special symbol fluctuation is performed. It is configured not to directly transition to a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a long-term variation is set as a variation pattern (for example, a second special symbol variation) without going through a special symbol jackpot winning. The first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be less likely to fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). This allows the player to play the game smoothly.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of this modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) in the right area (the right side of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13. A part of the configuration of the region to be formed is different, and the other configuration is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 193, in the present modification, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right area, and a left flow path 701 in which a ball fired by a right-handed game is formed on the left side of the distribution member 700, It is configured to be alternately distributed to the right channel 702.

  On the upstream side of the left flow path 701, a movable lid 1500 that forms a flow lower surface of the left flow path 701 is provided. And an open state in which a ball can enter the right first entrance opening 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which entry is difficult (impossible). The opening and closing operation is performed so as to be located at the first position.

  Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). And an opening / closing operation that repeats a closing period of 0.8 seconds on average in accordance with a predetermined scenario. The right first entrance 64b controlled to be opened and closed in this manner is configured such that a ball is less likely to enter than the first entrance 64.

  Then, the sphere flowing down the left channel 701 and flowing down on the movable lid 1500 (the sphere flowing down the channel formed on the movable lid 1500 located in the closed state) flows down the bent portion of the left channel 701. Then, the nail flows down toward the electric accessory 640a with a nail planted at a position where the lower end of the left channel 701 faces.

  On the other hand, a bending portion is formed in the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700, and a small hitting attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is disposed so as to be a part of the flow lower surface of the bending portion. ing. The small hit attacker 3650 flows in when the open / close lid 3650a is in an open state, and the open / close lid 3650a is controlled to be opened / closed during the small hit game executed based on the win in the second special symbol lottery. It is composed of a flow path through which the dropped ball flows down, and a winning hole 3653 for a small hit into which the ball flowing down the flow path enters. It should be noted that the contents of opening / closing control of the opening / closing lid 3650a during the small hit game are described in the main processing of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 55). And the detailed description is omitted.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be changed between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. I have. Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. Have been. In this movable scenario, an operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 second and thereafter closing the movable member 1500 for 0.8 second is repeatedly executed.

  That is, in the game board 13 of this modification, the ball shot in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2-second intervals, and the rolling surface on which the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) matches the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling on the constantly movable member) is at 1.2-second intervals, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened is 0 in 0.9 seconds. .1 second, the timing at which both match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-hitting game is continuously performed, about four balls enter the right first entrance opening 64b in one minute.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, a ball periodically enters the right first entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game is not performed. When the probable change state is set after finishing, it is possible to prevent a state in which the first special symbol is not held (special figure 1 held). In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit, the first entrance port is set in the normal game state. A right-handed game may be more disadvantageous to a player than a left-handed game aiming at 64.

  More specifically, in the case where the left-hitting game is performed in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, it is designed that, out of the 250 shot balls, about 15 shots enter the first entrance 64. If a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. In addition, it is designed so that approximately five shots enter the general entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when the ball enters. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow approximately 20 balls to enter the first entrance port 64 in consideration of firing the prize balls to be paid out again when 250 balls are fired. Become.

  On the other hand, in the case where the right playing game is performed in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, it is designed that, out of the 250 balls fired, about 9 rounds enter the right first entrance 64b. If the ball enters, two prize balls are paid out. The general entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, even if it is considered that the awarded ball to be paid out is fired again when 250 balls are fired, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (the right area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal game state, the right-handed game is performed more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not make the player more advantageous. As a result, the number of balls to be paid out as prize balls can be increased in a right-handed game during a time-saving state or a jackpot state.

  Further, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay unit for delaying the flow of the ball in the path until the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500, the ball fired by the right-handed game is movable. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing of reaching the lid 1500. In this modification, the purpose of delaying the flow of the ball (to make the flow behavior of the ball different) and the purpose of distributing the ball fired by the right-handed game to a plurality of flow paths are also used. Although the distributing member 700 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different configuration may be used for each purpose, or the sphere distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distributing member 700 may be used. On the other hand, a delay means (for example, a flow path in which the friction coefficient of the lower surface is different from that of another lower surface, a sphere, or the like) The downward flow may branch midway, and a flow path that eventually reaches the movable lid 1500 may be provided in any case.

  Next, a description will be given of the electric accessory 640a to which the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 reaches. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric accessory 640a is provided in an area where any of the sphere flowing down the first flow path 701 and the sphere flowing down the second flow path 702 can be reached, and is usually provided by a symbol drawing. A guided state (protruding state) in which a ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a can flow down toward the second entrance 640 by a general winning game executed when a hit is won, and an electric accessory 640a The state can be changed to a release state (embedded state) in which the ball that has reached can not be accepted.

  Further, the variable mode (opening / closing control content) of the electric accessory 640a executed as a per-regular game described above is made different depending on the set probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed. In the set gaming state (probable change state, time saving state), the electric accessory 640a has a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) for the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a to reach the second entrance 640. In the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a goes to the second entrance 640 in the gaming state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The opening / closing control is performed such that the electric accessory 640a is in the guidance state for a time (for example, 0.1 second) that cannot be reached.

  With such a configuration, during a gaming state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set (for example, a normal state, a latent state), a left-handed game is more advantageous than a right-handed game as an advantageous game. During a game state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set (for example, a probable change state, a time saving state), a right-handed game can be an advantageous game that is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game.

  Lastly, the balls that have passed through the electric accessory 640 a (the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 701 and the balls that have flowed down the second flow path 702) reach the V winning device 2650. The V prize device 2650 is controlled to be opened and closed by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game passes through a specific gate. Thus, the special symbol high probability state can be set after the big hit game is over.

  Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 2650.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the V prize device 2650 is combined with an opening forming member 2650b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and on the back side of the opening forming member 2650b, thereby forming the V prize device 2650. A base member 2650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c to turn on the LEDs from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 In order to open and close the arranged LED board 2650d, the back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with the base member 2650c, and the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1, and a back cover body 2650e. A flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the surface side to form a flow path, a switching member 2650h that protrudes into a flow path formed by the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, A link member 2650i locked with the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i. It comprises a flow path solenoid 2650k to be closed and a fixing cover 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 2650j with screws.

  FIG. 195 is a sectional view of the V winning device 2650. FIG. 195 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and FIG. 195 (b) is a sectional view of the V winning device 2650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the V prize device 2650 is formed with a jackpot prize port (big jackpot prize port) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning port (jackpot winning port) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 195 (b). Has a bottom surface inclined downward and to the left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 195 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the opening of the jackpot winning port (jackpot winning port) 2650a is opened by the opening / closing door 2650f1 formed of a shutter mechanism that can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1, and the ball can roll on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 2650c (the interior of the game board 13) so as to be retracted from the inside of the jackpot winning hole (big jackpot winning opening) 2650a. .

  In the open state, a surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used for the jackpot winning jackpot (jackpot winning port) 2650a. You can be awarded within. Therefore, the ball can be reliably won by the V prize device 2650 during the big hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 195 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a configuration in which the sphere guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2 described below.

  FIG. 196 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted, and a guiding piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball. It is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 disposed diagonally below and left, and the special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2. Is induced. The special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V route through which the flowing sphere passes through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3. The passage is detected by the detection switch 2650e3 which can detect the passage, and thereafter, the ball is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes through the V route, a special symbol It is configured that a high probability state is set. That is, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting the special symbol high probability state. In addition, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) that can pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game. This is for setting one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3, and sets the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196 (a)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a description will be given of the content of the transition of the gaming state in the present modification. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of a gaming state in a modification of the seventh embodiment. In this modified example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the state where the normal state is set, the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64 by the left hitting game. Thereby, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery), the jackpot A is set at a rate of 40% as the jackpot type, and the jackpot B is set at a rate of 60%. Then, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), the big hit C is set at a rate of 100% as the big hit type.

  When the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as the jackpot A7 (see FIG. 169) of the above-described seventh embodiment is executed, and the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game. When the big hit B is set, the same big hit game as the big hit B7 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 169) is executed, and the probability change state is set after the big hit game ends. In this modified example, when the probable change state is set, a special symbol executed during the special symbol high probability state is set as an end condition (first transition condition) of the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability). The number of lotteries (ST times) is set to 50, and the special symbol lottery number executed during the normal symbol high probability state is set as the end condition (second transition condition) of the normal symbol high probability state (normal symbol high probability). The configuration is such that (the number of time savings) is set to 70 (second transition condition A) or the number of lottery times for special figure 1 twice (second transition condition B).

  When the jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is executed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number) is the upper limit (4). Can be easily reached. During the probable change state, a game for executing the special drawing 2 lottery by a right-handed game is performed. In this modification, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to execute a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery so that the gaming state most advantageous to the player becomes the probable change state. This embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the special drawing 2 lottery is easily executed when the symbol high probability state is set.

  Specifically, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be easier to win the small hit than the special figure 1 lottery, and the probability of the small hit winning in the special figure 2 lottery is set to 1/20. In addition, in the case where the big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player after the big hit game is completed is more easily set than in the case of the special figure 1 lottery in which the big hit is won. ing. In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, the latent pattern 7 table 203fe3 referred to when selecting the variation pattern during the latent state is referred to when selecting the variation pattern during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, In the seventh embodiment, the probable variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when the variation pattern in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is selected is referred to when the variation pattern in the latent state is selected. .

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, in the probable state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and in the time saving state, the right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is mainly performed is performed, and the low probability of the ordinary symbol is performed. In the normal state where the state is set and the latent state, the left-handed game in which the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly executed is performed.

  Next, the relationship between the game result in the probable change state and the transition content of the game state will be described. As described above, in the present modification, the first transition condition for transitioning from the probable state to the time saving state when the condition is satisfied and the second transition condition for transiting from the probable state to the latent state when the condition is satisfied are set. Have been. Specifically, 50 times of special symbol lottery times (ST times) executed during the special symbol high-probability state are set as the first shift condition, and the normal symbol high-probability state of the normal symbol is set as the second shift condition. The number of executed special symbol lotteries (time saving times) is set to 70 (second transition condition A) or the number of special figure 1 lotteries is set to two (second transition condition B).

  In other words, if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot after the probability change state is set, the state shifts to the time reduction state, and then the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state is executed 20 times. , So as to shift to a normal state. Here, in the present modified example, during the probable change state, a different fluctuating time is set as the fluctuating time of the second special symbol according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of reserved balls of special figure 1). Make up. More specifically, similarly to the above-described latent table 7fe3 in the seventh embodiment, when the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 1 and 2), when the number of reserved balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, It is configured such that the fluctuation time shorter than 4) is easily selected.

  With this configuration, in the probable change state in which the set period (50 ST times) is defined, the special figure 2 in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is easily executed is increased in order to increase the number of executions. It is possible to cause the player to perform a novel game in which the small hit B is won in two lotteries and the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls.

  Further, in the present modification, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, when the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is interrupted and the special figure 1 change is executed a plurality of times. When the act of reducing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is executed, the second transition condition B is satisfied, and the state is shifted from the probable state to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game is reduced by interrupting the game during the period in which the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probable change state in which the long fluctuation time is easily selected is executed. it can.

  Next, a description will be given of how the special symbols change when the gaming state shifts. First, the flow when the second transition condition B is satisfied in the state where the probability change state is set and the latent probability state is set will be described. As described above, since the second transition condition B can be satisfied when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed, a new special figure 1 change is executed immediately after the latent state is set. Since the variation pattern (variation time) of this newly executed special figure 1 variation is selected using the variation pattern table referred to during the latent state, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation during the normal state is changed. A variation pattern that can be selected will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the long-term special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed during the long-term special figure 1 fluctuation.

  On the other hand, a case will be described in which the first shift condition is satisfied during the probable change state and the time saving state is set. As described above, the first transition condition can be satisfied either when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed, or when the special figure 2 change is stopped and displayed. At a different timing, a long-term special figure 1 fluctuation may be executed. However, the time saving state is configured so that the special figure lottery is continued 20 times or until the special figure lottery wins the jackpot, and the total of the fluctuation times for 20 special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time reduction state The value is configured to be longer than at least the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation set during the latent state. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table are defined so that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is easier to select a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the latent state.

  With such a configuration, in the case of shifting from the probable change state to the time saving state and then to the normal state, both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are performed for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). ) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that fluctuates. In addition, during the time saving state or the latent state, if a special jackpot is won by a special figure lottery, the special figure change that is being executed will be discarded. A new special drawing lottery corresponding thereto is executed. Therefore, in the case where a new gaming state is set at the time of the jackpot winning, the long-time special figure change that has been executed before the jackpot winning is continuously executed even after the jackpot game ends, and thus the first special is performed. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where both the symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes).

  As described above, in the present modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner, and the second special symbol lottery is more specially executed than the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured such that the winning state in the symbol lottery is more likely to set the probability change state after the end of the big hit game. With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the game state set after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, the same technical idea as the present modification may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having a different playability from the present modification. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be applied by using the above-described first to third embodiments. As described above, if a predetermined execution condition (for example, a ball entering a special power starting port or a small jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery) is established without a jackpot winning in a special symbol lottery, a predetermined game ( (Game per accessory, small hit game) can be executed, and it is determined that a ball that has entered the variable entering means that is opened during the predetermined game has entered a specific area (for example, a V winning opening). The present invention may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot game is executed at the opportunity.

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), the internal structure of the small hit attacker 3650 is changed so that the ball which has won the small hit attacker 3650 is either the normal winning opening 3652 or the V winning opening 3653. The movable valve 3651 may be configured to be movable so as to win the crab, and the big hit game may be executed when the ball wins the V winning opening 3653 (see FIG. 197 (b)). Further, even when the ball that has won the small hit attacker 3650 has won the normal winning opening 3652 (see FIG. 197 (a)), the same winning ball as when winning the V winning opening 3653 is provided. It is good to configure.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, the contents of the effect performed in the present modification will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, various transition conditions for terminating the probable change state are set, and the probable change state is changed to a different game state according to the satisfied transition condition. Among them, the effect contents regarding the second transition condition B that is satisfied when the special figure 1 change is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the probability change state will be described.

  In the present modified example, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, similar to the above-described seventh embodiment, the small hit type (small hit A, small hit C) for interrupting the running of the special figure 1 is changed. , A small hit type (small hit B) for discarding a running special figure 1 change can be set. Then, when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed without being discarded, the special figure 1 change number is updated.

  That is, if the small hit B is set when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the special figure 1 change that is being executed is discarded, and the special figure 1 change number is updated without updating the special figure 1 change frequency. It is configured to perform the fluctuation. Therefore, in the probable change state, the configuration is such that the second shift condition B described above is hard to be satisfied if the ongoing change of the special figure 1 is continuously discarded. On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation during the probable change state, a long special figure 1 fluctuation in which a long time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation time is set and a short time (for example, 1 minute) fluctuation time are set. In the case where the short special figure 1 change is selected and the long special figure 1 change is being executed and the remaining change time is, for example, 8 minutes, the small hit B is won. It is more advantageous for the player to win the small hit A and interrupt the long special figure 1 fluctuation than to discard the long special figure 1 fluctuation. That is, in some cases, the second transition condition B can be hardly satisfied.

  Specifically, when the special figure 1 fluctuation newly executed after the long special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is discarded is the short special figure 1 fluctuation, it is more effective than when the long special figure 1 fluctuation is not discarded. When the fluctuation time of the short special figure 1 fluctuation elapses, there is a case where the possibility that the number of times of the special special figure 1 fluctuation is updated is increased.

  Therefore, in the present modification, in the state where the probable change state is set, the state of the special figure 1 change being executed (the length of the remaining change time) and the change of the special figure 1 executed next are set. Whether the current gaming state is advantageous to the player based on the variation pattern (fluctuation time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery mainly executed (a state in which the probable variation state is easily continued). Or not). This allows the player to be notified of the game content in the probable change state in an easily understandable manner.

  FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a RUSH period variable effect executed when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the probability change state (RUSH) is performed. FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extended display indicating that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the RUSH period variable effect. FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extended display indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened as a result of the RUSH period variable effect, and FIG. 200 (b) is a RUSH period. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the extended display which shows that the RUSH period was extended as a production result of a variable production. In this modification, among the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (a), during the RUSH period, when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (a large hit, a small hit, or a part of a miss), the rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm. The effect (variable period effect) in which the character 811 imitating the game finds the treasure box 812 to which the extra bag 812h is attached is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "What is the content of the bonus" is displayed. The treasure box 812 is a display mode for displaying the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery mainly executed, and the bag 812h changes how the RUSH period (probable change state period) changes based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. This is a display mode for notifying a player of the fact.

  After the variable period effect shown in FIG. 199 (a) is started and the special figure 2 change is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which a result display mode 812a indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), as the result display mode 812a, a display mode of “V” indicating that the small hit has been won in the special drawing 2 lottery is displayed. As the result display mode 812a, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the character "" is displayed when the lottery result is a big hit. Is displayed, and if it is off, a display mode imitating a "cross mark" is displayed.

  Then, from among the opened bags 812h, a status display mode 812j indicating whether the RUSH period (probable change state period) is variable based on the lottery result of this special figure 2 lottery (whether the state has shifted to a state in which it is easy to change). Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), a display mode of “extended” indicating that the RUSH period has been extended is displayed as the status display mode 812j. As the status display mode 812j, in addition to the "extended" display mode indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, "sorry" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened, the small hit C has been set, and the RUSH period has ended. "End", the special drawing 2 lottery subject to the variable period production is out of order and does not affect the RUSH period "?", And the special figure 2 lottery subject to the variable period production A display mode such as “celebration” to congratulate that the result is a jackpot is displayed.

  Here, regarding the setting method of various display modes displayed when the variable period effect is executed, the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIGS. 183 to 192). This will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the status command receiving process (see S4232 in FIG. 183) executed in the command determination process 7 (S4192 in FIG. 183), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the probable changing state, and the probable changing state is in progress. If it is determined that “RUSH” shown in FIG. 199 (a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a process for setting a display command is executed.

  Next, instead of the special figure 2 change display setting processing 7 (see S5237 in FIG. 190) executed in the change display setting processing 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), the current special figure 2 change is a big hit change, A determination process is performed to determine whether the variation is a small hit variation or an out-of-place variation, and a selection process is performed to select whether to execute the variable duration effect based on the determination result. In this selection process, whether or not to execute the variable period effect is selected based on the contents specified in the dedicated data table (variable period effect selection table). Specifically, the period of the special figure 2 is about 20% if the change is a big hit, 100% if it is a small change, and 10% if it is a change. The contents of the period variable effect selection table are defined so that the execution of the variable effect is selected.

  Here, when it is selected to execute the variable period effect in the jackpot fluctuation, the display mode of “this” is displayed as the result display mode 812a and the “celebration” is displayed as the status display mode 812j in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command for displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In addition, if it is selected to execute the variable period effect in the departure fluctuation, the display mode of “X” is displayed as the result display mode 812a and “?” Is displayed as the status display mode 812j in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command for displaying the display mode of on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is selected to execute the variable duration effect in the small hit change, then the small hit type set in the current small hit change is read out, and the special figure 1 being executed at the stop timing of the special figure 2 change is read out. A type determination process is performed to determine whether the type is a small hit type that interrupts fluctuation or a small hit type that is discarded. Next, the remaining time of the currently running special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated based on the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, and is executed next from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern command included in the winning information stored in the reserved first area) is predicted.

  Then, as a result of the type determination processing, when it is determined that the small hit type interrupts the special figure 1 fluctuation, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of interruption is changed to the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation. If it is longer, the display mode of “extended” is displayed as the status display mode 812j. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of interruption is shorter than the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed, “ A display command for displaying the display mode of “sorry” on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Also, as a result of the type determination processing, when it is determined that the small hit type is that the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of discarding is changed to the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation. If it is longer, the display mode of “sorry” is displayed as the status display mode 812j. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of discarding is shorter than the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed, “ A display command for displaying the “extended” display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Furthermore, when the small hit type set this time is the small hit C, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol shifts to the low probability state at the stop timing of the special figure 2 change, so that “end” is displayed as the status display mode 812j. A display command for displaying the display mode of on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  As described above, in the present modification, even when the same small hit type is set, the timing at which the small hit change is stopped and displayed or the special figure 1 change executed next time is changed. The effect of the variable period effect is variable according to the set fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the small hit variation is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable period effect, the small hit type that interrupts the special figure 1 change that is being executed at the special figure 2 change stop timing, It is configured to relatively determine which is more advantageous to the player depending on the type of the small hit to be discarded, and to set the production mode (display mode) of the variable duration production based on the discrimination result. ing. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the small hit change at any time, it is possible to easily inform the player whether the small hit type advantageous to the player is set at that time.

  In this modification, as described above, the effect of the variable period effect is configured to be relatively set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect form of the variable duration effect may be determined based on whether the fluctuation time is longer than a specific time (for example, one minute), or the remaining fluctuation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded is specified time (for example, , 30 seconds).

  Further, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above and the technical idea of the modified example of the seventh embodiment may be combined. For example, in the latent state of the seventh embodiment, an end condition other than the jackpot winning is set. Alternatively, the latent state may be terminated even when the termination condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, the first end condition that can be satisfied when the total of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches 100, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 5 The second ending condition that can be satisfied when the number of times has been reached and the third ending condition that can be satisfied when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a specific small hit (small hit C) can be set. Just do it.

  With this configuration, when a potential state that is advantageous to the player is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment, the player is notified of how long the potential state is to be continued. It can be difficult to understand. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, once the latent state is set, the latent state continues at least until the next big hit game is executed (until the big hit is won). There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous, but in this modification, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the latent state to continue for a long time or until the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Furthermore, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit type (small hit A) for interrupting the first special symbol change being executed and the second special symbol change being executed are discarded (forcible upon departure). A plurality of small hit types including at least a small hit type (small hit B) to be stopped) can be set. When the small hit type is set as the small hit type B and the first special symbol change is discarded, the lottery count of the first special symbol in the latent state is updated by the discarded first special symbol change. It is configured not to be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the ease with which the above-described second end condition is satisfied in the latent state based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, the degree of advantage of the lottery result of the second special symbol can be made different depending on the execution status of the first special symbol.

  For example, in a gaming machine in which the fluctuating time A (2 minutes) and the fluctuating time B (10 minutes) can be set at least as the fluctuating time of the first special symbol in the latent state, the fluctuating time B (10 minutes) is set. ) Is set, and when the remaining time of the running first special symbol change is longer than 2 minutes, the running first special symbol change is discarded rather than discarded. In the state where the suspended first special symbol change is shorter than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to interrupt the suspended first special symbol than to suspend the executing first special symbol. This is advantageous.

  Therefore, the player can be interested in both the result of the lottery of the special symbol and the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, a combination of a plurality of events (special symbol lottery, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol) can make the degree of advantage to the player different, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to predict.

  Further, the technical idea described above may be used for a gaming machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, the process for the running of the special figure may be made different depending on the hit type acquired when the special power operation port is won.

  Also, in the seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in an overlapping manner, the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. Accordingly, the length of the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is varied by discarding or interrupting the first special symbol change being executed. In other words, the first special symbol change is discarded, thereby making it difficult to satisfy the end condition that can be satisfied based on the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed, thereby aiming at a long-term advantageous gaming state. In place of this, a specific area is provided in a small hit attacker which is opened in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, and when a ball passes through the specific area. May also be configured to execute a jackpot game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the configuration in which only the first special symbol has the hold storage function is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage function is provided in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A function may be provided. In this case, in the gaming state (probable state) that is advantageous to the player, only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is used as the number of retained balls to be referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol to be executed. May be referred to, or the total number of reserved balls obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be referred to. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. As the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is larger, a variation pattern (fluctuation pattern having a shorter variation time) advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is good to constitute so that it becomes.

  With this configuration, the player needs to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol. The act of reducing the number of balls can be suppressed. In addition, the total number of reserved balls obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol When the variation time of the second special symbol is selected based on both the difference and the total number of reserved balls is equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 5) and the difference is equal to or more than 3 In the above, it is preferable that a variation pattern (a variation pattern with a short variation time) advantageous to the player is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. This allows the player to actively play the game, thereby improving the operation of the game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the gaming state (probable state) advantageous to the player is set and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a specific number (one or two), The variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) more advantageous to the player is selected as the second special symbol variation than the case other than the specific number, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is set as the specific number. Although a small value is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific number may be a plurality of values (for example, three or four) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Alternatively, it may be a distant value (for example, one or three). In this case, if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a small hit type for discarding the running first special symbol change is set, the small hit win is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Can be varied according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the case where discarding the first special symbol change is more advantageous to the player, and the case where not discarding (interrupting) the change is advantageous to the player. Can be provided. With this configuration, the player can be more interested in the relationship between the lottery result of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, one type of variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this.For example, a large number of jackpot types in which the probability change state and the latent state are set after the jackpot is completed are provided, and are referred to during the latent state based on the set jackpot type. A plurality of variation pattern tables referred to during the latent state may be provided so that the variation pattern tables can be different. In this case, the second special pattern table may be provided according to the referenced variation pattern table. It is preferable to vary the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in which a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player is easily selected as the symbol variation. With this configuration, it is possible to change the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol that the player aims at during the latent state, so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict. Further, when a plurality of variation pattern tables referred to during the latent state are provided, a part of the variation pattern table is provided to the player as the second special symbol variation regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. An advantageous variation pattern table in which an advantageous variation pattern (a short-time variation pattern) is easily selected (always selected) and a second special symbol variation that is advantageous to the player regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is preferable to provide both or one of a disadvantageous variation pattern table in which a variation pattern (a short-term variation pattern) is hard to be selected (it is not selected).

  Further, in the modification of the seventh embodiment described above, when the first special symbol change being executed is discarded, the number of time savings is configured not to be subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is not limited to this. A configuration may be employed in which the number of times saved is reduced when the fluctuation is discarded. In such a configuration, when a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player is set, a short time (for example, 5 seconds) change time is set as the change pattern of the second special symbol change. The variation pattern is set so that a variation pattern in which a long-term variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is easily selected. Then, in the second special symbol change that is efficiently executed with respect to the first special symbol change, a certain number of small hits for discarding the first special symbol change being executed (for example, two times) are established until the winning is achieved. It is possible to provide the player with a novel playability of being able to execute the middle game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the number of retained special symbols in the first special symbol becomes one or two during the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol change is shortened. Was. Furthermore, a specific small hit (small hit B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol change being executed is discarded (forced stop) so as to reduce the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol. Was configured. In addition, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to acquire the reserved memory of the first special symbol in a game (right-handed game) executed during the latent state. In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured to be long (for example, 10 minutes). With such a configuration, as a game during the latent state, in the second special symbol lottery in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than in the first special symbol lottery is executed, a big hit or a small hit which is advantageous to the player A new game of simultaneously executing a game in which a lot of prize balls are obtained by winning the game, and a game in which the reserved memory of the first special symbol is reduced and the frequency of executing the second special symbol lottery is increased. Could be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, in the case where the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is four (upper limit), the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery may be increased. In this case, as compared with the configuration of the above-described seventh embodiment, it may be configured such that it is difficult to acquire the hold storage of the first special symbol during the game in the latent state (right-handed game). In this case, unlike the above-described embodiments, it is disadvantageous for the player to win a specific small hit (small hit B) in the second special symbol lottery.

  Even in the case of such a configuration, it is easy to perform a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player in accordance with the number of reserved special symbols (first special symbol) that is disadvantageous to the player. Can be different. In this case, for example, the second special symbol lottery is advantageously executed by acquiring the reserved number of the first special symbol up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to easily set the state to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire the reserved number of first special symbols up to the upper limit during the jackpot game.

  Further, even if the number of reserved special symbols stored up to the upper limit during the jackpot game is reached, the process of starting the first special symbol change after setting the latent state starts the second special symbol change. Since the process is executed before the process, it is possible to suppress the second special symbol change from being executed in an advantageous state after the latent state is set. As a control process of the main control device 110, the process of starting the second special symbol change may be executed before the process of starting the first special symbol change. With this configuration, for example, in the case where the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, the number of the stored holdings of the first special symbol is changed (decreased) from the number of the stored holdings obtained during the big hit game. The second special symbol change can be executed without any problem.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the case where the number of stored special symbols (number of special figure reserved balls) is a specific number (for example, one), a game advantageous to the player (for example, The first game (for example, a game for forcibly stopping the special symbol change) in which the special symbol change is configured to be easily executed, and further, the number of special symbols held (the number of special figure reserved balls) is easily set to a specific number. ) And a second game (for example, a game in which a special symbol change is stopped after a change time elapses) that is difficult to be a specific number is configured to be executable. Further, the design is made such that the specific number (for example, one) of special figure reserved balls in which a game advantageous to the player is easily executed is smaller than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the special figure reserved balls. However, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is larger than the specific number, the first game is more easily executed than when the number is smaller than the specific number. Further, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is a specific number, or when the number is smaller than the specific number, the first game is more difficult to be executed than when the number is larger than the specific number.

  With this configuration, the number of special figure reserved balls can be brought close to a specific number simply by having the player play the game aiming at the execution of the first game, and the player can understand the game. Easy games can be played.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls that is easy to execute a game that is advantageous to the player is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls. Alternatively, the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls may be set as the number of special figure reserved balls (specific number) that facilitates execution of a game advantageous to the player. In this case, if a game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped is executed, the number of special figure reserved balls tends to decrease, which is disadvantageous to the player. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property in which a game is performed with the aim of not executing the game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the processing content for the first special symbol change being executed is made different depending on the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Was. Specifically, if the small hit A or the small hit C is set as the small hit type, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted, and if the small hit B is set, the special symbol change being executed is changed. It was configured to be destroyed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, no matter what the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed, the processing according to the set small hit type is executed. There is a problem in that even if during a jackpot change, which is a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player, the jackpot change is discarded based on the small hit win. In addition, when such a configuration is used, a high expectation effect with a high degree of expectation in which the first special symbol change being executed is a big hit is executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to execute the high expectation effect because the player notices that the jackpot change has been discarded (the jackpot winning has been invalidated).

  In addition, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game state (probable state) advantageous to the player is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, In addition, since the second special symbol is configured not to be stored on hold, for example, the second special symbol that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed at a timing before the first special symbol that has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. Even if a means for determining in advance is provided, the timing at which the stop display is not determined is immediately before the big hit change is stopped and displayed. (Corresponding to the fluctuation time).

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed (when the special process is executed for the special symbol change being executed), the small hit game is performed according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. This is largely different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the configuration is such that the processing contents are determined. More specifically, at the point in time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation being executed If the result of the determination is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and the specific variation is discarded. If it is other than a pattern, the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted.

  Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation (big hit variation) that has won the big hit, the big hit type in which the big hit game (for example, the probability change big hit) advantageous to the player is executed, and the disadvantage to the player. A different big hitting game (for example, a normal big hit) is executed so that a different changing pattern is selected according to the disadvantageous jackpot type. Further, the changing pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to be different.

  More specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is large, the fluctuation time in which the fluctuation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type is smaller than when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is small. A variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is large, a jackpot game (for example, a probable big hit) advantageous to the player is more easily executed than when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is small ( A jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player can be made difficult to be executed (it is easy to be discarded by the small hit winning). In other words, the proportion of the probability jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting an advantageous jackpot game to be executed, thereby improving the operation of the game.

  Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a small hit is won in any one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. I have. By configuring in this way, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is won, it is possible to abandon the jackpot win by the other small hit lottery, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, it is possible to surely make the ratio occupied by the jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot vary.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in the present embodiment differs from the above-described modification of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193) in part of the configuration in the right area and in the lower area (variable). The difference is that a part of the configuration of the display unit 80 (the lower area) is different. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). The first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 to which the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 can flow are provided to extend to the lower side of the right region, The structure and arrangement position of the object 640a are changed, and the small hit attacker (the second attacker) that is opened in a part of the small hit game that is opened in the small hit game instead of the small hit attacker 3650 ) 5650 is disposed at a lower central position of the game board 13. The other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be described focusing on differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modification of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 passes through the curved path 701a, passes through the through gate 67, and flows downward in the right region. The sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side, flows into the inflow port 704a, and flows into the back side of the first flow path 701 (FIG. 201). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the far side (from the viewpoint), passes through the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and flows out from the outlet to the lower right area on the game board 13. . Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 join under the right region, flow down on the variable prize device (first attacker) 2650, and out. It flows into the mouth 66.

  Next, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 of the configuration arranged in the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and the second ball is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A mouth 640 is provided. With this configuration, the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 at an interval of 1.2 seconds can be made to flow toward the second entrance 640 without decreasing the flow speed. Therefore, since the falling intervals of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of spheres enter the second entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball is quickly released to the second entrance 640. You can get into the ball.

  In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701, first flow path 701, Since the distributing member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702) so as to cause the ball to flow down only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is invalidated), the second entrance port is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is broken, and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modified example, a ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. Creating a state that is easy to cause can be suppressed.

  Next, a case where a ball flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured such that the period during which the ball flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere that has flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outlet is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 spheres are fired toward the right region in one minute, the sphere that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the sphere that is fired next to the sphere are fired, and the second flow path 702 is fired. Will flow down the lower right area (the area where the first variable prize device 2650 is provided) of the game board 13 almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference). Therefore, in the gaming state (the big hit state or the small hit state) in which the first variable winning device 2650 is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

  Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 so that a plurality of flow paths are overlapped in a front view. As described above, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball channels (the area occupied by the ball channels in the game board 13). it can.

  Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and the first outlet is located in the lower right area of the game board 13. The configuration is such that the sphere flows out downstream of the sphere flowing out of the flow path 701. As a result, the ball that has flowed out of the outlet 704c (the ball that has flowed faster than the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the ball that has flowed out of the first flow path 701, and is irregular. A situation in which a ball flow occurs can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired by the right-handed game by the distribution member 700 is alternately distributed to two flow paths. However, other configurations may be used. Instead of alternating (1: 1) to the channels, the balls may be distributed at different rates, or the balls may be distributed to three or more channels. Further, the configuration may be such that the spheres are randomly distributed to a plurality of flow paths in accordance with the weight of the spheres and the timing of the flow. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 in which the distribution destination of the next passing ball changes according to the own weight of the passing ball is used. For example, a vibration member electrically driven in accordance with a predetermined rule is used. A dividing member may be used.

  Next, a lower region of the game board 13 in which the small hit attacker 5650 is provided will be described. The small hitting attacker 5650 is a variable ball-in means that is opened in a small hitting game that is executed when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small hitting attacker 5650 is disposed at a position below the first ball entrance 64, and a ball flowing down on the game board 13 reaches by a nail implanted in the game board 13. It is configured to be difficult. Therefore, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit game in which the player is unlikely to acquire a prize ball is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, control for interrupting or forcibly stopping the other special symbol variation being executed is configured to be executable. The control content to be executed is switched based on the variation content of the other special symbol variation. In other words, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball, but a predetermined control (interruption or forced stop) is executed for the second special symbol variation being executed. This is a trigger for execution.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the RAM 203 are different. Otherwise, it is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 202, the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 168 (a)) in that the small hit random number table 202fb is replaced with the small hit random number 8 table. 202gb, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd instead of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd, the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, the variation pattern selection 8 table 202ge, and the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, The difference is that a selection eight table 202gf is provided, and the other points are the same.

  Here, the contents of the small hit random number 8 table 202gb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number 8 table 202gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small hit random number 8 table 202gb also defines a small hit determination value for the first special symbol. Specifically, the small hit determination value is defined in a range of “300 to 599” for the value of the first random number counter C1 irrespective of the probability state of the special symbol for the symbol type of the first special symbol, Regarding the symbol type of the second special symbol, a small hit determination value is defined in a range where the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 is "550 to 599" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/2 when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the small hit with a probability of about 1/12 when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win. In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit attacker 5650 in which the ball cannot be won during the small hit game (it is difficult to win) is opened. Is executed, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big hit game is opened is executed. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery is set to win the small hit with a high probability, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively specific (prize ball). Also, in the second special symbol lottery, it is set so as to win a small hit with a probability lower than the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is different from the above-described jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in that a prize device (a prize device to be opened) in which a jackpot operation is executed is performed. The difference is that they differ from each other in that the value of the hour-saving counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot is different, and the other points are the same. Note that, for convenience of explanation, each of the jackpot types used in the above-described seventh embodiment and the jackpot types used in the eighth embodiment are partially different in name (for example, jackpot A7). And jackpot A8) are the same for the elements that are not described for the differences. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 204, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal jackpot (jackpot A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the setting is made at the time of the jackpot winning. Regardless of the game state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, that is, it is defined that the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set after the big hit game ends. In addition, when the jackpot C8 set at a rate of 20% of the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 10,000 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning. Is set to That is, the probable change state is set in effect until the next jackpot is won.

  As described above, the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is defined as a jackpot type having a different degree of advantage for the player, and the "jackpot A8" in the most unfavorable order for the player, "Big hit B8" and "big hit C8" are defined. In other words, it is defined that "big hit C8" is the type of big hit that is most advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery wins the probability change jackpot (when the "big hit E8" is won), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot win. . That is, when the "big hit E8" is won, a 100-times (100 special symbol changes) certainty change state is set after the big hit game ends.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed during the probable change state and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are executed in parallel (overlapping), it is the most advantageous jackpot type. While aiming to win the jackpot C8, a game is executed that aims not to win the jackpot types “jackpot A8” and “jackpot D8” for which the probability change state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, among the variation pattern selection tables in the eighth embodiment, the probable change 8 table 202ge and the latent probabilities 8 table 202ge referred to during the probable change state will be described. I do. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the eight tables for probabilities of change 202ge, and FIG. 206 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight tables for latent probability 202ge. .

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed game is executed in a state where the probability change state and the latent state are set, and a game in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in an overlapping manner is performed. Then, the fluctuation pattern set when the jackpot is won is made different depending on the selected jackpot type. Further, the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1) and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2) are different based on the total number of reserved special figures. It is configured so that a variation pattern can be selected.

  More specifically, the system is configured so that the larger the total number of special figure reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time selected when the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than the case where the total number of special figure reservations is short. The configuration is such that the larger the total number of special figure reservations is, the longer the fluctuation time selected when the player wins a jackpot disadvantageous to the player than the case where the total number of special figure reservations is short.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the control to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed in accordance with the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed. The content is configured to be different. Specifically, when the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern of 30 seconds or more, a process for discarding the special symbol variation is executed. If the variation pattern is less than 30 seconds, a process for interrupting the special symbol variation is executed.

  With this configuration, if the total number of special figure reservations is large, the special symbol fluctuation is discarded when a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is set, compared to the case where the total number of special figure reservations is small. When a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set, the special symbol change can be made difficult to discard (easy to interrupt). Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to continue the state where the total number of special figure reservations is large.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in the probable change 8 table 202g2, different fluctuations are performed based on the special symbol type, the result of the determination of the success or failure (the result of the selected type), and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations). A pattern is defined.

  More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit A", In the range of “0 to 3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range where the (total number of reserved special figures) is “4 to 7”, the long range of the variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 as the variation pattern. Stipulated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit B", and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 3”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as the fluctuation pattern. In the range of “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of “big hit C” and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is “0”. In the range of “−3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a very long variation with a variation time of 60 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of “number” from “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in association with a super short variation having a variation time of 10 seconds. .

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the determination is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is “0 to 3”. , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “4 to 6”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle variation having a variation time of 25 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total special figure reservation) In the range of “7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit D", and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 35 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit E", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “−3”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”) as the fluctuation pattern. ) Is "4 to 7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation having a variation time of 20 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbols to be reserved (the total number of special symbols to be reserved) is “0 to 7”. In other words, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the 8 tables for latent data 202g2, the special symbol type, the result of the determination of success / failure (the result of the selected type), the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) are displayed. A different variation pattern is defined based on this.

  More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit A", In the range of “0 to 4”, a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated as a variation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1. In the range of (total number of reserved special figures) “5 to 7”, the long range of 30 seconds as the fluctuation pattern is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Stipulated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit B", and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 4”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (summed special figure) In the range of “5 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit C", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figure held) is "0". In the range of “−4”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) ) Is "5 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of reserved special figures (total number of reserved special figures) is “0 to 6”. , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a middle variation having a variation time of 25 seconds is associated.

  Also, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of “big hit D”, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 4”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of “5 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit E", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “.about.4”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) ) Is "5 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbols held (the total number of special symbols held) is “0 to 3”. , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “4 to 6”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle variation with a variation time of 325 as a variation pattern. ) Is “7”, and the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in association with a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution is performed when the execution condition for executing the specific control (for example, suspension or discard) for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied (for example, at the time of executing the small hit game). The content of the specific control to be performed is switched according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. Then, the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed (the variation display mode set at the time of executing the special symbol variation) is switched to the variation display mode according to the content of the specific control. As a result, the switching content of the variation display mode can be changed according to the content of the special symbol variation being executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the switching condition for switching the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed to the specific variation display mode (variable display mode for forcibly stopping) according to the set game state. Are different in the easiness of establishment. Further, the easiness of establishment of the switching condition is changed according to the type of the special symbol being executed or the set jackpot type (the length of the selected change time is changed). Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting how the variable display mode is switched when the execution condition is satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, the easiness of establishment of the execution condition is configured to be different depending on the special symbol type, and specifically, a lottery result ( The probability of winning (small hits) is made different according to the special symbol type, and the length of the change time of the special symbol change set when the small hits is won is made different. As a result, the game result can be made to differ greatly depending on which special symbol type performs a change indicating which lottery result at which timing. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, a specific variation time is selected corresponding to each condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of fluctuation times that can be selected in this manner may be defined, and a fluctuation pattern of a different fluctuation time may be selected according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, in the present embodiment, the threshold value is set to a variation time of 30 seconds as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of threshold values may be set. Further, in the present embodiment, a variation time (for example, 28 seconds, 30 seconds) close to a threshold value set as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed is selected. Thereby, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect in the same effect mode can be executed. It should be noted that the difference in the fluctuation time (2 seconds) can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the fluctuation effect from the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, or setting the end timing of the fluctuation effect earlier than the end timing of the special symbol fluctuation. The difference period may be configured to display a still image (for example, an image displayed at the start of the variable effect or an image displayed at the end of the variable effect).

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf. The small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172 (a)) in that the small hit type is defined for the first special symbol, The difference is that the opening target that is opened in the game is changed, the point that the symbol confirmation time is changed, and the control that is performed for the special symbol change that is running is changed. is there. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The contents defined in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in a range of “0 to 89”, “small hit A8” is associated with the value. , “90-99” is associated with “small hit B8”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate at which "small hit A8" is selected at the time of the small hit winning is 90% (90/100), The rate at which the "small hit B8" is selected is 10% (10/100).

  When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game in which the small hit attacker (second attacker) 5650 is opened for 0.1 second is executed. Further, “0.1 second” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the second special symbol (the special symbol 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the currently executing second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the change in elapsed time of the currently executing second special symbol change is performed. Be executed. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON. ) Is executed to skip the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time). Then, upon the end of the small hitting game, the restart condition is satisfied (special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prohibit the remaining change time of the second special symbol change being executed from decreasing while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied). Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the second special symbol change that has been won is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed repeatedly. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since the process of measuring the change time of the special symbol change being executed is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be resumed. Therefore, the result of the already executed special symbol lottery can be reliably notified to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied triggered by the winning of the small hit, the processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol fluctuation during execution may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the first special symbol fluctuation may be interrupted after the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed. That is, even if the interruption condition is satisfied, the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation is continuously executed, and if the update process is performed until the preset variation time has elapsed, the interruption is performed. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, stop display of the special symbol change is not executed until the restart condition is satisfied. This eliminates the need to interrupt the updating process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when "small hitting A" is selected, the small hitting game opening target is a small hitting attacker (second attacker) 5650, and a small hitting game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball during the small hitting game is executed. .

  When "small hit B" is selected, the small hit game is executed with the same operation content as "small hit A" described above. Further, according to the variation state of the second special symbol being executed, either a process of interrupting the variation of the running special figure 2 or a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in a part of the case where a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control executed for the other special symbol variation being executed is changed to the state of the other special symbol variation ( (Change situation, setting situation). Specifically, when the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded). If the variation pattern has a variation time of less than 30 seconds, the control contents can be switched so as to interrupt the special symbol variation. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not to cancel the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed according to the fluctuation state of the special symbol fluctuation being executed, so that the timing of winning the small hit B8 is determined. The player can be watched at which timing.

  In the present embodiment, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation being executed, for example, it corresponds to a lottery result disadvantageous to the player. By simply defining the variation pattern table so that the variation time of the variation pattern becomes longer, it is possible to easily stop (discard) the special symbol variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player. The conditions used to determine the control content are not limited to this. For example, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution or whether the lottery result satisfies a specific condition is determined. The result of the control content may be determined based on Furthermore, the control content to be executed for the running first special symbol variation may be determined based on a combination of the running first special symbol variation and the lottery result of the small special winning second special symbol. .

  Next, the content of the small hit type corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) as the symbol type in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be described. "Small hit C8" is associated with the range of the value of the small hit type counter C5 from "0 to 79", and "Small hit D8" is associated with the range of "80 to 89". , “90-99” is associated with “small hit E8”. Since the range of values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate at which "small hit C8" is selected at the time of the small hit winning is 80% (80/100), The rate at which "small hit D8" is selected is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which "small hit E8" is selected is 10% (10/100).

  When "small hit C8" is selected, a small hit game in which the big hit attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Also, “0.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. Also, when the "small hit D8" is selected, the same small hit game as the above "small hit C8" is executed, and furthermore, depending on the variation state of the first special symbol being executed, Either a process of interrupting the change of the special figure 1 or a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. The content of the control process when the first special symbol change is interrupted or forcibly stopped based on the "small hit D8" is the target of the control process executed based on the "small hit B8". Since only the first symbol has been switched to the first special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the present embodiment is different from the above-described RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment in that a special variation flag 203ga is added, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special fluctuation flag 203ga is for indicating whether the special symbol fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set, and is used when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set. Set to on. In the present embodiment, when the small hit variation won for the specific small hit type is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation is interrupted according to the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed. It is configured to be able to switch between executing a process and executing a process of discarding (forcibly stopping). That is, in one special symbol lottery, for the other special symbol variation, the processing condition for switching the variation mode being executed to a variation mode different from the variation mode set when executing the other special symbol variation. Is established, the variation mode after the switching is made different according to the variation mode during execution.

  With this configuration, when the above-described processing condition is satisfied, the change mode to be switched to is determined based on the other special symbol change. Some games can be offered.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209 to FIG. 215, control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. The eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the first special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, and that a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected when a variation pattern is selected. Is added to the process of determining whether the variation pattern in which is set is selected, and when the special symbol variation winning the small hit is stopped and displayed, the process is executed for the other special symbol variation being executed. The difference is that a process for determining the process content is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the eighth embodiment, various control processes executed for the first special symbol will be described and illustrated while illustrating the characteristic processing contents of the eighth embodiment. This is also executed in the control processing of the corresponding second special symbol, but the detailed description using the drawings is omitted because the description is duplicated.

  First, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 8 (S386). The first special symbol big hit determination process 8 (S386) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) in that the current lottery result is obtained. When it is determined that it is not a jackpot (see S457 in FIG. 121), the special figure 1 deviation variation process 8 (S481) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 departure variation processing 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol big hit determination processing 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure variation process 8 (S481). In the special figure 1 departure variation process 8, when the first special symbol lottery has not been won (the departure has been won), a process for determining whether or not a small hit has been won is executed. Note that the detailed contents differ from the above-described special figure 2 deviation variation processing (see S1059 in FIG. 128) in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol. Are the same.

  In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing 8 (S481), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result acquired in the processing of S457 of the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small hit. It is determined (S485).

  If it is determined in the processing of S485 that the small hit has been won (S485: Yes), the small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S486), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S487). ) Then, a small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S488), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S485, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, the lottery is out (S485: No), the out-of-spec symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S485), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S481 in FIG. 210) executed as one processing of the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol (lottery) The small hit flag 203i is set to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the small hit, and the setting status of the small hit flag 203i at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol , It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small win.

  The small hit flag 203i used in the present embodiment includes a special figure 1 area indicating that the small hit has been won in the first special symbol lottery and a special figure 2 area indicating that the small hit has been won in the second special symbol lottery. When a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the flag in the special figure 1 area is set to ON, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, The flag of the special figure 2 area is set to ON. Thus, even if the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are duplicated and a small hit is won, the state can be easily stored.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) described above. , The difference between adding a special variation flag to ON after selecting a variation pattern, and the addition of a process for selecting a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning are different. Are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the processes of S551 to S555 that are the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 of FIG. 122) are executed, and thereafter, the current selection is made. It is determined whether the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). If it is determined that the variation time is 30 seconds or longer (S582: Yes), the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) is performed. The same processing from S556 to S559 is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S582: No), the processing of S583 is skipped, and the same S556 to S559 as the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 of FIG. 122). Is performed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S551 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S551: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing is executed (S581), and thereafter, the processing shifts to the processing of S553. Details of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S581) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581), the same processing content as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above is applied to the second special symbol. Is switched to the first special symbol.

  When the special figure 1 departure variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, when it is determined that the current lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S591: No), The processing having the same contents as S1377 to S1379 of the special figure 2 deviating variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S597 to S599), and thereafter, this processing To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S591 that the small hit is a small hit (S591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S592), and the small hit type is determined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The small hit type is selected with reference to the selection 8 table 202gf (S593). Next, the processing having the same contents as the processing in S1374 to S1376 of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S594 to S596). The process ends.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol change stop process 8 (S288) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol change stop processing 8 (S288). This first special symbol variation stop processing 8 (S288) determines that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON with respect to the first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 of FIG. 175). (S851; No), that is, the time saving update process 7 (refer to S882 in FIG. 175) executed when the first special symbol change to be stopped and changed this time is a shift change, 8 (S892) and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), a process of determining whether the second special symbol change is being executed is executed. (S891) In the case where the second special symbol change is not executed, the processing of S853 to S855 is skipped, and the stop of the jackpot change (start of the jackpot game) Zui and various flags, and the process of clearing the various counters (S870 in FIG. 175), differs in that to perform the add special variation flag 203ga processing (S893 in FIG. 213), but is otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 departure stop process 8 (S892) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure stop process 8 (S892). In the special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 (S892), the same processing as the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1584 of FIG. 181) is performed, and the processing target is changed from the second special symbol to the first special pattern. This is different in that it is switched to a special symbol and executed, and a small hitting process 8 (S1972) is executed instead of the small hitting process (see S1671 in FIG. 181). Description is omitted.

  Here, the small hit processing 8 (S1972) executed in the special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit processing 8 (S1972). The small hit processing 8 (S1972) differs from the small hit processing (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the above-described seventh embodiment in the content of the control processing executed according to the selected small hit type. They differ in the point. Specifically, when a specific small hit type (small hit B, D, E) is won, a process (interruption process, forced stop (discard) process) according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation being executed is performed. It differs in that it is configured to execute.

  When the small hit processing 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small hit type set for the current first special symbol change is read (S1682), and the read small hit type is "small hit A or small hit. It is determined whether it is "hit C" (S1981). If it is determined to be "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is in a special figure 2 change (second special design change) (S1684). When it is determined that FIG. 2 is changing (S1684: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special symbol change is interrupted (temporarily stopped) is set to ON (S1885), and the special figure 2 is set. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the temporary stop flag is turned on is set (S1686), and the process ends. In the process of S1684, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1981, when it is determined that the small hit is not “small hit A” or “small hit C” (S1981: No), it is next determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit E8”. (S1982), if it is determined to be "small hit E8" (S1982: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, the current state is in the probable change state (in the normal symbol high probability state). ) Is determined (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the probable change state (S1688: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not ON. When it is determined (S1689: No), that is, when it is determined that it is not the final change in the probable change state, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983). If it is determined that the special variation flag 203ga is not set to ON, that is, the variation pattern set to the second special symbol variation being executed is determined. If the variation pattern does not have a variation time of 30 seconds or more, or if the second special symbol variation has not been executed (S1983: No), the flow shifts to S1684 described above. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the processing of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the current time is not in the probable change state (S1688: No), or the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the processing of S1689. If it is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the final change in the probable change state (S1689: Yes), the process skips step S1690 and shifts to the above-described step S1684. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1983 that the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983: Yes), the flow shifts to the processing of S1692. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S1982 that it is not “small hit E8”, that is, if it is determined that it is “small hit B8” or “small hit D8” (S1982: No), the processing of S1688 to S1690 is performed. And skips to step S1983.

  In the processing of S1692 to S1697, the same processing as the small hit processing (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the above-described seventh embodiment is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and thereafter. Then, the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to off (S1184), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed (when the special process is performed for the special symbol variation being executed), the content of the special symbol variation being executed is described. Is configured to determine the processing content according to. More specifically, at the point in time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation being executed If the result of the determination is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and the specific variation is discarded. If it is other than a pattern, the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted. That is, when the specific condition for executing the special process for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied, the processing content of the special process is determined with reference to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, the content of the special processing determined when the specific condition is satisfied may be changed according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if the specific condition is satisfied, only “interruption” is determined as the special processing, and when the certain change state is set, the above-described eighth execution is performed. As in the embodiment, “interruption” or “discard” may be set. By making the content of the determination of the special processing different depending on the game state set in this way, it is possible to give a variety of playability in each game state.

  Further, the content of the special processing to be determined may be made different according to the type of the special symbol in which the specific condition is satisfied. For example, the second special symbol may be different from the case where the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol. May be configured so that “discard” is more easily determined when the specific condition is satisfied. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is less likely to be satisfied than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small hit), or the specific condition is satisfied. In the case, the condition for determining “discard” (in the eighth embodiment, the variation pattern being executed is 30 seconds or more) is determined by the second special symbol when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol. It may be configured so as to be a condition that is more difficult to be satisfied than when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the variation pattern during execution is 32 seconds or more). Thereby, the content of the special processing can be made different depending on which special symbol type meets the specific condition, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the specific condition for executing the special process for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied, the processing content of the special process is determined with reference to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed is a specific lottery result, the special symbol change being executed is not discarded. In the case where the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, the condition for determining “discard” is set (in the eighth embodiment, the change pattern during the execution is changed). (30 seconds or more). With this configuration, the ease of “discarding” can be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that a game suitable for the design concept can be easily executed.

  Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation (big hit variation) that has won the big hit, the big hit type in which the big hit game (for example, the probability change big hit) advantageous to the player is executed, and the disadvantage to the player. A different big hitting game (for example, a normal big hit) is executed so that a different changing pattern is selected according to the disadvantageous jackpot type. Further, the changing pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to be different.

  More specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is large, the fluctuation time in which the fluctuation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type is smaller than when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is small. A variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is large, a jackpot game (for example, a probable big hit) advantageous to the player is more easily executed than when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is small ( A jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player can be made difficult to be executed (it is easy to be discarded by the small hit winning). In other words, the proportion of the probability jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting an advantageous jackpot game to be executed, thereby improving the operation of the game.

  Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a small hit is won in any one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. I have. By configuring in this way, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is won, it is possible to abandon the jackpot win by the other small hit lottery, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, it is possible to surely make the ratio occupied by the jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot vary.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of the special process (interruption or discard) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is set as the other special symbol variation. Although the condition that is satisfied when a specific small hit is won in the fluctuation (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) is shown, an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition may be provided in addition to this. May be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters the entrance of the pachinko machine, or when the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise occurs and the power supply is temporarily stopped). May be configured so that the specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the state is interrupted. Further, a game method executed by a player is an illegal game method (for example, a magnetic sensor for detecting a magnetic force is provided, and a game method when the magnetic sensor detects a magnetic force, and an impact detection for detecting an impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided so that the specific condition is satisfied when the impact detection sensor detects a game method when a predetermined amount of impact is detected.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol change executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (when the probable change state and the time saving state are set) is discarded (forced stop), In addition, the configuration is such that the number of time savings (the number of probable changes) is not added in accordance with the discarded special symbol change. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured such that when the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set. When the special symbol change executed during the probable change state is discarded (forcibly stopped), the number of time savings (probable change number) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a display mode (for example, as shown in FIG. The value of (a) displayed in the display area HR2) is also configured so that the display mode is not updated in synchronization with the number of times of saving time. Therefore, it is possible to easily inform the player that the special symbol change has been discarded without updating the number of times saved. In this case, for example, the pachinko machine is configured so that the display mode for indicating the number of time savings (the number of times of change) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is updated at the start timing of the special symbol change. In the case of the machine 10, the display mode is restored based on the fact that the special symbol variation has been discarded (for example, when the remaining number of hours saved is displayed, the addition is performed, and when the elapsed number of hours saved is displayed, It is only necessary to execute the effect of subtracting (if any).

  Further, a plurality of time saving end conditions (for example, the first special symbol) as transition conditions for shifting from the probable state to the latent state (end conditions (hour saving end conditions) for ending the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of changes and the second special symbol change reaches 100, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol change is executed five times) In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays, on a display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an end condition most easily satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions (for example, corresponding to the second special symbol change five times). In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to inform the player of the game content in an easily understandable manner by displaying only “5”), the first special symbol change is executed immediately after the probable change state is set. Also, the third symbol display device Display mode of "5" displayed at the first display surface is configured not updated. When the first special symbol change is executed 95 times after the first special symbol change is executed 95 times after the probable change state is set (when the 96th first special symbol change is executed) The display control for updating the display of “5” displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to “4” is executed. In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the number of hours saved displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the special symbol type in which the special symbol change is performed during the probable change (time saving) state. This makes it possible to notify the player of the period until the probable change state ends in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ninth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a hold storage function is also provided for the second special symbol, and the effect (RUSH) performed during the latent state (RUSH game). There is a great difference in that the effect mode of “medium effect” is changed, and that the variation patterns of the big hit type, the small hit type, and the normal symbol are different.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the special symbol reservation number for indicating the number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see dm1a in FIG. 161). In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are some gaming machines which display the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special figures on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in order to easily show the number of reserved special figures to the player. . Further, a pre-reading process (prior discrimination process) is performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, and the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) is changed in a display mode of a corresponding reserved symbol (for example, a reserved symbol). There is a type that executes a hold change effect that informs the player by changing the color or effect of the game or changing the design of the hold symbol).

  However, in the above-described pending change effect, the number of reserved symbols to be subjected to the pending change effect is determined according to the number of acquired special figure reserved balls. It is more difficult to execute the change-on-hold effect than when the number of the reserved balls is large. In other words, as long as the effect using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed in accordance with the number of acquired special figure reserved balls, according to the number of acquired special figure reserved balls, Since the effect of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) for notifying the player of the pre-reading result (preliminary judgment result) is variable, for example, for a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls However, there is a problem that the player is dissatisfied with not being able to acquire many special figure reserved balls and is dissatisfied that the effect of the pre-reading effect is reduced, which lowers the willingness to play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls acquired is determined according to the result of the pre-reading processing (prior discrimination processing) executed for the special symbol winning information stored and stored. Regardless, it is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) that varies the number of specific symbols (exclusive icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). Thereby, even if the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same prefetching effect as in the case where the acquired number of special figure reserved balls is the upper limit, according to the prefetching result. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a prefetching effect with a high effect even to a player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is set to the number of special figure reserved balls that can be reserved (the storage of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). ) Is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 for indicating the acquired number of special figure reserved balls (it is difficult for the player to determine). ). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special figure holding balls (the number of stored second special symbols mainly executed during the latent state) is as follows. It can make you think it is a reserved symbol to show. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness of the player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls to play.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which a latent state is set), a special figure holding ball capable of holding and storing the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect. The number (the number of stored second special symbols mainly executed during the latent state) is set to be larger than the upper limit value (4). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to a player who has an illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is a reserved symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) executed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the number of times of opening of the attacker that is opened in the small hit game is determined. The number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the result of the determination. The number of times the attacker is released in one small hit game is made different depending on the type of the small hit that has been won. Furthermore, as part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker releasing operation as that of the small hit game is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, if at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, the fact that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game is notified in advance. Therefore, each time the number of the specific symbols is changed, the player watches the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Production contents in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 216 to FIG. 219, characteristic effect contents among effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. Specifically, the contents of the icon effect for variably displaying a specific symbol executed during the latent state (during the RUSH game) will be described. This icon effect is an effect in which the number of specific symbols (icons) is variably displayed based on a pre-read result with respect to the reserved memory of the acquired second special symbol (special symbol 2 reservation).

  First, with reference to FIG. 216 (a), the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the latent state (RUSH game) is set immediately after will be described. FIG. 216 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during an ending period in a jackpot game before entering a RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the latent state is not set, and a win is made in a latent jackpot (a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game), , The effect mode displayed during the ending period is made different between the time of the first hit when entering the RUSH game and the case where the potential hit is won in the state where the latent state is set. .

  As shown in FIG. 216 (a), the display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and the display area HR70 is formed in the center during the ending period at the time of the first hit of the RUSH game. Then, in the display area HR70, an icon 871 imitating carrot and acquired number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216 (a)) are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "RUSH continues as long as there is an icon" are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when a RUSH game is executed, an icon 871 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the game executed during the RUSH game based on the number of displayed icons 871 and the display mode. Is suggested to the player. This icon 871 is configured so that the number of display and the display mode are variably set based on information (lottery information, pre-reading information) on the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment in which the icon effect is executed during the RUSH game, during the ending period of the jackpot game which triggers the entry into the RUSH game, the icon effect initial shown in FIG. The display screen is displayed, and four icons 871 are displayed irrespective of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at that time and the result of the pre-reading. Accordingly, no matter what state the RUSH game is executed, the effect of the icon effect at the time of entering the RUSH game can be made the same, so that the effect of the icon effect at the time when the RUSH game is started can be changed. It is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.

  In the present embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the specific start condition is satisfied at the start of the icon effect, for example, In the case where there is a jackpot advantageous to the player in the prefetch result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol (the latent jackpot whose latent state is set again), the number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon effect May be configured to be a number other than four. In this case, it is preferable to display a smaller number of icons 871 than four.

  When the RUSH game is started, an icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a hold icon 873 in the display area HR71, and the effect using the hold icon 873 and a character 811 imitating a rabbit is mainly displayed. This is executed in the area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), in the present embodiment, the upper limit display number of the hold icon 873 is configured to be the same as the hold upper limit number of the second special symbol in which the lottery is mainly executed during the RUSH game. Therefore, a maximum of four hold icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

  As for the reserved icons 873a to 873d, a first reserved icon 873a, a second reserved icon 873b, a third reserved icon 873c, and a fourth reserved icon 873d are displayed in order from the top of the display area HR, and the production is started in order from the first reserved icon 873a. Used. Then, when the first holding icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 for use in the effect, the remaining second holding icons 873b to 873d are shifted to the holding icons in the previous order, respectively. You. When a new hold icon is acquired, additional icons are displayed in the order following the already displayed hold icons.

  In the present embodiment, the small hitting game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is prefetched, and the number of pending icons is determined based on the prefetching result. ing. Then, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hitting game is made different depending on the small hitting type that has been won. A big hit game in which the attacker 1650 is opened a predetermined number of times is executed.

  That is, for example, even when the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is two, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released is four times as a result of pre-reading (prior discrimination) for the two special figure 2 reserved balls. In this case, a configuration is made such that four icons can be set as the number of display of the hold icons. With this configuration, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be determined irrespective of the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls, so that a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls cannot be acquired. Even if it is, it is possible to execute an entertaining icon effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (a), among the icon effects during the RUSH game, the effect contents that consume the reserved icon will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hitting game is executed during a RUSH game. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the small hit game is executed, the digestion effect in which the character 811 eats the hold icon 873a is executed, and the prize ball display mode indicating the prize ball acquired in the small hit game. 874 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217 (a), a prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in a display mode of “+15” indicating that one ball has been won in the second attacker 1650 and that there have been 15 prize balls. I have. In addition, the character "I'll give you" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and informs the player that the effect that the character 811 eats the hold icon 873a will be executed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Note that in FIG. 217 (a), the display screen displayed during the digestion effect has been described with an example in which a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 has been opened one time is executed. Although the number of hold icons 873a to be taken is one, for example, when a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice is executed, a digestive effect in which the character 811 eats two hold icons is executed. Is done. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in some small hit games, or in some big hit games, a hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened a plurality of times is executed. The configuration is such that the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is larger in the big hit game than in the small hit game.

  That is, as the effect shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the effect in which the character 811 eats a plurality of hold icons is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be increased. With such a configuration, among the icon effects performed during the RUSH game, the player can be interested in the contents of the effect of consuming the reserved icons (decreasing the number of reserved icons).

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in the small hitting game and the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in the big hitting game are configured to be the same. ing. Therefore, by grasping the contents of the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the hit game, it is possible to prevent the type of the current hit game (small hit game, big hit game) from being determined by the player. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the number of the reserve icons 873 displayed is the number corresponding to the number of times the character 811 eats in one digestion effect, that is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hitting game being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect in which the hold icon used for the digestion effect remains at the end timing of the digestion effect, that is, the number of hold times larger than the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hit game is released. A digestive effect using icons may be executed. With this configuration, the number of reserved icons displayed at the start of the digestive effect can be increased, so that the player can be more expected to win the jackpot.

  In addition, during the execution period of the digestion effect, the number of reserved icons used in the digestion effect may be configured to be variable. Thereby, since the number of the reserved icons can be increased at any timing, even if the icon production with a low jackpot expectation is executed, the number of the reserved icons used for the production during the digestive production period is reduced. The game can be performed while expecting the game to increase during the digestion effect period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), description will be given on the effect contents of the acquired effect indicating that a plurality of pending icons have been acquired as the icon effect executed during the RUSH game. FIG. 217 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed as an acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of hold icons have been acquired, as an icon effect performed during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, as in the effect (see FIG. 162 (b)) performed during the RUSH game of the seventh embodiment described above, an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, an acquisition effect in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of hold icons are displayed from the treasure box is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (b), a treasure chest 812 displayed during the RUSH game opens, and an icon 871 imitating carrot and acquired number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217 (b)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Is displayed. Then, the character “get ginseng” is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and an effect is performed to notify the player that the number of displayed hold icons has increased.

  As described above, in the icon effect of the present embodiment, while the RUSH game continues, the display number of the hold icon is controlled so that the hold icon does not become 0, and acquisition for increasing the hold icon at various timings is performed. The effect is configured to be executable. Then, the configuration is such that the greater the number of icons 871 acquired in one acquisition effect, the more the game advantageous to the player is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be increased at a timing different from the timing of increasing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218 (a), the content of the continuous effect performed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 218 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed during a continuous effect performed during the icon effect. In this embodiment, a continuous effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the change of the second special symbol. This continuous effect includes a pattern that is executed during a single second special symbol change period and a pattern that is executed across a plurality of second special symbol changes. An effect using all the icons is executed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a continuous effect can be executed when four (upper limit) icons are displayed, and when the continuous effect is executed, FIG. ), The four reserved icons (873a to 873d) displayed in the display area HR71 are displayed in a line in the center of the main display area Dm, and the character 811 eats the first reserved icon 873a in order. Is executed. After the last hold icon 873d, a V icon 873y indicating a jackpot winning (a jackpot winning of a jackpot type advantageous to the player) is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Eat carrots! Treasure may come out from inside" are displayed to indicate to the player the effect of the continuous effect.

  In other words, when the continuous effect is executed, it means that all the reserved icons are consumed and the jackpot is won, or the reserved icons are not completely consumed and the RUSH game is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the V icon 873z may be displayed from among the pending icons being consumed in a state where the continuous production is being performed and the last pending icon is consumed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 218 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the effect when the V icon 873z is displayed during the continuous effect. FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the V icon 873z is obtained without exhausting all the reserved icons during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), an effect of finding the V icon 873z from among the third reservation icons 873c is performed while the third reservation icon 873c is being digested (during eating). . In this case, since the fourth holding icon 873d is not digested, the fourth holding icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71. If the jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game will be executed with the hold icon being displayed. At this point, the latent state (RUSH game) is executed again after the jackpot game ends. It will inform the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the effect in which a special icon different from a normal hold icon is displayed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a special icon is displayed during an icon effect. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved icons that can be displayed is calculated based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 calculated in advance. I have.

  Then, when the number of holdable icons that can be displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, four or more), that is, when the display upper limit number is exceeded, a special icon is displayed. Then, when the second special symbol change during execution or the prefetching result of the second special symbol includes a jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player, the number of displayable reserved icons is likely to exceed a predetermined number. are doing.

  As shown in FIG. 219, when the number of displayable reserve icons is calculated to be a predetermined number or more, a special icon effect in which a special icon 873x imitating a luxurious carrot appears in the treasure chest 812 in the acquired effect is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “lucky, SP ginseng get” are displayed to indicate to the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In the present embodiment, the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is defined as four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. When the number exceeds the number, the special icon is displayed so that the effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot to the player is performed while maintaining the upper limit of the number of icons simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of hold icons that can be displayed exceeds four (when a special condition is satisfied), the upper limit number of hold icons that can be simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71 is set. You may comprise so that it may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of a 2nd special symbol. With this configuration, the player who has recognized that the holding icon indicates the number of holding balls of the second special symbol can receive a number of holdings exceeding the upper limit of the number of holding balls of the second special symbol. By displaying the icon, an unexpected effect can be performed. Furthermore, when the number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed, it is possible to increase the expectation of the jackpot winning, so that an effect with a high jackpot expectation is unexpectedly provided to the player. It can be performed using sexual effects.

  The various effect screens executed during the characteristic effect (icon effect) executed in the ninth embodiment have been described above with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219, but are not limited thereto. For example, in the state where the RUSH game is executed, if the number of reserved special figure 2 becomes 0, one or more reserved icons are displayed, and the reserved icon is not related to the result of the special symbol lottery. The pseudo-variation effect using the icon may be configured to be executed, or the pending icon may be hidden.

  In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold icon, a display mode imitating a normal ginseng (see the hold icon 873a in FIG. 217 (a)) and a display mode imitating a luxurious carrot (the special icon 873x) can be set, but other display modes may be settable. For example, the first display mode corresponding to either the small hit or the big hit and the big hit can be set. The corresponding second display mode and the third display mode corresponding to a specific jackpot may be settable. Further, in order to additionally display a large number of reserved icons at once, a reduction effect of digesting a large number of reserved icons at once may be executed.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 223. In the ninth embodiment, a part of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a part of the RAM 223 are different from the above-described seventh embodiment. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 9 table 202hd. The big hit type selection 9 table 202hd is different from the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the seventh embodiment described above in that the big hit type (big hit) associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1). The target of release of the jackpot operation specified for A to C) is different from the value of the hour-saving counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot game, and is associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2). The difference is that the types of the jackpot types are increased, and the others are the same.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", "Big hit A9" is associated and defined. The “big hit A9” is the same big hit type as the “big hit A7” in the above-described seventh embodiment, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, “big hit B9” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “35 to 79”. The "big hit B9" is different from the "big hit B7" of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and the other points are the same.

  Specifically, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state, 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and when the "big hit B9" is won in the probable change state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is 50 Is set. On the other hand, when "big hit 9" is won in the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  That is, if the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state or the probable change state, the state shifts to the relatively advantageous probable change state. On the other hand, when "big hit B9" is won in the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Also, even when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is over, the player who wins the "big hit B9" in the stable change state is more advantageous to the player than the case where the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state. In order to set the probability change state, the number of times of the probability change is smaller in the case of winning in the probability change state than in the case of winning in the normal state.

  With such a configuration, by shifting from the normal state, which is the initial game state, to a different game state, the game state can be easily shifted to the most advantageous game state for the player. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game aiming at the most advantageous game state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, “big hit C9” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99”. The "big hit C9" is different from the "big hit C7" of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and the rest is the same.

  Specifically, when the "big hit C9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, that is, when the "big hit C9" is won, regardless of the set gaming state, the time-saving counter 203h The value is set to 0. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) most advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is the most advantageous big hit type for the player. In the state where the latent state is set, the value of “big hit B9” and “big hit C9” are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the rate of transition to the gaming state (latent state) most advantageous to the player is determined. The normal state and the probable state are set differently from the case where the latent state is set. The normal state and the probable state are set to 20%, and the latent state is set to 65%. It is configured so that the latent state is set after the big hit game ends.

  Further, as described above, the normal state in which the transition rate to the latent state is set to 20% and the probable change state are both configured to transit to the probable state at a rate of 45%. It is configured such that the degree of expectation for transition to the latent state in the case of transition to is different. With such a configuration, the transition rate at which the game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state (the latent state) for the player after the end of the jackpot game for a plurality of game states as the game state set at the time of the jackpot win. Even if they are set to be the same, the degree of expectation of shifting to the latent state can be different for each game state set at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery will be described. As shown in FIG. 220, in the ninth embodiment, four types of jackpots (jackpots D9 to G9) associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2) are defined, and according to the selected jackpot type. The jackpot game opening operation contents are different.

  Specifically, as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 34”, and “big hit D9” is associated with the big hit type. It is stipulated. This “big hit D9” is a big hit type in which the same content as “big hit D7” of the seventh embodiment is defined. "Big hit E9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "35 to 69". The "big hit E9" is a type of big hit (8 round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds and the special symbol is set to the special change state after the end of the big hit. Note that, when the "big hit E9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set gaming state. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) most advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is the most advantageous big hit type for the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E9" is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E9" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  "Big hit F9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89". In the "big hit F9", the number of rounds of the big hit is 9 rounds. In the first round (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the second round (R) to the ninth round (R). Up to this point, a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, there is a jackpot of a type set to the special symbol probable state (9 round probable jackpot). Note that, when the "big hit F9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  As described above, when the "big hit F9" is won, the same opening operation as in the small hit game is executed as the first round. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated in addition to the jackpot winning. Thereby, in the icon effect that determines the number of hold icons to be displayed based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been released (the number of times the small hit game has been released), a pattern that suggests a small hit and a pattern that suggests a big hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In the "big hit F9", nine rounds of big hit games are defined so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is released is the same as the above "big hit E9". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type selected based on the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened.

  In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as that of the small hit game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual big hit game is executed in the second and subsequent rounds (R). For example, even if the "big hit F9" is won, the jackpot game of 8 rounds (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 is opened for 1.5 seconds in the first round (R). An opening operation and an opening operation for opening the first attacker 650 for 28.5 seconds may be executed. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, and therefore, for example, a notification unit (for example, an LED) that notifies the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. When means for informing the number of rounds by lighting of the lamp) is provided, the number of types of rounds to be informed by the informing means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

  "Big hit G9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". In the “big hit G9”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 11 rounds. In the first to third rounds (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the 11th round (R) from the fourth round (R). The jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed until the eyes are reached, and after the end of the jackpot, there is a jackpot of the type set to the special change state of the special symbol (11 round certain change jackpot). Note that when the "big hit G9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  As described above, when the "big hit G9" is won, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed as the first to third rounds. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened three times is calculated in addition to the jackpot winning. Thereby, in the icon effect that determines the number of hold icons to be displayed based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been released (the number of times the small hit game has been released), a pattern that suggests a small hit and a pattern that suggests a big hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, since the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated three times as a result of one lottery of the second special symbol lottery, the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 even if the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is small. Can be calculated a lot, and the effect style of the icon effect can be diversified. In the "big hit G9", the eleventh round big hit game is defined so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is released is the same as the above "big hit E9". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type selected based on the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened.

  In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed in the first to third rounds (R), and the actual big hit game is executed in the fourth and subsequent rounds (R). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the "big hit G9" is won, the big hit game of the 8th round (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 in the first round (R) is executed. May be configured to execute an opening operation for opening the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds after the opening operation for opening the first attacker for 1.5 seconds is performed three times. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, and therefore, for example, a notification unit (for example, an LED) that notifies the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. When means for informing the number of rounds by lighting of the lamp) is provided, the number of types of rounds to be informed by the informing means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff of the seventh embodiment in that the types of the small hit types are increased, Change the content of the small hit operation specified for the small hit type (opening content of the small hit game) and the processing content for the first special symbol fluctuation executed when the small hit game is executed And the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  The small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table referred to when selecting the small hit type after the small hit winning in the special symbol lottery as in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff described above. It is defined that four types of small hits, "small hit A9" to "small hit D9", are selected in accordance with the value of the small hit type counter C5.

  When a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the small hit operation content and the processing content for the special symbol change being executed can be made different depending on the selected small hit type. In the present embodiment, the interruption process is executed for the special symbol change being executed, regardless of which small hit type is selected. This interruption process is a process of temporarily interrupting the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed (for example, until the small hitting game ends). This interruption processing is the same as that in the above-described seventh embodiment, so that the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The content defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 59”, “small hit A9” is associated with the value. , "60-79" is associated with "small hit B9", "80-89" is associated with "small hit C9", and "90-99" is assigned. Is associated with “small hit D9”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from “0 to 99”, the rate of selecting “small hit A9” at the time of the small hit winning is 60% (60/100), The rate at which "small hit B9" is selected is 20% (20/100), the rate at which "small hit C9" is selected is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which "small hit D9" is selected is 10%. (10/100).

  When "small hit A9" is selected, a small hit game in which the variable winning device (first attacker 650) is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed, and when "small hit B9" is selected, the right variable winning is selected. A small hit game in which the device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds is executed, and when “small hit C9” is selected, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds. The small hit game to be executed twice is executed, and when “small hit C9” is selected, the small hit game to execute the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 for 0.5 seconds three times is executed. It is stipulated that

  That is, in the present embodiment, according to the small hit type selected when the small hit is won, the small hit game that opens the first attacker 650 that is mainly opened during the big hit game, and the small hit game that is mainly performed during the small hit game And a small hitting game in which the second attacker 2650 to be opened is opened. With this configuration, the jackpot game was executed immediately after the small jackpot game was executed? Can be made to remind the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where the hold icon is displayed in the latent state, the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game. Icon effect is executed. Therefore, if "small hit A" is won in a state where the hold icon is displayed, it is possible to cause the player to feel delighted that an advantageous big hit game is executed when the first attacker 650 is opened.

  When “small hit B9” to “small hit D9” is selected, a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened is executed, but the second attacker is selected for each selected small hit type. The number of times of opening 1650 is different. That is, the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 calculated for one special symbol lottery can be made different. Thereby, when calculating the display number of the reserved icons in the icon effect, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be largely deviated from the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and thus the number of small hits. Become. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the number of reserved icons determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released without synchronizing with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  In the present embodiment, a small hitting game in which either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 is opened according to the selected small hitting type is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in one small hitting game, an opening operation for sequentially opening the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 may be set. Thereby, the opening operation performed as one small hitting game can make the player think that a plurality of small hitting games are continuously performed. Therefore, the relationship between one special symbol lottery and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be made more difficult to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221 (b), the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be described. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the ordinary figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg is different from the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment in the variation of the ordinary symbol selected during the latent state. The difference is that the pattern is the same as during the normal state, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  As shown in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in the present embodiment, during the probable change state, the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the right electric auditors product 164 as in the seventh embodiment. are doing. On the other hand, the ball fired by the right-handed game during the latent state is configured to be harder to enter the right electric combination 164 than in the above-described seventh embodiment. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, even in the latent state, the ball is inserted into the right electric accessory 164 so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily increased, whereas the gaming ability is increased. In the ninth embodiment, the same variation pattern as that in the normal state is selected because the game does not have such a playability.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), in the ninth embodiment, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the above-described seventh embodiment stores an icon display number selection table 222ha, a continuous effect selection table 222hb, Are provided, and are otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display number of the hold icon displayed in the icon effect described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and is a non-display information storage area 223hb. And the number of display of the hold icon based on the information on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened calculated based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110 and the acquired special figure 2 number of hold. Is stipulated.

  Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), the number of icons that can be selected (the number of reserved icons displayed) is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 reserved number (special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c). Value) and the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb, the number of icons to be displayed is defined.

  Specifically, when the number of reserved special maps 2 is “1” and the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “5 (special)” is defined as the number of displayed icons. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is “1”, the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb does not become “6” or more, and the corresponding value is not defined.

  When the number of reserved special figure 2 is “2” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 2” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. When the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “1 to 4” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed, and the icon display number is stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb. When the value is "6 to", "5 (*)" is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is “3” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 3” is defined as the icon display number, When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “2 to 4” is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is In the case of “6”, “4” is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is “4” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 4” is defined as the number of displayed icons. When the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “3 to 4” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed, and the icon display number is stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb. When the value is “6 to”, “4” is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  Here, when the number of displayed icons is “5 (special)”, the icon display number larger than “4”, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls, is selected. In the embodiment, since the upper limit display number of the reserved icon is “4”, the special icon for indicating that the selected icon display number has exceeded “4” which is the upper limit number of the reserved figure 2 reserved balls (FIG. 219 special icon 873x) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the difference between the number of special figure 2 reserved spheres and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb increases, that is, as a prefetch result of one special figure 2 reserved. The configuration is such that the more the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated, the more easily the special icon is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that gives a sense of expectation to the player even in a situation where the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is small.

  On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large (for example, three or four), the execution is performed when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small because the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to be prefetched increases. It is more likely that the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 will be calculated a plurality of times as a prefetch result of one special figure 2 reservation than the prefetch result to be performed. (4) is configured such that “4” is easily set without setting “5 (special)” as the number of icons to be displayed. Then, when the number of displayed icons is “4”, the configuration is such that a continuous effect described later is easily executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a special icon is frequently displayed in a state where the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is large.

  Further, even if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small (for example, 2), the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is large as a pre-read result, that is, a small hit C9 or a small hit D9 (FIG. 221 (a)). ) Or the jackpot G9 (see FIG. 220) is selected so that the number of icons to be displayed is larger than the number of special figure 2 reserved balls.

  On the other hand, even when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large, when the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is small as a pre-read result, that is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, or when the small hit A9 ( If the player has won the jackpot D9 or the jackpot E9 (see FIG. 220), the number of icons displayed is smaller than the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (see FIG. 221 (a)). It is configured to:

  With this configuration, the display number of the reserved icons used for the icon effect can be determined irrespective of the actual number of the special figure 2 reserved balls. A read-ahead effect can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball number) is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved icon is displayed to the player. Special figure 2 It is configured to be able to execute an interesting look-ahead effect regardless of the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls, assuming that it is a reserved symbol to indicate the number of reserved balls. Instead, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a reserved icon used for icon effects and a reserved symbol indicating the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the player can grasp the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the number of displayed reserve icons, for example, if many reserved icons are displayed while the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls is small, We can make you think you won the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type (the jackpot F9 or the jackpot G9) for which the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 is calculated is won, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, all jackpots that can be predicted based on the number of displayed hold icons are jackpots for which the latent state is set. Therefore, since the prediction based on the effect mode of the icon effect (display of the holding icon) is the prediction of the jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player, the player may be more interested in the prediction than the prediction including the jackpot winning which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot winning in which the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 is not calculated, that is, when a jackpot (jackpot D9, jackpot E9) in which the second attacker 1650 is not opened during the jackpot game is executed, It is configured such that the rate at which the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game is 50%. Therefore, even if a large jackpot is won in a case where the icon presentation is in a presentation mode in which the jackpot win cannot be predicted (for example, a state in which the number of displayed icons is small), the latent state after the jackpot game ends. Can leave the possibility to be set. In this case, before the execution of the jackpot game, an effect for invoking whether or not the hold icon is completely consumed is executed. If at least one of the hold icons is displayed at the age of the jackpot game being executed, the jackpot is played. It is configured to notify that the latent state is set after the game is over (RUSH game is continued).

  As described above, by using the hold icons displayed in the icon effect for various purposes, more various effects can be executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. The continuous effect selection table 222hb is a data table that is referred to when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous effect described above with reference to FIG. 218. In the icon effect, the display number of the hold icon is four. It is referred to when the second special symbol change is started in the state. In the continuous effect selection table 222hb, whether or not a continuous effect is to be executed is defined based on winning information (special figure 2 winning information) on the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

  Here, the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the continuous effect selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223 (b), in the continuous effect selection table 222hb, among the special figure 2 winning information, the winning information of the execution area (the winning information used in the second special symbol lottery this time) and the information in the hold The execution status is defined based on the winning information of the (hold area), the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon counter 223hc, and the value of the displayed icon counter 223hc is 4 That is, it is defined that the continuous effect can be selected only when four hold icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, if the winning information included in the execution area is a big hit, that is, if the second special symbol change executed this time is a big hit change, if the big hit type is “big hit F9, big hit G9”, In the case where the execution of the continuous effect A (execution A) is specified and the other jackpot types are “big hit D9 and big hit E9”, the range of the obtained effect counter 223f is continuously in the range of “0 to 89”. The non-execution of the effect is associated, and the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B) is associated and defined in the range of “90 to 99”. If the execution area includes the winning information related to the jackpot winning, the jackpot game is executed after the second special symbol change, so that the winning area stored in the holding area is not considered and the continuous winning game is continuously performed. Whether or not the performance is performed is specified.

  Here, in the continuous production of the pattern that finally wins the jackpot, as the production result of the continuous production, the first result in which all the reserved icons are digested to get the V icon 873y, and the V icon in which all the reserved icons are not digested, A determination is made as to which of the second result for obtaining 873z is an effect result. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot to be executed in this continuous production is a probability-variable jackpot (jackpot E9 to G9). The case) sets a first result for digesting all the holding icons, and if it is determined that the winning is a jackpot, a lottery (result) for determining whether to set the first result or the second result. Selection lottery), and the type of the effect result is set based on the result of the selection lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to surely prevent a situation in which the latent state is not set after the end of the jackpot game even though the jackpot game is executed with the hold icon remaining. it can.

  In addition, even if the winning is achieved in the probability change jackpot (execution A), since the first result can be set as the production result of the continuous production, for example, the continuous production in which the V icon 873y is obtained. Even if is executed, the player can play the game while having expectations to the end. In addition, if the jackpot game corresponding to the probability change jackpot is executed in a state where all the hold icons have been consumed, the hold icon is displayed until the jackpot game ends when the predetermined occurrence condition is satisfied during the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute an effect to be displayed.For example, when an operation effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 during a jackpot game is executed, and the effect result of the operation effect is a predetermined effect result, It is preferable that the generation condition be satisfied.

  With this configuration, a player who is playing a big hit game can be motivated to play the game in order to quickly grasp the game state set after the big hit game ends. Further, the method of establishing the occurrence condition is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of balls can be won by the variable ball-in means (first attacker 650 or second attacker 1650) that is opened during the jackpot game. May be set, or an occurrence condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls are thrown into a different ball-entering device that is different from the variable ball-entering device that is opened during the jackpot game.

  Returning to FIG. 223 (b), the description will be continued. If the execution area of the special map 2 winning information includes winning information indicating a small hit winning, and the winning information is “small hit B9” to “small hitting D9”, “big hit E” is set in the hold, When there is winning information indicating one of the jackpot types “big hit F” and “big hit G”, the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B) is associated with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of “0 to 69”. The non-execution of the continuous effect is defined in association with the range of “70 to 99”. In addition, if there is no winning information indicating any of the jackpot types of “big hit E”, “big hit F”, and “big hit G” in the hold, the value of the effect counter 223f is continuously in the range of “0 to 69”. The non-execution of the effect is associated with the execution (execution C) of the continuous effect C in the range of “70 to 99”. Also, in the execution area of the special map 2 winning information, winning information indicating the small hit winning is included, and when the winning information is “small winning A9”, regardless of the winning information stored in the holding area. The non-execution of the continuous production is specified.

  When the execution area of the special map 2 winning information includes winning information indicating a winning, the winning information indicating any of the big hit types of “big hit E”, “big hit F”, and “big hit G” in the hold. When there is no winning information indicating any of the big hit types of “big hit E”, “big hit F”, and “big hit G” in the hold, Non-execution of the production is specified.

  As described above, when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol executed this time and the pre-read result of the second special symbol stored and stored (stored in the reserved area) (Winning information), it is possible to execute a continuous production with a high jackpot expectation. Therefore, after grasping that the jackpot is won at the time when the continuous production is executed, it is possible to make the continuous production look at the continuous production while watching whether the production result is the first result or the second result. Because it is possible, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect is executed only when four hold icons are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the larger the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls, the more easily four reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four reserved icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be enhanced. In addition, even if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the reserved icon may not be displayed in the upper limit number (four), so the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit. Even in the state, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four holding icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed only when four hold icons are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when two or more hold icons are displayed, You may comprise so that production may be performed. In this case, for example, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the result of pre-reading, and, for example, win a big hit (big hit E9) that is advantageous to the player. Only when there is winning information indicating that the game is to be performed, it is preferable that the continuous effect is executed in a state where the number of holding icons is small. Thereby, according to the display number of the hold icon at the time when the continuous production is executed, the expectation of the continuous production, that is, the expectation of the jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player can be changed, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to make the user interested in the timing at which the continuous production is performed.

  Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the result of the pre-reading. For example, it is possible to win a big hit (big hit E9) which is advantageous to the player. When there is the winning information shown, as a preparation effect for executing the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be executed after the forced increase display is executed so that the display number of the hold icon becomes the upper limit. .

  When the contents specified in the continuous production selection table 222hb are described with reference to FIG. 223 (b), the continuous production types A, B, B A continuous production C (execution C) is provided. In the execution A, a continuous production (see FIG. 218 (b)) for mainly acquiring the V icon 873z in the middle of the continuous production is performed. In the execution B, a V icon is mainly provided at the end of the continuous production. (Execution C to acquire the V icon 873y in FIG. 218 (a)). In the execution C, during the continuous production, the holding icons 873a to 873d imitating carrots cannot be completely digested (cannot be eaten). Although it has been described that the effect in which the icon cannot be acquired is performed, it is sufficient that the effect having the above-described content is mainly performed. For example, the effect of the execution B is executed in the execution A with a low probability, that is, If production which effect result is than the actual game result disadvantage may be executable to configure another continuous effect.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment is not displayed on the RAM 223 (see FIG. 174) of the audio ramp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment. The difference is that an information storage area 223ha, an undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a continuous effect flag 223hd are added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main controller 110, and will be described later. In the winning command processing 9 to be performed (see S4281 in FIG. 224), the number of times of release of the extracted second attacker 1650 is stored (S4486 in FIG. 224). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of displayed icons based on the stored information, and thereafter, the referred information is discarded. For the winning information already acquired before the latent state is set, the second attacker 1650 is opened with respect to all the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223hb at the end timing of the jackpot game. The number of times is extracted and the result is stored.

  By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this way, the timing at which the winning information of the special symbol is received and the timing at which the effect mode is determined can be easily made different.

  The undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is a counter for indicating the number of reserved icons that are not yet displayed among the currently displayed reserve icons, and the value of the counter is decremented when a new reserved icon is displayed. Is done. In the present embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons, a true icon effect for increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a value for the displayed icon number counter 223hc, a value for the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, display A pseudo effect in which only the apparent number of reserved icons is increased / decreased without increasing / decreasing the value of the completed icon counter 223hc (an effect having the same value in the end) can be executed.

  The displayed icon number counter 223hc is a counter for counting the number of currently displayed reserved icons, and is added when a new reserved icon is displayed, and is subtracted when the reserved icon decreases. It is. When displaying a new pending icon, the total number of pending icons to be displayed is determined with reference to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc. The display number is determined based on the difference from the value of the displayed icon counter 223hc.

  The continuous effect flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the continuous effect is being executed. While the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON, an effect in which the number of reserved icons increases or decreases in the icon effect is not executed.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224 to FIG. 227, a description will be given of a control process executed by the audio lamp control device out of the control contents of the ninth embodiment. The control contents of the audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment include a winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) instead of the winning command process (see S4211 in FIG. 183) in the seventh embodiment. The jackpot end process 9 (see S4954 in FIG. 225) instead of the jackpot end process, and the ready state setting process 9 (see S4691 in FIG. 226) instead of the ready state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 185) are set during the RUSH. RUSH setting process 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is performed instead of the process (see S8410 in FIG. 192), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning command processing 9 (S4281). In the winning command processing 9 (S4281), processing for updating information related to the icon effect executed during the RUSH game and determining the number of display of the hold icons 873 (see FIG. 217) displayed in the icon effect is executed. Is done.

  When the winning command processing 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON. (S4482) If it is set to ON (S4482: Yes), winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the received winning command is extracted (S4484). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a winning command to be won.

  If it is determined in the process of S4484 that there is hit information (S4484: Yes), the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is extracted based on the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) indicated by the hit information (S4485), The value corresponding to the extracted number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, the number of displayed icons is selected with reference to the icon display number selection table 222ha based on the special figure 2 number of reserved balls and the information stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb (S4487). Thereafter, the difference between the selected icon display number and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), and other processing is executed (S4412), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, control for changing the display number of the reserved icon is not executed, only updating the information used for the icon effect. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the display number of the hold icon changes and the timing at which the winning winning command is received different from each other, making it difficult for the player to understand how and when the display number of the hold icon changes. be able to. In the present embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, the information used for the icon effect is only updated, and the control for changing the display number of the pending icon is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control for changing the display number of the hold icon may be executed, or control for changing the display number of the hold icon when a predetermined lottery is executed and the winning is performed. It may be configured to execute.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4484 that there is no hit information (S4484: No), then it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489), and the flag is not set to ON. Is determined (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is larger than 0 (S4490). If it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S4490: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S4491), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S4492), and the pseudo effect mode is set. To update the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) (S4493), set a display command to indicate the set effect mode (S4494), and shift to the process of S4412. I do.

  When it is determined in the processing of S4489 that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489: Yes), that is, when the continuous production is currently being performed, or when the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0, In the case (S4404: No), that is, when it is in a state where the display number of the hold icon cannot be increased, the process proceeds to the process of S4412 without setting the pseudo effect.

  Next, the contents of the big hit end processing 9 (S4954) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot end process 9 (S4954). This jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is based on winning information already acquired when the RUSH game can be executed after the jackpot has ended, that is, when the latent state is set or when the probable change state is set. The big hit end processing described above is largely different from the big hit end processing in that the processing for setting the information regarding the icon effect is executed.

  When the jackpot end process 9 (S4954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is not set to ON (S5051: No), Next, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a positive change big hit (S5052). When it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot (S5052: Yes), that is, when the jackpot executed at a timing other than during the RUSH game is set to the jackpot, all the jackpots stored in the winning information storage area 223b are set. The winning information is read (S5053), the winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the winning information is extracted (S5054), and the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated based on the extracted winning information (S5054). S5055). Then, the calculated total number of times of the second attacker (total release number) is stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb (S5056).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a latent jackpot (S5057). If the jackpot is a latent jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display for indicating the corresponding latent mode (prepare mode, RUSH mode) is made. Command (S5058), the icon display number is set to 4 (S5059), the value of the displayed icon number counter is set to 4 (S5060), and the information stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is set. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted (S5061), a display command indicating the end of the big hit is set (S5062), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5057 that the hit is not a latent big hit (S5057: No), a display command for indicating the positive change mode is set (S5063), and the process proceeds to S5062. .

  If it is determined in the processing of S5051 that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON, that is, if it is a jackpot that has been won during a RUSH game (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot. (S5064), if it is a normal jackpot (S5064: Yes), the RUSH game is over, so various flags and counters related to the RUSH game are reset (set to the initial state) (S5065), and the current jackpot is reached. A corresponding RUSH display command is set (S5066), and the flow shifts to the process of S5062. In this case, in the processing of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH game is set. If it is determined in the process of S5065 that it is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH game will be continued is set.

  Next, the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). In the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691), a hold icon is displayed at the timing of shifting from the probable change state to the latent state in the preparation state setting process of the seventh embodiment (see S4641 in FIG. 226). The processing is different in that a processing for adding the same is added, and the other steps are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description is omitted.

  When the preparation state setting processing 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processings of S8001 to S8004 as the preparation state setting processing (see S4641 in FIG. 226) are executed, and then the corresponding latent mode (RUSH mode) Is set (S8051), the number of displayed icons is set to 4 (S8052), the value of the displayed icon counter is set to 4 (S8053), and stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the displayed information (S8054), and the process ends.

  That is, the same processing as that performed at the end of the big hit when the latent state is set after the big hit game is executed is executed. This makes it possible to unify the initial display of the icon effect (a state in which four reserved icons are displayed irrespective of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2), regardless of the trigger when the latent state is set. Therefore, the control processing for changing the effect mode of the icon effect in accordance with the transition trigger to the latent state can be unified, so that the load of the control processing can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the content of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450). In the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450), a process for setting an effect mode of the icon effect to be executed according to the second special symbol change executed during the RUSH game is executed.

  When the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8651), and if the value is 4 (S8651: Yes), the continuous effect selection is performed. The continuous effect is selected with reference to the table 222hb (S8652), and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect (S4453). When it is determined that the continuous production is to be executed (S4453: Yes), a display command for indicating the production mode of the selected continuous production is set (S4454), and this processing ends. In the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are updated in accordance with the number of reserved icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous effect. If it is determined that the continuous effect is not to be executed in the process of S4453 (S8653: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8651, if it is determined that the value of the displayed icon counter 223hc is not 4 (S8651: No), it is next determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655). ), When it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8655: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is larger than 0 (S8656). If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S8656: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S8657), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S8658), and the mode of the pseudo effect is adjusted. Then, the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated (S8659), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S8660), and the process ends. .

  When it is determined in the process of S8655 that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655: Yes), that is, when the continuous production is currently being performed, or when the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0 In this case, that is, in a state where it is not possible to increase the display number of the hold icon, the process ends without setting the pseudo effect.

<Regarding Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the icon effect performed in the above-described ninth embodiment, a continuous effect can be performed based on the pre-read result. And the production mode of the continuous production was determined when the continuous production was set. Specifically, as the effect of the continuous effect, the type of effect, such as an effect that is executed so that the reserved icon remains, or an effect that is executed to consume all the reserved icons, is determined in advance. The effect according to the type was configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load during the continuous production without any difference between the production result of the continuous production and the actual game result. There was a problem that it was not possible to give diversity to the people.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, at the time of starting the jackpot game to be the target of the continuous production, the production mode of the continuous production is made variable based on the winning type of the winning and the number of remaining reserved icons. I have. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the production mode of the continuous production in the first half period until the jackpot game is started and the second period after the jackpot game is started, for example. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the production pattern of the continuous production.

  In this modification, since the process of increasing the display number of the hold icons after the jackpot game is started is configured to be executable, an effect mode in which all the hold icons are consumed in the first half period of the continuous effect is set. Even if the winning jackpot type is a latent jackpot, the number of displayed hold icons can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition condition when deciding the effect mode in the first half period of the effect pattern of the continuous effect, and it is possible to easily diversify the effect pattern.

  Further, in the present modification, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big hit game. Thus, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in the big hit game.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 228, a control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. The present modification is different from the above-described ninth embodiment in that a jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) executed at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed, and the rest is the same. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802).

  When the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it has been determined (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). Then, it is determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4951). If it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4951: Yes), the continuous production flag 223hd is turned on. It is determined whether it has been set (S4952). That is, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot to be subjected to a continuous effect.

  In the process of S4952, when it is determined that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952: Yes), the continuous production flag 223hd is set to OFF (S4953), and the current big hit is a latent big hit ( It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game (S4954). If it is determined that the jackpot is a latent jackpot (S4954: Yes), the number of open second attackers 1650 during the jackpot is determined. The information in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated correspondingly, that is, the hold icons are displayed in correspondence with the release of the second attacker 1650 executed in the jackpot game executed this time. Each value is updated to digest the number (S4955).

  Thereafter, a display command corresponding to the updated content is set (S4956), and after the update, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 0 (S4957), and when it is determined that the value is 0, that is, In the case where the continuous effect is advanced in accordance with the opening of the second attacker 1650, even though the RUSH continues at the latent probability jackpot and the display number of the hold icon becomes 0 (S4957), the continuous effect is executed. Later, an additional effect (mode) for displaying one hold icon is set (S4958), and the process ends. As an additional effect mode set here, there is an effect in which ginseng falls from the sky during a jackpot game. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of a jackpot game being executed during the RUSH, the hold icon is not displayed, that is, the RUSH game may be ended by the current jackpot game Is configured to execute a pseudo additional effect as to whether or not the above additional effect is executed. This pseudo additional production is formed of a first production that stimulates that something falls from the sky, similarly to the additional production, and a second production that other than ginseng falls from the sky. This allows the player to play the game while keeping expectations until the end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4954 that the current jackpot is not a latent jackpot (S4954: No), that is, if the RUSH game ends at the current jackpot, all the displayed holding icons are consumed. The effect mode is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4951 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4951: No), the same processes of S4913 to S4916 as the above-described jackpot-related process (see S4802 in FIG. 68) are executed. This processing ends.

  In addition, the technical idea used in this modification, that is, the technical idea of performing an effect of changing the display number of the hold icon at the timing when the jackpot game is started, is used for purposes other than executing in a continuous effect. Is also good.

  In this modification, since the process of increasing the display number of the hold icons after the jackpot game is started is configured to be executable, it is assumed that the effect mode in which all the hold icons are consumed in the first half period of the continuous effect is set. In addition, when the type of the winning jackpot is the latent jackpot, the display number of the hold icon can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition condition when deciding the effect mode in the first half period of the effect pattern of the continuous effect, and it is possible to easily diversify the effect pattern.

  Further, in the present modification, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big hit game. Thus, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in the big hit game.

  As described above, in the above-described ninth embodiment, the special figure acquired in accordance with the result of the pre-reading processing (preliminary determination processing) executed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored. It is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) in which the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is varied regardless of the number of reserved balls. Thereby, even if the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same prefetching effect as in the case where the acquired number of special figure reserved balls is the upper limit, according to the prefetching result. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a prefetching effect with a high effect even to a player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is set to the number of special figure reserved balls that can be reserved (the storage of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). ) Is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 for indicating the acquired number of special figure reserved balls (it is difficult for the player to determine). ). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special figure holding balls (the number of stored second special symbols mainly executed during the latent state) is as follows. It can make you think it is a reserved symbol to show. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness of the player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls to play.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which a latent state is set), a special figure holding ball capable of holding and storing the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect. The number (the number of stored second special symbols mainly executed during the latent state) is set to be larger than the upper limit value (4). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to a player who has an illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is a reserved symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) executed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the number of times of opening of the attacker that is opened in the small hit game is determined. The number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the result of the determination. The number of times the attacker is released in one small hit game is made different depending on the type of the small hit that has been won. Furthermore, as part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker releasing operation as that of the small hit game is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, if at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, the fact that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game is notified in advance. Therefore, each time the number of the specific symbols is changed, the player watches the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of icons that can be displayed (the number of reserved icons) in the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received. ) Is determined, and the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons displayed at various timings is performed. However, a process of determining the number of icons that can be displayed (the number of pending icons) (display) The number-of-possible icons determination process) is not executed every time the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received. When the process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed, the process may be executed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied. More specifically, the number of additional receptions of the prize information command (prize command) becomes a predetermined period (for example, a period indicating an elapsed time of 30 seconds) after the previous displayable icon number determination process is executed, or three. May be configured to execute the process of determining the number of displayable icons when the period up to) has elapsed. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the prize information command (prize command) is actually received different from the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information included in the command. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the number of reserved icons has been determined for the (reserved figure storage). In this manner, the received winning information command includes a production mode in which the timing for determining the number of displayable icons is made different to increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed within the range of the number of displayable icons. Since it can be easily separated from the winning information, it is possible to easily provide a surprising effect to the player.

  Furthermore, in addition to the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, the displayable icon number determination processing is executed. May be configured. In this case, it is preferable to execute an operation effect on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can operate the operation means with predetermined contents. This makes it easier for a player who has operated the operating means correctly for the operation effect to be executed to execute the icon effect based on the winning information included in the received winning information command. Can be motivated to play the game.

  In addition, it detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening 63 or the through gate 67 provided in the game board 13 and displays the result based on the detection result (at a predetermined probability when the ball enters). You may comprise so that the possible icon number determination process may be performed. With this configuration, the number of reserve icons that can be displayed is determined by a game that is not related to the special symbol lottery, so that the timing at which the player actually receives the winning information command (winning command) Since the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information included in the command can be made different, it is possible to determine which winning information (special figure reservation storage) the number of reserved icons has been determined. It can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons, a true icon effect for increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a value for the displayed icon number counter 223hc, a value for the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, display Pseudo-effects (effects that finally have the same value) in which only the number of appearance reserved icons is increased / decreased without increasing / decreasing the value of the completed icon number counter 223hc. The mode is also configured to be set by the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the range of the number of icons to be increased / decreased in the pseudo effect and a display frame indicating that the effect is to be executed. When a display command indicating that a pseudo effect is to be executed is received by the display control device 114, an effect based on information included in the received display command is set. You may be comprised so that an aspect may be determined.

  With such a configuration, only the icon effect (true icon effect) set based on the winning information of the special symbol needs to be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the sound lamp control device 113 Can reduce the processing load of the control process. In addition, by executing a pseudo effect of increasing or decreasing (variable) only the apparent number of reserved icons without increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, the icon effect is held. The variable pattern of the number of icons can be diversified. In addition, since the pseudo effect is executed so that the final increment and decrement of the reserved icon match, when setting the effect mode of the true icon effect, care is taken about the effect status of the pseudo effect. There is no need, and the processing load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to audio ramp controller 113 and the number of times that audio-ramp controller 113 receives the number-of-reservations command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning of the special figure entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is held up to one time. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to this. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of retained balls of the variable display based on the prize in the special figure entrance 64 can be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Also, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data of the display control device 114.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided between a display means for displaying a main symbol and a display means for displaying a slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to a player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the left side of the game board 13 is divided into a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player and a gaming state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although the left-handed game aiming at the area is configured to be executed, the aiming area of the different game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the case of the normal state, the game board A left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. May be executed, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, even when any game state is set or the jackpot game is set, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state and during the big hit game, and the left-handed game is executed only during the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can easily understand whether or not the player is in a state advantageous for the game method to be executed (right-handed game, left-handed game).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use a lever-shaped operating means that can determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and can determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching A simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Also, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. For example, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect form of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on a player's operation on the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or input of an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22), and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A control device capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of effect operation means can be centrally managed. The effect mode for the player's operation on the means can be set smoothly.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, a switch button group 22z (a switch button 22za, a first selection button 22zb, a second selection button 22zc) for selecting an end condition of a game per accessory is provided. A part or a part of each operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c All may be configured to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed at the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be embodied as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of a jackpot probability (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a probable change state) is selected from a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Can be set as a typical example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probability, for example, implemented as a pachinko machine that can change the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot, according to the setting You may. That is, the rate at which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is determined according to the setting, or the rate at which the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the rate at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. By changing the ratio according to the setting, the degree of advantage for each setting may be changed. In addition, for example, the rate at which a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) are given after the end of the big win is determined according to the setting, or a large number of time savings (for example, 0 times) is given. May be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is likely to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (eg, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or a disadvantageous gaming state (eg, a normal state) ) May be varied according to the setting at which the jackpot determined to be (or easily shifted) is determined. In addition, a configuration in which a jackpot type in which the ratio determined only by a specific setting is significantly higher (which is hardly determined by other settings) may be provided. Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. In the setting 6, when the jackpot becomes a jackpot, the jackpot of six rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, the jackpot of six rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 becomes extremely high, so that the player pays attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot and plays the game. be able to. Alternatively or additionally, for example, in the setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time savings are given after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, a game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Instead of or in addition to the above, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the inside of the jackpot, etc.) operates in a different operation pattern from the other jackpot types The configuration may be such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the determination ratio increases). In addition, in the case of changing the combination of the jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the positive change state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a big hit probability high. In this configuration, particularly, in the probable change state, as the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the number of possessed balls tends to increase (the number of award balls to be paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired). It is effective for gaming machines. More specifically, for example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next big win is won, and is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a small probability of winning with a high probability in the probable change state, provides an advantage of a high setting. Sex can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big hit is likely to increase, so that the chance of winning a small hit and winning a prize ball increases. Therefore, in the probability change state, it becomes easier for the player to acquire more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating the operating lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button, and is known. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to another embodiment. For example, by applying to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 87). See S4211, S4212, S4219 and S4220). Then, during the execution of the standby state effect, each time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be set to a mode according to the situation of the actual upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. In other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted by a similar method.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (The timing of updating the number of times saved and the timing of determining the end of time saved are made different)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; And a second gaming state different from the gaming state; and a gaming state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state. Updating means capable of updating related first information; and end determining means capable of determining whether the first information updated by the updating means satisfies an ending condition. means When the end determination unit determines that the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set, the second game state is set, and the gaming machine includes: A gaming machine A1 wherein an update timing of the first information by the update means is executed differently from an end determination timing for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which game balls easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. (For example, JP-A-2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the player play a game while expecting the first gaming state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state executed based on the fact that the number of lotteries has reached the specific number. This is configured to be executed at the timing when the game is performed, and to provide the set advantageous state to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed, in which the lottery number is counted (subtracted) in the advantageous state and the advantageous state is terminated when the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. Since it is configured to be executed at the timing of the execution, there is a problem that the processing executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load by reducing a processing amount executed at the same timing.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (duplicate game is possible), and a lottery in the other game is performed according to a game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of a fluctuation period for indicating a result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, a plurality of games can be executed in an overlapping manner, so that a game aiming to execute a privilege game can be efficiently executed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted in accordance with the game result of one game, the privilege game is repeatedly performed by a plurality of games that are repeatedly performed, and On the other hand, it is possible to suppress execution of a privilege game that is difficult to understand.

  However, in the case where the above-described configuration in which the advantageous state can be set is used for a gaming machine capable of executing the overlapping game, when the number of lotteries is measured (subtracted) during the advantageous state and the number of lotteries reaches the specific number, Since the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the lottery result is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game based on the bonus game being given by one game In the case where the subtraction of the variable time for indicating the change is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the awarded bonus game, the interrupted variable time subtraction is restarted and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, there is a problem that measurement (subtraction) processing of the number of lotteries is executed. That is, since the lottery count executed in the advantageous state is measured (subtracted) based on the fact that the result of the lottery executed in a state other than the advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the game in the advantageous state is performed for the player. There was a problem that it could not be suitably executed. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by appropriately executing a game in an advantageous state to a player.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the updating of the first information by the updating unit and the determination of the end by the end determining unit can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the end condition is satisfied by updating the first information, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing executed at the same timing and to reduce the processing load.

  In the gaming machine A1, the updating timing is a timing at which the determination is performed by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the update timing of the first information related to the determination by the determination unit is the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination unit. There is an effect that information can be reliably updated. Further, since the first information can be updated by the updating unit by performing the determination by the determining unit, the player is interested in both the determination of the determining unit and the set game state. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the determination is performed by the determination unit, the first information is updated by the update unit, so that it is possible to suppress an unnecessary update process from being performed and reduce the processing load. There is.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the end determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the termination condition is determined during a period in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed, so that the player can grasp the determination result of the determination unit. The game state can be prevented from changing while the user is watching the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine A3, the determination unit performs a determination corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting unit, and the end determination timing is determined after the identification information is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine A4, which is a period until the determination is performed by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, although the first information is updated by the updating means to the first information that can satisfy the end condition, the determination by the determining means is executed before the second game state is set. Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information and the end determination timing are made different, there is an effect that the determination performed by the determination unit can be properly performed.

  The gaming machine A5 according to any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, wherein the first information is updated by the updating unit based on the number of times of the determination performed by the determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated every time the determination unit performs the determination, so that the first information is updated to the player. Can be easily understood. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the first game state is suddenly shifted to the second game state and the player is confused.

  In the gaming machine A5, the update unit updates the first information after the determination by the determination unit is performed and before a dynamic display for indicating a determination result of the determination is performed. A gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the first information is not updated during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A6, when an interruption condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display, and an interruption by the interruption means. A resuming unit for resuming the dynamic display when the resuming condition is satisfied, and the first information updated by the updating unit can be changed when the dynamic display is interrupted by the suspending unit. Gaming machine A7, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, when dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing unit. Therefore, during the dynamic display of the identification information, in addition to the result of the determination by the determination means, the presence or absence of interruption can be enjoyed for the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In the gaming machine A7, the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7. In other words, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can play the game while expecting that the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when a second condition different from a first condition that can be satisfied based on a result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 that can be executed, and wherein the interruption condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7 or A8, the interruption condition can be satisfied when the second condition that allows the bonus game to be executed without using the determination by the determination unit is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game different from the determination by the determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A9, the game machine has a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the second condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A9, as a game different from the discrimination by the discriminating means, it is possible to perform a game in which a game ball is inserted into the ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A10, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state; Variable control means capable of executing a variable operation for changing a member to a first state for a predetermined period based on establishment of an execution condition, wherein the variable control means sets a state in which the first game state is set. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the variable operation is easier to execute than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the period during which the first gaming state is more likely to be satisfied than the second gaming state is continued based on the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game for satisfying the second condition.

<Characteristic B group> (Depending on the setting conditions, the rate at which the privilege is awarded depending on the winning ball differs)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state; Variable control means for changing the means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, a specific area through which game balls entering the variable ball-in means can pass, and a game ball entering the specific area In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege on the basis of the above, setting information determining means capable of determining setting information when the variable ball-in means is variably controlled by the variable control means, According to the setting information determined by the setting information determining means, the first state in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area, and the game ball which is more difficult to pass than the first state. Switching means that can switch between the second state and Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it is intended to.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, as a starting port, there is provided a variable ball entry means provided with a variable member which can be changed between a first state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a second state in which the ball is regulated, and the variable ball entry means is provided with a variable ball means. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to set an advantageous state that is easy to change to the first state and a disadvantageous state that is hard to change to the first state from the first gaming state (for example, JP-A-2001-033569). Gazette). In such a gaming machine, the ease of entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means is varied so that the player can actively play a game while expecting that the advantageous state is set. Although it was possible to do so, even if the disadvantaged state is set, if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the lottery will be executed, so the variable entry in the disadvantaged state There is a risk that the game may be played at a timing when the means enters the first state, and there is a problem in that the player's willingness to set the advantageous state is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, in the state where the disadvantageous state is set, it is difficult to perform the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased. It aims to provide a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since it is possible to switch between the first state and the second state according to the setting information, the player is interested in the setting information at the time when the game ball enters the variable entering means. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine B1 has operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means, and the switching means is configured such that a game ball having entered the variable ball input means has a first flow path and a first flow path. A plurality of flow paths including a different second flow path, wherein the plurality of flow paths can be switched so as to flow down any one of the flow paths, and the operation control means is provided by the variable control means The control of the operation to the switching means is started based on the start of the control, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path by the switching means can pass through the specific area. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the switching means is operation-controlled by the operation control means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and when a game ball entering the variable ball entry means flows down the first flow path by the switching means, passes through the specific area. Can be done. Thereby, the variable control for facilitating the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means and the operation control of the switching means can be linked with each other. There is an effect that it can be appropriately controlled whether or not to pass through.

  In the gaming machine B2, the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path by the switching means is less likely to pass through the specific area than the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B2, the game balls flowing down the second flow path can be made harder to pass through the specific area than the game balls flowing down the first flow path. There is an effect that it is possible to set the passing ratio of the game balls entering the variable ball entry unit to the specific area only by controlling the operation of the switching unit by the control unit.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the game machine B2 or B3 has a normal area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass, and the normal area is a specific area of the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. Are formed so that game balls that have not passed through the game pass, and the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege when the game ball passes through the normal area. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2 or B3. In other words, when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the normal area, no benefit is given. Therefore, even if a game ball excessively enters the variable ball entry means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive privilege. In addition, by providing a normal area in the variable ball entry means, it is possible to provide extra benefits to the player without providing a mechanism for suppressing game balls from entering the variable ball entry means outside the variable ball entry means. Can be suppressed from being given, so that there is an effect that the area outside the variable ball entry means can be easily used for other purposes.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game ball flowing down the first flow path is provided with a third flow path different from the second flow path, and different from the second flow path and the third flow path. And a fourth flow path, and a distribution means that can be distributed to the fourth flow path, wherein the gaming machine has, as the specific area, a first area in which game balls distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means can enter. And at least a specific area and a second specific area different from the first specific area in which game balls distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means can enter. Is a game machine in which the content of grant is different between a case where a game ball enters the first specific area and a case where a game ball enters the second specific area. B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4. That is, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path by the switching means is distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, it passes through the first specific area, and when it is distributed to the fourth flow path. It passes through the second specific flow path. Thereby, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means according to the establishment condition of the set condition, the ease with which the privilege is given by the privilege granting means is changed, and further, the bonus is given by the distribution means. Benefits can be different. Therefore, whether or not the privilege is granted and the content of the privilege to be granted are determined stepwise, so that the presence or absence of the privilege and the content of the privilege are determined for the player in comparison with the case where the privilege is determined at once. This has the effect that the period during which the game is enjoyed can be lengthened. In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating a flowing state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flowing state of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating that the setting condition is satisfied. This allows the player to know that it is a situation in which some benefits are likely to be given by allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means at the time before the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with expectation.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the game machine has game state setting means capable of at least setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that it is easier to switch to the first state when the first gaming state is set by the setting means than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ease of switching to the first state can be changed according to the set gaming state. Thus, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-in means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are harder to enter than the first variable pattern. Wherein the switching means is switchable to at least the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable pitching means with the first variable pattern. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5. That is, when the second variable pattern is set by the variable control means, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than when the second variable pattern is set. . Then, the switching means can switch to the first state when variably controlled by the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls that cannot pass through the specific area are generated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the privilege granting means executes a specific game based on a game ball having entered the specific area, and the gaming machine executes the special game by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine B8 having privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the specified game performed is a predetermined result.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, if the result of the specific game executed when the game ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result, the bonus game is performed. Since the game is executed, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game for passing the game ball to the specific area.

<Feature C Group> (In a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of games in an overlapping manner, an effect mode related to the other game is set according to one of the fluctuation times)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period of the displayed identification information based on the selection information; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit indicates the specific determination result. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when stopped and displayed with specific identification information for identifying a specific game that can execute a specific game during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Game execution means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect related to the specific game, and the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means at least to information corresponding to the selection information. Gaming machine C1, characterized in that those having a presentation mode setting means for setting Zui.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (overlapping game is possible), and a game result is shown for each of the games to be executed repeatedly. (For example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, in the case where a plurality of games are performed in an overlapping manner, each of the games can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by looking at each effect display performed in an overlapping manner. Since the effect mode of the effect display to be performed is determined based only on the content of the corresponding game, and it is not possible to execute the effect related to a plurality of games executed in duplicate, the effect display being executed Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the entirety of the game being repeatedly executed, and the effect of the effect is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, a gaming machine is provided in which a rendering effect is enhanced by performing an effect that makes it easy to grasp the contents of a plurality of games that are repeatedly executed, thereby enabling a player to play a game with will. The purpose is to:

  According to the gaming machine C1, the effect of the specific effect can be determined based on the selection information. Therefore, an effect in which the dynamic display of the identification information that is repeatedly executed and the specific game are associated with each other is executed. This has the effect that the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to determine the production mode of the specific production based on the selection information, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play a game to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various production modes. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C1, the game machine C1 has a remaining period determining unit that can determine a remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying unit, and the effect mode setting unit is determined by the remaining period determining unit. The gaming machine C2, wherein the effect mode is set based on the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the remaining period of the identification information. The effect mode of the specific effect can be changed accordingly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play a game at various timings in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to view various presentation modes.

  In the gaming machine C2, when a suspending condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a suspending means for suspending the dynamic display, and the suspending means suspends the dynamic display. Resuming means for resuming the dynamic display based on the end of the privilege game, wherein the interruption condition is that the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is a predetermined game result. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being established when:

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, the discrimination by the discriminating means and the specific game can be related not only in the effect to be executed but also in the actual game, so that the effect of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine C3 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is executed. Means for setting the first game state when a specific period has elapsed since the second game state was set, and the resuming means for setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game. In this case, the suspended dynamic display is restarted as a dynamic display in the second game state, and the specific period is a remaining period of the identification information restarted by the restarting means. Wherein the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second game state in which the game advantageous to the player is executed is set varies depending on the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means. Then, it is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when the production mode of the specific production is interrupted by the interruption unit. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later depending on the effect mode of the specific effect, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the remaining period discriminating means capable of discriminating the remaining time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the remaining time discriminated by the remaining time discriminating means is Advantageous condition determining means for determining whether or not the advantageous condition is satisfied, wherein the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determining means. Gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4. That is, it is determined by the advantageous condition determining means whether the remaining period satisfies the advantageous condition, and the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the determination result. This has the effect that the player can be notified of the presence of the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, when the remaining period of the identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the first period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied, and thus the processing is executed. There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game to execute the specific game based on the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information when a game ball enters the ball-in means, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition means Storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number, wherein the determination means performs a determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied And a pre-determination unit that can pre-determine the obtained information stored in the storage unit before the determination based on the obtained information is executed by the determination unit. Means for determining in advance a dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means based on at least the acquired information; Predecision Gaming machine C6, characterized in that in which it is determined that meets the favorable condition is longer than the dynamic display period is determined by means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, the acquired information determined by the determining unit is stored in the storage unit up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage unit is determined in advance. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the active dynamic display is longer than the previously determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, the game can be performed while predicting the timing of interruption of the dynamic display which is advantageous to the player based on the specific effect to be executed, and thus there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determining means determines a determination result of the preliminary determining means corresponding to the obtained information next determined by the determining means among the obtained information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C7 for determining whether or not the object satisfies the advantageous condition.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. In other words, the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information for which the determination is performed by the determination unit, and therefore, based on the specific effect to be performed, The player can determine whether to suspend the dynamic display or the dynamic display to be executed next. Therefore, it is possible to make the player select a game, and it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming state setting unit may be configured to set the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit in a state where the first gaming state is set as the specific period. The first game state is set when a period until a predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed at least two or more times is set in advance, and a period calculation unit capable of calculating the specific period is provided; The period calculating unit calculates the specific period by adding a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying unit to the specific number of times as an upper limit. A game machine C8 comprising period mode display means capable of displaying a period mode for indicating the specific period calculated by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, it is possible to grasp the game state in the second game state based on the effect mode of the specific effect, while observing the length of the specific period by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at various effects to be performed, and to increase the effect of the effect.

<Characteristic D group> (The end condition of the hit game is made different depending on the operation on the operation means)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and the variable entry means when the first condition is satisfied; A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time, the specific game executed by the specific game execution means. The first ending condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means, and the period in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state has passed the predetermined period. Of a plurality of end conditions including a second end condition that is satisfied in the case, an end unit that ends when one end condition is satisfied, a first operation, a second operation different from the first operation, Operating means capable of executing Operation is better when is executed, the second than when the operation is executed, the gaming machine wherein the first end condition is one which easily obtained D1.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If there is, a bonus game in which a game ball can be inserted into an attacker (specific winning opening) is executed, and a plurality of conditions for terminating the bonus game are set. (For example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a gaming machine, generally, a time ending condition for ending a privilege game based on an elapsed time since execution of a privilege game and a number of game balls entering an attacker during the privilege game are based on A prize ending condition for terminating the privilege game is set, and control for terminating the privilege game is executed when any of the ending conditions is satisfied.

  However, since the same game is performed every time during the bonus game, even when a plurality of end conditions are set, basically, only one of the end conditions is easily satisfied. In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured so that the gaming ball can be easily won by the attacker during the bonus game, the winning end condition is easily established before the time end condition is established. In a gaming machine configured to make it difficult for a game ball to win, the time end condition is more likely to be satisfied before the win end condition is satisfied.

  As described above, even if a plurality of ending conditions of the privilege game are set, if the ending conditions that can be satisfied almost become the specific ending conditions, the advantage of setting the plurality of ending conditions, that is, which ending condition There is a problem that it is difficult to make it difficult for the player to be interested in the game during the privilege game by making it difficult to understand whether the privilege game is ended based on the establishment. In the above-described gaming machine, the player actively performs a game during the privilege game by suppressing that the fulfilled termination condition is biased toward a specific termination condition among a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the privilege game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing such operations.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to make the ending condition for ending the specific game being executed different depending on the operation content executed by the operation means, and to make the player enthusiastically play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a selection effect execution unit capable of executing a selection effect for allowing a player to select whether to execute the first operation or the second operation on the operation unit. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the end condition can be selected based on the selection effect executed by the selection effect execution means, so that a game which is easy for the player to understand can be provided. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D2, the game machine D2 has an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of the selected effect executed by the selected effect executing means, wherein the effect mode setting means includes a case where the first end condition is satisfied; The gaming machine D3, wherein the effect mode is set differently when the privilege given after the end of the specific game is different from when the second end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. That is, the effect of the selected effect can be made different depending on the privilege given after the end of the specific game, so that the player pays attention to the selected effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D3, determination means for performing a determination when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means being dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. A dynamic display means capable of performing a bonus game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result A bonus game execution unit, and a period determination unit that can determine a period until the bonus game execution unit is executed based on a result of the determination by the determination unit. A game machine D4 for setting an effect mode of the selected effect based on a timing at which the effect is executed and a result of the judgment by the period judgment means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. That is, since the production mode of the selected effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing at which the bonus game is executed, any of the specific games being executed is The game can be performed while predicting whether the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game can be shortened by satisfying the end condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the game machine D4 has a second variable ball entry means that can be varied between a third state in which game balls can enter and a fourth state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the third state, The privilege game execution means is configured to vary the second variable ball-in means in a predetermined variable pattern between the third state and the fourth state for a predetermined period as the privilege game, and the privilege game execution means The types of the privilege games to be executed include a first privilege type, and a second privilege type in which the period during which the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state during the privilege game is longer than the first privilege type. And a type setting means for setting one privilege type among a plurality of privilege types including at least the special mode, and the effect mode setting means executes at the end timing of the specific game based on the start timing of the specific game. The benefits that can be played The case of the type which is the first award type, in the case of the second award type, game machine is characterized in that varying the representation embodiment D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D4. In other words, if the special game can be executed at the end timing of the specific game, the effect mode of the selected effect is set in accordance with the type of the special game. The game can be performed while predicting which end condition is satisfied for the specific game to end the specific game in an advantageous situation for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D5, the end timing of the specific game is the first situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the dynamic display means, or the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state determination means determines whether the state is the second state, and the effect state setting means changes the effect state between the case of the first state and the case of the second state. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the effect of the selected effect is determined depending on whether the timing at which the specific game can be ended is during the dynamic display of the identification information or the execution of the privilege game. Since the mode can be made different, based on the selected effect to be executed, it is possible to end the specific game in a situation that is more advantageous to the player if any of the end conditions is satisfied for the specific game being executed. The game can be performed while predicting whether the game can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  The gaming machine D6 further includes a remaining period determining unit that determines a remaining period of the dynamic display at an end timing of the specific game when the situation determining unit determines that the first situation is present. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by the remaining period discriminating unit, the mode setting unit sets an effect mode different from when the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period. Gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6, the effect of the selected effect is varied according to the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing when the specific game can be ended. Therefore, based on the selected effect to be executed, it is better to satisfy any of the end conditions for the specific game being executed, and to shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game. The game can be played while predicting whether the game can be shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D7, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is satisfied, and the specific game in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. And a resuming means for resuming the dynamic display suspended by the suspending means when the specific game is over. A gaming machine D8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D4 to D7. That is, while the specific game is being executed, the dynamic display can be interrupted, so that the duration of the dynamic display interruption period can be varied by changing the end condition for terminating the specific game. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In the gaming machine D8, the game machine D8 has a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball-in means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine D9 characterized by being possible.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D8, the bonus game can be executed even when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the specific area, so that the player It is possible to provide a pleasure of selecting whether to perform a game for satisfying the second end condition or a game for satisfying the first end condition with respect to a specific game, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D8 or D9, a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed as the game state. Wherein the game state setting means is configured to perform the first game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times in a state where the second game state is set. A gaming machine D10 for setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display is interrupted during the second game state. Is effective when extending the duration of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select whether to perform a game for satisfying the second end condition or a game for satisfying the first end condition for the specific game. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature E group> (Navi display of the target of the hit game)
Variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and discrimination is performed when a discrimination condition is satisfied. Determining means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means identifying the determination result of the determining means A bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time when stop display is performed with specific identification information indicating that the determination result is And a display control means for displaying, on the display means, a display image indicating the variable ball-in means when the privilege game is executed in the gaming machine E1. .

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. In some cases, as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a game for opening a ball entry means, in which a game ball is normally difficult to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which an arrangement position of a starting port is different from an arrangement position of a ball entry means opened during a privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which a game ball is fired to a player is varied between a case where a player is aiming at a starting port and a case where a bonus game is performed. It was possible to provide a game that did not come.

  However, if the game aimed at the starting port is continuously executed when the bonus game is executed, the ball cannot be made to enter the ball entry means during the bonus game, and the player loses money. May occur.

  Also, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (variable from a state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball according to the game content) are set in a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the game ball should be fired, and there is a problem that the player plays an inappropriate game and loses the player. Was. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a game which is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine E1, a display image indicating the variable ball-in means is displayed on the display means by the display control means, so that when the bonus game is executed, it is determined where to aim and fire the game ball. Can be easily informed to the person. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine E1, the display control means may display the display image on the display means at least during a period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed until the variable ball input means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the display image is displayed before the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. In this case, a game ball can be made to enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a privilege game type selecting means capable of selecting one privilege game type from a plurality of privilege game types, and the display control means A display mode setting unit configured to set a display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display unit, wherein the display mode setting unit performs different display according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the mode can be set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the display mode of the display image can be changed based on the jackpot type, so that the privilege game can be executed in an easily understandable manner and the privilege game can be performed. Can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E3, the award game execution means is capable of executing the award game having a different value according to the award game type selected by the award game type selection means. .

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, a privilege game having a different value is executed according to the privilege game type, so that the player is gazed at the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable ball input means has ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered, and the display mode setting means controls the display means by the display control means. A game machine E5 characterized by variably setting the display mode of the display image displayed on the basis of detection of the incoming ball by the incoming ball detection means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the display mode of the display image can be changed when the game ball enters the variable ball-in means by the ball-in detection means. Can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the progress of the privilege game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the game device includes an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination unit that can determine an operation performed on the operation unit, and the display mode setting unit includes: The gaming machine E6, wherein the display mode is variably set based on a determination result of the operation determining means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the display mode of the display image can be changed by the player operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E6, the display mode setting means can set a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determining means. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the display image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation on the operation means. With this, a player who does not need to display the display image when the bonus game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed on the display unit is used for another effect display. Becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable display can be executed by the player.

  In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display mode setting unit can set a rotation display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on a determination result of the operation determining unit. A gaming machine E8, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation on the operation means, so that the player can visually recognize the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic F group> (Time saving end timing is switched according to conditions)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; A plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, a game state setting means capable of setting any game state, an update means capable of updating predetermined information, and the update means. End determination means capable of determining whether the updated predetermined information satisfies an end condition, and the end determination means determines the end condition by the end determination means in a state where the first game state is set. Fulfillment A game machine capable of setting the second game state when it is determined that the end condition determination means has a switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determination means based on establishment of a switching condition. A gaming machine F1 characterized by the following.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which game balls easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. (For example, JP-A-2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the player play a game while expecting the first gaming state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state executed based on the fact that the number of lotteries has reached the specific number. This is configured to be executed at the timing when the game is performed, and to provide the set advantageous state to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed, in which the lottery number is counted (subtracted) in the advantageous state and the advantageous state is terminated when the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. Since it is configured to be executed at the timing of the execution, there is a problem that the processing executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load by reducing a processing amount executed at the same timing.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (duplicate game is possible), and a lottery in the other game is performed according to a game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of a fluctuation period for indicating a result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, a plurality of games can be executed in an overlapping manner, so that a game aiming to execute a privilege game can be efficiently executed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted in accordance with the game result of one game, the privilege game is repeatedly performed by a plurality of games that are repeatedly performed, and On the other hand, it is possible to suppress execution of a privilege game that is difficult to understand.

  However, in the case where the above-described configuration in which the advantageous state can be set is used for a gaming machine capable of executing the overlapping game, when the number of lotteries is measured (subtracted) during the advantageous state and the number of lotteries reaches the specific number, Since the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the lottery result is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game based on the bonus game being given by one game In the case where the subtraction of the variable time for indicating the change is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the awarded bonus game, the interrupted variable time subtraction is restarted and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, there is a problem that measurement (subtraction) processing of the number of lotteries is executed. That is, since the lottery count executed in the advantageous state is measured (subtracted) based on the fact that the result of the lottery executed in a state other than the advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the game in the advantageous state is performed for the player. There was a problem that it could not be suitably executed. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by appropriately executing a game in an advantageous state to a player.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the execution timing of the end condition determination means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at which timing the first gaming state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the updating means can update, as the predetermined information, at least first information based on the number of times the determination is made by the determination means, and the switching condition is updated by the updating means. A gaming machine F2, which can be established when the obtained first information satisfies the end condition.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the switching condition can be satisfied when the number of determinations by the determination means satisfies the termination condition. The player who has performed the determination by the determination unit can be caused to play the game while pounding whether or not the first game state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, when the second determination condition is satisfied, a second determination unit that performs a second determination, and second identification information for indicating a result of the second determination by the second determination unit are moved for a predetermined period. Second dynamic display means capable of dynamic display, and the second identification information for dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means for indicating the specific second determination result And a second privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the switching condition is that the result of the second determination by the second determining means is the second determination. A gaming machine F3, which can be established when it is a result.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, the switching condition can be satisfied based on the second determination executed by the second determination unit different from the determination unit, so that the end. When the determination by the determination means is performed until the condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the switching condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means delays the execution timing of the end condition determining means for a specific period, and the determining means performs the first processing as the determination performed during the specific period. A gaming machine F4 for performing a determination corresponding to a gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the determination of the determining means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition determining means is delayed by the switching means is determined by the first game. This can be executed as the determination during the state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the game state display means includes a game state display means capable of displaying a display mode for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means on the display means, As a display mode for indicating that the first game state is set, a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode can be displayed. The game machine F5 is displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means as a display mode indicating a state in which the first gaming state is set. Since the second display mode displayed in such a case is configured to be displayable, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the current game state in an easily understandable manner.

<Characteristic G group> (variable display of the target game navigation of the hit game according to the progress of the game)
A first state in which the game ball can enter the ball, a second state in which the game ball can enter the second state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first state, and a first variable ball entry means. A first privilege game execution means capable of executing a first privilege game in which the first variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. A second variable ball entry means capable of being changed to a third state in which a ball can enter, a fourth state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the third state, and the first bonus game execution means executed by the first privilege game execution means When the game result of the first privilege game is a predetermined game result, a second privilege game capable of executing a second privilege game in which the second variable ball entry means is changed from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period. A bonus game execution means, and the first variable ball entry means when the first privilege game is executed. A display control means for displaying a first display image on a display means and displaying a second display image indicating the second variable ball-in means on the display means when the second privilege game is executed; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that:

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. In some cases, as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a game for opening a ball entry means, in which a game ball is normally difficult to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which an arrangement position of a starting port is different from an arrangement position of a ball entry means opened during a privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which a game ball is fired to a player is varied between a case where a player is aiming at a starting port and a case where a bonus game is performed. It was possible to provide a game that did not come.

  However, if the game aimed at the starting port is continuously executed when the bonus game is executed, the ball cannot be made to enter the ball entry means during the bonus game, and the player loses money. May occur.

  Also, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (variable from a state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball according to the game content) are set in a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the game ball should be fired, and there is a problem that the player plays an inappropriate game and loses the player. Was. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a game which is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine G1, a display image indicating the variable ball-in means corresponding to the privilege game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means. Can be notified to the player in a way that is easy to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine G1, the display control means displays the first display image during the period from when the first execution condition is satisfied to when the first variable ball input means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine G2 that is displayed on display means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. When fired, the game ball can enter the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the second display image when the first privilege game is executed by the first privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G3, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, during the execution of the first privilege game, the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second privilege game that can be executed next. At least a part is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp in advance the game method after the end of the first privilege game, and to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the first display image when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, during the execution of the second privilege game, the first display image showing the first variable ball-in means corresponding to the already executed first privilege game. Is displayed at least in part. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can visually recognize the contents of the bonus game executed in the past, and the player can easily understand the game.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the display control means may execute the first display image and the first display image before the first privilege game is executed based on the first execution condition being satisfied. A gaming machine G5 for displaying a second image in order.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the first execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the player of a plurality of bonus game flows that can be executed in the future. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp a series of game methods in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic H group> (executing a game that is likely to be the number of reserves in which the advantageous game can be executed and a game that is unlikely to be held)
An information acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and a storage unit that can store the information acquired by the information acquisition unit until a determination condition for the information is satisfied, up to a predetermined number as an upper limit, A determining unit for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied; and dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determining unit on a display unit. Dynamic display means, and specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result Wherein the number of the information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition, as compared with the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those likely to perform a favorable game which is advantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player A gaming machine in which an advantageous privilege game is executed has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). In addition, there has been a configuration in which when a game ball enters the starting port, a lottery right for executing a game lottery can be held and stored up to a predetermined number. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a game having the same advantage is executed irrespective of the number of lottery rights held and stored, so that the game tends to be monotonous. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the easiness of executing the advantageous game can be varied according to the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine includes a first game in which the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means easily satisfies the predetermined condition, and a second game in which the predetermined condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first game. , A gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can more easily satisfy the predetermined condition in the first game than in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine H2, the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number, and the first game is executed by the storage unit. The gaming machine H3, wherein when the number of pieces of information stored in the means is larger than the specific number, the number of pieces of information is more easily reduced than in the second game.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, when the number of information is larger than the specific number, when the first game is executed, the number of information is reduced than when the second game is executed. Since the number of pieces of information can be easily set, the number of pieces of information can be easily set to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is larger than the specific number can perform the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of pieces of information than the second game when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is smaller than the specific number. A gaming machine H4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when the number of information is smaller than the specific number, when the first game is executed, the number of information is reduced rather than when the second game is executed. Since the number of pieces of information can be easily increased, the number of pieces of information can be easily set to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is smaller than the specific number can perform the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is set. Having a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until the time elapses, wherein the first game is capable of forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information by the forced stop means The gaming machine H5, wherein the second game is more difficult to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information by the forcible stopping means than the first game.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed can be forcibly stopped by the forcible stopping means. Thus, the dynamic display of the identification information can be terminated without waiting for the identification information being executed to be dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. Therefore, the next determination by the determination means can be easily performed, and the game efficiency can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H5, when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination different from the determination is provided, and the first condition is at least the second determination condition. A gaming machine H6, which can be established when the result of the second determination by the two determination means is a specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, the first condition can be easily satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a specific second determination result. Therefore, by providing the novel playability of executing the second determination by the second determination means to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic I group> (a variable display in which the number of times saved is updated during the time reduction period and a variable display that is not updated are provided)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; and a first game state. A game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including a different second game state, the second game state being executed in a state where the second game state is set. A gaming machine comprising: updating means for updating the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed; and limiting means for limiting the updating of the first information by the updating means. I1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when the number of lotteries executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, the time-saving game ends, so that the remaining period of the time-saving game is easily predicted for the player. As a result, there is a problem that the willingness to play is reduced. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set, the updating of the first information is restricted by the restricting means if the first condition is satisfied. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when an end condition based on the first information is satisfied in a state where the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I1, by limiting the updating of the first information by the limiting means, it is possible to make it difficult to end the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the end condition of the second game state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I2, it is preferable that the discriminating means perform the discrimination in a state where the second game state is set, rather than perform the discrimination in a state where the first game state is set. A gaming machine I3 characterized by performing a determination that is advantageous to the game machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so during the period in which the second gaming state is set. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the number of executed dynamic displays to be large, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I3, the updating unit can update, as the first information, the number of dynamic displays of the identification information executed in a state where the second gaming state is set. Gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I3, the updating unit updates the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information as the first information, so that the game is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set. The second game state ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated in spite of the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in accordance with the conditions that are satisfied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when a special condition is satisfied in a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is reduced. A forcible stopping means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until a lapse of time, wherein the first condition may be satisfied when the forcible stopping means forcibly stops the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine I5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forcible stopping means, the first condition is satisfied, and the updating is performed by the limiting means. Updating of the first information by the means is restricted. This can prevent the first information from being updated by the dynamic display of the identification information that could not be normally dynamically displayed, so that the identification information is displayed in the state where the second game state is set. Has an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second game state ends without being able to normally and dynamically display, causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine I5, the forced stop means forcibly stops with the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result, regardless of the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the identification information. A gaming machine I6,

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, when the identification information is forcibly stopped, the specific game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed normally in a state where the second game state is set and the second game state ends and the player does not feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine I6, when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, the gaming machine I6 has a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination different from the determination, and the specific game execution unit includes the second determination unit. The specific game is also executed when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the special condition is at least a result of the second determination by the second determination means. Is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I6, if the second determination result of the second determination means capable of executing the specific game is a predetermined second determination result, the special condition is satisfied, and the forced stop is performed. The dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the means. Thus, when the second determination by the second determination means is performed to execute the specific game, even if the result of the predetermined second determination is earlier than the result of the specific second determination, the specific identification is performed. There is an effect that the dynamic display of information is forcibly stopped and the first information can be prevented from being updated.

  In the gaming machine I7, as a type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, a first specific game type and a second specification capable of executing a specific game more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type Game type determining means for determining one specific game type from among a plurality of specific game types including a game type, wherein the game type determining means determines the specific second determination result by the second determining means. The gaming machine I8, characterized in that the second specific game type is more easily determined than when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I7, the second determination means is more likely to give a determination result more advantageous to the player than the determination means, so that the second determination is actively performed on the player. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting unit can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination means is easier to execute the second determination when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine I9.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination by the second determination means is more significant when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. Is easy to execute, the second determination can be positively executed by the player in the state where the second game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting unit can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic J group> (If the condition for stopping the running variable display in the middle is satisfied, the stop control content is switched based on the content of the running variable display.)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A dynamic display mode determining unit for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by a unit, and a switching condition being satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. A specific control unit capable of executing specific control for switching the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode in accordance with a condition satisfied by dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display unit; Having Gaming machine J1, characterized in that the at it.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, when one lottery is won, the result of the other lottery is forcibly discarded. In this case, the other lottery result is forcibly discarded irrespective of the content of the other lottery result, which may be disadvantageous to the player in some cases and gives the player distrust. There was a problem. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) performs a lottery (change) of a first special symbol and a lottery (change) of a second special symbol. As described above, the problem to be solved by the technical concept of the present feature group is not limited to the simultaneous variation machine, but a gaming machine other than the simultaneous variation machine (for example, a lottery of the first special symbol according to a winning order). Of course, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (fluctuation) and lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the switching condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is specified according to the condition that the dynamic display of the identification information being executed satisfies. Can be switched to a target display mode. Thereby, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Therefore, when switching the dynamic display mode, it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of distrust, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, in the case where the specific control is performed, the specific control means may execute a plurality of specific dynamic display modes according to a condition satisfied by dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by switching to any of the specific dynamic display modes.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, when the specific control is performed, the specific dynamic display mode can be made different depending on the condition that the dynamic display of the identification information satisfies. . This makes it possible to determine the specific control corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, when performing the specific control for the dynamic display of the identification information, a game that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine J1 or J2 has a second determination unit that executes a second determination different from the determination when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, and the switching condition includes the second determination. A gaming machine J3, which can be established when the result of the second determination by the means is a predetermined second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the switching condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a predetermined second determination result, and the specific control is performed. Will be different. Therefore, the control content of the specific control is associated with both the result of the determination by the determining means and the result of the second determination by the second determining means, which has an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J3, the specific game execution means performs the specific game even when a result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being executable.

  According to the gaming machine J4, since the specific game can be executed based on the second determination by the second determination unit, both the determination by the determination unit and the second determination by the second determination unit are performed on the player. Can be motivated. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency at which the specific control is executed can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines at least a dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is such that the longer the dynamic display period is, the shorter the dynamic display period is. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being more easily established.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the longer the dynamic display period is, the more easily the switching condition can be satisfied. There is an effect that the player can be interested in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the game machine further includes a remaining period determining unit that can determine a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying unit. A game J6 characterized in that the ease of establishment is varied depending on the length of the residual dynamic display period determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the ease of establishing the switching condition can be varied according to the length of the residual display period. On the other hand, there is an effect that the user can be interested in the length of the remnant display period of the identification information.

<Feature K group> (increase or decrease the number of specific symbols displayed based on the prefetch result without synchronizing with the number of reservations)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means at least up to a predetermined number until an identification condition for the information is satisfied; A determination unit that performs a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied; and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit is dynamically displayed on a display unit. A specific game that can execute a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information indicating the specific determination result. Executing means for performing a preliminary determination based on the information before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is performed in the gaming machine having: And a specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means, and a display number of the specific symbol displayed by the specific symbol display means. And a symbol number variable display means capable of variably displaying regardless of the number of pieces of information.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player A gaming machine in which an advantageous privilege game is executed has been proposed. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port, a lottery right for executing a game lottery can be held and stored up to a predetermined number, and the held lottery is stored. There has been proposed a type in which the number of rights is displayed as a symbol, and the display mode of the symbol is changed based on a preliminary determination result obtained by previously determining a lottery result corresponding to a held lottery right (for example, JP 2013-223613 A). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the result of the preliminary determination can be suggested to the player using the displayed symbol, but when the number of the lottery rights stored on hold is small, the display is performed. There was a problem that the number of symbols to be played was reduced, the effect of the effect was reduced, and the game was likely to be monotonous. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the number of specific symbols displayed based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit can be changed regardless of the number of information stored in the storage unit. Therefore, even when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is small, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be variably displayed, and the player is interested in an effect that suggests a result of the preliminary determination. There is an effect that it can be provided.

  The gaming machine K2, wherein the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol with an upper limit of the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the upper limit display number of the specific symbol is set as the upper limit number of information that can be stored in the storage means, so that the specific symbol is stored in the storage means for the player. Can be thought of as indicating the number of pieces of information that

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 and K2, the symbol number variable means, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is one or more, the symbol number in the range of one or more as the number of the specific symbols. A gaming machine K3 wherein the number of specific symbols to be displayed is variable.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, while the information is stored in the storage means, the specific symbol can be continuously displayed. Indicates the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means.

  In one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, one gaming state is set among a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Possible game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means can set the first game state when an end condition is satisfied at least in a state where the second game state is set; The gaming machine K4, wherein the specific symbol display means can display the specific symbol on the display means while the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, while the specific symbol is displayed on the display means, the second gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player whether or not the second game state ends every time the number of displayed specific symbols changes. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K4, the symbol number changing means is capable of changing the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means by two or more.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be greatly changed at a time, so that a surprising effect can be provided to the player, and the effect can be improved. There is an effect that can be increased.

  In the gaming machine K5, the symbol number variable unit includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is easier to change so as to increase the display number of the specific symbol than when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. .

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, it is easier to increase the number of display of the specific symbol if it is determined in advance that the information corresponding to the specific determination result is included, There is an effect that the player can be interested in the variable situation of the specific symbol and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K6, the symbol number variable unit includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the number of display of the specific symbol to be increased at one time is more likely to be increased in the case where the specific symbol is displayed than in the case where the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. .

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K6, the possibility that information corresponding to a specific determination result is included becomes higher as the number of displayed specific symbols increased at a time increases. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the number of specific symbols to be displayed increases, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine K7, the symbol number variable means can execute a preparation variable display for decreasing the display number of the specific symbol before increasing the display number of the specific symbol to the specific number. Gaming machine K8.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K7, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be reduced by the variable preparation display, so that the specific number of variable displays is increased regardless of the current number of specific symbols to be displayed. Can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the effect of variably displaying the number of specific symbols displayed by the symbol number varying means can be increased.

<Characteristic L group> (Varying rate to the starting port on the downstream side is varied by varying the winning rate of the electric chute on the upstream side)
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; and a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. Executable second determination means, and when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a specific first determination result, or when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific first determination result. When the determination result is two, in a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a corresponding specific game, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a game flowing down the first flow path A first ball entry means capable of satisfying the first determination condition when the game ball enters, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means; And a variable means that can be changed to a second state that is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; A variable control means capable of variably controlling the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern when standing, a game control ball capable of entering, and a second control condition capable of satisfying the second determination condition when the game ball enters. And the second ball entry means, among the game balls flowing down the first flow path, game balls that could not enter the first ball entry means. A gaming machine L1 which is provided at a position where it can be obtained.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Further, there is a type in which a plurality of starting ports are provided, and one of the starting ports is provided with a variable member for facilitating the entry of a game ball during a time-saving game, thereby making it easier to execute a lottery during the time-saving game. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when a game ball is fired toward a start port provided with a variable member, a game ball that does not enter the start port is wasted, and the game motivation is reduced. was there. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine L1, a state in which the first determination is easily performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path is determined by the length of the period in which the variable means is changed to the first state by the variable control means. A state in which the second determination is easily performed can be switched. Thereby, when a game ball flows down the first flow path, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting which discrimination is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

  In the gaming machine L1, as the variable pattern of the variable means variably controlled by the variable control means, a first variable pattern and a period in which the variable means is in the second state longer than the first variable pattern may be used. A game machine L2 having variable pattern determination means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least two variable patterns.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means in accordance with the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means. It is possible to switch between a state where the first determination is easily performed and a state where the second determination is easily performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path. Therefore, the player can be interested in the variable state of the variable means, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine L2 has a determination unit that executes a predetermined determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and the variable control unit performs the variable control when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A gaming machine L3 for variably controlling means.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, the variable means is variably controlled based on the determination result of the determining means, so that the player is interested in the content of the determination by the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means And a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods of different lengths, wherein the dynamic display period determining means A gaming machine L4 wherein the dynamic display period is determined based on a result of the determination.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determining means is stopped and displayed can be varied, so that the variable control by the variable control means can be performed. A period that is never executed can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the second determining means performs a more advantageous determination for the player than the first determining means.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second discriminating means performs a decision that is more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means. There is an effect that the game can be played while the player is interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first flow path while expecting the ball to arrive.

  In the gaming machine L5, there is provided a detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the detection result of the detecting means, The means, at least, a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing into the first flow path, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path, which did not enter the first ball input means. And a second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, wherein the effect executed by the effect executing means is such that the ball flowing down the first flow path is transmitted to the second ball input means. A gaming machine L6 for indicating a degree of expectation to reach to a player.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the flowing state of the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the effect can be enhanced. There is.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the gaming machines described above, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko game machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of the gaming machines described above, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
S306 determination means S307 dynamic display means S902 information acquisition means S904 storage means S1775 part of the preliminary judgment means S1804 part of the specific game execution means S1914, S1917 part of the game state setting means S4487 symbol number variable display means S8654 specific symbol display means

Claims (5)

Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition;
Storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means at least up to a predetermined number, at least until a determination condition for the information is satisfied;
A determination unit that performs a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means on the display means;
Specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. In gaming machines,
Before the determination based on the information stored in the storage unit is performed, a preliminary determination unit that performs a preliminary determination based on the information,
Specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means,
A gaming machine comprising: a symbol number variable display unit capable of variably displaying the number of the specific symbols displayed by the specific symbol display unit regardless of the number of the information. .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol with an upper limit of the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.   The symbol number variable display means, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is one or more, changes the display number of the specific symbol in a range of one or more as the number of the specific symbol. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein A plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
The game state setting means can set the first game state when an end condition is satisfied at least in a state where the second game state is set,
The game according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol on the display means while the second game state is set. Machine. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the symbol number variable display means is capable of changing the display number of the specific symbol displayed on the display means by two or more.

Images